Home

Fujitsu V3.1.0 User's Manual

1. Oye aaases 245 KRIB T RAE E a E E E E E A E 245 P H 245 Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations CINES Re Ee rp E M O EE FIRE UL ji K 21 MI ams Basie Informal erani emere ae Re ee tr e een EFE RH RR HE Te Ra Verses pe en usted esie pee Re EE e RE RAR CIEJBOOIIMM T M M PN ho UVM p HQ Chapter 22 Network Device Oparslfglie ceruice ceste nci Ine acento cel ec cheer a nee proa ERE a Rick A Raa Ei Ras o CR Rr o SEn a 256 exa cq Mamenn Mode P P 256 22 2 Switchover of the Target ot Auto COnN pora MON iccse nisso snoa EASE E na Sa ar S e AAS Eae NEITA ETE E ESEN ESSER 257 Chapter 23 Network Resource DODIIODE ceii iens tet idee cite cer Eterno E EEE E ane 259 23 1 Automate Network ConttuEBtlON cos copain rte eit orbe eret ote c tr pe e FG oot pecore sp eiie ge ek pesdeedeepasuse 259 iar qi Mgr MEMEHHMM nnn 260 WBIGD Ian o 260 TN IU Em 263 xiii PM S M T css ds ga cas cosets dest sa cis UU Um
2. 191 17 134 Batch Power Operation ot L Servers in Resource Folders etre trt rrr tr eias 192 I E MOIS iecore toic eie eoe eir D e E d E ORO REO E 193 SESS ID CRAB c eaire i ahi 195 1272 2 Md due toe Basie Maa iere rere der tre tree tel e inter ba ede tb c e Hp rae pe a Rib de ERRORS 198 1723 Autachmg and Detashtmo Disks ier ee tior a bue cite REED REED REG Ee tee Eanske 198 17 2 4 Sharing Disks Between L Servers 203 1725 Modine INR ta Resource SUG ca eoe rarae nm rr er er t co ee b Rr re b en etr Rea Eee Eaa 204 13 3 Utr g the LeServer onsple a tete emer trei Dre pe HO Pu prn ebd eei eO e dd Evvs 207 DET Deine an LASNE M 209 Ta onne Dase OE M 209 Aeee and Registering onere eem rete be i e d d ete E 210 Ue cr 212 WE NN unit ML 213 DP I T T E E E det ere tite d i sande t de HE eder ED rotor C RE eR 213 17 6 Snapshots and Backup and Restoration ol L SOPVerg 4aiie scien ehe teri EA EEE EEANN RENE EZ NER E RC R ERE Ee dee aS deua on 214 INTUS M M 214 OA ENO uou c c T M 217 17 7 Migration of VM Hosts between Servers
3. R R M i sea 04 rp M LM XE 15 2 4 Deleting Ghapier EE um bci D MEUSE E 164 163 Creation Dung an L Server Teniplgte een iae ettet tete ettet iste los esie d eee renta iS erepto NASEN 165 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters 169 ANM I H 170 expo Mr Cm 172 IEEE SUG M HR 175 HO NT rr S 177 wd arg Em 178 163 Creation or Virtual LsSeryers Using PRERTIIGLBES aiite caeteri retten tertie bt terere Fee d i e eder e era dee iai tabes 178 oW Bern cili c na 179 Mem o4 MI T 181 RID ri m 185 15 PETG Te Ub TUER racemis tei btt de i iue ekle 186 15 3 5 OS e a E A ei ete dem err ro ie ere aite nei e Debe be i eerie 187 Chapter TT E Servor Oberatlofte eie cedem ie i e e tee cci ee et ee eee 189 DFG Pcie Ore ths 190 UNES iUe a Es 190 eA SUDpIS Nt LoSePVEou anteire etre RI Peine E eno EE t E E ed chaes 191 NECS Restartins an e c NT
4. 263 LWwMSCIDBOCI M HR 266 I UGS Pe MEE 277 Ct Mr 25 M ih aed 278 A 5 Resource List Tab 281 Ad Besoumee Decus Tali tte E etim o E m RE OX TR C E eM E TOU RR e ARESA 283 OO TE Bass AUD WES etercr ex perte FEY XER EH THERE HERD FALTEN Le Y DYEIED NEERK ENSEM EE R E C EY AXE SET UE DE EE Ve Ier G 284 A0 ServEF BUENO HERR RUE ROLE E ERE ERREUR HEURE ERREUR HERE ETE deat cae 286 A 6 3 Physical OS VM Host and VM Guest Attribules iiii ect etrenen rota epe soroa SEKVENS KERESE e va epe pa reo eee en keen pae uae 288 A 6 4 Network Device Attributes eese 292 A m9 Power Monitoring Devices PDU or UPS ACIDS erepti rte ces LIRE rr Een erre reat tenete eerte 297 A55 Management aC Was AWOME enero eie petere e sever re t nia Re Cre E ERE D ri Eo EE e t aee ende eva pa 298 4 6 7 Storage Management Sofware AIDIC S eser etienne rerit icri t EO UU Eee PEN E EU NO ero PIE EEG de LEX velie 298 Pah ONT a MEDIE T 100 ME E 299 A050 YM Manasentent Sot wave STIL DUUSE uates e re erret ri err td rr RE SX RE ERO ERR E ER e p EREE 300 ES MIR Viriual Storace AIDES M 301 AGT NUE AE ME 301 AGI LoSepver Aa aes
5. 232 18 34 When Using Server Virtualization SOFDWAME eusace sede territi ssnaeesndesduaasdiediccanasedoeaeiocdebedalssesiaussapdayesidsaseass 233 jor pri MR n 234 18 4 1 Preparations 234 iow dd vlc T 235 153 3 Por Vistudl Machines eee deridet ee ee pier P E t EO Ub d bit un 236 D MIecinDeirgunsi rM 237 oS oleas dU LS3ep VE e ao iore reet dre Er rri eb rt ro secet reo dtr ORE E Ede ad rre iaa 237 Chaprer 19 Reson Operans cera emet rtr Etro tte PORE tee R Le OPE Te Pepe Rene E ERR SERM REIR TEE AAE 239 I nrc cr Mm 239 lob 239 j xjon n T 239 19 2 E nre aS Ue AMIEL eerte etn remet eere petite i e PE EGER in nae de e nid POE E E rl abe E 241 19 5 Deleting Chapter 20 Resource Pool ODetraltipris 1 inue cine tenendo ttd ene nort chat endure se dnas PER a ACE UC Ea RICE E MER ide eara iR RES 243 RES l1 p P 243 ow re rp T m 243 Fuss 244 o E
6. Oracle VM Enter the location using 32 characters or less 165 Solaris Containers Enter up to 52 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric on on periods and hyphens characters upper or lower case underscores Enter up to 63 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ periods and hyphens However names which start with SUNW cannot be used The name global cannot be used when the configuration uses the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM For the configuration to use the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM machine refer to Table 17 4 List of Items Specified in the Definition File of 17 8 1 Installation Destination folder Select a resource folder or a tenant to store L Servers Template Specify an L Server template created in Chapter 13 Creating L Server Templates in the Setup Guide CE The L Server template specified from the Template List tab is displayed Check the specifications CPU performance memory capacity disk capacity multiple for the L Server to create For Physical Model name disk capacity multiple are displayed For Virtual CPU performance memory capacity and disk capacity multiple are displayed VMware Hyper V When using templates with al
7. 218 17 8 Allocating and Releasing Resources to L Setvers 5 en breeds e ed loire ES e Pei i ede li e e eee toss 219 ES NUBE CLIPS IRR n 221 xii pb ERO EE 222 15 5 2 1 Allocating ReROUEEOR 5er prb e HR RER OPORTERE HEHO REED EH PEDE FOE HE EC Fee Ei EHE 222 12 822 Reledsig RESOUIDES ere tanen er re t etd e be i ric a re dye eR ER pte et re Ei eco E eo de ode dusg 222 1752 3 Modifying Contipuration Definition Dufottatl lk teret teret rtt rtt P carente NENES aai 222 17 9 Changing Physical Server Usage 17 9 1 Configuring L Servers for Usage Change 17 9 11 When enly the Configuration Definition defined is Created iecit nrbt itense 223 17 9 1 2 When Resources are Already Allocated allocated 2 22 tret erret tr rrr rite ehe oae ters toten eese aueescaeseoses ins 224 UM NU T Ales 17 9 3 Releasing Configuration Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual MaChines cccccsesceeeeeseeeesesneeeeessneeeeees 228 1 1 Management SCOPE iresi R R R 228 n r e E E E E E E E E 229 TEF PREPS URSIN osinean ii iiae E e e a adei ada ia S ea iaa iE edis 231 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware 231 Ui books succ ra m 231 Ts 33 Wine ab Me SUA B M
8. Administrator password An existing password setting will be displayed as an encrypted d 9 character string cmd remotescript i TEN P To edit the password overwrite it with plain text delete the 1 params password i s V encrypted yes line and perform the encryption procedure indicated in the example If this parameter is not set the password will be re initialized The encryption status of the Administrator password encrypted yes means that the password is encrypted If this line exists the rcxadm deployctl command does not operate p Example 00606060029209090900600000099200000090909909909000000909909090909000909009090009090909990990900000092990909000000909000060000999006999 With KMS Automatic Search ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params kmscheck AUTO cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password PASSWORD With KMS Manual Settings ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params kmscheck MANUAL cmd remotescript 1 params kmsname fujitsu activation com cmd remotescript 1 params kmsport 497 1 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params passwordZPASSWORD With MAK ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params makkey 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password PASSWORD If the Administr
9. SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer operation chassis name partition no server name ip address spechassis 3 speserver3 192 168 3 213 spechassis 4 speserver4 192 168 3 214 Server WWNN operation server name port count wwnn blade001 1 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 01 blade002 1 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 02 364 SpareServer operation server name spare server vlan switch auto switch boot type spare server force off spare server with vm g uest blade001 blade003 ON ON local OFF OFF VMManager operation name ip address product login name login passwd passwd enc CenterServer 127 0 0 1 vmware vc Administrator admin plain ServerAgent operation server name blade001 rackmount001 rackmount002 ServerVMHost operation server_name vm_login_name vm_login_passwd vm_passwd_enc blade002 admin admin plain MonitorSetting operation server name ping timeout recovery action reboot count blade001 600 reboot and switchover 3 PowerDevice operation device name ip address snmp community name voltage comment ups1 192 168 3 196 public 100 SmartUPS ups2 192 168 3 197 public 100 SmartUPS Memo operation resource type resource name label comment common TEL 0000 0000 365 Appendix C Maintenance Mode This appendix explains the maintenance mode available in Resource Orchestrator and how to use it Maintenance mode is used during hardware maintenance of managed servers It is also
10. is displayed Link Status The operational status of the port is displayed One of the following is displayed up down unknown Speed DuplexMode The speed and duplex mode of the operating port are displayed Link Aggregation Group The name of the link aggregation group to which the port of the selected LAN switch belongs If it does not belong to link aggregation a hyphen is displayed 294 Link aggregation information The following information is only displayed when LAN switch blades are selected Link aggregation group name The name of the link aggregation group to which the port of the selected LAN switch blade belongs is displayed Port name The link aggregation port name is displayed For PY SWB104 PG SW109 LAG Link aggregation group number For PY SWB101 PG SW201 or PY SWB102 PG SW111 Logical port number of the LAG port channel Member port Link status The physical port names and the link status up or down of the physical ports is displayed for the ports in the link aggregation VLAN VLAN ID A list of VLAN IDs set in the selected LAN switch is displayed Untagged Port s A list of ports set with a port VLAN ID is displayed The logical port for link aggregation is only displayed for LAN switch blades Tagged Port s A list of ports set with tagged VLAN ID s is displayed The logical port for link aggregation is only displayed for LAN switch blades Note The following LAN
11. Note Selecting a displayed resource will focus display on that resource In such a focus mode all links that are not directly related to the selected resource will be shown in lighter colors 11 6 Display Filters This section explains how to use display filters 116 Resource descriptions The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Selecting or clearing a filter s checkbox will either show or hide the content associated with that filter Physical links The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Disabling this filter will hide all physical links between resources on the network map VLANs Only displayed when the VLAN tree is displayed The display filter area includes the following filters checkboxes Disabling this filter will hide the VLAN selected in the VLAN tree on the network map 117 Chapter 12 Cloning Physical Servers This chapter explains how to use the server cloning function 12 1 Overview Cloning is a function used to deploy a cloning image collected from a single managed server source server to other managed servers destination servers This function shortens the time required for an initial installation as it can be used to install the same operating system and software on multiple servers Software maintenance can also be performed quickly and easily by deploying a cloning image collected from a server on which patch application or sof
12. When using VMware as server virtualization software By entering the name of the port group to exclude from automatic network configuration in the VMware excluded port group definition file creation of an L Server is possible even when the service console and port group use the same VLAN When using blade servers and LAN switch blades in switch mode or end host mode Tagged VLANs can be automatically configured for external connection ports of LAN switch blades Details of auto configuration differ depending on L Server type For Physical L Servers When using physical L Servers refer to B 3 1 Automatic Network Configuration in the Setup Guide CE For Virtual L Servers Refer to the setup section for the server virtualization software to use in Appendix C Configuration when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE Manual Network Configuration When using a port group on a virtual switch VMware a virtual network Hyper V or a virtual bridge Xen KVM that has been manually configured with a physical NIC selected beforehand use one of the following procedures to create a network resource The Procedure From the GUI In the dialog displayed when creating a new network resource check Use configured virtual switches checkbox and then create a network resource manually configured network resource The Procedure From the Command Line Create a network resource manually configured network resource with
13. A Information 0060600000909909000090909909099000090909099099090000909099909099000909099090999090900090990990900900099990990900000909099990000900990000000999 For details on configuration modification registration release and deletion of resources registered in resource pools refer to Chapter 19 Resource Operations 060606002020929090990909000909090990000909099090990900000909099090990990900009090909099090000090909909000000909090909099090000090992900000009990000009299 136 14 1 VM Host Resources This section explains how to register a VM host in a VM pool Moving an L Server migration is only possible between VM hosts belonging to the same cluster group when two or more cluster groups are registered in the same VM pool Use the following procedure to register a VM host in a VM pool 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target VM pool and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Select the VM host to register The list of the VM hosts that can be registered is displayed in the resource list Select the VM host that you want to register using the Select checkbox or select all VM host resources displayed in the resource list by checking lt Select all gt When the Match network configuration to that of the other VM host checkbox is displayed the network can be automatically configured during VM host registration by selecting this checkb
14. A number between 5 and 2000 can be specified By default 20 is set when enabling a dynamic memory when L Server is created Memory Weight Optional Specify the memory allocation priority It is possible to specify it for Hyper V A number between 0 and 10000 can be specified If left blank 5000 is set when creating an L Server Startup RAM Optional Specify the amount of an initial memory It is possible to specify it for Hyper V Enter a number between 0 1 and memory capacity By default memory capacity is set when enabling a dynamic memory when L Server is created Dynamic Memory Optional It is possible to specify it for Hyper V Specify true when enabling a dynamic memory Specify false when disabling a dynamic memory By default this information is different depending on an amount of an initial memory and a set value of the memory buffer True is set when the amount of an initial memory or the memory buffer has already set Nothing is set when the amount of an initial memory and the memory buffer are unset Enter the CPU and memory information and click lt Next gt d Enter NIC information NIC Number Enter when the server type is VM Enter the number of NICs Enter a number between 1 and 10 Xen Enter a number between 1 and 15 Oracle VM RHEL KVM Enter a number between 1 and 8 Solaris Containers Enter a number between 0 and 8 Enter the NIC information and click Next e
15. When VM is selected for the server type select the VM type on the Server tab However when an image is selected Resource Orchestrator will automatically select the VM type that matches the image so selection is not necessary when selecting the server type Image Specify a cloning image to deploy Clicking lt Select gt displays the Select a Cloning Image dialog Select the cloning image to deploy to the L Server specifying Deploy in Image deployment on the Select a Cloning Image dialog The available cloning images are displayed in the selection list Specifying Do not deploy in Image deployment will create an empty server without an operating system installed Oracle VM L Servers cannot be created with Do not deploy specified in Image deployment A Information When a cloning image is specified the sizes of system disks of virtual L Servers will be changed into the size of when the cloning image was deployed When deploying cloning images the OS image included in a cloning image is used but the values of CPU memory and network are overwritten with the values used when creating an L Server Only system disks are deployed Note 000000000090090909990990090900000090909099090900909900000090090909090029099090000000090909990909090990900000000000909009909000000009099299 When using a Windows image for multiple languages English Japanese Language Pack manually select the language version when deploying the cl
16. and hyphens Enter the desired items and click OK to reflect the settings on the items displayed in the VM guest list 236 3 Click lt OK gt The virtual machine becomes manageable as a virtual L Server From the command line execute rcxadm lserver convert For details on the rexadm lserver convert command refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G Note 060606200002090900000090909000000099000000000909090090000090990990909000090900909000009090909090909090990900009909090900000909909090090099299 When operating an admin server on a virtual machine on VMware or Hyper V environment do not link that virtual machine to an L Server VMware FT secondary virtual machines cannot be linked with L Servers VMware When the limit values of CPU memory of a virtual machine linked with an L Server have been set to Unlimited different methods are used for calculating the number of possible L Servers and modifying L Server specifications For details on the calculation method refer to Max Number of Possible L Servers View in 20 6 Viewing For details on modifying specifications refer to 18 5 Changing Configuration Hyper V When a virtual machine with a network adapter that has never been started before is linked with an L Server the MAC address the L Server uses on the network might be set to 00 00 00 00 00 00 In that case cancel the link between the virtual machine and L S
17. 92 When there are spare server settings involving the VIOM server profile exchange method When there are servers using the VIOM server profile exchange method that are in the following states Being switched over Have been switched over prior to failback Being failed back Server blades that are managed using VIOM and are currently the target of operations by Resource Orchestrator power control image related processes etc 9 4 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices This section explains how to delete LAN switches and network devices Deleting LAN Switch Blades Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices 9 4 1 Deleting LAN Switch Blades This section explains how to delete LAN switch blades Use the following procedure to delete LAN switch blades 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The target LAN switch blade is unregistered 9 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices This section explains how to delete LAN switches and network devices Use the following procedure to delete LAN switches and network devices The Procedure Using the ROR Console 1 Inthe ROR console network device tree right click the target LAN switch or network device and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The
18. Delete Delete es Deletes the specified resource pool Change Settings Basic Information Modifies a resource pool s registration settings Moves the specified resource pool and all resources Move to Folder P P registered there 272 Table A 17 Popup Menus Available for Network Pools Popup Menu Function Register Resources eo gt i Registers a resource to the selected resource pool Create Network Resource Using existing admin LAN subnet Creates a network resource from a registered admin LAN subnet as an admin LAN Change Settings Basic Information Modifies a network pool s registration settings Move to Folder Moves the specified network pool and all resources registered there Table A 18 Popup Menus Available for Address Pools Popup Menu Function Change Settings Modifies registration settings of an address pool Move to Folder Moves the specified address pool and all resources registered there Table A 19 Popup Menus Available for Tenants Popup Menu Function Modifies a tenant s registration settings Change Settings Global pool Modifies the settings of the global pool for the tenant Moves the specified tenant and all resources registered ere C Powers on all L Servers in a resource folder Power C Powers off all L Servers in a resource folder Reboots all L Servers in a resource folder Table A 20 Popup Menus Available for Folders Popup Menu Function Create 273
19. Max Number of Possible New L Servers When an L Server template is selected the number of L Servers that can be created using resource pools is displayed Server Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed Number of servers Unused Total The number of physical servers registered in the resource pool is displayed Max Number of Possible New L Servers When an L Server template is selected the number of L Servers that can be created using resource pools is displayed Storage Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed Capacity Unused Total The capacity of the virtual storage or disk resources registered in the resource pool is displayed Attributes The setting status of Thin Provisioning attributes is displayed When Thin Provisioning attributes are set Thin Provisioning is displayed When Thin Provisioning attributes are not set Thick Provisioning is displayed Ma
20. User Groups 1 EE Creates modifies or deletes a user group Change Password Change Password 00000 Changes the password of the logged in user Performs viewing registration changing or deletion of Admin LAN Subnet B CBS MES the admin LAN subnet information CEMENENLT TIC TON NN OFF Powers off a server after shutting down its operating system OFF Forced Powers off a server without shutting down its operating orce system Reboot Reboots a server after shutting down its operating eboo system Reboots a server without shutting down its operating E uid PM Turns the maintenance LED on Turns the maintenance LED on maintenance LED on LED 4 C j Turns the maintenance LED off Switches over a server with one of its spare servers Failback Switches back a server to its pre switchover state desena R 00 ul p Accepts a switched over configuration as final without Takeover NN oe i switching back to the original configuration Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced Hardware Maintenance Re configure ames 265 Menu Items Function en Restore LAN Switch 8 Restores a LAN switch configuration o ON Maintenance Mode 2 Backs up a system image from a server Deletes backup system images Collects a snapshot of the L Server Snapshot Restores a snapshot to the L Server Collects a cloning image from a server Cloning 2 9 Deploy Deploys a cloning image to a server M
21. From here the explanation is made assuming that Resource Name was set as DHCP Server d On the Resource of the Dependencies tab select the following name and select AND from AND OR Shared Disks Network Name Admin LAN IP Address e Click lt Apply gt f Click lt OK gt 11 Configure the registry replication settings from the following Services and Applications of the manager Following the table in step 2 set replication of the registry of the resource Perform the following procedure for each resource a Right click the target resource on Other Resources on the Summary of RC manager displayed in the middle of the Failover Cluster Management window and select Properties from the displayed menu The target_resource Properties window will be displayed b Click lt Add gt on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed c Configure the above registry key in Root registry key 54 d Click lt OK gt When configuring the second registry key as well repeat steps b to d e After configuration of the registry keys is complete click lt Apply gt f Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 12 Configure the dependencies of the resources of the manager service or application Configure the dependencies of resources based on the following table If some resources have been configured select AND from AND OR and add the dependent resource Resource for Configurat
22. Popup Menu d Function Change Settings Settings Basic Information Modifies a tenant s registration settings Moves the specified tenant and all resources registered ere ION Powers on all L Servers in a resource folder Power FEN Powers off all L Servers in a resource folder Reboots all L Servers in a resource folder Table A 21 Popup Menus Available for L Platforms Popup Menu Function Move to Folder DAE Moves an L Platform to another folder Table A 22 Popup Menus Available for L Servers Popup Menu Function Ies ementeseteibSer Hmas ume mme Change Settings Dweeerae Mmenteseeese C Mmeemtemetewemenes Snapshot Backup Backs up a system image from an L Server owes jomwaetsewremne 274 Popup Menu Function Install VM Tool Connects the ISO images for installing VMware Tools to an L Server Cancels the link between an L Server and a physical server or virtual machine Revert ie Only the L Servers that were created by linking are displayed Table A 23 Popup Menus Available for VM Hosts Popup Menu mae ail Function Menu Submenu Places a server into maintenance mode Maintenance Mode External Management P Opens a VM host s Web interface Software Creates a link between an L Server and a configured Convert to L Server virtual machine Table A 24 Popup Menus Available for VM Guests Popup Menu Function Start M Opens a VM host s Web interface art
23. Storage that uses an iSCSI connection LAG Link Aggregation Group A single logical port created from multiple physical ports using link aggregation 372 LAN switch blades A LAN switch that is mounted in the chassis of a blade server LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A protocol used for accessing Internet standard directories operated using TCP IP LDAP provides functions such as direct searching and viewing of directory services using a web browser license The rights to use specific functions Users can use specific functions by purchasing a license for the function and registering it on the manager link aggregation Function used to multiplex multiple ports and use them as a single virtual port By using this function it becomes possible to use a band equal to the total of the bands of all the ports Also if one of the multiplexed ports fails its load can be divided among the other ports and the overall redundancy of ports improved local pool A resource pool that contains resources that can only be used by a specific tenant They are located in tenants logical volume A logical disk that has been divided into multiple partitions L Platform A resource used for the consolidated operation and management of systems such as multiple layer systems Web AP DB comprised of multiple L Servers storage and network devices L Platform template A template that contains the specifications for server
24. Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the network resource is displayed Address Number Unused Number Total Number The total number and number of unused IP addresses registered in the network resource are displayed Network Device List Network Device Name The network device name is displayed Model The model name is displayed Status The operational status of the network device is displayed Usage The available usage for the network device is displayed Ruleset The ruleset name is displayed Current Resource The name of the network device that has been allocated is displayed Network Device Attributes For details refer to A 6 4 Network Device Attributes Network Resource Attributes General Area Name Label The network resource name is displayed Type The network resource is displayed Label The label for the network resource is displayed Comments Comments for the network resource are displayed Capacity IP address Total Number The total number of IP addresses registered in the network pool is displayed Unused Number The number of unused IP addresses registered in the network pool is displayed 327 Attribute Information Admin LAN Whether it is to be used as an admin LAN is displayed When used as an admin LAN yes is displayed When not used as an admin LAN no is displayed iSCSI boot The LAN for iSCSI boot is displayed use configured virtual switches If no virtual network virtual swit
25. The system configuration files CSV format used for pre configuration are saved using ASCII often referred to as ANSI in Windows systems When files that use a character code other than ASCII are imported the system may not operate correctly When directly editing configuration files using a text editor please do not save the file using a character code other than ASCII B 3 Resource Definitions This section explains the resource definition information specified system configuration files Admin LAN Subnet Data Section Name Enter Subnet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line subnet_name Enter the subnet name Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetic character and containing up to 16 alphanumeric characters underscores _ hyphens and periods network_address Enter the network address for the subnet used as the admin LAN Enter valid values for the network address subnet_mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN VIOM Data Section Name Enter VIOManager as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line name Specify VIOM ip_address Enter the IP address of the terminal on which VIOM is ins
26. Virtual Storage Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Configuration Information Status The status of the resource is displayed Storage Type The storage type of the resource is displayed 323 Thin Provisioning Thin provisioning configuration information is displayed When thin provisioning is configured yes is displayed When thick provisioning is configured or no attribute is specified no is displayed Total Capacity The total storage capacity is displayed Unused Capacity The free storage capacity is displayed Disk Resource List Name Label The disk name is displayed A link to the detailed information of the allocated disk is displayed Status The disk status is displayed Size The disk size is displayed Virtual Storage The disk allocation destination is displayed Share The shared settings of the disk are displayed Attributes The attributes that have been set are displayed When thin provisioning is configured Thin Provisioning is displayed When thick provisioning is configured Thick Provisioning is displayed Allocated L Server The name of the L Server to which a disk has been allocated is displayed Disk Details Attributes General Area Name Label The disk name is displayed Type The disk
27. 1 m C2 host01 host01 192 168 1 12 192 168 2 12 When the VM host is a rack mount server or another maker s server only the admin LAN IP address of the VM host can be obtained 2 Depending on the VM management product an IP address that differs from that of the admin LAN of the VM host may be obtained Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManagerVeteWcustomize data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name vmhost ip addresses rcxprop Format of the Definition File In the definition file information for a single VM host is entered on each line Each line is exported in the following format Items in the Definition File admin lan ip Specify the IP address of the admin LAN of the VM host other lan ip Specify an IP address other than the IP address of the admin LAN of a VM host that has been registered with VM management software Multiple IP addresses can be specified separated using commas Oracle VM When specifying a host name instead of an IP address for IP address specification during registration of an Oracle VM Server with Oracle VM Manager specify the host name Example of the Definition File The following is an example of the definition file Oracle VM Server 192 168 0 10 2 192 168 10 10 25 192 168 0 11 192 168 10 11 172 16 0 11 192 168 0 12 192 168 10 12 host01 5 3 Storage Management Softwa
28. 383 Xen A type of server virtualization software XSB eXtended System Board Unit for domain creation and display composed of physical components XSCF eXtended System Control Facility The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise M series servers zoning A function that provides security for Fibre Channels by grouping the Fibre Channel ports of a Fibre Channel switch into zones and only allowing access to ports inside the same zone 384
29. Click the Environmental Data category title and modify the values for the following items in the displayed area Data to collect Clear the Power checkbox 3 Click Apply Collection of environmental data is canceled 7 8 3 Changing Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to change power monitoring device settings The following settings can be changed Device name Admin LAN IP address SNMP community name Voltage Comments Complete setting modifications on the actual power monitoring device before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change power monitoring device settings 1 From the ROR console right click the power monitoring device tree then select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Power Monitoring Device dialog is displayed 2 Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click OK The power monitoring device settings will be changed with the entered information 84 7 9 Changing Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to change and cancel monitoring information settings 7 9 1 Changing Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to change monitoring information settings The following settings can be changed Enabling or disabling of ping monitoring Time out Recovery method Number of reboots Use the following procedure to change settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right cl
30. Enter the disk information Disk Enter the disk capacity in units of GB Enter a number in the following range 0 1 to 2048 GB Xen 0 1 to 999 9 GB Solaris Containers 0 1 to 9600 GB 157 Clicking lt Add gt adds a disk Enter the disk number VMware A number between 0 and 55 can be specified Hyper V Oracle VM A number between 0 and 59 can be specified Xen A number between 0 and 251 can be specified RHEL KVM A number between 0 and 16 can be specified Solaris Containers 0 can be specified Enter the disk information and click Next f Enter the information on server redundancy alive monitoring boot location and ServerImageLink Redundancy Select a server redundancy to be allocated to the L Server Select HA when enabling redundancy Select None when not enabling redundancy Xen RHEL KVM Only None can be specified Alive monitoring Configure alive monitoring as enabled or disabled This item can only be configured when Redundancy is enabled Xen RHEL KVM Oracle VM Solaris Containers The alive monitoring configuration is not displayed Boot Location Decide whether the physical location of servers to be allocated to the L Server can be changed This item can be configured when VM is selected for Server Type in the basic information Select Fixed when starting the L Server on the same VM host that operated last time Select AttachAtBoot when automat
31. Make sure that less than 200 resources are specified for registration or changing in the system configuration file If itis necessary to specify more than 200 resources for registration or changing do by importing multiple system configuration files When importing system configuration files which begins with RCXCSV V 1 0 in the first line the agent cannot automatically be registered Moreover the registration fails in cases where a spare server is defined to a VM host in the system configuration file 0060606200600099229209090900000000909099099090409909000000090090090590909090000000000909999090990000000000000995299900000006060002999 2 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 2 Login and Logout in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 99 3 In the ROR console select File System Configuration File Import from the menu The Import System Configuration File dialog is displayed 4 Specify a configuration file prepared in step 1 5 Click lt OK gt The import process starts The system configuration file is verified first and then resources are imported one by one following the order defined by the system configuration file The processing of resource registration or change is executed after the verification The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking lt Cancel gt in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and
32. Resources For details refer to 14 2 Physical Server Resources Virtual storage resources or disk For details refer to 14 5 Storage Storage pool Yes resources Resources Network 1 Network resources or network Refer to 14 3 Network Resources or iau cd devices 14 4 Network Devices For details refer to 14 6 Add Set iid din s W _ sc A iii Resources Image resources f For details on how to register an The following two types are f image that uses a template from available VM management software refer Virtual image resource to 14 7 1 Virtual Image An image that is created using a Resources template from a VM For details on how to register a management software for VM T Image pool i ib a cloning image that was collected Yes 2 Yes 3 uest creation or that is i S using ROR VE refer to 14 7 2 collected as a cloning image Physical I R sical Image Resources from an L Server s TN For details on how to collect Physical image resources E cloning images from an L Server An image that uses a cloning refer to 17 5 1 Collecting and image from cloning of a FOROR physical server in ROR VE i ai Yes Required No Not required When using RHELS Xen or RHEL KVM it is necessary to register MAC addresses 2 When collecting cloning images from L Servers the cloning images are automatically stored in image pools 3 When using templates register them to image pools
33. SCSET 0 SCSE1 14 AM SCSE2 0 SCSI2 14 AM SCSE3 0 SCSE3 14 AM When changed to use a path through disk or difference disk Note that changing the device path for the system disk enables deletion of disks for all disks Once a virtual L Server is created do not change the device path of the system disk using VM management software as doing so results in the following behavior A hyphen is displayed for Usage in the Disk Information displayed on the Resource Details tab on the ROR console Reduction of the size of the system disk will be possible When changing the disk type using the same device path from VM management software perform the following procedure 1 Delete a disk from the virtual machine using VM management software 2 Confirm that the disk deleted in step 1 has been deleted as disk information of the L Server on the ROR console 3 On VM management software add a disk to the virtual machine Here changing the disk type refers to the following Switching from a virtual disk to Raw Device Mapping a pass through disk or a difference disk Switching Raw Device Mapping a pass through disk or a difference disk to a virtual disk When using VM management software to change the configuration of disk resources saved in a virtual machine that were created from virtual storage the disk resources registered in the storage pool may be deleted When snapshots are collected from the virtual machine using VM manage
34. Storage Units Virtual Storage and Disks Popup Menu Function Change Settings Basic Information Modifies the selected resource s registration settings A 3 Status Panel This section explains the different statuses that are displayed in the ROR console Figure A 3 Status Panel Status Monitoring Area Monitoring events f WTotal 9 units Stopped 3 units Eror 0 units Bil Warning 0 units Last updated 2009 06 25 15 07 02 Resource Status Area Status Monitoring Area The Event Log monitors a history of events that have occurred on managed resources Based on detected events the status monitoring area will change color and blink Clicking the status monitoring area will stop the blinking The following table details the different statuses and their associated corrective actions 277 Table A 35 Monitor Status List Back This indicates a normal state Monitoring events No warning or error level events have occurred on the displayed resources Warning event detected one or more of the displayed resources This indicates an error state Error event detected An error level event has occurred on one or more of the displayed resources Resource Status Area This area displays the number of registered servers experiencing each status This indicates a warning state Yellow A warning level event has occurred on No action is necessary Click the status monitoring
35. This section explains how to collect a snapshot 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Snapshot Collect from the popup menu The Create a Snapshot dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items Comments Enter a comment that identifies the snapshot Up to 128 characters other than percent signs back slashes V double quotes and line feed characters can be specified The snapshot is collected 3 Click lt OK gt From the command line execute rexadm image snapshot For details on the rexadm image snapshot command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Restore This section explains how to restore a snapshot To restore a snapshot the L Server must be stopped 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Snapshot Restore from the popup menu The Restore a Snapshot dialog is displayed 2 Select the version of the snapshot to restore The snapshot is restored 3 Click OK Execute the rexadm image restore command For details on the rexadm image restore command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G amp Note In the following cases the specifications of the L Server will not be modified Use the server virtualization software to make changes as necessary When the VM guest corresponding to the L Server to be restored has been migrated to a VM host that is not re
36. Use the rcxadm netdevice list command to confirm the maintenance mode status Check the maintenance mode status in the MAINTENANCE displayed in the display results of the list subcommand ON Indicates that maintenance mode is configured 256 OFF Indicates that maintenance mode is released gA See 090600620600600090900906000690909909099900009009090006000009090929090999090009900909990900090090990909000090009090909009000090990909909000000999090999 For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 90606006000000920900000090990909900000909090990909000009009099090000009090990909090000090900900000900902909000000009909000000009099060999 amp Note When configuring maintenance mode for a network device auto configuration is not executed on the network device Therefore when a network device configured for maintenance mode is in a redundancy configuration it may be unable to keep the redundancy configuration depending on the configuration details When configuring maintenance mode for a network device with redundancy configuration it is recommended not to perform operations creation modification and deletion for a tenant administrator The configuration details for which redundancy configurations cannot be maintained depends on the specifications of network devices configuring the network devices For details refer to the manuals of network device
37. When it is not configured is displayed A 6 4 Network Device Attributes General Area Network device name The name used to identify a network device is displayed System Name sysName The name of the device specified as a network device is displayed 292 IP address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Device name Product name The product name of the network device is displayed For NS appliances NSAppliance is displayed Model The model name of a network device is displayed For NS appliances NSAppliance is displayed Vendor The vendor name of a network device is displayed For NS appliances Fujitsu is displayed Serial number The serial number of a network device is displayed For NS appliances is displayed Firmware version The firmware version of a network device is displayed Device status The status of a network device is displayed One of the following is displayed normal error unknown Slot A slot number representing the mounted location is displayed This is only displayed for LAN switch blades A hyphen is displayed in other cases Maintenance mode The status of maintenance mode is displayed One of the following is displayed active maintenance Type The type of a network device is displayed One of the following is displayed L2 Switch Firewall SLB For network devices with multiple types all types are displayed separated by commas For vi
38. When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen is displayed VM Guest List Name Label The name of the VM guest is displayed Status The status of the VM guest is displayed VM Type The VM type of the VM guest is displayed VM host name The name of the VM host associated with the VM guest is displayed OS Type The OS type of the VM guest is displayed CPU Capacity The CPU capacity of the VM guest is displayed Number of CPUs The CPU capacity of the VM guest is displayed 318 Memory Capacity The memory capacity of the VM guest is displayed Allocated L Server The name of the L Server allocated to the VM guest is displayed A 6 18 Server Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Priority The priority of the server pool is displayed Capacity Number of Servers Total Units The total number of servers registered in the server pool is displayed Unused Units The number of available servers registered in the server pool is displayed Physical Server List Physical Server Name The name of the physical server is displayed Status The status of the physical server is displayed Model The model name of the physical server is displayed OS The OS of the physical server is displayed CPU Type The CPU type of the physical se
39. and sampling rate Use the following procedure to export power consumption data 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click a power monitoring target and select Export Environmental Data from the popup menu The Export Environmental Data power monitoring target dialog is displayed 2 Setthe following items Figure 13 1 Export Environmental Data power monitoring target Dialog Export Environmental Data Choose the type and period of environmental data that will be exported Target Resources Select Device Name Comments IV ups Data Type Select DataType Unit Description v i Power W Instantaneous power consumption Average W Average power consumption during the power selected time span Total energy consumption during the L Energy Wh selected time span Output time Last hour v span Rate Finest sampling v Format CSV OK Cancel Help 131 Target Resources Specify the power monitoring target to export the power consumption data of Select the checkboxes of each desired target More than one target can be selected Data Type Specify the type of data to export Check the checkbox of each desired data type More than one data type can be selected Output time span Select the time span for which to export data from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Last hour Last day Last week Last month Last year Custom When Custom is select
40. and the following model PRIMERGY BX960 S1 Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Check whether the DHCP client is enabled on the managed server to collect the cloning image from Cloning images with the same name can be saved up until the maximum number of image versions When collecting a new cloning image when the maximum number of image versions has already been reached select the cloning image to delete The maximum number of image versions is three by default This setting can be changed by following the instructions given in 6 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Physical Servers When deploying cloning images the destination server temporarily starts up with its hostname set to either the physical server name or the source server s hostname If the same server names are detected on the same network a network duplication error will occur 120 Some programs may experience problems when started with a different hostname If such programs have been installed configure their services not to start automatically This has to be configured before collecting the cloning image Some programs may experience problems when the same server name exists If such programs have been installed
41. gt es 2 no Resources allocated state undenne Alloc h a 8 Resources to L Server E Retention of L Server Definition Creation Server Automatic Specified Resources Release Allocation Settings Release L Server Resources L Server Configuration L Server Modification Configuration Modification Defined state defined Resources unallocated state preserved a 7 EEO Network L Server L Server L Servers can be deleted when their status is something other than undefined specifications have not been defined 220 17 8 1 Installation By setting the values in the following definition file in advance it is possible to change L Server related behaviors and default values displayed on the General tab and Server tab when creating an L Server For the values available for L Server templates when an L Server template does not have values configured the values of the definition file are adopted When creating an L Server using commands if the XML file of the L Server does not have values configured the values of the definition file are adopted Use the UTF 8 character code for definition files Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Installation_folde SVROR Manager etc customize_data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name server rcxprop Definition File Format For the definition file write each line in the following format Key V
42. host affinity A definition of the server HBA that is set for the CA port of the storage device and the accessible area of storage It is a function for association of the Logical Volume inside the storage which is shown to the host HBA that also functions as security internal to the storage device Hyper V Virtualization software from Microsoft Corporation Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC servers enabling flexible management of operations I O virtualization option An optional product that is necessary to provide I O virtualization The WWNN address and MAC address provided is guaranteed by Fujitsu Limited to be unique Necessary when using HBA address rename 371 IBP Intelligent Blade Panel One of operation modes used for PRIMERGY switch blades This operation mode can be used for coordination with ServerView Virtual I O Manager VIOM and relations between server blades and switch blades can be easily and safely configured ICT governance A collection of principles and practices that encourage desirable behavior in the use of ICT Information and Communication Technology based on an evaluation of the impacts and risks posed in the adoption and application of ICT within an organization or community ILOM Integrated Lights Out Manager The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise T series servers image file A system image or a cloning image Also a collective term for them bot
43. m Information s 09060606060000000000000000900900900090999099909909909909909909909909909909909909909990909090000000000000000099999990900999999299299990999 WWN settings are applied to managed servers during server startup Ce 3 Check the Restart the server checkbox if the server is to be restarted A Information Select server restart in the following cases When installing an operating system immediately after performing the above settings Insert the operating system installation CD in the target server and select server restart Once the server has been restarted its WWN settings are applied and the operating system installation starts When an operating system is already running if changing storage settings Click lt OK gt to restart the target server and apply its WWN settings The server restart is not required in other cases The WWN that has been set is enabled at the next restart 4 Click lt OK gt A Information 0000000000090999099090090000009090990990909900900000009009909909009090000000009090909909009090000000090099009900920000000009909999 When using a server without an OS the resource name displayed on the server resource tree is the same as that of the physical server 5 Restart the HBA address rename setup service The HBA address rename setup service must be running to use the HBA address rename function For details on how to configure these settings refer to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA a
44. of a resource should be confirmed from either the resource tree or the Resource List tab A Information a 00606002090990900000009099209000009990990900000009009099000000090999090000090909909900000000909000000009099090000000090099000000999299 For the SPARC Enterprise T series the following levels are displayed for SEVERITY values of hardware SNMP Trap MIBs SUN HW TRAP MIB mib When SEVERITY is Critical or Major Error is displayed When SEVERITY is Minor Warning is displayed When SEVERITY is Informational Info is displayed A 14 Dialogs This section explains how to enable or disable display of some of the confirmation or warning dialogs used by the ROR console Use the following procedure to change dialog display settings 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2 Click the Dialog category title and change the following settings in the displayed area Dialog display options checkboxes To disable further display of a confirmation or warning dialog select its corresponding checkbox To restore display of a disabled dialog deselect its corresponding checkbox lt Select All gt button Selects all dialog checkboxes lt Deselect All gt button Deselects all dialog checkboxes 3 Click lt Apply gt The new settings are applied 339 Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files This appendix explains the format of the CSV system confi
45. on a single physical server Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Confirm the Physical Servers to Use 2 Stop the Source L Server for Usage Change Stop L Servers operating on physical servers which are required for change usage For details refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server 3 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting When using multiple L Servers switching between them on unused physical servers in a server pool Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Confirm the Server Pool Confirm whether an unused physical server exists in the server pool 2 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting 17 9 2 Operation The methods for operating physical servers after usage changes are as follow Perform the procedure given in 17 9 1 Configuring L Servers for Usage Change before performing any operations When using multiple L Servers switching between them on a single physical server Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Stop the Source L Server for Usage Change Stop L Servers operating on physical
46. only specify system disks on the Disk tab If different locations are specified for system disks and data disks L Server creation with cloning image deployment may fail Disks are created in the same location even if there is a mixture of disks with Thin Provisioning attributes and disks with no Thin Provisioning attributes in the cloning image 9 09060006000000000000000000909090099092092099290909909099090900990000000000000000000090009909990999909909909990990009200099 166 A Information For virtual L Servers when creating an L Server even if the size of the system disk is specified in advance if the specified size differs from that of the deployed cloning image the size will be changed to that of the deployed cloning image 0060060000000000000000000090090909090909909909090990909909900900900000000000000000000909009099999999990999090990906090090900999 VMware Hyper V Depending on the server virtualization software used some restrictions may apply to the operating systems that parameters can be set for and the prerequisites for performing the settings For details refer to the manual of server virtualization software Basic software OS that can be used on an L Server is limited to software supported by the server virtualization software The image to deploy can be specified when creating an L Server Image deployment for Resource Orchestrator uses the following functions of the server virtualization software Table 16
47. the capacity reserved for failover is displayed in CPU Capacity and Memory Capacity under VM Host List and Capacity on the Resource Details tab For VM hosts for which the HA function is unavailable or for operations with no reservation for failover a hyphen is displayed Whenthe HA function provided by server virtualization software is available for the VM hosts and CPU capacity and memory capacity are reserved for failover If the VM host does not meet the following conditions free space will be displayed as 0 The power status is ON The status is normal Maintenance mode has not been set 246 The maintenance mode of server virtualization software has not been set VMware For VM hosts for which standby mode has been set by server virtualization software calculation results are displayed for free space even when the status is stop In Resource Details for the VM host and when using the command rcxadm pool list name Resource pool name the total CPU capacity is displayed in the format of CPU performance CPU core count CPU performanceis displayed as a number truncated to one decimal place Therefore depending on the value of the second decimal place of CPU performance CPU capacity may not match the actual free CPU capacity Max Number of Possible L Servers View This section explains how to display the converted number of L Servers that can be created with VM pools server pools and
48. will forcibly power off the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog will power off the managed server without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power OFF in progress state orange blinking The power button finally displays Power OFF status after confirming that the target server has been shut down correctly Force Reboot Selecting Force Reboot will forcibly reboot the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog will power off and reboot the managed server without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays Power ON status after confirming that the OS has started up correctly on the target server Note VM Host Take caution regarding the following points when powering off or rebooting a VM host When using a server virtualization software s high availability feature confirm that the server is set to VM maintenance mode within that virtualization software This can be confirmed from the virtualization software client Perform power operations only after setting VM maintenance mode either from the VM management software client or using the resource control command Refer to the server v
49. 1 Functions Used when Deploying Images VMware vSphere 4 0 VMware vSphere 4 1 Template guest OS customization VMware vSphere 5 Microsoft R System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 T late tOS ti t fil Microsoft R System Center 2012 Virtual ia lias ca aba oe Duc CRM Machine Manager Solaris Containers The cloning image needs to be specified Resource allocation When creating an L Server for which only a configuration definition exists check the None Definition only checkbox When an L Server for which only a configuration definition has been created is started resources will be allocated For details refer to 17 8 2 1 Allocating Resources When modifying the configuration of an L Server for which only a configuration definition was created refer to 17 8 2 3 Modifying Configuration Definition Information Network NIC Select a network resource to connect to the NIC of the L Server A list of the NICs defined in the L Server template is displayed Select the network to connect to each NIC from the Network to connect column a Click Select in the Network to connect column The Select a Network Resource dialog is displayed b The following items are displayed Select the network resource to connect Name Label Admin LAN Subnet address Number of addresses Unused Total For physical L Servers the network connection can be selected in addition to these items Connect Specify when
50. 10 Virtual Storage Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Configuration Information Management software A link to the web interface of the storage management software is displayed Status The status of the resource is displayed Storage Type The type of the resource is displayed Thin Provisioning Thin provisioning configuration information is displayed When thin provisioning is configured yes is displayed When thick provisioning is configured or no attribute is specified no is displayed Total Capacity The total storage capacity is displayed Unused Capacity The free storage capacity is displayed A 6 11 Folder Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed 301 Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Tenant L Platform Folder List Name Label The name used to identify a tenant is displayed Type The type of a tenant is displayed Stored Resource Number The number of stored resources is displayed Pool List Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Type The type of the resource pool is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool
51. 11 Network Map This chapter provides an overview of the Network Map and describes its features 11 1 Overview The Network Map displays the following information for resources managed in Resource Orchestrator Network configuration of physical and virtual servers including virtual switches and VM guests Statuses of network links between all resources VLAN configuration affecting each physical and virtual server Two different maps listed below are available within the Network Map Switch between the maps as necessary Overall map Displays chassis servers and their connections network links with adjacent LAN switches Local map Shows a more detailed map focused on the selected resource chassis or server This map displays resources contained in the selected resource e g server blades LAN switch blades VM hosts VM guests virtual switches and their connections links with adjacent LAN switches or chassis Up to two chassis can be displayed at a time In the Network Map resource icons are used to represent the status of each resource Moreover different colors are used to represent different link statuses The network map creates physical logical links by searching the related resources When there are more resources chassis physical virtual servers NICs physical virtual switches and ports the number of network links increases and it takes more time for drawing These drawing operations are performed when d
52. 3 Changing Power Monitoring Devices 7 9 Changing Monitoring Information Settings TaI Chg me Montorine TAGE ACOH SOLERE cca ceti e t aha ee ear eicere e prr HC tO eb tek t 79 2 Canceling Monitoring Information SEHE i eemper etit Re err ee eintreten EARE REE EAEE EEA ERASE pH recipi rero d RE M 7 10 1 Changing Storage Management Software Basic Information T102 Chasse Storace Unit Base Dorsten reete or reiecta cnr s rr ee sa s ease ce AE 2103 Charging Virtual Storage Resource Basie informato eerte eterne Iob treten better inire eroe iiaae segete aede 7 Ios C hansiue Disk Resource Basic DaforrnftMl rroia trt rtr deeem d rate eet teh ne etra abigo dr TLI Changing BMC Blad Lagie Server Antomation Seltiugs 5 o ire ee tia par eie n ra eB eei OEC HERE EE ERE Hber Ee REIS Chapter 8 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers 8 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration medi c pA Y EID 2 PRESTO TOT DET TED OO DE Chanpier 9 Deleng FS Se aaa ite he b et Re OR UE RR ERI REM RAM Rn ERIS RR AR URBES NE IR RE RR ERE PA Eel Edd ER er rl mM 92 Dec lec tana Managed canc D M eC im rab die TM i RE r A 9 4 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices 24 1 Deleg LAN Switeh Blades reete een n
53. 7 Excel Active Directory and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries NetApp is a registered trademark of Network Appliance Inc in the US and other countries Data ONTAP Network Appliance and Snapshot are trademarks of Network Appliance Inc in the US and other countries Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates in the United States and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Red Hat RPM and all Red Hat based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and other countries SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX AG a Novell business VMware the VMware boxes logo and design Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions ServerView and Systemwalker are registered trademarks of FUJITSU LIMITED All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Notices The contents of this manual shall not be reproduced without express written permission from FUJITSU LIMITED The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice Month Year oni Za Sued Manual Code Edition November 2011 First ovember 2011 First 51 7612 01ENZ0 00 Edit
54. C 3 Click OK The server name is changed 69 7 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses This section explains how to change admin IP addresses To change the IP addresses of remote management controllers refer to 7 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings Chassis Use the following procedure to change the IP address of a chassis l 2 Change the IP address of the management blade In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed Change Admin LAN IP address Click lt OK gt The chassis admin IP address is changed Managed Servers Use the following procedure to change the IP address of a managed server However it is still required when using the same address for both the admin and public IP address This procedure is not required when changing only the public IP address of a server I 2 Log in to the managed server with an OS administrator account Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address according to the OS manual If the admin LAN has been made redundant change the admin IP address set in the following tools or products Refer to the manual of each product for usage details Windows PRIMECLUSTER GLS BACS Intel PROSet Linux Solaris PRIMECLUSTER GLS NIC switching mode Physical IP addr
55. ID The partition number is displayed Displayed only when a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Maintenance Mode The operational status of the server is displayed One of the following is displayed active maintenance Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected LED status The illumination status of the maintenance LED is displayed Displayed only for PRIMERGY BX servers Admin LAN MAC address 1 The MAC address of the NIC used for the admin LAN is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected CPU core count The CPU type of the physical server is displayed CPU type The type of CPU is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers CPU clock speed CPU clock speed frequency is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers 286 Memory Size The total capacity of server memory is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers For SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers this is displayed only when the server is powered on Admin LAN MAC address 2 The MAC address of the network interface used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise se
56. IP Address of the HBA address rename Server This section explains how to change the IP address of the HBA address rename server 15 Use the following procedure to change the IP address of the HBA address rename server i 2 Log in to the HBA address rename server with administrator authority Stop the HBA address rename setup service Stop the HBA address rename setup service according to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address according to the OS manual 4 Restart the HBA address rename setup service Start the HBA address rename setup service according to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE 7 3 Changing VIOM Registration Settings Use the following procedure to perform setting changes for management software VIOM 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the management software VIOM and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Management Software VIOM Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined User ID Enter the ID of a VIOM user account Password Enter the password of the above VIOM user account Click lt OK gt To change registered VIOM server profiles follow the procedure described in 5 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Pr
57. Information on the selected unregistered server Network Resources Information on all registered network resources is displayed Power Monitoring Devices Information on all registered power monitoring devices Management Software Information on all registered management software Management Software vCenter Server SCVMM OVM Manager or VIOM Information on the selected management software Storage Resources Information on all registered storage resources is displayed Storage Management Software Information on storage units virtual storage and disk resources that are operating using the selected storage management software is displayed VM Management Software Information on storage resources that are operating using the selected VM management software is displayed Storage Units Information on virtual storage and disk resources that are operating on the selected storage unit is displayed Virtual Storage Information on the disk resources of the selected virtual storage is displayed L Server Information on the selected L Server is displayed L Platform Information on the selected L Platform is displayed Folder Information on the selected resource folder is displayed Tenant Information on the selected tenant is displayed VM Pool Information on all registered VM hosts is displayed Server Pool Information on all registered server resources is displayed Storage Pool Information on all registered storage resources is displaye
58. L Server template specify the VM type When creating individual specifications for an L Server specify the VM type on the Server tab Resource pools can be used with user role management to restrict the users that can use them Bysetting a priority for multiple resource pools you can set the order for automatically selecting the required resources when creating an L Server For details on resource pool types and the resources that are stored refer to Table 6 3 Resource Pool Types in 6 4 Resource Pool Types in the Design Guide CE Moving an L Server migration is only possible between VM hosts belonging to the same cluster group when two or more cluster groups are registered in the same VM pool 20 2 Creating Use the following procedure to create resource pools 1 Right click the root folder or a resource folder in the orchestration tree and select Create Pool from the popup menu The Create a Pool dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Name Label Enter a name for the resource pool Enter up to 32 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters or hyphens on upper or lower case underscores To enable the user to identify a resource pool it is recommended that the resource pool is named based on its resource type performance or usage Type Select the type of the resource
59. L Servers that have had cloning images deployed but to collect them from a dedicated master server The network parameter auto configuration function defined in a cloning image cannot be used for Resource Orchestrator When the target server of cloning image collection has a redundant NIC configured release redundancy and then perform collection VMware Hyper V The disk space necessary for the collected cloning images can be confirmed from the following display Resource list for image pools or cloning image list in the Resource Details window Resource list for image resources or version list in the Resource Details window From the command line execute rcxadm image list For details on the rcexadm image list command refer to 4 1 rexadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Xen KVM Oracle VM The disk area necessary for extraction cannot be checked from collected cloning images For this reason include the disk size in the cloning image name or the comment and check the necessary disk area is available before extracting images 211 VMware For details on how to collect cloning images on VMware refer to Collecting a Cloning Image in C 2 8 Collecting Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V For details on how to collect cloning images on Hyper V refer to Collecting Cloning Images of C 3 8 Collecting and Deleting Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE Xen For details on
60. Linux Manager 1 Change the IP address set for the admin LAN Set a new IP address on the primary node using the following command opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt De activate the admin server s takeover logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to de activate the takeover logical IP address For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Register the takeover logical IP address as a PRIMECLUSTER resource Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to register the virtual interface as a PRIMECLUSTER resource For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Mount the shared disk Mount the shared disk for managers on the primary node Change the settings of the DHCP service When registering the admin LAN subnet When registering an admin LAN subnet change the file below and set the DHCP server for the takeover logical IP address File name Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 etc dhcpd conf Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 etc dhcp dhcpd conf 61 Change the takeover logical IP address in the following line to the new takeover logical IP address option dhcp server identifier takeover logical IP address Example When the takeover logical IP address is 192 168 4 100 before being changed DHCP Server Configuration file see usr share doc dhcp dhcpd conf sample ddns update style none option vendor class i
61. List Start IP Address The start address of the IP addresses to be excluded from automatic configuration is displayed End IP Address The end address of the IP addresses to be excluded from automatic configuration is displayed External Connection List Chassis Name The chassis name is displayed Switch Name The switch name is displayed Port Number The external connection port number of the LAN switch blade is displayed For link aggregation the physical port numbers of the member ports that constitute the link aggregation are displayed A hyphen is displayed if the link aggregation configuration has been released Link Aggregation Group If link aggregation then the link aggregation group name is displayed A hyphen is displayed if a physical port VLAN Type The VLAN type is displayed When used as Tagged VLAN tagged is displayed When used as Untagged VLAN untagged is displayed When VLAN is not used none is displayed Status of virtual switch automatic configuration The following information is displayed when automatic network configuration has been performed on the target of network resource automatic configuration or when a VM host on which automatic network configuration has been performed exists in the cluster Cluster Group The cluster is displayed VM host name The VM host name is displayed VM Type The VM Type VMware or Hyper V is displayed 329 VMware Hyper V Virtual Swi
62. Managemen 8 Displayed from the VM guest list when selecting a VM Software Console Dost ost Table A 25 Popup Menus Available for Physical Servers Popup Menu Function Unregister im Unregisters the selected resource from a resource pool Move Resources Dee H Moves a resource to another resource pool Maintenance Mode Release Sets a server to active mode Opens a server management screen Creates a link between an L Server and a configured Convert to L Server physical machine Table A 26 Popup Menus Available for Virtual Storage Popup Menu Function External Management Unregister oe E Unregisters the selected resource from a resource pool 275 Popup Menu Function uae 7 umane Change Settings Basic Information Modifies the selected resource s registration settings Start Management o 1 ens a management console Software Console P The following menus are displayed from the disk list displayed when selecting a storage pool Table A 27 Popup Menus Available for Disks Popup Menu Function Fue Uere me esteem aos pe Pa wemesmem 0 owore 0 Memmennemamereoesemt The following menus are displayed from the disk list displayed when selecting a virtual storage Table A 28 Popup Menus Available for Disks Popup Menu Function Change Settings Basic Information Modifies the selected resource s registration settings Table A 29 Popup Menus Available for
63. Management window right click the PXE Services resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The PXE Services Properties window will be displayed b Click lt Add gt on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed c Configure the above registry key in Root registry key d Click lt OK gt e After configuration of the registry keys is complete click lt Apply gt f Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 4 Assign the manager s shared disk and IP address to the secondary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another node 1 Move to node zode name from the displayed menu The name of the secondary node is displayed for node name Change the manager IP address on the secondary node On the secondary node use the rexadm mgrctl modify command to set the new IP address Use the same IP address as the one set in step 2 Assign the manager s shared disk and IP address to the primary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another node 1 Move to node zode name from the displayed menu The name of the primary node is displayed for node name 7 On the primary node take the manager s shared disk and IP address offline
64. ROR console management software tree right click the target management software and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The target management software is deleted 9 7 Clearing the Power Monitoring Environment This section explains how to clear the power monitoring environment Clearing the power monitoring environment is done by deleting power monitoring targets For details on how to release collection settings refer to 7 8 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environments 9 7 1 Deleting Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to delete power monitoring devices Use the following procedure to delete power monitoring devices 1 In the ROR console power monitoring devices tree right click the target power monitoring device and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target power monitoring devices are deleted from the tree view 9 8 Deleting Admin LAN Subnets This section explains how to delete admin LAN subnets Use the following procedure to delete an admin LAN subnet 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 2 Select the subnet to delete 3 Click Delete The Delete Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 4 Click OK The target subnet information is deleted A Information When a
65. Redeem npe iiir asit e eei be D beris RETO dE e dete i 93 0 4 2 D lstiug LAN Switches and Network DovViQas is eem hee eee tr e er e eh P Ed aree ta nb eate reciba ia 93 95 Deleung Nopwork BesoUPeBE nieloeme nomeo De EDI ERE HO RR EN SERERE RO HII EISE HOHER 9 6 Deleting VM Mandremnent SODEWGle eren eterne rhet tete pe e secs eb tie EPI ERE M SEE ESTEE RE RERO ER eR eR aee re EXPE AE tede duo gas 9 7 Clearing the Power Monitoring Environment 9 3 1 Del ting Power Monitoring Devices nemen tete dee Pe ER EO ERE P CO ODE ERE Pere Hee b erbe deben 95 S5 Delecta Admin LAN SUBHIQUS sas sch sts ee e hte tene ore hebben ere laci ce ER n i RO RR EE EE 95 99 Delenn BMC Black Lose Server AODODISGON 2 c mcer a do erepti m rt rte ene d rere bate ciate REED i esent 96 Chapter 10 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and MOdification ccscccccsssccceseenceeeeseeeeeesseeeeesenseeeessseeeessaees 97 TH D OVebidew ecrit 10 2 Importing the System Configuration File 10 3 Exporting the System Configuration File Chapter 11 Network Map IUMES a EEUU UV Pie M CUIU E P M M ES n o a MERE 11 3 1 Network Map Layout R M 105 wc 105 TY A RESOUNGE 107 11 4 1 Resource Statuses 107 AZ VLAN DEPI oeieo a a EE E EAEE AEE E E AE bagi batons EE ESS 112 MEO Hoo E
66. Resources This section explains how to create a network resource and register the resource in a network pool Network resources can be created using the following methods Creating new network resources Refer to 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources 137 Creating network resources using already registered admin LAN subnets Refer to 14 3 2 Creating Network Resources Using Already Registered Admin LAN Subnets The network resource for the admin LAN that is directly connected from the manager is automatically created with the values of AdminLan for the network resource name and 1 for the VLAN ID To change these values delete AdminLan and then create a new network resource following the procedure provided in 14 3 2 Creating Network Resources Using Already Registered Admin LAN Subnets When configuring the subnet settings in network resources confirm that the following IP addresses are not included in the subnet scope Set them as excluded addresses when they are included in the subnet scope IP address for detected unregistered servers P address of VM management software Admin LAN IP address for LAN switch blade P address for default gateway iRMC address Admin IP address for network device 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Use the following procedure to create a new network resource and register it in a network pool When using VMware as server virtualization software and using the sam
67. Server template might need to be modified in advance Please verify the configuration of such L Server template and make necessary changes 15 2 Editing a Template Using an Editor This section explains how to edit an L Server template using an editor Use the following procedure Export an L Server Template For details on how to export L Server templates refer to 15 2 1 Export 2 Edit with an Editor For details on editing a template with an editor refer to 15 2 2 Editing 3 Import the L Server Template For details on how to import L Server templates refer to 15 2 3 Import For details on how to delete L Server templates refer to 15 2 4 Deleting 15 2 1 Export This section explains how to export an L Server template Use the following procedure to export an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree On the Template List tab right click the L Server template to export and select Export from the popup menu Displays the File Download dialog 2 Click Save The L Server template is exported 161 From the command line execute rexadm template export For details on the rexadm template export command refer to 8 1 rcxadm template in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G amp Note 06060606000299090000000909909000000990020900009009209090000009090909909092000009099000000000209009909000000990000000090920900000090299 When exporting an L Server template the XML file is gene
68. Server template which was deleted from the Template tab delete it After unpublishing the image information that uses the L Server template which was deleted from the Template tab delete it In cases where deleting does not work in either 1 or 2 as there is an L Platform that has completed deployment recreate an L Server template with the same name 0060606060009090906006000090999000099009099099090900000029290990900009909909990909000900909909909000000909990990900009090099990000000990900000099299 15 1 6 Export Use the following procedure to export an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The L Server Template Editor window is displayed 2 Select the L Server template to export and Click lt Export gt 3 The export confirmation dialog is displayed When Are you sure to export the specified L Server Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Yes gt The L Server template will be exported 15 1 7 Import Use the following procedure to import an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The L Server Template Editor window is displayed Select the L Server template to import and Click lt Import gt The Import L Server Template dialog is displayed Select the file name for L Server template t
69. Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller IP address ILOM XSCF To modify user account settings select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password fields under Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For SPARC Enterprise T servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller settings LOM 1 Change settings on the remote management controller ILOM If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority Admin privileges 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller IP address ILOM XSCF To modify user account settings select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password fields under Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For PRIMEQUEST servers Use the following procedure to change remote server management settings 1 Change the remote server management settings If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority 2 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu
70. The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 2512 5 3 Select the Modify remote server management login account checkbox Then change the User ID and Password of Remote Server Management For SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller XSCF settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller XSCF If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority platadm privileges 2 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 3 Select the Modify remote server management login account checkbox Then change the User ID and Password of Remote Server Management XSCF 7 1 6 Changing Port Numbers This section explains how to change port numbers When changing port numbers of the agent the nfagent port of the manager must also be changed Change this according to information in 6 2 Changing Port Numbers For details on port numbers refer to Appendix A Port List in the Design Guide CE Use the following procedure to change the port numbers for managed servers 1 Change the port numbers Windows Hyper V Use a text editor such as Notepad to change the following line in the Windows system foldeNsystem32MriversVetc services file service name port
71. The Move a Pool dialog is displayed 2 Select the destination resource folder 3 Click OK The target resource pool is moved to the destination resource folder When using tenants to segregate resources movement of resources may be limited For details refer to Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations 20 5 Deleting Use the following procedure to delete resource pools When a resource pool is deleted the resources in that resource pool are also deleted The following resources are unregistered from a resource pool VM bost resources Physical server resources Virtual Storage Resources Disk Resources network device Physical image resources It is recommended that you move the resources in the resource pool to another resource pool in advance 1 Right click the target resource pool in the orchestration tree and select Delete from the popup menu The name of the resource pool to delete is displayed in the Delete a Pool dialog If resources are registered in the resource pool to delete a list of those resources is displayed in All Resources Confirm the list and check the Delete All Resources checkbox 2 Click OK The target resource pool is deleted 20 6 Viewing The pool list in the resource list display the resource folders total size of resources and free space available In the L Server list when the server is a physical L Server the physical server for the L Server is displayed When the
72. The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process 217 From the command line execute rcxadm image restore For details on the rcxadm image restore command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Delete This section explains how to delete unnecessary versions of backups of system images 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Backup Restore Delete a Backup from the popup menu The Delete a System Image dialog is displayed 2 Select the version of the backup to delete 3 Click lt OK gt The backup of the system image is deleted From the command line execute rcxadm image delete For details on the rexadm image delete command refer to 4 1 rexadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 7 Migration of VM Hosts between Servers This section explains how to move migrate an L Server between servers Physical Servers When using physical L Servers moving between servers migration cannot be used Use the following procedure to migrate between servers 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Migrate VM Guest from the popup menu The Migrate an L Server dialog is displayed 2 Select the destination VM host from the destination VM host list Only the VM hosts available for mig
73. VM host 4 This includes not only the resources for active virtual machines but also those of resources of stopped virtual machines VMware This includes the overhead memory used for the virtual machine The resources of VMware FT secondary virtual machines are included VMware This is the resource capacity secured when VMware HA admission control is enabled This is calculated according to the policy of the admission control Formulas for individual policies are as follows When the policy is share Total resource capacity 3 multiplied by the share When the policy is the VM host corresponding to the spare server Total resource capacity 3 multiplied by 100 96 When the policy is a VM host not corresponding to the spare server Total resource capacity 3 multiplied by 0 When the policy is slots Total resource capacity 3 multiplied by 0 The reservation capacity for the VM host is not secured with the following policies If an L Server is deployed with those policies the L Server may not be powered ON due to a shortage of resources When the policy is the spare server and multiple VM hosts are defined for the spare server 249 When the policy is slots 6 This includes not only the resources for active L Servers but also those of resources of stopped L Servers 7 Images include cloning images and snapshots However the size of images is not displayed Xen When using RHELS Xen on the
74. When doing the operation inactivate a target external port or change vlan id for internal ports which have the same vlan id as a target external port LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Conditions The port is selected as Selected Port The port is activated More than one internal port have the same vlan sj Changing VLAN IDs This section explains how to change VLAN IDs set on the external ports of a LAN switch With Port VLANs Use the following procedure to change VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select Untagged from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID is changed With Tagged VLANs First delete the VLAN ID was set on the desired LAN switch blade port before setting the new VLAN ID Use the following procedure to change VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the fol
75. XML CE 60606062002000990900000090990990909900000909099090900000900909929099090000909090900909000009009099090000009909090090000009909909000009009990900000909299 amp Note The type in the Type element cannot be modified for the network devices already registered in a network pool The type in the Type element and group ID in the Redundancy group id element cannot be modified for the network devices already deployed for an L Platform Modifying multiple network devices at one time deletes all link information that has been registered and then registers the link information specified for the Links element To change device information only while keeping existing link information do not specify the Links element 7 7 Changing VM Management Software Settings This section explains how to change VM management software settings The following settings can be changed Location IP address UserID Password Here the method for changing settings registered with Resource Orchestrator is explained Complete re configuration within the VM management software admin console before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change VM management software settings 82 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Management Software zame Settings dialog is displayed The nam
76. a feature whereby a mirror volume is generated at the remote site when a volume is generated at the local site and copies are maintained by performing REC dynamic memory A function that optimizes physical memory allocation for virtual machines depending on their execution status on Hyper V end host mode This is a mode where the uplink port that can communicate with a downlink port is fixed at one and communication between uplink ports is blocked environmental data Measured data regarding the external environments of servers managed using Resource Orchestrator Measured data includes power data collected from power monitoring targets 369 ESC ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Software that supports stable operation of multi vendor storage system environments involving SAN DAS or NAS Provides configuration management relation management trouble management and performance management functions to integrate storage related resources such as ETERNUS ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager This is storage management software that makes highly reliable and rapid backups restorations and replications using the advanced copy feature of the ETERNUS disk array Express The edition which provides server registration monitoring and visualization external FTP server An FTP server used to relay network device files between the ROR manager and network devices that do not possess their own FTP server function FC switch Fibre Channel Swit
77. a resource in a resource pool a Register physical server resources in a server pool In the Register Resources dialog for the server pool check the Display servers with OS installed checkbox and specify a physical server with an OS installed b Register the disks that are connected to the physical server to be linked with the L Server in a storage pool c Register address set resources Specify the scope including MAC WWN addresses being used by the configured physical server d Register network resources Specify IP addresses not being used by the configured physical server or the virtual machine 234 When the IP address used for a configured physical server a virtual machine or other devices is included in the subnet address scope specify the IP address in the IP addresses to be excluded When linking a configured virtual machine to an L Server perform the following procedure to register a resource in a resource pool a Register VM host resources in a VM pool b Register the virtual storage and disks that are used for a virtual machine to be linked with the L Server in a storage pool c Register network resources Specify IP addresses not being used by the configured physical server or the virtual machine When the IP address used for a configured physical server a virtual machine or other devices is included in the subnet address scope specify the IP address in the IP addresses to be excluded Confirmatio
78. accessible resource pools without overcommit configured 218 When VM Pool is specified for Resource type The migration is performed with a destination VM host selected from a VM pool For environments using overcommit the same overcommit settings must be configured for both the L Server and VM pools When VM Host is specified for Resource type The migration will fail because the destination does not exist For environments not using overcommit the same overcommit settings must be configured for both the L Server and the VM pool which the VM host belongs to Perform one of the following Select a VM host from the list of the destination VM hosts and then perform the operation again In the Modify an L Server dialog change the value for VM host to Automatic and then perform server migration again In the Modify an L Server dialog change the value for VM host to Pool check the resources to be allocated and then perform server migration again when necessary In the Modify an L Server dialog change the value for VM host to VM host check the resources to be allocated and then perform server migration again when necessary If a VM host is specified for the destination VM host the migration between servers will be performed regardless of whether or not overcommit has been configured The information set on the VM host to use can be checked using the following methods Select the target L Ser
79. admin IP address of the managed server Without changing the IP address of the managed server it is not possible to register the information of the subnet the managed server belongs to or change the information of the subnet Changing the IP Address of a Clustered Manager In a clustered manager configuration use the following procedure to change the IP address set within the operating system Windows Manager Change the IP address using the Failover Cluster Management window Linux Manager 59 1 Stop the manager s cluster service Stop the manager s cluster service from the cluster administration view Cluster Admin 2 Log in to the admin server s primary node Log in to the operating system of the admin server s primary node with administration privileges 3 Mount the shared disk on the primary node Mount the admin server s shared disk on the primary node 4 Change takeover the logical IP address Release PRIMECLUSTER GLS virtual interface settings from the PRIMECLUSTER resource then change the PRIMECLUSTER GLS configuration For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual 5 Activate the takeover logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line to activate the takeover logical IP address For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations In a clustered manager configuration use the following procedure to register an IP add
80. and re used as a basis for the design of other systems This makes it easy to design various systems located in different sites Figure 10 1 Examples of Use Office Server room Download 1 Contact Fujitsu technical staff 1 Contact Fujitsu technical staff 3 2 Design J m 2 Design v Sle System System System System configuration configuration configuration Admin client configuration template Excel file CSV template Excel file CSV Manager 5 CheckiSave _ a i Check Reuse F Data transfer System configuration file CSV System configuration file CSV Only system configuration files in CSV format can be imported or exported For details on the system configuration file s format refer to Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files Resource Orchestrator provides a sample in CSV format To obtain a copy of the Excel template hereafter system configuration template please contact Fujitsu technical staff This system configuration template makes it easy to create system configuration files in CSV format When loading a system configuration template from a CSV file or importing a system configuration file from the ROR console Use the format described in B 2 File Format for the system configuration file 97 When saving a file in CSV format from the system configuration template or exporting a system configuration file from the ROR console Export will be performed using the latest file format giv
81. as differing logically by software by grouping ports on a LAN switch Using a Virtual LAN network configuration can be performed freely without the need for modification of the physical network configuration VLAN ID A number between 1 and 4 095 used to identify VLANs Null values are reserved for priority tagged frames and 4 096 FFF in hexadecimal is reserved for mounting VM Virtual Machine A virtual computer that operates on a VM host VM guest A virtual server that operates on a VM host or an OS that is operated on a virtual machine 382 VM Home Position The VM host that is home to VM guests VM host A server on which server virtualization software is operated or the server virtualization software itself VM maintenance mode One of the settings of server virtualization software that enables maintenance of VM hosts For example when using high availability functions such as VMware HA of server virtualization software by setting VM maintenance mode it is possible to prevent the moving of VM guests on VM hosts undergoing maintenance For details refer to the manuals of the server virtualization software being used VM management software Software for managing multiple VM hosts and the VM guests that operate on them Provides value adding functions such as movement between the servers of VM guests migration VMware Virtualization software from VMware Inc Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC serve
82. blade which is ata now unusable The LAN switch blade was detected to have been powered off Note When operating in IBP mode 108 Table 11 4 VM Host Icons The status of the VM host could not be obtained An error was detected from the VM host A fatal error was detected from the VM host which is now unusable The VM host was detected to have been powered off A warning was detected from the VM guest The status of the VM guest could not be obtained An error was detected from the VM guest A fatal error was detected from the VM guest which is now unusable The VM guest was detected to have been powered off 109 Table 11 6 Virtual Switch Icons normal No new errors or warnings were detected from the virtual switch A warning was detected from the virtual switch The status of the virtual switch could not be obtained An error was detected from the virtual switch A fatal error was detected from the virtual switch which is now unusable The virtual switch was detected to have been powered off No new errors or warnings were detected from the LAN switch A warning was detected from the LAN switch The status of the LAN switch could not be obtained An error was detected from the LAN switch A fatal error was detected from the LAN switch which is now unusable The LAN switch was detected to have been powered off 110 Table 11 8 Firewall No new errors or warnings were dete
83. by clicking on the Contact icon Registering contact details of technical support staff beforehand can help streamline recovery procedures when problems occur 4 2 Screen Layout This section explains how the BladeViewer screen is organized The BladeViewer screen consists of a status panel a chassis panel and a blade panel Figure 4 2 BladeViewer Screen Layout Chassis panel Blade panel Status panel This panel displays a summary of resources statuses Chassis panel This panel displays the statuses of each registered chassis Blade panel This panel displays the status of all resources mounted within the selected chassis A Information 00600000099209000000099909900000090909090000000909090990900000090999000000090900000000099209900000099909000000090909909090000099299 To switch from BladeViewer to the ROR console click lt Advanced gt gt gt which is displayed in the upper right of the BladeViewer screen Switch to the ROR console when necessary for example to register servers and change various settings Otherwise the last view used before logging out either the ROR console or BladeViewer is displayed 4 3 Resource Status Monitoring This section explains how to monitor resource statuses using BladeViewer 4 3 1 Status Panel The status panel displays a summary of resources statuses including resources other than PRIMERGY BX servers When a problem occurs in the system a red or yellow light icon starts blinking
84. by other applications or services If necessary change the ports used by Resource Orchestrator services Windows Manager Manager Services Resource Coordinator Manager Resource Coordinator Task Manager Resource Coordinator Web Server Apache Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel2 62 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel3 1 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel4 1 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel5 1 Resource Coordinator DB Server PostgreSQL Related Services Deployment Service TFTP Service PXE Services DHCP Server 2 Linux Manager Manager Services rcxmanager rcxtaskmgr rexmongrell rcxmongrel2 rcxmongrel3 1 rcxmongrel4 1 rcxmongrel5 1 rcxhttpd rcxdb Related Services scwdepsvd scwpxesvd scwtftpd dhepd 2 In Basic mode these services are not supported 2 Necessary when managing a managed server in a separate subnet to the admin server Change the ports used by the above services if there is a possibility that they will conflict with other applications or services For Windows operating systems an ephemeral port may conflict with a Resource Orchestrator service if the range allowed for ephemeral ports is changed In this case change the port number to a value not included in the range for ephemeral ports For details refer to 2 1 1 4 Checking Used P
85. capacity is not changed Solaris Containers The number of CPUs and the CPU performance of an L Server are displayed as when the following conditions are met because the resources are not managed using Resource Orchestrator Acap value for the CPU has not been set in the non global zone The non global zone is managed using resource pools that are not the targets of management When the conditions are not met the cap values of CPUs are used for the number of CPUs and the CPU performance For details refer to E 6 2 Preparations for Servers in the Design Guide CE When the number of CPUs and CPU performance are displayed as the amount of resources used by an L Server will be calculated using 0 on When something other than is displayed for the number of CPUs and CPU performance those values are used for calculation The memory size of an L Server is displayed as when a cap value of memory has not been set in a non global zone When a cap value has been set the value is set for the memory size of an L Server on When memory size is displayed as the amount of resources used by an L Server will be calculated using 0 on When something other than is displayed for memory size that value is used for calculation Whenconfigured to calculate using a reservation value free CPU capacity and memory size of the virtual machine are not changed 3 This does not include the overhead used for the
86. configure their services not to start automatically This has to be configured before collecting cloning images When the target of operation is a PRIMEQUEST server confirm that the boot option settings on the target server and the boot option set in BIOS are configured for Legacy boot When the settings of one of the servers are UEFI configure the settings after changing to Legacy boot For details on how to change boot options refer to 7 1 10 Changing Boot Options When using local disks as system disks and iSCSI storage as data disks refer to the advisory notes described in Table 8 1 Supported Storage Device Configurations in 8 1 1 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide VE Windows Enable NetBIOS over TCP IP A volume license is required for cloning and must be entered during the installation of Resource Orchestrator Agent Refer to 2 2 1 2 Collecting and Checking Required Information and 2 2 2 Installation Windows Hyper V in the Setup Guide CE for details If no volume license is entered during the agent installation or if this information is changed after installation edit the following license configuration file on the source server Note that the structure and location of this file depend on the version of Windows that is being used For Windows Server 2003 Installation_folder Agent scw SeparateSetting sysprep sysprep inf Edit the following line to enter a valid product ID ProductID Windows p
87. console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Import from the ROR console menu 2 Specify the file name and click OK The L Server template is imported When a registered L Server template name is included in the specified file a warning dialog is displayed to confirm whether or not to overwrite the L Server template When overwriting it click OK When not overwriting it click lt Cancel gt and return to the dialog to specify the file name If a template is imported without editing the L Server template name of the L Server template file which was exported in 15 2 2 Editing the content of the existing L Server template will be overwritten If a template is imported after changing the L Server template name of the L Server template file which was exported in step 2 a new L Server template will be added leaving the content of the existing template intact From the command line execute rcxadm template import For details on the rexadm template import command refer to 8 1 rcxadm template in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 15 2 4 Deleting This section explains how to delete an L Server template 162 L Server templates that are no longer required including the sample template can be deleted Use the following method to delete an L Server template On the Template List tab right click the L Server template to delete and select Delete from the popup menu From the command lin
88. details on the Cloning Image List refer to A 8 Image List Tab 12 5 Deleting This section explains how to delete a cloning image Use the following procedure to delete cloning images 1 In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning images is displayed under the cloning image list 2 In this list right click the name of the cloning image to delete and select Delete from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click lt OK gt The selected cloning image is deleted G Note While the cloning image is being deleted no operations can be performed on other versions of the same cloning image images that share the same image name 000606000009090000090990909000000909090900000909990990090900009099990990000090909090990000090909090990990990000090990999090900009099099909000009999 130 Chapter 13 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs This chapter explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format 13 1 Exporting Power Consumption Data This section explains how to export power consumption data The power consumption data for each power monitoring target that is registered in the power monitoring environment can be exported in CSV format The exported data can be selected by specifying the desired data types power and energy time spans
89. displayed differ depending on the role and access rights of the user The resources below are shown in a tree view Resource folders and L Servers Resource pools and the resources registered in resource pools The top level resource folder of each tree is called a root folder The standard tree consists of only the root folder The orchestration tree displays the following information Resource List Tab Displays information on resources related to the resource selected in the resource tree Resource Details Tab Displays detailed information for the resource selected in the resource tree Additionally external software can be opened Available Pool A list of resource pools available for use is displayed Template List A list of the L Server templates available for use is displayed 280 An L Server can be created using an L Server template Sorting the Resources in the Tree The tree displays the resources in ascending order of name by resource type To sort the resource list within the same type of resource use the following method Storage Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Installation_folde SVROR Manager etc customize_data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name gui config rcxprop Definition File Format RESOURCE TREE SORT ORDER ARESOURCE TREE ORDER Items in the Definition File RESOURCE TREE ORDER Specify either one of the following options name Displays the r
90. displayed in the ROR console A list of registered L Server templates is displayed Create is displayed for users with a role that allows L Server creation When Create is clicked the Create an L Server dialog is displayed 336 A 12 Recent Operations This section describes the recent operations area of the ROR console Figure A 6 Recent Operations Recent Operations LA Operation Started Status PEF Server Power OFF 2012 05 02 18 54 40 2012 05 02 18 55 10 Completed 4 Eos rider ee Folder 2012 05 02 18 53 57 2012 05 02 18 53 57 Completed enant Stoo L SemerinFolder 2012 05 02 18 49 18 2012 05 02 18 49 18 Completed m rf The recent operations area shows the status of operations that were recently performed The result of a completed operation shows the operation s completion time and the related resource name For operations that are still running a progress bar is shown to indicate the current progress state Each operation displayed in the recent operation area provides the following information Information Displayed in the Recent Operations Area Operation The executed operation and the target resource name are displayed The process name is displayed while the process is being executed Started The date and time at which the operation was started is displayed Status The status of the executed operation is displayed The date and time at which the process was completed is di
91. driver For details refer to Figure 5 5 Procedures for Multi path Configurations 41 Figure 5 4 Procedures for Single path Configurations For operating For cloning image system installation deployment Software Installation and Cloning Image Deployment Agent Registration Install the operating system Install the multi path driver Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Register the agent Figure 5 5 Procedures for Multi path Configurations For cloning image deployment For operating system installation Software Installation and Agent Registration Install the operating system Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Cloning Image Deployment Register the agent 42 b Example For a server with two ports WWNs could be configured as follows WWNN value provided by I O Virtualization Option 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 Values to set in the HBA address rename settings dialog WWNN value 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 HBA port number on board 2 Values actually set by the admin server on the HBA WWPNS are generated automatically WWNN value for ports 1 and 2 of the HBA 20 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 WWPN value for HBA port 1 21 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 WWPN value for HBA port 2 22 00 00 17 42 51 00 00 6060606006060600000000000000000900000900909099909009909099090090900000000000000000000009009099099999909909000060660606090099
92. either ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page A 8 Image List Tab The Image List tab displays information regarding available images Those lists can be used to manage both system images and cloning images The following two tables list the items that are displayed in System Image List and Cloning Image List System Image List Server Name The name used to identify a physical OS or VM host is displayed Version The latest version of the system image is displayed Backup Date The date and time of the most recent system image backup is displayed Comments Comments describing the system image are displayed Cloning Image List Area Cloning Image Name The name used to identify a cloning image is displayed 333 Version The version of the cloning image is displayed Collection Date The name used to identify a cloning image is displayed OS The name of the operating system stored in the cloning image is displayed Comments Comments describing the cloning image are displayed Right clicking a resource in the list displays a list of available operations in a popup menu Refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus for details on the operations available from popup menus Clicking a column heading in this list will change the color of the selected column and sort images in either ascending or descending o
93. folders are displayed in the following format Resource_folder_name label When abel is not set only resource folder name is displayed If you select the Resource List tab with a target resource folder selected in the tree a list of information for the resources that belong to the resource folder are displayed If you select the Resource Details tab detailed information for the resource folder is displayed The displayed resource folders differ according to the privileges of the user Users that can access all resources All resource folders are displayed in the tree Users that have their access scope restricted by their role Only the resource folders that the user has view privileges for are displayed in the tree From the command line execute rcxadm folder list or rexadm folder show For details on the rexadm folder list command and the rexadm folder show command refer to 3 5 rcxadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 21 4 Modifying Basic Information This section explains how to modify the basic information folder name label comment of resource folders 1 Right click the target resource folder in the tree and select Change Folder Settings Basic Information from the popup menu The Folder Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Change the items you want to modify 3 Click OK The basic information of the resource folder is modified From the command line execute rcexadm folder modify For det
94. for user names passwords and SNMP communities Note that if extra commas are added to the end of a line those will be simply ignored without errors Backslashes and double quotations will be displayed differently in the ROR console from how they appear in the system configuration file Refer to the following table for details on such differences Table B 1 Differences between System Configuration Files Contents and Display in the ROR Console Content of a System Configuration File CSV Display in the ROR Console hp Note The whole value must be enclosed by double quotations Example CSV Content a nb n Display in the ROR Console A b n Order of Section Definition Section order and section name are shown below Moreover the section definition order is fixed 343 Table B 2 Section Order and Section Names Section Name Subnet VIOManager Chassis PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis LanSwitch LanSwitchNet Server SPARCEnterprise PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer em ServerNet SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer SPARC AB ServerWWNN 1 SpareServer 1 em VMManager m l ServerAgent 2 3 Server VMHost 2 3 No MonitorSetting PowerDevice Order Em E o o Eu e FAM e Ea is Ee Hs 9 ERI a Memo 2 When loading from the system
95. from Resources Resources Virtual storage When creating a specified size of disk automatically from the virtual storage during L Server creation select Virtual storage When Virtual Storage is selected the virtual storage resources which can be registered are displayed in the resource list Select the virtual storage resource which you want to register using the Select checkbox of the resources or select all registered virtual storage resources by checking lt Select all gt Note Virtual storage resources cannot be selected for EMC storage Disk resource When using a disk that has been created in advance as an L Server select Disk resource When the following items are specified as search conditions the list of the relevant disk resources that can be registered is displayed Virtual storage Select a virtual storage where there is a disk that has been created in advance Size Enter the size of the disk resource Minimum value Enter the lowest value of the disk size to be searched as a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Check the Minimum value checkbox and enter a value lower than the maximum value Maximum value Enter the highest value of the disk size to be searched as a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Check the Maximum value checkbox and enter a value higher than the minimum value Depending on the value of the second decimal place of the disk size mat
96. have been collected when using Microsoft R System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager m Information Alias Name configuration When a disk that has been created from the ETERNUS virtual storage RAID group for example when expanding disks set the alias if possible based on the disk resource in the ETERNUS LUN Refer to 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters Physical L Server Data Disk for iSCSI Boot When Using ETERNUS Storage Using storage management software the data disk can be accessed from managed servers by defining LUNs of the iSCSI boot disk and of the data disk in the same Affinity group When Using NetApp Storage Using storage management software the data disk can be accessed from managed servers by defining LUNs of iSCSI boot disk and of the data disk in the same igroup 060606020009090000000909909909000000909909090000090909099099090000009099099000000909090909900000009099099090000000990900000000909090900009099 Detaching a Disk Use the following procedure to detach a disk allocated to an L Server 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Detach Disk from the popup menu The Detach a Disk dialog is displayed 2 Select or enter the following items Resource List Select the disk resource to remove from Resource List Disk resources other than system disks are displayed in the list Delete the selected disk resource for Physical L Serv
97. how to install software to the registered managed servers and set up their operating environment Chapter 9 Deleting Resources Explains how to delete resources Chapter 10 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification Provides an overview of the pre configuration function and explains how to use system configuration files Chapter 11 Network Map Provides an overview of the Network Map and explains its features Chapter 12 Cloning Physical Servers Explains how to use the server cloning function Chapter 13 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs Explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools Explains how to register a resource managed by Resource Orchestrator to a resource pool li Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations Explains how to operate L Server templates Chapter 16 Creating L Servers Explains how to create L Servers Chapter 17 L Server Operations Explains how to operate L Servers Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines Explains how to link a configured physical server to a physical L Server and how to link a configured virtual machine to a virtual L Server Chapter 19 Resource Operations This section explains how to perform resource operations with resource
98. if memory CPU hot plug is enabled The memory CPU hot plug is enabled on the virtual L Server created by Resource Orchestrator 2 The changed value will be enabled on the actual virtual machine after it is restarted VMware Hyper V When CPU reserve memory reserve and initial memory capacity have been set for the L Server changing the CPU performance and memory size to values smaller than those values is not possible To change these settings use the command line or VM management software VMware When the memory size is changed the limit value of memory is also changed However when the limit value of memory has been set to Unlimited only the memory size is changed When changing the memory limit setting use the VM management software to do so For details on the configuration method refer to the manual of the VM management software When VMware FT has been configured on a virtual machine linked with a virtual L Server server redundancy settings cannot be modified Check whether the memory CPU hot plug has been enabled from the VM management software if an existing VM guest is to be linked to a virtual L Server If it is not enabled enable the setting from the VM management software Refer to the manual for the VM management software network device for information on how to enable the memory CPU hot plug with the VM management software Hyper V When dynamic memory settings are changed from disabled to enable
99. information is displayed by double clicking any of the following resources in the resource tree Chassis Server Physical OS VM Host VM Guest Network Device PDU or UPS Management Software vCenter Server OVM Manager SCVMM or VIOM Storage Management Software Storage Units Virtual Storage VM Management Software Folder Tenant L Platform L Server VM Pool Server Pool Storage Pool Network Pool Address Pool 283 Image Pool Note 006060000909090900000090909900000090909900000009009099009090000090909090000009090090900000009009090909000009099099090000000909090000000299 For items that there is no content to display the details for a hyphen is displayed Selecting a blade server displays the following chassis image in the Resource Details tab This image shows the slot positions of all server blades installed in the chassis Figure A 5 Chassis 12345678910 The resource images shown in the above chassis image are explained in the table below Table A 38 Meaning of the Resources Shown in the Chassis Image s eeseisowea In Server blade selected within the chassis image Server blade that has not been registered yet Empty slot Attributes of Displayed Resources The Resource Details tab displays different attributes for each resource as described below A 6 1 Chassis Attributes General Area Chassis name The name used to iden
100. installation of this VM host For a Physical OS Select Solaris For a VM Host Select Solaris Containers and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority on on periods or hyphens Enter up to 466 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores This name should start with an alphabet character Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host Enter up to 256 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and symbols 3 Click OK The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree Note 00606060090990990900000990992000090090990990900009090929099909909000090909909090090000999090900000090990900990000009990900000002009090900090999 After registering the server please verify that the information registered for the remote management controller is correct This can be verified by trying out power operations from Resource Orchestrator against that server For details on power operations refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE 5 10 Registering Power Monitoring Devices This section explains how to register power monitoring devices Registering power monitoring devices PDU
101. labels for network resources using port groups on VMware When the label for a network resource to use is changed accidentally the new L Server deployment will fail Use the following procedure to change network settings 205 When the L Server status is defined 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Definition from the popup menu The Modify L Server s definition dialog is displayed 2 Use the Network tab to change network resource settings of the L Server A Information Lo 090606060000009299099009900000990909099099909290900000900009090909909090909099099000009090909090990099000000009990999000000000009999 For Physical L Servers For details on operation of the Network tab refer to 16 2 4 Network Tab For Virtual L Servers For details on operation of the Network tab refer to 16 3 4 Network Tab 006000000009990909090900000009090990990909909099000000090090909090990900900000000909090909909909090000000009099090990990900000000009999 3 Click OK When resources have not been allocated preserved or have been allocated allocated to the L Server amp Note When resources have not been allocated preserved or have been allocated allocated to the L Server only the network resources of physical L Servers can be modified 066000009092090990900006090092909009009900990900000909909909990900090009909220090009909099009000009909099099099200000909990900
102. large number of resources or when you want to divide resources according to certain conditions Resource folders can be created in the orchestration tree or the server resource tree Resource folders created in the orchestration tree can store the following resources L Server Resource Pools Resource Folders Tenants Resource folders created in the server resource tree can store the following resources Chassis Servers that are not stored in a chassis Resource Folders Resources stored in resource folders can be freely placed 252 Using hierarchical folders other resource folders can be stored in the resource folders Using resource folders enable you to do the following Since the number of resources handled at once is reduced it becomes easier to select resources Resources can be categorized in detail Also in the orchestration tree the access scope of roles can be restricted and used in combinations to restrict the resource folders that can be accessed for each administrator This enables you to do the following Divide the management scope for each administrator Link with roles to prevent erroneous operations from being performed on resources outside of the scope of operation privileges When the access scope is limited to a single resource folder that resource folder is called the home folder By setting a home folder a folder does not need to be specified for the various operations that normally req
103. managed server refer to C 4 7 Advisory Notes for RHEL5 Xen Usage in the Setup Guide CE VMware This does not include the overhead memory allocated when creating a virtual machine from an L Server template Therefore the displayed number of L Servers may not be able to be created In the display of the conversion number for L Servers corresponding to VM pools and storage pools depending on the VM type and CPU architecture of the virtual L Server template the number of L Servers that can be created is as below When VM type is specified for the L Server template The number of L Servers that can be created is displayed for the resource that corresponds to the specified VM type When there are no resources that correspond to the specified VM type 0 is displayed When VM type is not specified for the L Server template The number of L Servers that can be created is displayed for the resources that correspond to the specified CPU architecture When there are no resources that correspond to the specified CPU architecture 0 is displayed For the definition of the L Server template refer to 14 2 2 Virtual L Server Templates in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 00062062000922909900000909999099090090900929098090000090990990900000999099090909090009090990909909000000909099099099000090999909909000009099990009009999 Point For details on how to select the deployment location of a virtual L Server refer to Selection location o
104. management software specifications When creating a virtual L Server if there are any values configured in the VM specific information definition file those values are used For details on VM specific information definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers and Chapter 8 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE Xen When using RHELS5 Xen L Server creation cannot be performed using the ROR console Use the rcxadm Iserver command For details on the rexadm Iserver command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Hyper V When using dynamic memory and memory weight Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 SP1 or later must be applied to the VM host and SCVMM must be upgraded to System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 SP1 or later If there are no VM hosts or SCVMM with SP1 applied creation of an L Server for which dynamic memory is enabled or memory weight is specified will fail Solaris Containers Calculate the cap value to configure for the non global zone from the number of CPUs and the CPU performance For details refer to C 7 6 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE 16 3 1 General Tab Name Label Enter a name for the L Server VMware Hyper V Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters on on upp
105. matching that in the L Server definition are selected as spare servers For details on how to select a spare server refer to 17 1 1 L Server High Availability in the Operation Guide CE Spare server pool Select the spare server pool Clicking lt Select gt displays the Select a Server Resource dialog Specify the server pool that the physical server to use for automatic switchover is registered in When a problem occurs on the physical server recovery is performed by automatically switching to another physical server in the same resource pool that is operating normally For details on how to perform switchover a spare server refer to 17 1 1 L Server High Availability in the Operation Guide CE Alive monitoring Configure alive monitoring as enabled or disabled Address pool WWN MAC Select an address pool Clicking lt Select gt displays the Select an Address Resource dialog Select Automatic or Pool The default is Automatic When selecting Pool select from the registered address pool Specify the virtual WWN obtained from the I O Virtualization Option and the address pool of the registered MAC address VIOM will be used for blades and HBA address rename for rack mount servers Startup priority With L Servers when performing batch power operations in a resource folder or a tenant configure the priority for the L Server Set a number between 1 and 256 Smaller values indicate higher priority If omitted 128 is s
106. of images 7 Free disk space Free space as a resource is not displayed The free space is calculated as the free space of a resource pool when the following conditions are met Disks are not used for L Servers or cloning images Number of creatable L Servers is displayed as follows When the number of disks specified for an L Server template is 1 and when the disk capacity specified for an L Server template is the same capacity as or smaller than the disk resource is displayed 247 When the number of disks specified for an L Server template is 2 or larger or something other than the above 0 is displayed Hyper V As the saved disk resources that are created from the virtual machine cannot be used as system disks the number is 0 even if the L Server is unused Number of L Servers that can be created The following smallest value is displayed Free CPU capacity the CPU capacity specified in the L Server template selected from the Template select list Free memory size the memory size specified in the L Server template selected from the Template select list 8 Free storage capacity the storage capacity specified in the L Server template selected from the Template select list VMware The VM hosts for which standby mode has been set by server virtualization software are excluded from the targets of L Server deployment and other VM hosts in the same cluster become the deployment target
107. on the Subnet When there are managed servers on the subnet use the following procedure to change the network address or subnet mask 1 Register the tenant admin LAN resource information which has the network address or subnet mask after changing 2 Change the destination for connection on the tenant admin LAN of all L Servers belonging to the subnet before changing 3 Delete the tenant admin LAN used before the change when necessary 19 3 Moving 239 Move individual resources Use the following procedure to move a resource to another resource pool 1 Right click the target resource in the orchestration tree and select Move a Resource from the popup menu The Move a Resource dialog is displayed 2 For Destination Pool select the destination resource pool 3 Click lt OK gt The target resource is moved to the selected resource pool Move multiple resources Use the following procedure to move a number of registered resources that have been registered in the resource pool to another resource pool 1 Right click on the resource pool in the orchestration tree then select Move Resources from the contextual menu The Move a Resource dialog is displayed 2 Select the destination resource pool for the resource from the Destination Pool 3 Ifthe resources being moved are disk resources click the lt Search gt in the search conditions After entering the resource name click lt Search gt to reduce the numb
108. on the left side of the status panel Clicking the light icon changes its color back to gray The table below shows the status and meaning associated with each light icon Table 4 1 Light Icons m9 Gray not lit No errors or warnings have been detected in the system Yell cae A warning has been detected in the system Red He Error An error has been detected in the system blinking A Information When the light icon blinks it means that a warning or an error has been detected Check the location of the problem from the chassis or blade panel If Blade Viewer shows no resources with a warning or error status in either the chassis panel or blade panel switch to the ROR console and check the event log to identify the cause of the problem To the right of the light icon Blade Viewer shows the number of servers with an error warning normal and stop status Table 4 2 Displaying the Server Icon and the Number of Units Icon and number of units Meaning Server and number of units Note Nis the number of servers Table 4 3 Status Icons None The resource can be used normally Warni An error occurred however the resource can be used arning Alternatively the status of some resources cannot be obtained A fault or error occurred therefore the resource cannot be used The resource is stopped therefore it cannot be used 4 3 2 Chassis Panel The chassis panel displays the statuses of each registered c
109. only possible when using the ROR console Use of commands and moving of an L Server migration between VM hosts are only possible when using the ROR console When an L Platform is included in a resource folder or a tenant the L Server under the L Platform is not the target of batch power operations When operating a physical server or a VM guest related to an L Server using the server tree on the ROR console or using commands consider also the effects on L Servers 17 1 Power Operations This section explains the power operations of L Servers 17 1 1 Starting an L Server This section explains how to startup an L Server Use the following procedure to start an L Server 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Power ON from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The L Server is started On an L Server for which only a configuration definition has been created defined server and disk resources will be allocated and after image deployment is performed when a cloning image has been specified the L Server will be started On an L Server which has been released preserved server resources will be allocated and started For details on the statuses when configuration definitions have been created defined servers have been released preserved and resources have been allocated allocated refer to 17 8 Allocating and Releasing Resources to L Servers From
110. option will not be changed it is necessary to change the BIOS settings when performing the change 7 1 11 Changing Admin LAN Subnets Use the following procedure to change an admin LAN subnet 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 74 2 Select the subnet to change The Change Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 3 In the Change Admin LAN Subnet dialog set the following items Subnet name on gt The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including underscores on on hyphens and periods Network address Enter valid values for the network address Subnet mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask Gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN 4 Click Change 5 Click OK amp Note When changing the information for a subnet other than the one the admin server belongs to if there is even 1 managed server belonging to the target subnet the Network address and Subnet mask cannot be changed When changing the Network address or Subnet mask refer to the Modification Procedure when there are Managed Servers Belonging to Different Subnets 006062062009290990900009090999099099090009090990909090000090909909909000009990990990900090909090990900000909090990990909909000909990909290900009999000
111. page number to display move forwards and backwards by single pages and move to the first or last page Name Label The L Server template name and label are displayed Server Type The server type is displayed For physical L Server templates Physical is displayed For virtual L Server templates VM is displayed Server Specifications When the server type is Physical the model name of the server is displayed When the server type is VM the CPU frequency multiplied by the number of CPUs and the memory size are displayed Disk Capacity The disk capacity is displayed in units of GB NIC Number The number of NICs for the L Server template is displayed Redundancy Server redundancy is displayed Position The boot location is displayed lt Modify gt button Click when modifying an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 3 Modifying lt Copy gt button Click when copying an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 4 Copying lt Delete gt button Click when deleting an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 5 Deleting lt Export gt button Click when exporting an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 6 Export L Server List In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to specify the page number to display move forwards and backwards by single pages and move to the first or last page 149 Server Name The L Server name is displayed Server Type
112. platadm privileges of a remote management controller to manage servers ILOM XSCF For XSCF Enter up to 31 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character ForILOM Enter between 4 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores start with an alphabet character This name should or hyphens mgmt_passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller ILOM XSCF to manage a server For XSCF Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols 354 For ILOM on Enter between 8 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols ms rn ng Og NAN mpm mer nr nm pu Mp wu yr cna muHowem quo Wow ieu care c i ario Hoi inc mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following If mgmt passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted PRIMEQUEST Server Management Data Section Name Enter PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis section partition no The number of a partition Enter a number between
113. pool VM Pool Server Pool 243 Storage Pool Network Pool Address Pool Image Pool Priority Select the priority of the resource pool for automatically selecting a resource when creating an L Server Select a value between 1 and 10 Smaller values indicate a higher priority 5 is selected by default Attributes Enter attributes for the resource pool This item is displayed only when VM Pool or Storage Pool is selected for Type When VM Pool is selected for Type When using a VM pool with overcommit check the Over Commit checkbox Specify the calculation method for free space for Capacity Calculation Limit Calculates using a maximum value Reserve Calculates using a reservation value For details on the display of each calculation method refer to Max Number of Possible L Servers View in 20 6 Viewing When Storage Pool is selected for Type When setting Thin Provisioning attributes check the Thin Provisioning checkbox Note 00606060600000000600000000000900990909092909909909099090909090900990909000000000000000009009000909099999099999090909909099000099 This item is not displayed if not migrating using the setting method of overcommit functions after upgrading the admin server from ROR V2 3 or V3 0 Edit the definition files for this version separately For details refer to G 1 1 Overcommit Definition File in the Setup Guide CE Whether or not a storage
114. pools Chapter 20 Resource Pool Operations Explains how to add new resource pools and delete or modify existing resource pools Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations Explains resource folders which are used when managing a large number of resources or when you want to divide resources according to certain conditions Chapter 22 Network Device Operations Explains how to operate network devices Chapter 23 Network Resource Operations Explains how to operate network resources Appendix A User Interface Provides an overview of the ROR console GUI Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files Explains the format of the CSV system configuration files used by Resource Orchestrator s pre configuration function Appendix C Maintenance Mode Explains the maintenance mode available in Resource Orchestrator and how to use it Glossary Explains the terms used in this manual Please refer to it when necessary Notational Conventions The notation in this manual conforms to the following conventions When using Resource Orchestrator and the functions necessary differ due to the necessary basic software OS it is indicated as follows iii KVM Sections related to RHEL KVM Solaris Containers Sections related to Solaris containers Oracle VM Sections related to Oracle VM Physical Servers Sections related to physical servers VM host Sections related to Windows Server 2008 with VMware or Hyper V enabled Unless spec
115. popup menu for cloning images cannot be used Table A 9 Popup Menus Available for Network Devices Popup Menu Function Discover LAN switches Discovers LAN switches within the admin LAN Topology Detect physical links Acquires physical link data from registered LAN switches Table A 10 Popup Menus Available for the Power Monitoring Devices Tree Node Popup Menu Function Power Monitoring Device Registers a power monitoring device Environmental Data Exports environmental data Table A 11 Popup Menus Available for Power Monitoring Devices Popup Menu Function Update le O Updates a power monitoring device PDU or UPS 1 Modifies a power monitoring device s registration Modify Registration Settings P B settings Hardware Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced Re configure eee power monitoring device PDU or UPS Expot Environmental Data Exports environmental data 1 Unlike other resources the properties of a power monitoring devices are not automatically updated Use this option to update them manually when necessary Table A 12 Popup Menus Available for Management Software Popup Menu Function Management Software vCenter Registers VM management software VMware vCenter Server Server Management Software SCVMM Registers M management software System Center Register Virtual Machine Manager M t Soft OVM Registers management software OVM Manager Manager Manage
116. port The port opposite to the selected port In IBP mode all ports that belong to the selected port group In IBP mode all ports that belong to the same port group as the selected port 11 4 2 VLAN Display The following resource icons are used when displaying VLANs in the Network Map Table 11 12 Resource Icons for VLAN Displa Chassis 112 Note When operating in IBP mode LAN switch blade LAN switch Integrated network device 113 A Information 06090606000090909000090909090990990000909090909909909009009090999099099099000909099009909000009090909909909090000999090999090000009990000000999000000999 If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 11 4 1 Resource Statuses 11 4 3 Other Icons The following tables detail the icons displayed in the Network Map Table 11 13 Admin Server Icon Indicates the server used as the admin server Table 11 14 Map Navigation Icons m e 11 5 Network Links This section details the network links displayed in the Network Map 11 5 1 Link Display The following table details the physical and virtual links displayed between resources Table 11 15 Links mwseeemesaw maim memes Peg Represents a VLAN link related to the selected resource Represents a disabled port 114 11 5 2 Link Statuses Link
117. refer to 4 1 rexadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Cloning images identifiable by their name attribute can be managed by image version G amp Note 06060600000909909000009090909090000009090909090000090909029090909000006090909090000009090090900000009009009090000009990920000000900900006000299 For virtual L Servers the results of cloning image collection vary based on the disk configurations as follows VMware When the target L Server includes Raw Device Mapping RDM disks the target disks are treated as virtual disks and the image will be collected Hyper V When the target L Server includes Pass through disks the image cannot be collected regardless whether Collect all disks is specified or not When the target L Server includes difference disks the image will be collected including the difference disks by specifying Collect all disks Collecting Cloning Images from Templates of Server Virtualization Software For details refer to 14 7 1 Virtual Image Resources amp Note When using MAC license authentication for activation of Windows Server 2008 images Sysprep can be executed a maximum of three times Since Sysprep is executed when creating L Server with images specified or when collecting cloning images collection of cloning images and creation of L Servers with images specified cannot be performed more than three times Therefore it is recommended not to collect cloning images from
118. register it again 00606000020000000092099200000000990909000020290020000600092999 e0060600600000000000092006000000092299 ees0 ccc02c ccc 2 299 DE 7 1 1 Changing Chassis Names This section explains how to change chassis names Use the following procedure to change the name of a registered chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Chassis name Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens C 3 Click OK The chassis name is changed 7 1 2 Changing Server Names This section explains how to change physical server names Names of physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests can be changed by a user with administrative authority Once changed new names are automatically reflected in the ROR console Use the following procedure to change the name of a physical server 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Physical Server Name Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens
119. resource settings Yes Starting the console lt g lt Batch power operations PXE boot Z iSCSI boot Z Allocating and releasing resources Blade chassis high availability o o o o o o o o o o Storage chassis high availability 220 Type of L Server L Server Function i i Physical Server Using VIOM jo redu ne e HEA Other Physical Servers o i 0 w O Disaster Recovery No No The following items can be modified Server redundancy spare server selection methods and spare server pools Startup priority 2 Configured physical servers for which server switchover has been already set cannot be managed Enable server redundancy by modifying specifications 3 The settings of ping monitoring for physical servers are inherited However settings for ping monitoring cannot be configured using XML or the GUI as a physical L Server Table 18 2 Functional Range Available When Using a Configured Virtual Machine as an L Server Type of L Server L Server Function L Server for Server Management Migration of L Servers between servers Yes 3 Yes 3 migration 1 es es es Modifying specifications Yes 4 Yes 4 Collecting cloning images Yes 2 5 Yes 2 5 Attaching and detaching disks No Yes 2 es es es es es Snapshot collection and Yes 2 Yes 2 restoration Allocati d releasi resources Starting the console Yes 2 Yes 2 Batch power operat
120. secondary node 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed A Information The related services allow managed servers to boot from the network using a dedicated module stored on the admin server during backup restore or cloning Note that changing port numbers on the admin server alone is enough to support communication during the above image operations Therefore no additional configuration is required on the managed servers 6 3 Changing the Maximum Number of System Image Versions Use the following procedure to change the maximum number of system image versions 1 Change the maximum number of system image versions 2 Confirm the maximum number of system image versions For details of the methods for changing and checking the generations of system images refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing system image versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case backing up a new system image will only delete the oldest version Delete unused versions of system images manually if they are no longer necessary For details refer to Delete If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions 6 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Physical Servers Use the following procedure to change the maxi
121. server blades takes precedence Resources displayed in the resource tree are represented by an icon and their resource name For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE For a non registered resource one of the following registration states is displayed at the end of the resource s name Table A 36 Resource Registration States Unregistered The resource was automatically detected but has not been registered yet Registering The resource is being registered Admin Server This server is the admin server itself If a label was set for a resource in BladeViewer that label is displayed after the resource name Display Format resource narme label Clicking a resource in the resource tree displays information related to that resource in the Main Panel Right clicking a resource displays a list of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE Clicking a resource icon will show information related to that resource in the Main Panel Use this information to investigate the problem A Information For a VM host coordinated with VMware vCenter Server the name IP address or host name entered when re
122. servers which are required for change usage For details refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server 2 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting When using multiple L Servers switching between them on unused physical servers in a server pool Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Confirm the Server Pool Confirm whether an unused physical server exists in the server pool 2 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change Start the destination L Server for usage change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting 226 Point Usage cannot be changed while the L Server is stopped temporarily during L Server restart When power operation has been performed directly on the physical server using the ROR console or commands without performing power operation of the L Server the L Server which was last operated will start If the last L Server that was operated has already been started on another physical server its status will change so there is no boot disk and it will fail to start 17 9 3 Releasing Configuration This section explains how to release configurations of the L Server fo
123. should be manually set from the ROR console s option dialog 2 Restart all the managed servers that were either registered or modified following an import operation 3 The pre configuration s scope of configuration is the same as that of the ROR console Moreover the pre configuration function can perform the same labels and comments settings as those available in BladeViewer Those settings are described in Chapter 4 BladeViewer and 4 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments 98 G amp Note The following operations cannot be performed by the pre configuration function and should be performed from the ROR console Deleting registered resources from Resource Orchestrator Changing the name of a registered chassis physical server only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or a power monitoring device Deleting registered admin LAN subnets Discovering registering or changing registration settings of a LAN switch Detecting physical link information from a LAN switch Canceling VIOM Integration Registration and deletion of SNMP trap destinations Configuration and change of WWN information using ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser integration The following operations cannot be performed by the pre configuration function and should be performed using commands Registration and deletion of ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser integration Make sure that less than 200 resources are specified for registration or changing in
124. slot within a chassis Each server or storage blade is displayed according to their actual position slot within the chassis Note that an unregistered server is shown in light gray while an empty slot is shown in white 10 Figure 4 3 Blade Panel Resource List erver a euoe unDewu Server Blade A power button is displayed in the upper part of each server blade This power button is used to represent the power status of each server as shown below Table 4 7 Server Blade Power Buttons owertiton Coo Sms Mem n Green lit Power ON status Gray not lit Power OFF status Power ON Power OFF in progress Orange blinking Power OFF in progress o Green blinking Power ON or reboot in progress in progress A Information The power status of a server blade can be easily controlled by clicking on its power button For details refer to 4 4 1 Server Blade 6006060020009006000000090909069000000909900900000900942909000000009090990900000090900090000009090909000000090909090990900000099090909000009999 A physical server icon is displayed on the right side of the server blade power button The table below shows the meanings associated with each physical server icon 11 Table 4 8 Physical Server Icons P CJ Unregistered server Maintenance mode server Va See For details on the different physical server statuses refer to Table 4 3 Status Icons in 4 3 1 Status
125. specified size of disk resources from the specified virtual storage resource and allocate them to the L Server When using the virtual storage resource on which the Thin Provisioning attributes are configured the disk resource can be created specifying a size exceeding the actual disk space Disk Assign the LUN created in advance to the L Server When specifying search conditions the relevant disk resource list is displayed Select from the displayed disk resources The specified disk resources are allocated to the L Server Search conditions Storage pool Select the storage pool of the storage destination of the disk resource Search size Enter the lowest value of the disk size to be searched as a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Allocation status Specify the status for the disk to allocate to the L Server Unallocated Specify when selecting a disk resource which is not allocated to another L Server Allocated Specify when selecting a disk resource which is allocated to another L Server 176 Allocated L Server Specify an L Server when sharing the disk resources Disk name Specify the name of the disk to be found Begins with Specify when searching for disks whose names begin with the specified string Includes Specify when searching for disks whose names include the specified string 16 2 4 Network Tab Specify the following items NIC Network Configure the network to connect with t
126. status is on For details refer to the manuals of VM products 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Basic Information from the popup menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Change the items you want to modify 3 Click OK The basic information of the L Server is modified From the command line execute rcxadm lserver modify For details on the rexadm lserver modify command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 2 3 Attaching and Detaching Disks This section explains how to modify the disk configuration of an L Server 198 Prerequisites For physical L Servers attachment and detachment of disks is only possible when using SAN boot Solaris Containers Attaching and detaching of disks is not possible from the ROR console However it is possible from the global zone Attaching a Disk Use the following procedure to attach a disk to an L Server 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Attach Disk from the popup menu The Attach a New Disk dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items Size Enter the disk size of the additional disk as a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes 10 is initially displayed Resource type Specify the disk to allocate to the L Server Select from the following items Automatic assignment Sel
127. storage pools 1 Left click the target VM pool in the orchestration tree and select the Resource List tab 2 In the Template selection list select the L Server template to convert 3 Click OK The number of L Servers that can be created is displayed in Number of creatable L Servers 0606060000920990900000099090900000009909090000000990909090000009090209200000009200000009299 e00606060029909900060009009220000000909299 When the status of the VM host and virtual storage is one other than normal the resource will be excluded from L Server allocation regardless of its available space 1 However a value corresponding to the available space of the resource will be displayed for the L Server converted number When using physical L Servers the L Server converted number of virtual storage is an estimate and an error may occur during L Server creation The available space on resources and the space displayed for Number of creatable L Servers are calculated as follows 2 CPU memory Total resource capacity 3 Total of resources used for virtual machines 4 Reservation capacity for the VM host the capacity reserved for the HA function enabled on the VM software 55 Addresses and available space on the network Total resource capacity Total of resources used for L Server 6 Free storage space Total resource capacity Total of resources used for L Server 6 Total
128. storage volumes from servers active mode The state where a managed server is performing operations Managed servers must be in active mode in order to use Auto Recovery Move managed servers to maintenance mode in order to perform backup or restoration of system images or collection or deployment of cloning images active server A physical server that is currently operating admin client A terminal PC connected to an admin server which is used to operate the GUI admin LAN A LAN used to manage resources from admin servers It connects managed servers storage and network devices admin server A server used to operate the manager software of Resource Orchestrator affinity group A grouping of the storage volumes allocated to servers A function of ETERNUS Equivalent to the LUN mapping of EMC agent The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on managed servers aggregate A unit for managing storage created through the aggregation of a RAID group Aggregates can contain multiple FlexVols alias name A name set for each ETERNUS LUN to distinguish the different ETERNUS LUNs Auto Deploy A function for deploying VMware ESXi 5 0 to servers using the PXE boot mechanism Automatic Storage Layering A function that optimizes performance and cost by automatically rearranging data in storage units based on the frequency of access Auto Recovery A function which continues operations by a
129. subcommand again For Virtual L Servers Virtual Storage Resources Refer to Virtual Storage Resources and Disk Resources for Physical L Servers KVM Solaris Containers It is not necessary to register virtual storage resources Disk Resources KVM Solaris Containers Register the raw devices or partitions recognized by VM hosts for Solaris Containers the global zone as disk resources Disk resources can be registered by executing the rcxadm disk register command When performing migration of VM guests for Solaris Containers non global zones corresponding to virtual L Servers register devices that are shared between VM hosts as disk resources defined to be shared For details on the rexadm disk command refer to 3 3 rexadm disk in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G Note KVM Solaris Containers For disk resources used by virtual L Servers the content of disks will remain when disks are detached from the L Server or when the L Server itself is deleted When using disk resources that are registered in global pools perform operation carefully as the disk resources can be allocated to any users When using disk resources for virtual L Servers it is recommended to operate the disks in a local pool and delete data on the disks during deletion of L Servers or detachment of disks Use the following methods to delete the data on disks Using an OS perform disk formatting while the L Server is connected Us
130. that resources have already been allocated allocated Refer to 17 9 1 2 When Resources are Already Allocated allocated 17 9 1 1 When only the Configuration Definition defined is Created This section explains configuration and operation when only the configuration definitions have been created defined for the L Server Settings Repeat the following procedure the same number of times as the number of physical servers which are used for usage change 223 1 Create and Register Each Resource Create and register each resource Perform resource creation and registration referring to Chapter 5 Registering Resources and Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools 2 Create an L Server Create an L Server for which only the configuration definition defined is created referring to Chapter 16 Creating L Servers Perform the following configuration Set Deploy for image deployment from the select a cloning image section of the General tab Check the None Definition only checkbox on the General tab Check the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release on the Server tab Operation The operation method is shown below When using multiple L Servers switching between them on a single physical server Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Check the Physical Server and L Server of the Source L Server for Usage Change 2 Stop the Source L Server for Usage Ch
131. the ROR L Server Template Editor window and click lt Copy gt The Copy L Server Template dialog is displayed Edit the L Server template name In the Copy L Server Template dialog click lt Next gt The copy confirmation dialog is displayed When Are you sure to copy L Server Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Copy gt The L Server template will be copied 159 15 1 5 Deleting Use the following procedure to delete an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed Select an L Server template to delete on the ROR L Server Template Editor window and click lt Delete gt When Are you sure you want to delete this Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Delete gt The L Server template will be deleted Point 00606060600000609006000909990000900909909909000009029290909090900090909099909000090090990990009000920909990900060000992900000000990000c006099299 When deleting an L Server template do not delete until after confirming that it is not being used as a type of L Platform Template Server If an L Server template being used for L Platform templates and image information is mistakenly deleted rectify it by performing the following procedure 1 After unpublishing the L Platform template that uses the L
132. the actual network configuration If the IP address of the target switch is set to the same address as that of another unregistered LAN switch unintentionally change back the target LAN switch IP address to its original value according to the instructions given in this section If there are more than one LAN switch with inconsistent IP address configurations delete all registered LAN switches according to 9 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices first then perform Discover and Register according to 5 5 2 Registering LAN Switches SSH connection SSH version 2 can be selected for the following LAN switch blades LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 1 00 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 4 16 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 3 12 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 3 12 or later version 7 4 2 Changing VLANs Set for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades VLAN types and IDs set on the external connection ports of a managed LAN switch blade can be changed amp Note VLANs cannot be changed on PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode If the port VLAN ID is unspecified or 1 a tagged VLAN ID cannot be set to 1 Whenusing End Host Mode for the following LAN switch blades cannot modify a port vlan id and remove a tag vlan for the external ports which meet the follwoing conditions
133. the physical L Server 1 Initialize the file where the agent s SSL certificate data is stored For details refer to 5 5 rcxadm certctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 2 Modify the IP address of the admin LAN of the manager registered in the agent For details refer to 5 3 rcxadm agtctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 3 Reboot the physical L Server p Example 0606060606006000009909090000000000909090909909090000009009009209090900000000009090990990909090900000000999909090006060000609062929299 177 Table 16 3 Correspondence Relationships of Network Information Windows OS Information Information for L Server Configuration IP address specified for network interface Name of network configured by a tenant interface administrator Table 16 4 Correspondence Relationships of Network Information Linux OS Information Information for L Server Configuration IP address specified for network interface Name of network Number of NICs number of NICs on the back side IP Address of rack mount servers Number of NICs number of NICs on the back side P Address of rack mount servers configured by a tenant interface administrator Untagged VLAN When not configuring a VLAN check this checkbox Only one VLAN can be selected in the same NIC or NIC group amp Note Physical Servers The IP address to be allocated to a physical L Server must be unique An IP address is requir
134. the procedure described in 5 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles To register blade servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers refer to 5 5 When using Rack Mount and Tower Servers 27 Figure 5 2 Status Transition Diagram for Managed Servers Registered Without a registered agent Registering Managed VW Deleting Managed Server Registering Agents Deleting Managed Server Server status Functions that can be used with that server status C The target resource is not displayed in the resource tree SL Use the following procedure to register blade servers 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click an unregistered server blade or partition in the target chassis and select Register Server from the popup menu The Register Server dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens oy Register agent checkbox Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Without Agent Registration Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required 28 With Agent Registration Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Admin
135. the resource list 3 Select the cluster or VM host on which network automatic configuration is to be performed by selecting the Select checkbox or select all the clusters or VM hosts displayed in the resource list by selecting Select all 4 Click lt OK gt Automatic network configuration is performed 259 Appendix A User Interface Resource Orchestrator includes two graphical user interfaces the ROR console and BladeViewer This appendix provides an overview of the ROR console For details on how to open and close the ROR console refer to Chapter 4 Login to the ROR Console in the Setup Guide CE For details on BladeViewer refer to Chapter 4 BladeViewer A 1 ROR Console This section explains how the Resource tab of the ROR console is organized For sections other than the Resource tab refer to the following manuals User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE User s Guide for Tenant Users CE The Resource tab of the ROR console is sometimes referred to as the ROR console Figure A 1 ROR Console Menus Status Panel lt BladeViewer gt gt gt button MM Resource List ITIN IS Recovery Settings Image List Network Map Event Log Server Resources Folder List Chassis List Server List LAN Switch Blade List Steves Resone Name Lebel Type Number m we e Folder 3 j f L3sernver folder ffjexooo EO p am
136. the verification of the system configuration file during import If an error occurs during the verification process which means an invalid value exists in the system configuration file an error message is displayed only in the event log Correct the system configuration file and import it again Invalid content also includes invalid section headers If there is an error message displayed but the values in the specified line are all correct check whether the section header is correct or not If an error occurs during registration and change process an error message is displayed in both the recent operations area and the event log In this case the process is finished up to the previous line setting that is before the system configuration file line number which message is displayed Correct the system configuration file and rectify the problem then import it again The process will resume from the position where it stopped Import log file The import log is saved in the following location on the manager In cases where an error occurs in the verification step which means the processing of registration or changing the resource has not started yet no log file is created Windows Manager Installation_tolde SVROR Manager var log config log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vrcvmr log config log Backing up the manager prior to import automatically When importing is performed by a user exporting is also automatically executed The e
137. them with L Servers The management scope and the scope of use as an L Server vary depending on the resources used by the configured physical server or virtual machine For details refer to Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template This section explains how to create an L Server using an L Server template Use the following procedure to create an L Server using an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree Select an L Server template on the Template List tab of the Main Panel and click Create The Create an L Server dialog is displayed 2 On the General tab set the following items Name Label Enter a name for the L Server For Physical L Servers Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ or hyphens For Virtual L Servers VMware Hyper V Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ periods and hyphens Xen Oracle VM Periods cannot be used KVM Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ or hyphens
138. to request an update of hardware properties If the IP address is not shown after going through the above procedure set it by manually entering the IP address and registering the server IP addresses cannot be collected automatically when the server is a SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server After entering the IP addresses manually register the servers Server OS category This option is displayed if the target server runs a physical OS or VM host Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting VM Host activates the user ID and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during installation of this VM host Select the server OS category depending on whether the relevant server is used on a physical OS or a VM host For a Physical OS Select Windows Linux or Solaris only SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers For a VM Host Select VM Host and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority 29 Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host Boot option Only set this when the targets of operations are PRIMEQUEST servers Specify the boot option configured from BIOS when installing th
139. to the L Server When using the virtual storage resource on which the Thin Provisioning attributes are configured the disk resource can be created specifying a size exceeding the actual disk space Disk Assign a LUN created in advance or the automatically created disk resources for allocation to the L Server When specifying search conditions the relevant disk resource list is displayed Select from the displayed disk resources The specified disk resources are allocated to the L Server 199 Search conditions Storage pool Select the storage pool of the storage destination of the disk resource Search size Enter the lowest value of the disk size to be searched as a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Allocation status Specify the status for the disk to allocate to the L Server Unallocated Specify when selecting a disk resource which is not allocated to another L Server Allocated Specify when selecting a disk resource which is allocated to another L Server Allocated L Server Specify an L Server when sharing the disk resources Disk name Specify the name of the disk to be found Begins with Specify when searching for disks whose names begin with the specified string Includes Specify when searching for disks whose names include the specified string 3 Click lt OK gt 4 Make the disk available following the disk attachment procedure provided by the OS From the command line execute
140. tree will display its attributes in the Main Panel Right clicking a power monitoring device will display a list of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus 279 Management Software Management software vCenter Server SCVMM and VIOM used in coordination with Resource Orchestrator is displayed in a tree view For details on the icons used to indicate different management software refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE Clicking a management software on the tree displays information related to it in the Main Panel Right clicking a management software will display a list of available operations in a popup menu For details on popup menus refer to A 2 2 Popup Menus VLAN Resources for which VLAN IDs have been applied are displayed in a tree view The following resource types are displayed Server Switch For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE Storage Resource Tree In the storage resource tree resources managed by Resource Orchestrator are displayed in a tree view The following resource types are displayed Storage Management Software Storage Units RAID Groups LUNs Virtual Disks of VM Guests Orchestration Tree Manages and operates L Servers and resource pools All resources authorized for access by the logged in user are displayed The resources
141. used during the installation and maintenance of physical OSs and VM hosts Maintenance mode avoids unwanted error notifications and disables execution of Auto Recovery upon server failure The following operations can be performed on a server that has been placed into maintenance mode Maintenance LED Maintenance LEDs can be controlled Backup and restore System images can be backed up and restored Cloning Cloning images can be collected and deployed Use the following procedures to set and release maintenance mode Setting Maintenance Mode In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu Releasing Maintenance Mode In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or its physical OS or VM host and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu Note When using ServerView Deployment Manager depending on the operation servers may be rebooted or temporarily shut down This also affects servers managed using Resource Orchestrator Itis recommended to place affected servers into maintenance mode before running operations from ServerView Deployment Manager Then the maintenance mode should be released once finished L Servers cannot be created for physical servers that are in maintenance mode 366 Glossary access path A logical path configured to enable access to
142. using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename and the following model PRIMERGY BX960 S1 Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt If the above command has not been executed on the server from which the cloning image is being collected the cloning image may not be collected correctly Delete that cloning image and then redo the cloning image collection 125 It is recommended to back up destination servers before deploying cloning images as this will simplify the recovery procedure in case of the deployed cloning image is faulty For details on backing up refer to Backup G amp Note 60060600009090909000000909090900000090990000000909090990090900000909090
143. virtualization management software is displayed Displayed only if coordinated up with external I O virtualization management software VIOM server profile The assigned VIOM server profile name is displayed Displayed only if managed by VIOM and a server profile has been set Network Properties Physical Connections Index The network number that belongs to the physical server is displayed LAN Switch The name of the LAN switch that belongs to the physical server is displayed Port Name The name of the port that belongs to the physical server is displayed hardware maintenance NIC Summary For servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers and PRIMEQUEST servers only admin LAN information is displayed For SPARC Enterprise servers only the IP address is displayed MAC address Media Access Control address The list of MAC addresses for hardware maintenance of the physical server IP address The list of IP addresses for hardware maintenance of the physical server Admin LAN The MAC addresses and IP addresses of each server are displayed 321 L Server Properties Allocated L Server L Server name allocated to the physical server is displayed A 6 19 Storage Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Priority The priority of the storage pool is displayed Attributes The setting status of Thin Provisioning attributes is displayed When Thin P
144. week Last month Last year Custom When Custom is selected the following fields must all be specified Start day Start time End day End time Rate Select the graph output interval to export from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Finest sampling Hourly Daily Monthly Annual 134 3 Click lt Graph Output gt After switching to the graph display window the selected power consumption data can be displayed in line graphs Figure 13 3 Graph Display Window Update button Environmental Data Graph Data Type Power Output Time Span From 2009 11 16 1300 To 2009 11 16 1359 Rate Finest sampling Tarcet Resources Environmental Data 7 9 900 E bx900 2 7 9 bx900 3 C 0 900 4 7 amp x900 6 7 0 70x900 7 7 2 5 900 8 Plot Notation OMiew OHide EY AT Moa BY h I vi AG nAg NAG NAG MAG NAG NAG 46 NAG n 1240 12345 1220 Xs 1230 1226 1240 124 13250 The following operations can be performed from the graph display window Switching resource display By selecting and clearing the checkbox of the Target Resources it is possible to display or hide the corresponding graph Switching plot symbol display Selecting the View or Hide radio button of Plot Notation switches between displaying and hiding plot symbols in line graphs Data update Clicking the update button on the upper right of the screen updates the d
145. 0 global zone The actual OS that is used for a Solaris container A Solaris environment that has been installed on a physical server GLS Global Link Services Fujitsu network control software that enables high availability networks through the redundancy of network transmission channels GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI Box Interface Board A board which mounts onboard I O for two partitions and a PCIe PCI Express interface for a PCI box GUI Graphical User Interface A user interface that displays pictures and icons pictographic characters enabling intuitive and easily understandable operation HA High Availability The concept of using redundant resources to prevent suspension of system operations due to single problems hardware initiator A controller which issues SCSI commands to request processes In iSCSI configurations NICs fit into this category hardware maintenance mode In the maintenance mode of PRIMEQUEST servers a state other than Hot System Maintenance HBA Host Bus Adapter An adapter for connecting servers and peripheral devices Mainly used to refer to the FC HBAs used for connecting storage devices using Fibre Channel technology HBA address rename setup service The service that starts managed servers that use HBA address rename in the event of failure of the admin server HBAAR HBA address rename T O virtualization technology that enables changing of the actual WWN possessed by an HBA
146. 0 and 3 server name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens If enclosed by parentheses this server will be seen as being in a switched over state and this line will be ignored when importing the system definition file amp Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive CO ip_address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources 0 0606062000090909909999909000900000099999909990000000999909909900209900090000900900909999909990990000009999099909000000090999999 boot option Specify the boot option configured from BIOS when installing the OS When installing using a legacy boot legacy When installing using UEFI uefi 355 Server Blade VLAN Data Section Name Enter ServerNet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server_name Enter the server name the value of server_name in the Server section nic_no This is the index number of the server blade s network interface Enter a number between 1 and 12 vlan id optional Enter the VLAN ID and tag
147. 000000909999090900000000090092999 For the input ranges for the Create L Server Template dialog refer to 14 2 1 Physical L Server Templates in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 15 1 2 2 Creating a Virtual L Server Template Use the following procedure to create a virtual L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed In the ROR L Server Template Editor window click lt Create gt The Create L Server Template dialog is displayed In the Create L Server Template dialog set the following items a Enter basic information Name Enter the name of the L Server template on The character string within 32 characters composed of alphanumeric character underscore and hyphen is specified in the first alphanumeric character Label Optional Enter a label for the L Server template The character string within 32 characters is specified Comments Optional Enter a comment for the L Server template The character string within 256 characters is specified Server Type Select a server type Select VM when creating a virtual L Server template 154 VM type Select a VM type The following VM types are displayed VMware Hyper V RHEL Xen RHEL KVM Oracle VM Solaris Containers Set the basic information and click lt Next gt Configure the
148. 000009090909099000000909929090000090909090000099999 5 1 Registering VIOM Coordination Use the following procedure to configure management software settings 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Register Management Software VIOM The Register Management Software VIOM dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined User ID Enter the ID of a VIOM user account Password Enter the password of the above VIOM user account 3 Click lt OK gt 5 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles Use the following procedure to configure VIOM server profiles 1 Select Management Software VIOM from the ROR console and then select the Resource Details tab 2 In General of the Resource Details tab click the link for the Management software The Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager starts up 3 Refer to the ServerView Virtual IO Manager manual to configure server profiles 292 5 Note HBA address rename and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis When using backup and restore or cloning prioritize the following two boot operations 1 Boot from the first admin LAN network interface NIC1 Index1 2 Boot from the network interface used by the admin LAN NIC2 Index2 5 2 Registering VM Management Software This section explains how to register VM management software Registration of VM management software such as VMware vCenter Server enables us
149. 0000099009909999999990999090090990099 KVM Solaris Containers Select disk storage from the resource pool to create the disk resource Select one of Automatic Storage pool or Disk Oracle VM The total size of resources is not displayed for the virtual storage in the resource list 16 3 4 Network Tab Specify the following items Network to connect Configure a network resource to connect Clicking Select displays the Select a Network Resource dialog If OK is clicked while a network resource is selected the network resource to connect is displayed The number of NICs that can be configured differs depending on the VM type 186 VMware 0 to 10 Hyper V 0to8 Xen 0 to 15 KVM 0 to 8 Oracle VM 1to8 Solaris Containers 0 to 8 IP address Optional Specify the IP address to allocate to the L Server To manually specify the IP address to allocate to the L Server enter the IP address DNS server Specify the DNS server Note Hyper V IP addresses can be automatically configured on the following guest OSs on which the integrated services are installed Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 Microsoft R Windows R 7 Microsoft R Windows Vista R Microsoft R Windows R XP 16 3 5 OS Tab Enter the parameters to set for the OS when creating th
150. 000029909090099299 For Physical L Servers 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Network Configuration from the popup menu The Change network configuration of an L Server dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items NICs Clicking Add adds a network Select a network resource to connect with in the Add a Network dialog A Information When adding a new NIC or NIC group select the number of Undefined for NIC in the Add a Network dialog When performing redundancy for the NIC select the pair of NICs to use When adding an already defined NIC or a network to connect with the NIC group select the number of defined NICs for NIC in the Add a Network dialog Clicking lt Delete gt deletes the selected network If the number is not the NIC number specified when creating an L Server lt OK gt is not activated When lt OK gt is not activated click lt Add gt to configure undefined NICs Network Click Change to select a network resource that is connected to a NIC or a NIC group IP address Enter an IP address to set for the L Server If the IP address is not entered an IP address is automatically allocated to the L Server 206 Untagged VLAN Select whether or not to use untagged VLAN for a NIC or a NIC group 3 Click lt OK gt From the command line execute rcxadm lserver modify For details on the rcxadm Iserver modify command
151. 00900909920000000200900600606006299 Confirming the License Use the following procedure to confirm the registered license 1 After logging in to Resource Orchestrator select Tools Licenses from the menu and click the license name in the displayed dialog The Licenses dialog is displayed When using a command execute the rexadm license command For details on the rexadm license command refer to 5 12 rcxadm license in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G Note When is displayed for NUMBER_OF_LICENSES the same number of agents as purchased licenses can be used Chapter 3 Configuring Users for Infrastructure Administrators Only users with the infrastructure administrator tenant administrator or administrator role can create user accounts For details on operation methods by a tenant administrator refer to Chapter 10 Tenant in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE 3 1 Registering User Accounts This section explains how to register user accounts of infrastructure administrators Use the following procedure to register a user account on the Resource tab of the ROR console Check the user information registered in the directory service f user registration to the directory service is to be performed Check if user information is registered in the directory service If the user information is registered in the directory service it cannot be registered in Resource Orchestrator If us
152. 06000900000000099900000900909009000000090990900900000090909092092000090909900200000009000000000929990996 ecccccccccc ccc To back up and restore L Server system images the following conditions must be met For Backup The status of the L Server is that in which resources have already been allocated allocated The L Server has been started An agent on the L Server has already been registered For Restoration The status of the L Server is that in which resources have already been allocated allocated Use the following procedure for backup and restoration of system images Backup Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Backup Restore Backup from the popup menu The Backup System Image dialog is displayed 2 Configure when necessary 3 Click OK The system image is backed up The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process From the command line execute rcxadm image backup For details on the rcxadm image backup command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Restore Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Backup Restore Restore from the popup menu The Restore System Image dialog is displayed 2 Configure when necessary 3 Click OK The system image is restored
153. 090290999 Modification Procedure when there are Managed Servers Belonging to Different Subnets When there are managed servers in the target subnet change the network address or the subnet mask using the following procedure 1 Register the subnet information using the new network address or subnet mask 2 Use the following procedure to change the admin LAN IP addresses of all managed servers belonging to the subnet before modification For details on how to configure these settings refer to 7 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 Delete the subnet used before modification 7 2 Changing Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service This section explains how to change settings for the HBA address rename setup service Such settings include the admin server IP address the port used to communicate with the admin server and the IP address of the HBA address rename server 7 2 1 Changing the IP Address of the Admin Server This section explains how to change the IP address of the admin server When this setting is changed the HBA address rename setup service automatically checks whether it can communicate with the new admin server IP address Changing this setting also requires changing the port on the admin server side beforehand Change the IP address of the admin server according to 7 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses and change the admin IP address for the HBA address rename setup service according to step 12 7 2 2 Changing the
154. 09090990900000009209090000000299 Linux When using Linux for a physical L Server and iSCSI storage for a system disk an L Server cannot be created using a cloning image Xen When using RHELS Xen L Server creation and operation using the ROR console cannot be performed For details refer to C 4 RHELS Xen in the Setup Guide CE Solaris When using Solaris physical L Servers cannot be created In this case link L Servers with configured physical servers For details refer to Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines 6066060602000200000000090050909000000909090900000900909090909000000909060909090000090060906000000000000000000909090900000009290900000090299 164 A Information Physical Servers For details on physical L Servers refer to B 5 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE VMware For details on VMware refer to C 2 VMware in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V For details on Hyper V refer to C 3 Hyper V in the Setup Guide CE KVM For details on RHEL KVM refer to C 4 RHEL5 Xen in the Setup Guide CE Oracle VM For details on Oracle VM refer to C 5 Oracle VM in the Setup Guide CE Solaris Containers For details on Solaris Containers refer to C 7 Solaris Containers in the Setup Guide CE Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines Configured physical servers and virtual machines can be managed by linking
155. 090990900900009090099000000090490990909909000999090990000009099090909909909000099909200000002929099090000099299 18 6 Releasing an L Server This section explains how to revert the link between an L Server and a configured physical server or virtual machine Use the following procedure to release the link to an L Server 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Revert from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The link between the L Server and the configured physical server or virtual machine can be reverted 237 From the command line execute rcxadm Iserver revert For details on the rexadm Iserver revert command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE However for L Servers created using Resource Orchestrator the link between the L Server and a physical server or virtual machine cannot be reverted 238 Chapter 19 Resource Operations This chapter explains how to perform resource operations with resource pools 19 1 Registration Use the following procedure to register a resource to a resource pool 1 Right click the target resource pool in the orchestration tree and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 When a resource to register is a disk resource click lt Search gt in the search condition area The resources displayed in Resource List can be filtered
156. 099090990900000000009999 10 U 10 U 20 T 30 T 10 T 20 T 350 Note If a hyphen is entered VLAN settings will not be performed This section will be ignored for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode Cr Server Management Information Section Name Enter Server as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis_name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis_name in the Chassis section amp Note This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers slot no Enter the slot number where the server blade is installed Enter a number between 1 and 18 amp Note This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers Whenaserver blade is registered Resource Orchestrator does not check the actual slot position or whether it has been installed properly When registering multi slot servers enter only the master slot number 000606000020929209099090000000090909909909090000000090909090202000000000009009090990992000000000009092090909000000009099299 server name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character on and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens If enclosed by parentheses this server will be seen as being in a switched over state and this line will
157. 0990909909009090000000000000000000000900090909099099099990909909909000906006999 Number Clicking Add will display the Disk Definitions dialog and then specify the number of disks to add Specify a number 1 or larger Solaris Containers Only specify one Resource type Windows Linux Solaris VMware Hyper V Xen Oracle VM Specify the disk to allocate to the L Server Select from the following items Automatic assignment Select a suitable virtual storage resource from those registered in the appropriate storage pool Create the specified size of disk resources and allocate them to the L Server Set Automatic for the default value 185 Note When there are storage pools with and without Thin Provisioning attributes configured that have the same priority the storage pool that will be given priority is decided based on definition files For details on definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE Storage pool Select a virtual storage resource registered in the specified storage pool Create the specified size of disk resources and allocate them to the L Server Virtual storage Displays virtual storage resources such as datastores as a list Select from the displayed virtual storage resources Create the specified size of disk resources from the specified virtual storage resource and allocate them to the L Server Whe
158. 16 Creating L Servers Perform the following configuration Set Deploy for image deployment from the select a cloning image section of the General tab Do not check the None Definition only checkbox from the General tab Check the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release on the Server tab 3 Change L Server Configuration When using multiple L Servers switching between them on a single physical server Repeat the following procedure the same number of times as the number of physical servers which are used for usage change a Create and Register Each Resource Perform resource creation and registration referring to Chapter 5 Registering Resources and Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools b Release the resources of the source L Server for usage change Resources are released while the resource details of the source L Server for usage change are preserved For details refer to 17 8 2 2 Releasing Resources c Create an L Server Create an L Server for which resources are already allocated allocated referring to Chapter 16 Creating L Servers Perform the following configuration Set Deploy for image deployment from the select a cloning image section of the General tab Do not check the None Definition only checkbox from the General tab Check the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release on the Server tab When using multiple L Servers switching betwee
159. 9 For how to create network configuration information XML definitions refer to 9 4 8 When Registering Network Devices as Resources in the Design Guide CE 5 7 2 Registering Network Devices This section explains how to register network devices When registering individual network devices Use the rcxadm netdevice create command to register network devices defined in network configuration information XML definition When batch registering multiple network devices Use the rcxadm netconfig import command to register network devices defined in network configuration information XML definition wA See For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note When registering network devices if multiple network devices are registered with the same resource name the following problems will occur Make sure to use a name that is unique on the system when registering a network device Network devices cannot be identified by name in the resource list Modification of a network device using the rcxadm netdevice modify command is not possible because the target network device cannot be identified Change the name of the network device to modify the settings of referring to 7 4 Changing LAN Switch Settings and then modify the setti
160. 90000090909090909000009090904000000090900000000009090900006000900000009099 32 5 4 5 Configuring VLANs on External Connection Ports When not performing automatic VLAN configuration use the following procedure to configure VLANs on a LAN switch blade s external connection ports 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Specify the VLAN ID to assign to a LAN switch blade port Adding a new VLAN ID a Under VLAN select Create new b Enter a VLAN ID number For details on VLAN IDs refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used Modifying an existing VLAN ID a Under VLAN select Change b Select a VLAN ID Physical Port Link Aggregation Select port numbers to configure or VLAN types of link aggregation group names Untagged or Tagged 3 Click lt OK gt Check that the VLAN has been set 4 Select the LAN switch blade in the server resource tree of the ROR console and display the Resource Details tab Confirm that the VLAN information is displayed in VLAN Area on Resource Details 5 4 6 Configuring VLANs on Internal Connection Ports Use the following procedure to configure VLANs on a LAN switch blade s internal ports 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target ser
161. 900900009090090990000000900909090900000099099020000000920909000009099 Cloning images cannot be deployed to servers that have been set up as spare servers for other managed servers when not using I O virtualization Cancel any such settings before deploying a cloning image VLAN settings on adjacent LAN switch ports cannot be deployed during server cloning LAN switch VLAN settings should be set up before deploying a cloning image For details on how to configure VLAN settings on LAN switches refer to 5 4 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches When deploying a cloning image back to its source server the source server should be backed up before deployment For details on backing up refer to Backup If the deployed cloning image is faulty and causes deployment errors use the following procedure to collect a new cloning image 1 Restore the system image that was backed up before cloning image deployment 2 Fix any incorrect settings on the source server 3 Collect a new cloning image 4 Delete the faulty cloning image When deploying cloning images to multiple managed servers if the managed servers belong to different subnets cloning images cannot be deployed When using PRIMEQUEST servers cloning images cannot be deployed to partitions for which UEFI has been set When collecting and deploying cloning images configure the BIOS settings and boot option settings after changing to Legacy boot For details on how to change boot op
162. 99 amp Note As Windows bridge connections are not supported network links will not be displayed The following actions are available in the Network Map Switching between map types 103 Screen scrolling Scroll button Map drag and drop Navigation map drag and drop Maximizing and minimizing of the display area Configuring automatic update to show the latest status Updating to show the latest status Hiding of the navigation map Hiding of display filter options Showing or hiding of the following information Resource descriptions Network links VLANs Resetting to initial display Highlighting of a selected resource Showing or hiding of details for the following resources Servers including VM hosts LAN switches VM guests Virtual switches 11 2 Preparations The following preparations are required to add display content to the Network Map 1 Register LAN switches LAN switch blades included in a chassis or external switches For details on the registration method refer to 5 5 2 Registering LAN Switches 2 Register network devices or physical network links For details on the registration method refer to 5 7 Registering Network Devices G amp Note If no LAN switch blades have been registered only network links between external LAN switches will be displayed If only one external switch is registered no network links will be displayed at all If anon supported LAN s
163. BA is displayed WWPN 1 The first WWPN set on the HBA is displayed The WWPN should be set to the I O address of each HBA in descending order Therefore for rack mount or tower servers the order may not correspond with port number order described for the HBA WWPN 2 The second WWPN set on the HBA is displayed The WWPN should be set to the I O address of each HBA in descending order Therefore for rack mount or tower servers the order may not correspond with port number order described for the HBA Network Properties Area VLAN The following information is not displayed for VM guests Index The mounted position index of each network interface on the server is displayed Port VLAN The port VLAN IDs set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface are displayed When connected to a PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blade operating in IBP mode IBP is displayed Tagged VLAN The tagged VLAN IDs set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface are displayed When connected to a PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blade operating in IBP mode IBP is displayed Port Groups Area IBP NIC Index The mounted position index of each network interface on the server is displayed Group The names of the port groups set on the LAN switch ports connected to each network interface for LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode are displayed Only is displayed under the following conditions The corr
164. Configure the above registry key in Root registry key d Click lt OK gt e After configuration of the registry keys is complete click lt Apply gt f Click lt OK gt to close the dialog Linux Manager 1 Mount the shared disk on the primary node Log in to the primary node with OS administrator privileges and mount the admin server s shared disk 2 Change the location of the image file storage directory Change the location of the image file storage directory according to the instructions given in 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Because image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete Run the rcxadm imagemgr command on the primary node Also specify a directory on the shared disk for the new image file storage directory 3 Un mount the shared disk from the primary node Un mount the shared disk for which settings were performed in step 1 from the primary node 6 8 Changing the Password for the Resource Orchestrator Database Use the following procedure to change the password for the Resource Orchestrator database 1 Log on to the admin server with OS administrative privileges 2 Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE 3 Change the password for the Resource Orchestrator database Execute the rexadm dbctl modify command Enter the new password interactively Wi
165. E AEAEE E E 114 WT See e a I A E E e erede Et ER EE OPER REDE S 114 EERE AEE gsc EU 114 115 2 Link SSES eperra 115 11 5 9 Ac ciepale DP of BODWOCE LR ia EEA erre rre HC re rr to R E E A 115 PARI vgl see E ce ise es Sac nba deca sng E nsdn sand ace saan E devas dtsaee Tdi seestcds vested ies E 116 Chapter 12 Cloning Pry sical SVS iii rb eere called a e el cbe ipt eer bee aud 118 KAROE ai a M 118 EERE tr A E E E E ET 119 EE E PER 125 e E 130 AE E T E PMH m 130 Chapter 13 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs essen 131 13 1 Exporting Power Consumption DAS iens ere te rer sits tact tete eer ere seit O T ee a e ete Read 131 13 2 Displaying Power Consumption Data rapis rencontrer ttr nera t nene te edo tbi e ee E 133 Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools sssssssssessssseeseseenee enne nnne nnne nnne nen nets nennen nennen 136 14 1 VM Host Resources 14 2 Physical Server Resources xm di nn Dee orl Crann New DS ey GT GSI esses cscs cts tsk iaia a a eieaa a a a a aa a 138 14 3 2 Creating Network Resources Usin
166. E Switch Blade 30 12 PRIMERGY BX600 GbE Switch 16 2x10Gb PRIMERGY BX600 GbE Switch 16x1Gb Cisco Catalyst Blade Switch 3040 connection_type Enter the connection method to use for the LAN switch blade If you configure ssh for a LAN switch blade which does not support SSH or specify a character string other than ssh the configuration is regarded as telnet For telnet telnet For SSH ssh VLAN Data for LAN Switch Blades Section Name Enter LanSwitchNet as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis_name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis_name in the Chassis section port_no Enter the port number of an external LAN switch blade port Enter numeric characters The port number that can be specified is different depending on the model type For details refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used vlan id optional Enter the VLAN ID and tag type T for tagged or U for untagged to be assigned to the specified LAN switch blade port Enter a VLAN ID followed by tag types To specify multiple VLAN IDs separate each set of VLAN settings using semicolons Both tagged T and untagged U VLAN IDs can be used together but only one untagged U type is allowed Pp Example 0606060620600092922900000000000909090909009090000000009090209090900000000009009099909090900000000000
167. EE I E ERTES 31 eC Gantioriatian PES RM rU C 32 3 5 3 Confip ring VLANS omn External Connection POP rere erem tree tena a rete ter eid 33 5 4 6 Configuring VLANs on Internal Connection Ports RE NES ucc rename pr MM Em 5 5 When nung Rack Mount and TOWEL BODIES uec eere vsti ie tet terr ra tree o Eee HP Ee PETE LESE oesie kE OnE SSS IKC TEE Reb aen bi a 34 35 5 1 Regisiermg Rack Mount or Tower Set VEI iure eerte er EH ERI HOHER EFFERRE LEE EHE EHE EFE EE ESSERE 34 sod Meester mnie LAN SWINE oan tite etes shat c ire n e o RET Eee EE EE I EY SER ERE 39 5 5 3 ABA address PEMA HEARNE seus tree perterriti pad e rb EXER eden iae peers eese ber bee ere peine be ets eei Essi et 40 2 0 Re mstermp Nebwork Resaurees aaepe rotor nr e EE dee E HH OE FEEDER EHE ERO seve onedicaasedsnseeaadeustnsteseasvags 43 Jcc ocos sdct qb n A t 44 5 7 1 Creating the Network Configuration Information XML Definition icieere tini ttt ttti rettet repete apetece 45 Ara Roce nne Noore DETE E 45 25 WiirunigPRIMEDUEST SOPVGIS eere teen teret ri eene tpe tiran ee eren eb o RE EEEE SeS E E RESER 46 5 8 1 Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers iiis iterato terret tae ir C ne dte i rr feri reed eee beg 46 2 52 Rogers PRIMEQUES T Sere a cmm rm e terrae o dire bear b eae pta rcd e ee ead 47 SD When using SPARC Enterprise Servers eleme dedere rei id eO POE EO P tei HO eere reir ed 47 5 9 1 Registering SPARC Enterpri
168. Ele ena e He e IAEE E ERASE EEEE EAR HR RUNE EY ARST BA Examples oi CSNY igi M Append C Maintenances 50 e ethane 366 Ico E Lee Ra ee LS AE Ld E ee Sc ae 367 Xiv Chapter 1 Resource Management Overview This chapter provides an overview of the two views available on the Resource tab in Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator provides two different GUIs on the Resource tab the default window and BladeViewer Choosing an appropriate GUI depends on the administrator s authority level or the kind of operations to be performed ROR console The ROR console gives access to all functions of Resource Orchestrator BladeViewer BladeViewer offers a simplified lifelike representation of blade servers and their statuses While this enables intuitive operation it does not include the tree based navigation or detailed menus available in the Resource tab of the ROR console BladeViewer makes it easier to monitor blade servers visualize their hosted applications and perform power operations This makes BladeViewer suitable for administrators who only need to monitor blades and perform basic operations To switch the view of the Resource tab from the default window to BladeViewer click lt BladeViewer gt gt gt To switch the view of the Resource tab from BladeViewer to the default window click lt Advanced gt gt gt A Information All descriptions about the user interface other than those in Chapter 4 Bla
169. G amp Note 0606002009099099090000090992904909000090099099090900009090909090200000909009909909090000990909090900000909090909909909000009990900009092920900009009999 The batch operations for an L Server in a tenant are only available for Basic mode Starting an L Server in a Resource Folder Use the following procedure to start an L Server in a resource folder Right click the target resource folder or tenant in the orchestration tree and select Power ON from the popup menu The Power On L Servers dialog is displayed Point 00606060606060092929900000000009090909990900000000900909090900000000000909999090909099000000009990909090006060060009062929299 A list of L Servers that are targets of the power operation is displayed The display order is in descending order of priority Even if the list of L Server is not displayed the power supply can be operated ee06060606060600292209909909900000600009090099992909909000600009000092090990909000000060009099909909909900060000000990909909000600000092929299 2 Click OK L Servers in a resource folder are started in the order of priority 192 When the following conditions are met on an L Server with a configuration definition already been created defined the L Server will not be the target of powering on The cloning image is specified Boot disks system volumes are dynamically created from virtual storage The L Server is a virtual L Server on RHEL KVM When an L S
170. GY servers The RAID management tool differs depending on the model or the OS of PRIMERGY servers RDM Raw Device Mapping A function of VMware This function provides direct access from a VMware virtual machine to a LUN RDN Relative Distinguished Name A name used to identify the lower entities of a higher entry Each RDN must be unique within the same entry Remote Management Controller A unit used for managing servers Used for gathering server data failure notification power control etc For Fujitsu PRIMERGY servers iRMC2 For SPARC Enterprise ILOM T series servers XSCF M series servers For HP servers iLO2 integrated Lights Out For Dell IBM servers BMC Baseboard Management Controller Remote Server Management A PRIMEQUEST feature for managing partitions Reserved SB Indicates the new system board that will be embedded to replace a failed system board if the hardware of a system board embedded in a partition fails and it is necessary to disconnect the failed system board 377 resource General term referring to the logical definition of the hardware such as servers storage and network devices and software that comprise a system resource folder An arbitrary group of resources resource pool A unit for management of groups of similar resources such as servers storage and network devices resource tree A tree that displays the relationships between the hardware of a serv
171. I characters 0x20 to Ox7e Password Enter the password of the above remote management controller user account Enter up to 16 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e This field can be omitted if no password has been set for this user account Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable For PRIMERGY BX servers Select Enable and enter an SNMP Community For servers other than PRIMERGY servers Select Disable By default Enable is selected SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this server Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN MAC address NIC1 Enter the MAC address of this server s admin LAN network interface Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC addresses will be automatically detected when the Register agent checkbox is selected SAN Boot Admin LAN Redundancy Use Admin LAN redundancy checkbox Check this when performing redundancy for the NIC on the admin LAN MAC address NIC2 Enter the MAC address of the second admin LAN network interface This network interface is to be used by the HBA address rename setup service or to
172. IC decided in 9 1 1 Admin LAN Network Design in the Design Guide CE Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required If registering agents register agents after checking the product name is displayed in the General Area of Resource Details tab Executing Update acquires the latest information With Agent Registration Physical server name Remote management controller IP address User ID Password Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable SNMP Community Admin LAN IP address Admin LAN Redundancy Use Admin LAN redundancy checkbox MAC address NIC2 For physical L Servers specify the MAC address of the second specified NIC decided in 9 1 1 Admin LAN Network Design in the Design Guide CE OS Type Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens Remote management controller IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller 36 User ID Enter the ID of a remote management controller user account with administrative authority over this server Enter up to 16 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCI
173. LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN When IP address is displayed Entering an admin LAN IP address is not required Agents are automatically registered Note If ServerView Agents mandatory software is not running message number 67231 will be displayed In this case server registration succeeds but the agent is not registered For details on the appropriate corrective action refer to Message number 67231 in Messages If the admin LAN IP address of servers not running a physical OS or a VM host are displayed old information may have been being displayed After cancelling registration of the server right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu to request an update of hardware properties The IP address is updated to the correct value it takes several seconds to obtain the information and to update When IP address is not displayed Enter the IP address of this server s admin LAN network interface The Agent will not be registered automatically but can be manually registered after server registration if necessary After registering servers register agents as required A Information When a physical OS and VM host are running on this server the admin LAN IP address may be obtained automatically After cancelling registration of the server right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu
174. List Name Label The name of the image is displayed Version The version of the image is displayed Collection Date The date and time the image was collected is displayed Image Type The image type of the image is displayed VM type The VM type of the image is displayed Comments Comments for the image are displayed 332 A 7 Recovery Settings Tab The Recovery Settings tab displays a list of spare servers assigned to the resource selected in the server resource tree The table below shows the information displayed in the Recovery Settings tab Recovery Settings Tab Server Name The name used to identify a physical OS or VM host is displayed Admin LAN IP Address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Primary Server The name of the server on which the physical OS or VM host is operating is displayed Switchover State The current switchover state is displayed Spare Server The configured spare server is displayed The switchover state is indicated by an arrow shown next to the currently active Primary Server The messages Switchover in progress Failback in progress or Takeover in progress are displayed respectively during a server switchover failback or takeover process If more than one spare server has been set the first server listed is the one that is currently running Clicking a column heading in this list will change the color of the selected column and sort the displayed recovery settings in
175. M guests or SPARC Enterprise servers Version The latest version of the system image is displayed Backup date The date and time of the most recent system image backup is displayed Comments Comments describing the system image are displayed Spare Server Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests Primary server Displays the name of the physical server that will be replaced when server switchover occurs Active server Displays the name of the physical server that is currently running Server switchover method The method used to perform server switchover is displayed Server boot method The boot type of the system disk is displayed Automatic server recovery Shows whether automatic server recovery is enabled or not 290 Network switchover Shows whether network settings will be automatically adjusted during server switchover Force spare server to power off during switchover The setting whether the spare server is turned off forcibly when switching over to the spare server is displayed Switch over to spare server running VM guests The setting whether the server is switched to a VM host on which a VM guest exists is displayed Spare server Displays the name of the physical server that will replace the current active server when server switchover occurs HBA Address Rename Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests or SPARC Enterprise servers WWNN The WWNN set on the H
176. Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click lt OK gt The target server is released from maintenance mode While a cloning image is being collected no other operations can be performed on that image or other versions of that image images sharing the same image name 124 12 3 Deploying Once collected cloning images can be deployed to one or more destination servers Cloning images collected from the source server can only be deployed to destination servers which satisfy the following conditions Destination servers should be in either normal warning unknown or stop status Destination servers should have been placed into maintenance mode Destination servers should be of the same model as the source server I O virtualization should be used when destination servers are spare servers Cloning images cannot be deployed to managed servers where VM hosts or VM guests are running Preparations When the configurations of managed servers are as below execute the following commands before deploying cloning images Ina SAN data environment using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN When
177. Model Name of the network device 1 Select the network device to confirm in the network device tree on the ROR console 2 Select the Resource Details tab In the General section Vendor Unit Name and Model Name are displayed 14 5 Storage Resources This section explains how to register a storage resource in a storage pool The registration method varies depending on the type of storage resource For Physical L Servers Virtual Storage Resources Refer to Virtual Storage Resources and Disk Resources for Physical L Servers Disk Resources Refer to Virtual Storage Resources and Disk Resources for Physical L Servers iSCSI Boot Disks To register iSCSI boot disks execute the iSCSI boot operation command rcxadm iscsictl For details on the rexadm iscsictl command refer to 5 10 rcxadm iscsictl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When registering a disk for iSCSI boot in a storage pool it is recommended to use the appropriate physical storage unit resource allocation method thin provisioning or thick provisioning for that disk This does not affect the allocation method of storage resources in the storage pool 143 Note If iSCSI boot information already registered is specified the registered information continues to exist If the registered information is changed delete the iSCSI boot information using the unregister subcommand and then register the iSCSI boot information by using the register
178. Panel When a server blade is used as the admin server the following admin server icon is displayed Table 4 9 Admin Server Icon Indicates the server used as the admin server An OS icon is displayed below the physical server icon The table below shows the meaning of each OS icon Table 4 10 OS Icons CO A Information Clicking on a VM host OS icon displays a detailed list of the VM guests operating on the selected VM host For details refer to 4 3 3 2 VM Guest List A user defined label is displayed with a resource icon below the OS icon If no label is set The OS name is displayed 12 If the OS name cannot be acquired because the OS has not been installed or for other reasons The server name physical server name or VM guest name is displayed The following table shows the resource icons used in BladeViewer and their associated meanings Table 4 11 Resource Icons wy See For details on the resource status refer to Table 4 3 Status Icons in 4 3 1 Status Panel A Information If a comment has been defined for a server clicking on its label displays the Server Properties dialog The Server Properties dialog displays the comment and label set for the selected server as well as its OS name server name for a physical OS the physical server name for a VM guest the VM guest name and IP address For details on defining comments refer to 4 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Co
179. Partition ID The partition number is displayed Partition name The name used to identify a partition is displayed SB The ID of the system board used to configure a partition is displayed IOB The ID of the IO board used to configure a partition is displayed GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI Box Interface Board The ID of the GSPB used to configure a partition is displayed Reserved SB The ID of the Reserved SB assigned to a partition is displayed LSB The partition logical system board LSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers XSB The partition eXtended System Board XSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers 285 A 6 2 Server Attributes General Area Physical server name The name used to identify a server is displayed Model name The model name of the server is displayed When the server has been registered as a managed server and powered on the server model name obtained from ServerView Operations Manager is displayed For other servers no model name is displayed Product name The product name of the server is displayed For PRIMERGY BX servers the product name obtained from the management blade is displayed For other servers the model name is displayed Status Server status is displayed Slot A slot number representing the mounted location is displayed Displayed only for PRIMERGY BX servers Partition
180. R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows 7 Windows R 7 Professional Windows R 7 Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista Windows Vista R Enterprise Windows Vista R Ultimate Windows XP Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Tin Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Serv
181. R console Figure A 2 Menu File View Settings Operation Tools A 2 1 List of Menus The menus provided on the menu bar of the ROR console are listed in the table below Options available vary according to the authority level of the user account Function impos Imports the system configuration file for pre Import fiourati System Configuration configuration File Exports the system configuration file for pre configuration 263 Menu Items Function Downloads a sample of the system configuration file Download Template CSV format for pre configuration Data T 4 Exports environmental data collected from power Power Monitoring Devices monitoring devices View Reset Layout rn Returns the layout of the ROR console to its initial state Register Power Monitoring Device Registers a power monitoring device Management Software Registers VM management software VMware vCenter vCenter Server Server Management Software Registers VM management software System Center SCVMM Virtual Machine Manager Management Software OVM Manager Registers management software OVM Manager Management Software VIOM Register Resources Registers a resource to the selected resource pool Settings Unregisters the selected resource from a resource pool Pool Unregister Resources Or unregisters resources registered in currently selected 00 resource pools Move R Moves the selected res
182. RIMERGY TX300 S6 PRIMERGY TX300 S5 PRIMERGY TX300 S4 PRIMEQUEST 1000 Other PC servers Set the basic information and click lt Next gt b Enter information on the CPU and memory C CPU Perf Select the CPU frequency Enter a number between 0 1 and 10 CPU Num Enter the number of CPUs to be allocated to the L Server Enter a number between 1 and 240 Memory Size Enter the memory capacity to be allocated to the L Server Enter a number between 0 1 and 8192 Set the basic information and click Next Enter NIC information NICs Enter the number to identify the NIC definition to allocate to the L Server Index Index is a number in which the NIC definition allocated in L Server is identified Configure a number in the following range 0 31 Click Add NIC to add a NIC Clicking Delete deletes a NIC NIC Num Specify the number of network resources NumOfNetworkLinks to configure for NICs Each index is specified Specify a number in the following range 1 4098 NIC Group Optional Specify a NIC redundancy group Specify a NIC redundancy group if necessary Up to 16 NIC groups can be added Index Enter a NIC redundancy group index Configure a number in the following range 0 15 NIC Num Enter the number of network resources NumOfNetworkLinks contained in the NIC redundancy group Specify a number in the following range 1 4098 One network resource is set to NIC and the NIC redundancy group when omitting i
183. RN gt Inaclustered manager configuration for details on how to change the admin IP address registered for the manager refer to Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations Log in to the managed server with an OS administrator account Change ServerView Agents settings on the managed server Change the SNMP trap destination of the ServerView Agents Refer to the ServerView Agent manual for details on changing SNMP trap settings 58 8 10 11 12 13 14 Stop the agents on managed servers Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Stop the agent referring to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE Change Agent settings Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Use the rcxadm agtctl modify command to set the new manager IP address Windows Hyper V gt Installation_folde Agent bin rcxadm agtctl modify manager P_address lt RETURN gt Linux Xen KVM opt FJSVrcxat bin rexadm agtctl modify manager P_address RETURN Restart the agents on managed servers Windows Hyper V Linux Xen KVM Start the agent referring to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE Restart the manager Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE Repeat steps 6 to 11 for each managed server on which an agent is running Re configure the HBA address rename setup service When using the HBA address rename
184. Registration in Address Pools MAC Addresses To register a MAC address in an address pool execute the rexadm addrset create command For details on the rexadm addrset create command refer to 3 1 rcxadm addrset in the Reference Guide Command XML CE An address set resource will be created and registered in the address pool 14 7 Image Resources This section explains how to register a cloning image to a resource pool The registration method varies depending on the type of image resource 146 14 7 1 Virtual Image Resources This section explains how to register a cloning image to a resource pool When an image template has been created in advance using VM management software register it to the image pool using the following procedure 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target image pool and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Select a cloning image to register 3 Click lt OK gt The cloning image is registered G Note 00020009002909000000999909900000090909909090900000909099909090000090990990902090009900920000000909009909909900000909900000000099099090000099299 For images templates created in advance using VM management software change the name of a template as follows to enable Resource Orchestrator to process it Delete any characters other than alphanumeric characters and underscores _ Ensure an alphabetic cha
185. S ServerView FUJITSU ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition V3 1 0 User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management Windows Linux J2X1 7612 03ENZO 00 October 2012 Preface Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map The documentation road map for Resource Orchestrator is as shown below Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map Target Readers _Design Pre Configuration Installation Quick Start Guide CE Administrators Adi i LIOS Infrastructure Administrators NS Option Instruction DR Option Instruction Tenant Administrators User s Guide Tenant Users for Tenant Users IE Point 6060606062000909000000009090900000009090909090000009009099090000009099099009000090909090900000009009090000000909900000009009090000099299 User s Guide for Tenant Administrators Refer to the user role manuals displayed in the table below for roles that are not in the diagram Roles that are not in the diagram Roles that are in the diagram Infrastructure operator Infrastructure administrator Infrastructure monitor Tenant operator Tenant administrator Tenant monitor Dual Role Administrator Infrastructure administrator and Tenant administrator Dual Role Operator Dual Role Monitor For information about the documents for Resource Orchestrator refer to Chapter 1 Documentation Road Map in the Quick Start Guide CE Purpose This manual provides an ou
186. Selecting Shutdown will shut down the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog shuts down the OS and powers off the managed server At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power OFF in progress state orange blinking The power button finally displays Power OFF status after confirming that the target server has been shut down correctly Reboot Selecting Reboot will reboot the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog shuts down the OS and reboots the managed server At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays Power ON status after confirming that the OS has started up correctly on the target server Forced Power Off and Reboot Clicking on a power button that shows Power ON status and selecting lt Options gt gt gt in the displayed Power Operation dialog enables selection of the Force Shutdown and Force Reboot actions A forced shutdown or reboot will forcibly power off or reboot the managed server blade without waiting for its OS to shut down cleanly 16 Figure 4 6 Power Operation Dialog with Additional Options Power Operation abc Please select one of the following power operations for the server Force Shutdown Selecting Force Shutdown
187. Servers or detachment of disks Use the following methods to delete the data on disks Using an OS perform disk formatting while the L Server is connected Using a function of the storage perform disk formatting For ETERNUS Create a LUN again 14 6 Address Set Resources This section explains how to create an address set resource and register the resource in an address pool In the following cases it is necessary to create address set resources and register them in the address pool When Creating Physical L Servers For blade servers For WWNs and MAC addresses it is necessary to create address set resources and register them in the address pool For rack mount servers For WWNs it is necessary to create address set resources and register them in the address pool It is not necessary to create or register address set resources since MAC addresses allocated to network adapters of physical servers are used When creating a virtual L Server with the server type RHEL Xen or RHEL KVM For MAC addresses it is necessary to create address set resources and register them in the address pool Use the following procedure to create an address set resource and register it in an address pool Registration in Address Pools WWNs To register a WWN in an address pool execute the rexadm addrset create command For details on the rexadm addrset create command refer to 3 1 rcxadm addrset in the Reference Guide Command XML CE
188. Specify this mode when performing the network boot using PXE Preboot eXecution Environment Network for PXE boot Select the network resource for PXE boot from the network resources defined in the L Server Note PXE boot is unavailable on networks that use tagged VLAN settings For network boot select network resources for which tags are not configured When performing a network boot on the admin LAN When the DHCP service used by the PXE boot server is configured to receive DHCP requests from other clients the following functions cannot be used Backup and restore Creation of a physical L Server with images selected Deployment and collection of cloning images 16 2 3 Disk Tab Disk type Select a disk type Disk SAN Storage Area Network Select when using SAN storage iSCSI Select when using iSCSI storage Clicking lt Add gt displays the Disk Definitions dialog Specify the following items for each disk Size Number of Disks Size Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Values of 0 1 or larger can be specified 175 Number Clicking Add will display the Disk Definitions dialog and then specify the number of disks to add Specify a number 1 or larger Resource type Specify the disk to allocate to the L Server Select from the following items Automatic assignment Select a suitable virtual storage resource from those registered in the a
189. Specify whether add the CPU and memory of the VM guests allocated to the L Server to the total of the VM pool when the power of the L Server is OFF When the Automatic when powered off checkbox is checked the CPU and memory of VM guests allocated to L Servers cannot be calculated as the total usage amount of VM pools Boot Location Decide whether the physical location of servers to be allocated to the L Server can be changed Fixed Starts the L Server on the same VM host that operated last time Move the L Server between servers to start it on a separate VM host Relocate at startup Automatically selects the optimal VM host when the L Server is started When VM host is specified select VM hosts from the range Note 0606006000000092090906009006090000000600909090900999090000000009090929090900990900000000090090990909000009000090902090900006900009029999 When RHEL Xen is specified for the VM type select Fixed Server Recovery Specify the server redundancy to allocate to the L Server To enable redundancy select the HA checkbox VMware Oracle VM If the HA checkbox is selected The HA function is located on an enabled VM host When there is no VM host for which the HA function has been enabled the L Server for which a configuration definition has already been created cannot be started 183 If the HA checkbox is not selected The HA function will be preferentially located on a disabled VM host How
190. TES on erret ertt ten e ici eet vetere itineri ib reteltian teet t IRE 10 A eco qM M M 13 LET MM atc iP e P 15 AA Pig wer COMME 4 4 1 Server Blade Lr n VI MO M HE AED tatus Panel COPIA ioci deteetetre teint tette mee edi e idee desee thi ended e eri tec T 18 4 5 Listing and Edinnc or Labels amd COUBBDIS 51 mirer ctuess ertet eet tem aree tue t ar e P bees 19 45 4 Baking Contacis socer rt HP EO ERE HO EEH ERE EE OE CERE EE LEE FE CHELUTEE IEEE HE E EAE ORO Sdadvenses 20 25 3 Changing PA MG uice etta eei d o n ree Ee ne eer erit ie hi dev E EET Pee toe iei e dioere d deest 20 Chapter velneiel tt 22 Jaca I ANUS ER ATI PR M 22 5 LI Regisienng VIOM Server Prohiles cente eerte tr i ED ERE REGE E EEUU ERE ELE SEE IEEE eese EE 22 52 Bemstenng VM Miuiseetnent SO Ele tea eee tied rhe idee eret ener iet eei etre eee ee PIE ete ierit SEa ersan Neith 23 5 3 Storage Management Software 54 Wher using Blade SOFVess iui tende iren EU CAREER EEG HOT OTEHER S EO EY E ORE ETE E CHE eases x MB cuir M Et 26 ee USNR ONG Ne lr A E 27 543 Reeisenng LAN Switch Blades iecore eite nr E HIERO EE LO PE EE HERE ERO
191. Tagged VLAN ID in the VLAN Configuration dialog the tagged LAN only will be enabled To enable a port VLAN enter a value for Port VLAN ID When only a tagged VLAN is configured the value for the port VLAN is not displayed on the ROR console even if it has been configured on the switch For the devices for which port VLANs cannot be deleted it is necessary to limit the frames that let ports pass through to the tagged frames only If the port VLAN ID is unspecified or 1 a tagged VLAN ID cannot be set to 1 5 4 7 HBA address rename Settings For details refer to 5 5 3 HBA address rename Settings Point When creating a physical L Server using a blade server HBA address rename settings are not necessary 0606060620002920006000009990900000909009099090000009009909909000000909090900000909090900000000099090000009990900000009909000060909299 5 5 When using Rack Mount and Tower Servers This section explains how to register resources when using rack mount or tower servers When using rack mount or tower servers use the following procedure to register resources Register Rack Mount or Tower Servers Register LAN Switches 5 5 1 Registering Rack Mount or Tower Servers This section explains how to register a rack mount or tower server 34 Figure 5 3 Status Transition Diagram for Managed Servers Registering Managed Server Deleting Managed Server Not displayed Registering Agent pm Registering Managed Server dhol A
192. The character string within 32 characters composed of alphanumeric character underscore and hyphen is specified in the first alphanumeric character Label Optional Enter a label for the L Server template The character string within 32 characters is specified 150 Comments Optional Enter a comment for the L Server template The character string within 256 characters is specified Server Type Select a server type Select Physical when creating a physical L Server template Server Specification Methods When Server Type is Physical the Model and CPU and Memory of the server are displayed Click lt Model gt to select a model name to allocate to the L Server Clicking lt CPU and Memory gt enables you to enter the number of CPUs CPU performance and memory size of the server allocated to the L Server Model Select a model name The following models are displayed PRIMERGY BX620 S6 PRIMERGY BX620 S5 PRIMERGY BX620 S4 PRIMERGY BX920 S3 PRIMERGY BX920 S2 PRIMERGY BX920 S1 PRIMERGY BX922 S3 PRIMERGY BX922 S2 PRIMERGY BX924 S3 PRIMERGY BX924 S2 PRIMERGY BX960 S1 PRIMERGY RX100 S6 PRIMERGY RX100 S5 PRIMERGY RX200 S4 PRIMERGY RX200 S6 PRIMERGY RX200 S5 PRIMERGY RX300 S4 PRIMERGY RX300 S6 PRIMERGY RX300 S5 PRIMERGY RX600 S5 PRIMERGY RX600 S4 PRIMERGY RX900 S1 PRIMERGY TX150 S7 PRIMERGY TX150 S6 PRIMERGY TX200 S6 PRIMERGY TX200 S5 151 P
193. The server type is displayed For physical L Servers Physical is displayed For virtual L Servers VM is displayed Server Specifications When the server type is Physical the model name of the server is displayed When the server type is VM the CPU frequency multiplied by the number of CPUs and the memory size are displayed Disk Capacity The disk capacity is displayed in units of GB NIC Number The number of NICs on the L Server is displayed Position The boot location is displayed lt Export of Template gt button Click when exporting an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 8 Creating a Template using an Another Existing Template 15 1 2 Creating This section explains how to create an L Server template To create a Physical L Server Template refer to 15 1 2 1 Creating a Physical L Server Template To create a Virtual L Server Template refer to 15 1 2 2 Creating a Virtual L Server Template 15 1 2 1 Creating a Physical L Server Template Use the following procedure to create a physical L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed 2 In the ROR L Server Template Editor window click Create The Create L Server Template dialog is displayed 3 Configure the following settings a Enter basic information Name Enter the name of the L Server template
194. U allocation priority It is possible to specify it for Hyper V A number between 1 and 10000 can be specified If left blank 100 is set when creating an L Server CPU Num Enter the number of CPUs to be allocated to the L Server Enter a number between 1 and 8 Hyper V Enter a number between 1 and 4 Oracle VM Enter a number between 1 and 32 RHEL KVM Enter a number between 1 and 64 Solaris Containers Enter a number between 1 and 4096 Memory Size Enter the memory capacity to be allocated to the L Server Enter a number between 0 1 and 255 in units of gigabytes Solaris Containers Enter a number between 0 1 and 32 Memory Reserve Optional Enter the minimum amount of memory resources to be reserved for the L Server Itis possible to specify it for VMware Enter when using the overcommit function Enter the value in the range from 0 to the upper limit of the memory capacity If left blank the value specified for the memory size when creating an L Server is configured Memory Share Optional Enter the relative proportion for allocation of memory resources on the L Server Itis possible to specify it for VMware Enter when using the overcommit function Enter an integer between 0 and 1000000 If left blank the value specified for the memory size 1024 10 is configured when creating an L Server Memory buffer Optional Specify the memory buffer It is possible to specify it for Hyper V 156
195. U is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs Firmware version The firmware version of the device PDU or UPS is displayed Date of manufacture The date of manufacture of the PDU or UPS is displayed Outlets The number of outlets provided by the PDU is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs Intended orientation The intended orientation horizontal or vertical of the PDU is displayed This is not displayed for UPSs 297 A 6 6 Management Software Attributes General Area Management software name The name used to identify the management software is displayed Type The type of the management software is displayed One of the following is displayed vCenter Server SCVMM OVM Manager VIOM IP address The IP address used to connect to the management software is displayed Status The status of the management software is displayed Management software A link to the web interface of the management software is displayed A 6 7 Storage Management Software Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Configuration Information Management Software Type The management software type of the storage management software is displayed Version The version of the storage management software is displayed IP Address The IP address used to
196. Update the network map to show the latest status Display filter area Provides checkboxes to select which information to display in the network view Map navigation area Shows a zoomed out version of the selected map including items which are too far away to be displayed in the network view VLAN display area Displays the selected VLAN ID in the VLAN tree 11 3 2 Map Types This section explains the different types of map available Overall map The overall map displays links between chassis servers and adjacent LAN switches for all the resources managed in Resource Orchestrator 105 Local map button Selecting a resource icon in the network view will show a button on the upper right side of this icon Clicking this button shows the local map Point The local map and overall map buttons in the map selection area are initially disabled Selecting a chassis in the network view enables them 60606062060009090900900000990990909090000909099090900000900909909000000909090909090900009090990900000090990900000000909020000000999090000090999 Local map The local map displays all resources contained in the selected resource as well as their connections network links with other resources Point 06060606200009000000000909090900009090909090900000090909909909000000099000000090909090900000000909909900000099900000090909200000909299 Upto two chassis can be expanded in the local map When two chassis are already expanded ex
197. a ee Event Log 4 Qeror 4 2swarning v Info Filter l4 4 1 164 gt gt I Status Date Tenant Name Resource Name Y Event ID _ Event Log Info 2012 05 01 14 34 59 wanset2 21143 FJSVrex INFO 21143 delete address set ated Info 2012 05 01 14 35 00 wanset2 21144 FJSVrocINFO 21144 delete address set complet Info 2012 05 21 14 31 02 weanset2 21143 FJSVrex INFO 21143 create address set sarned info 2012 05 01 14 31 03 wensat 21144 FJSVrex INFO 21144 create address saticomplet info 2012 04 26 19 50 05 wensett 21143 FJSVrex INFO 21143 create address set stated info 2012 04 26 19 50 05 wensett 21144 FJSVrex INFO 21144 create address set comp et Info 2012 05 01 10 53 58 vmesxt 21143 FJSVrex INFO 21143 moving resource stated Info 2012 05 01 10 53 58 vmesxt 21144 FJSVrex INFO 21144 moving resource complete info 2012 04 27 08 40 32 vm3 2 21181 FJSVrex INFO 21161 vm3 2 VM guest is detecte Info 2012 04 27 08 40 32 vm3 1 21181 JSVrox INFO 21181 vm3 1 VM gues is detecte ajp m 4 The event log displays a history of events that have occurred on managed resources These events are added to the log automatically Each event provides the following information Event Information Status Displays the level of the event There are three levels Error Warning or Info Date Date and time at which the event occurred Tenant Name Name of the tenant associated with the event Resource Name Name of the resource a
198. access the storage management software is displayed Port Number The port number used to access the storage management software is displayed 298 User ID The user name of the storage management software is displayed Management software A link to the management software for the storage management software is displayed Physical Storage Unit List Name Label The name of the storage unit is displayed Model The model name of the storage unit is displayed Storage Management Software The storage management software for the storage unit is displayed A 6 8 Storage Unit Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Model The model name of the storage device is displayed Configuration Information Management software A link to the management software for the storage management software is displayed Serial Number Information used to identify the chassis of the storage unit is displayed IP address The IP address used to access the storage management software is displayed Virtual Storage List Status The status of the registered virtual storage is displayed Capacity Unused Capacity Total Capacity The capacity of the registered virtual storage is displayed Storage Type The type of the registered virtual storage is displayed Attributes The type of the virtual storage is displayed 299 Storage Management Software The storage ma
199. aching and Detaching Disks When a Disk has been Detached Detach the disk from the physical L Server For details refer to 17 2 3 Attaching and Detaching Disks For a physical L Server linked with a configured physical server reflect attachment or detachment of disks using the following procedure 1 Cancel the link between the physical server and the physical L Server For details refer to 18 6 Releasing an L Server 2 Create a link between the physical server and the physical L Server For details refer to 17 8 1 Installation Even if modification of the L Server configuration failed part of the information may be successfully modified In this case it takes a while for the modified information to be reflected The virtual machine information is reflected through periodic queries 17 2 1 Modifying Specifications This section explains how to modify L Server specifications Use the following procedure to modify L Server specifications Solaris Containers Calculate the cap value to configure for the non global zone from the number of CPUs and the CPU performance For details refer to C 7 6 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE The Procedure when Using the GUI 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Modify Specification from the popup menu The Modify an L Server dialog is displayed 195 2 Change the values The current values for each item a
200. acters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 to Ox7e This field can be omitted if no password has been set for this user account amp Note Ifthe password of the current administrator account on the remote management controller is longer than 16 characters either create a new account or change its password within 16 characters ipmi passwd enc Enter one of the following f ipmi passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted admin lani nic number The index of the NIC to use for the admin LAN Enter a number 1 or larger amp Note CO This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers admin_lan2_nic_number The Index number of NICs used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy Enter a number 1 or larger For the following cases enter a hyphen When not using the HBA address rename setup service When redundancy of the admin LAN for managed servers does not use GLS When not using as the spare server of a managed server with redundancy configured Note This field is only required for PRIMERGY BX servers 0 06060000000909209909009909000009009029909090909900000000909009002090000000000090909290990909099099000000009099909090902909000000009209009299 admin lan nic redundancy Enter one of the following When using the NIC specified in the admin lan2 nic number as the backup for admin LAN redundancy ON When not using the NIC spec
201. age in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 5 3 Unregistration This section explains how to unregister cloning images Use the following procedure to unregister cloning images 1 Right click the target image pool in the orchestration tree and select Unregister from the popup menu The Unregister a Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The cloning image is unregistered From the command line execute rcxadm pool unregister For details on the rexadm pool unregister command refer to 3 10 rcxadm pool in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 60606060600092009000060009090490900000090990000000090990909909000009090909900920000090909090000000900000900000090909000000090909000000909299 When unregistering a cloning image a numeric value is added at the end of the image name to change its name as follows The image name will not be changed after unregistration When releasing registration as image names will be changed execute the rexadm image list command to check the creation time and comment before performing unregistration Images can be identified using this method For details on the rcxadm image list command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Unregistered images of virtual L Servers can be used in the same way as when they are collected from templates of server virtualization software For details refer to 17 5 1 Collecting and Registering Beforeunregisterin
202. ails on the rexadm folder modify command refer to 3 5 rexadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 21 5 Deleting This section explains how to delete resource folders The procedure for deleting resource folders differs according to the resource folder type For Orchestration Iserver 1 Right click the target resource folder in the orchestration tree and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete a Folder dialog is displayed 2 The name of the resource folder to be deleted will be displayed If resource folders or resources are included in the resource folder to delete a list of them is displayed in All Resources Confirm the list and check the Delete All Resources checkbox G Note When the Delete All Resources checkbox is checked lt OK gt will be enabled 254 3 Click lt OK gt The target resource folder is deleted From the command line execute rcxadm folder delete For details on the rexadm folder delete command refer to 3 5 rexadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For Server server 1 Right click the target resource folder in the server tree and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete a Folder dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target resource folder is deleted From the command line execute rcxadm folder delete For details on the rexadm folder delete command refer to 3 5 rexadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G N
203. al Refer to Comment Optional of 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources 3 Click OK The network resource is created and registered in a network pool When checking the Automatically configure VLANs for the uplink ports checkbox in the VLAN ID Uplink port settings a tagged VLAN is automatically configured in the uplink port of LAN switch blade when creating a network resource 142 14 4 Network Devices This section explains how to register a network device in a network pool Use the following procedure to register a network device in a network pool as a resource 1 Right click the target network pool in the orchestration tree and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Check the Select checkbox for the resource to register 3 Click lt OK gt The network device is registered in the network pool as a resource Point CC ey When registering or modifying the network devices to be registered in a network pool as resources the Type element of the XML definition must be Firewall or SLB A Information Script execution to perform auto configuration of network devices When there are the folder names of rulesets corresponding to Vendor and Unit Name or Model Name of network devices registered in the network pool the scripts registered in the relevant ruleset folder are executed Use the following procedure to confirm the Vendor and Unit Name or
204. al alias names are set for the ETERNUS LUNs the initial settings for aliases in ETERNUS LUNs are used instead The format for the alias name set for the disk resource names and Resource Orchestrator is as follows Disk resource names Format name L Server name specified by user x String in decimal format uniquely allocated by the manager y Decimal representing the disk index Alias name Format NAMEXXYYYY maximum 16 characters NAME String starting at the beginning of name maximum 11 characters XX Two digit decimal string corresponding to x YYYY Three digit decimal string corresponding to y As the L Server names that can be reflected in alias are a maximum of 11 characters the infrastructure administrator should consult with the tenant administrator and determine rules for L Server names If the L Server name is changed the disk resource name and aliases in the details about the disk are not changed If the disk resources are created from the virtual storage RAID group for example that is the subject of ETERNUS Dynamic LUN Mirroring the LUN created on the remote site receives the same alias If the alias name of the ETERNUS LUN corresponding to the disk created from the virtual storage has been changed using the ETERNUS WebGUI the alias name in the disk details will be updated with the regular update The disk resource name is not changed 16 2 1 General Tab Name Label Enter a name for the L Server Ente
205. alue Items in the Definition File Specify the following items Table 17 4 List of Items Specified in the Definition File When also allocating resources during L Server creation Specify true Wh ti L definiti Allocating resources allocate_after_create truelfalse en ony creating an Cenerven dampen Specify false If left blank true is set It will be set using the default values of Resource allocation on the General tab When releasing server resources while an L Server is turned off Specify true When not releasing server resources while an L Server is turned off Repurpose auto_preserved truelfalse Specify false If left blank false is set It will be set as the default value of Resource release on the Server tab It can be specified using an L Server template When using VM names in the format of Virtual L Numbering VM names vm name suffix truelfalse Server Name Number Specify true 221 om o e Rma For details on numbering refer to Association of an L Server Name with a VM Guest Name in 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template When using the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM when not using numbering Specify false If left blank true is set Switching the value for this item does not automatically change existing virtual L Server names or VM names This item only affects when creating a virtual L Server when modifying gen
206. and PCI Box Interface Board The ID of the GSPB used to configure a partition is displayed Reserved SB The ID of the Reserved SB assigned to a partition is displayed LSB The partition logical system board LSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers XSB The partition eXtended System Board XSB number is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers A 6 3 Physical OS VM Host and VM Guest Attributes General Area Server name The name used to identify a physical OS or VM host is displayed 288 Admin LAN IP Address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Not displayed for VM guests Status The status of the physical OS VM host or VM guest is displayed Type The type of the OS running on the server is displayed One of the following is displayed Physical OS VM Host VM Guest OS The type of the OS running on the server is displayed Physical server name The name of the server on which the physical OS VM host or VM guest is operating is displayed Not displayed for VM guests L Server The link to the allocated L Server information wA See 0606060002092090900000090909099090900009009099059090000090090990909000000909090900000090909090909000000909090000000090090900000099090000099299 Refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE for details on resource statuses VM Host Information Area The
207. and communication between admin clients and VM hosts is possible connection of the console is possible Oracle VM KVM Xen Solaris Containers The console cannot be connected to through the ROR console Note For console connection use admin client functions Check if the console connection is possible from the admin client in advance 207 VMware Normally the admin server notifies the admin client of the IP address of the admin LAN of the VM host registered with the admin server to use as the connection destination for the console For this reason the console cannot be connected to by admin clients that exist on networks that are not connected to the admin LAN To connect to the console from a admin client that is connected only to the public LAN in the definition file on the admin server set the VM host connection destination that can be connected from the admin client The admin server notifies of the VM host connection destination that can be connected from the public LAN and the admin client can connect to the console Note If the destination for connection of a public LAN that has been set for a VM host is specified in the definition file a console connection from the admin LAN will be unavailable 6060000099090000009090090000009090040000009090909090000000909000000009090909000000090090009000000909900000009209090000000299 Further the VM host connection can be specified for each tenant The L Server conso
208. and the load put on the admin server The following values are guidelines Table 7 2 Polling Interval Polling Interval Number of Devices that can be Monitored Simultaneously 5 minutes Up to 40 devices 10 minutes Up to 60 devices Use a polling interval of 5 minutes or longer when monitoring chassis and servers Use a polling interval of 10 minutes if monitoring more than 40 devices 83 Data storage period Enter storage periods for each collection rate Data older than the configured storage period will be deleted every day Enlarging data storage periods reduces the number of devices that can be monitored simultaneously Use the default storage period values when monitoring chassis and servers 3 Click lt Apply gt The new settings are applied G amp Note 06060600009090990900000090909090000009090990000000909090929090909000006090909090000009090909090000000900909090900000099090900000009090900000009299 If the Power checkbox under Data to collect is cleared the collection of power consumption data including the calculation of hourly daily and other summarized data will not be performed anymore 7 8 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environments This section explains how to cancel the collection of power consumption data Use the following procedure to cancel the collection of power consumption data 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2
209. ange Stop L Servers operating on physical servers which are required for change usage For details refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server 3 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting When using multiple L Servers switching between them on unused physical servers in a server pool Usage can be changed by repeating the following procedure 1 Confirm the Server Pool Confirm whether an unused physical server exists in the server pool 2 Start the Destination L Server for Usage Change For details refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server After changing the configuration the L Server before changing cannot be operated until the new L Server has finished starting 17 9 1 2 When Resources are Already Allocated allocated This section explains configuration and operation when resources have been allocated to the L Server Settings Perform step 1 the same number of times as the number of physical servers which are used for usage change Create and Register Each Resource Perform resource creation and registration referring to Chapter 5 Registering Resources and Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools 224 2 Create an L Server First server Create an L Server for which resources are already allocated allocated referring to Chapter
210. ange LAN switch VLAN settings The VLAN settings of the LAN switch blade ports connected to the physical servers can be reconfigured normally within Resource Orchestrator Refer to 5 4 6 Configuring VLANs on Internal Connection Ports for details on how to configure these settings 7 1 9 Changing HBA address rename Settings This section explains how to change the HBA address rename settings The WWNs and HBA ports that are set by HBA address rename can be reconfigured normally within Resource Orchestrator Refer to 5 5 3 HBA address rename Settings for details on how to configure these settings 7 1 10 Changing Boot Options This section explains how to change boot option settings The boot options configured for PRIMEQUEST servers can be changed by re configuring them Use the following procedure to configure the boot option settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Boot option For UEFI Select UEFI For Legacy Boot Select Legacy boot amp Note e006060606000006020000600092900600000090929299 ecc c cc0cccc066 27969 eccccc52029 secc c cc22229 ecc060020200060600602092929299 eccccc226 Changing the boot option changes the information registered with Resource Orchestrator As the actual boot
211. aracters blank spaces and any of the following symbols ns gn gn OO NAN amp aen spe ue np nye un y m Neg zn M n U en p ud nom ul n n mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following If mgmt_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted LAN Switch Blade Data Section Name Enter LanSwitch as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the value of chassis name in the Chassis section 348 slot_no Enter the slot number where the LAN switch blade is installed Enter a number between 1 and 8 switch_name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade Enter a string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Note LAN switch blade names should be unique between all LAN switch blades The names are case sensitive 0 0600000090909229909009090000090090299090990909000000990909090909909000000000900909990909090909909000000002999090909000000009009999 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the LAN switch blade Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods G amp Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources CO snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read only permission as that set on the LAN switch blade Enter a string of up
212. arding the number of simultaneous connections In this case log out from other connections If the connection is unavailable the following features are also unavailable Registration of LAN switch blades Changing of LAN switch blade settings Changing and setting the VLAN for LAN switch blades internal and external connection ports Restoration of LAN switch blades Server switchover changing network settings while a server is switched over SSH connection SSH version 2 can be selected for the following LAN switch blades LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 1 00 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 842 4 16 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 3 12 or later version LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 3 12 or later version 006062062009092099000009099290990990900009099090909000090909902909909000099909909090009090909099090000090909099099099090009090999090000009990990000906299299 5 4 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches On managed LAN switch blades VLANs should be set on both the ports external connection ports connected with the adjacent managed network devices such as L2 switches and the ports internal connection ports connected to the NIC on the managed servers G amp Note VLANs cannot be configured on PRIMERGY BX 900 and BX 400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 0606060600009200000060009099090000000900900000009099090990
213. are not meet divide the section as different CSV files and import them one by one b Agent section ServerAgent or ServerVMHost To register an agent it must fulfill all of the following conditions Please import agents only if they meet all these conditions The agent of Resource Orchestrator must already be installed on the managed server An OS must be running on the managed server The agent of the target physical server must be registered or the agent registration section defined in the system configuration file n the Server section when registering or changing managed servers in different subnets than the admin server one of the following conditions must be fulfilled The target subnet information is registered The target subnet s information is defined in the Subnet section of the CSV format system configuration file CC G amp Note When registering a new server with the registered primary server and configuring it as a spare server import the Server section and SpareServer section separately 100 When changing physical server names during pre configuration it cannot be performed at the same time as other pre configuration operations Import the Server section separately from other sections 6 When the import is completed successfully a message is displayed in the Recent Operations area Point Error handling The processing of resource registration or change is executed after
214. area to stop the blinking and fix the cause of the problem Click the status monitoring area to stop the blinking and fix the cause of the problem The resource status area lights up when there is at least one server in either Error or Warning status Clicking a lit up status area will display a list of resources with that status in the Resource List tab Double click a displayed resource to switch to its Resource Details tab and open either its external management software or the Management Blade s Web interface to investigate the problem A 4 Tree Panel This section describes the trees used in the ROR console Figure A 4 Tree Panel Server Resource 3server folder flllfaxoo0 E O B Bxo00 B BX900 2 B Bx900 3 t EI BX900 4 Unregistered t EI BX900 5 Unregistered EF B BX900 6 F B Bx900 7 t IQBexoo0 s t E BX900 9 H BBxo00 10 t B BX900 1 t BE BX900 12 In the tree panel clicking the area on the upper left enables selection and display of the following 5 types of tree server resources network devices power monitoring devices management software and VLAN Server Resources Chassis servers physical OSs VM hosts VM guests and LAN switches managed in Resource Orchestrator are displayed in a tree view Resources are primarily displayed in registration order However for blade servers within a common chassis the order by which Resource Orchestrator detects
215. ated to the L Server when the power is turned off If the Automatic when powered off checkbox is checked the server is released when the power is turned off amp Note When resources of the same servers are shared due to a change in usage ensure that Resource release is set for the L Server they are allocated to When the server resources are allocated to the L Server for which Resource release is not configured the server resources cannot be shared Boot Location Decide whether the physical location of servers to be allocated to the L Server can be changed When unselecting the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release the location will be Fixed Fixed Starts the L Server on the same physical server that was operated last time Relocate at startup Automatically selects the optimal physical server when the L Server is started Even when Physical server is specified the L Server may operate on a separate physical server from the second time it is started Server Recovery Specify the server redundancy to allocate to the L Server To enable redundancy select the HA checkbox 173 When selecting the HA checkbox the Use a low spec server checkbox of Spare server specs and lt Select gt of Spare server pool will be enabled Spare server specs This section specifies the selection method of spare server When the Use a low spec server checkbox is selected physical servers with models
216. ations are used in this manual Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Windows Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition iv Windows R 7 Professional Windows R 7 Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista R Enterprise Windows Vista R Ultimate Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter M Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x86 Wind 2 86 Edit dows aS 280 Editon Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x86 a Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x64 Wind 2 4 Edit ihdows 2008 46 Me Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x64 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft
217. ator password has been changed execute the following command The password specified in the cmd remotescript 1 params password parameter of the definition file is changed to the encrypted string and the line encrypted yes is added to indicate that the password is encrypted For details refer to 5 8 rcxadm deployctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE gt Installation_folder Agent bin rcxadm deployctl passwd encrypt lt RETURN gt 122 With MAK Already Encrypted Password ActivationInfo cmd remotescript 1 params makkey 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 cmd remotescript 1 params ieproxy proxy activation com 8080 cmd remotescript 1 params password xyz123456 encrypted yes 06060606200209220000009009090000009090990909909000090090290900000090090990900909000090099090000009290909000000099290909090000090999060099 Collecting Cloning Images Use the following procedure to collect cloning images 1 Place the target server into maintenance mode a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the desired server or its physical OS and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click OK The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Stop all operations running on the source server When a cloning image is collected the source server is automatically restarted Therefore all operations running on the source server should be stopp
218. auto false specified for the lt Network gt element in the XML definition file To perform auto configuration of a network device an L2 switch when creating a network resource specify auto true for the lt SwitchConfiguration gt element and the ruleset name to use for auto configuration for the lt Ruleset gt element in the XML definition file 5 7 Registering Network Devices This section explains how to register network devices 44 The devices that need to be registered as network devices must meet the following conditions Network devices to be automatically configured using the auto configuration for network device function Network devices to be monitored using the Network monitoring function Resource Orchestrator supports registration of the following types of network devices Firewall Server Load Balancer LAN Switches Use the following procedure to register a network device 1 Create network configuration information for the network device to register 2 Register the network device using the network configuration information created in 1 5 7 1 Creating the Network Configuration Information XML Definition Create the network configuration information XML definition necessary for registering the network device to be managed by Resource Orchestrator WS See 606060606200002000000009090000000909090909000000909099009000000909909900900000909009000000009090909000000909990900000909099090900006090929
219. auto configuration using AutoConfiguration displayed in the display results of the rcxadm netdevice show command true Indicates that the network device is the target of auto configuration false Indicates that the network device is not the target of auto configuration wA See For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 258 Chapter 23 Network Resource Operations This chapter explains how to operate network resources 23 1 Automatic Network Configuration Automatic network configuration is normally performed when creating an L Server for the first time but it can also be performed beforehand By performing it beforehand the creation of an initial L Server can be made faster Automatic network configuration is performed as follows 1 Select the target network resource on the orchestration tree and then select Automatic Network Configuration from Operation of the ROR console menu Or right click the target network resource and select Automatic Network Configuration on the displayed menu The Automatic Network Configuration dialog is displayed 2 Select the By Cluster or By VM Host radio button from Scope for Automatic Setting The cluster or VM host list to be automatically configured is displayed on
220. be ignored when importing the system definition file Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive CC ip_address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods G Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources sesecocoosoooooosocoooocsoooooosoooosooocooocosoooocsoooococooooooooooosoooooooooooooooooooooooo 351 mac_address Enter the MAC address of the admin LAN network interface NICI Index1 on Enter a string delimited by hyphens or colons XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXJ XX XX XX XX second mac address Enter the MAC address of the network interface used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy The second network interface Index 2 should be used on Enter a string delimited by hyphens or colons XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX Note This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using the HBA address rename setup service When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy The second mac address header is the equivalent of the hbaar mac address header defined in RCXCSV V3 0 hbaar mac address can only be used when RCXCSV V3 0 is specified at the top of the imported system con
221. bel comments can be performed for the L Server When using Hyper V the virtual machine on a VM host which is not managed with VM management software cannot be linked to an L Server CC 18 4 Installation This section explains the installation method to link a configured physical server to a physical L Server and the installation method to link a configured virtual machine to a virtual L Server 18 4 1 Preparations Preparations For details refer to the procedure in D 2 Preparations for Servers in the Design Guide CE Setup Register the resources of configured physical servers and VM hosts to Resource Orchestrator When linking a configured physical server to an L Server perform the following procedure described in Appendix B Configuration when Creating Physical L Servers in the Setup Guide CE When linking a configured virtual machine to an L Server perform the following procedure described in C 2 VMware or C 3 Hyper V in the Setup Guide CE 1 Register Resources When linking a configured physical server to an L Server perform the following procedure a Register Storage Management Software b Register Managed Servers When linking a configured virtual machine to an L Server perform the following procedure a Register VM Management Software b Register Managed Servers 2 Register Resources in Resource Pools When linking a configured physical server to an L Server perform the following procedure to register
222. ber of CPUs Defined The number of CPUs defined during L Server creation is displayed Number of CPUs Allocated The number of CPUs of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Memory Defined The memory capacity defined during L Server creation is displayed Memory Capacity Allocated The memory capacity of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Number of NICs The number of NICs on the L Server is displayed The Number of Disks The number of disks on the L Server is displayed Model Defined The model name defined during L Server creation is displayed Model Allocated The model name of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed A 6 17 VM Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Priority The priority of the VM pool is displayed Attributes When using a VM pool with overcommit Over Commit is displayed The calculation method for free space is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed 315 Capacity CPU Capacity Total Capacity The total CPU capacity of the VM host is displayed Unused Capacity The free CPU capacity of the VM host is displayed Memory Size Total Capacity The total memory capacity of the VM host is displayed Unused Capacity The free memory capacit
223. bort the operation When a new cloning image version delete the old cloning versions beforehand For details refer to 17 5 4 Deleting If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions 6 6 Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshot Image Versions Use the following procedure to change the maximum number of snapshot versions 1 Change the maximum number of snapshot versions 2 Confirm the maximum number of snapshot versions For details of the methods for changing and checking the generations of snapshots refer to 5 9 rexadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing snapshot versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case collecting a new snapshot on the same server will only delete the oldest version Delete any old snapshot versions manually if they are no longer necessary For details on the deletion procedure refer to Deletion in 17 6 1 Snapshot If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions 6 7 Changing the Image Folder Location Use the following procedure to change the location path of the image files folder 1 Select the Image List tab in the ROR console and confirm the current image list 66 2 Log on to the admin server with OS administrativ
224. by entering the virtual storage size and resource name and clicking lt Search gt 3 Select the resource to register from the Resource List 4 Click lt OK gt The resources are registered in the resource pool When registering resources directories and files that are necessary for performance monitoring are created on the server where the resources are registered Refer to C 6 9Advisory Notes for RHEL KVM Usage in the Setup Guide CE for details 19 2 Modifying Use the following procedure to modify a resource registered in a resource pool Right click the target resource in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Basic Information from the popup menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Change the items you want to modify 3 Click OK The resource settings are modified amp Note 6060606000090909090900000909090000009090909090000090909099009090000006090909090900000909009000000009090900909000000909909200000009090900000009299 When changing the subnet information for the L Server to a different subnet if there are managed servers in the subnets to be changed Subnet address mask cannot be changed When changing Subnet address mask refer to Modifying When There are Managed Servers on the Subnet 6066060020002000000600090080900000090900900000900902900920900000090906090909000009009060000000009009000000009090900000009209000000902996 Modifying When There are Managed Servers
225. c and select Modify Registration Setting from the popup menu The Modify Management Software BladeLogic dialog is displayed 2 Set the following items Label Enter the Label of the Management software Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter the Comment of the Management software Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click lt OK gt The target BMC BladeLogic Server Automation settings are changed 87 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers This chapter explains how to install software to the registered managed servers and set up their operating environment Figure 8 1 Procedure for Setting up Operating Environments Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches if necessary Configuring HBA address rename if this is to be used 1 Software Installation and Agent Registration 2 Cloning Image Deployment Install the operating system Install required software Install the Resource Orchestrator agent Register the agent 1 HBA address rename and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis I O virtualization settings for all the servers mounted in one chassis must be made using either HBA address rename or VIOM 2 These settings can be omitted for resources that have already been installed or registered 8 1 Configuring WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration This section explains how to configure WWN setting
226. can be monitored from a view representative of the actual placement and configuration of physical devices When using virtual servers BladeViewer shows a list of VM guests for each VM host This helps keeping track of relationships between VM guests and VM hosts BladeViewer also makes it easy to confirm which operating systems physical OS and guest OS are affected by a hardware failure Display and control of power status The power status of each server blade storage blade and VM guest is represented by an intuitive power button Clicking this button provides quick access to power control operations for both server blades and VM guests Display of custom labels and comments BladeViewer allows users to define custom labels and comments for each physical OS VM host and VM guest Once defined labels are shown on top of each displayed physical OS VM host and VM guest Using labels to display application contents makes it easy to visualize what applications are running on each server blade and identify the applications affected by a server failure Clicking on a label displays the comment defined for the related resource Registering troubleshooting and recovery procedures beforehand can speed up the recovery of affected applications when a problem occurs Display of contact information Blade Viewer allows users to define technical support contact information for their entire IT system This contact information can be shown
227. ce Mode 267 Popup Menu Function Reboots a server without shutting down its operatin Reboot Forced 8 P e system N LED 3 Hardware Detects and re configures the properties of a replaced i Re configure Maintenance server Backup Restore Restores a system image to a server Deploy Deploys a cloning image to a server Console Screen 5 s CisSzr Opens the server console External Management Opens external server management software Software 6 Export 7 Environmental Data Exports environmental data collected from servers Move to Folder se oo y O Moves a server to another folder 1 Available only for PRIMERGY BX series and PRIMEQUEST servers 2 Available only for VM hosts when using PRIMEQUEST 3 Available only for PRIMERGY BX servers 4 Can only be selected for VM guests 5 For physical L Servers when opening the L Server console screen at the second time or later a window for iRMC management may be opened instead of the console screen If an 1RMC management screen is displayed close that screen and then start the console screen again 6 Available only for PRIMERGY series PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise M series servers 7 This option is only available for chassis equipped with power monitoring capabilities Table A 4 Popup Menus Available for Physical OSs Physical Servers VM Hosts and VM Guests Popup Menu Function Delete 1 eC Deletes a physical OS or VM hos
228. ch A switch that connects Fibre Channel interfaces and storage devices Fibre Channel A method for connecting computers and peripheral devices and transferring data Generally used with servers requiring high availability to connect computers and storage systems Fibre Channel port The connector for Fibre Channel interfaces When using ETERNUS storage referred to as an FC CA port when using NetApp storage referred to as an FC port when using EMC CLARiiON referred to as an SP port when using EMC Symmetrix DMX or EMC Symmetrix VMAX referred to as a DIRECTOR port fibre channel switch blade A fibre channel switch mounted in the chassis of a blade server FlexVol A function that uses aggregates to provide virtual volumes Volumes can be created in an instant FTRP The pool for physical disks created by Automatic Storage Layering for ETERNUS In Resource Orchestrator FTRPs are used as virtual storage resources on which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured FTV The virtual volumes created by Automatic Storage Layering for ETERNUS In Resource Orchestrator FTVs are used as disk resources on which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured global pool A resource pool that contains resources that can be used by multiple tenants It is located in a different location from the tenants By configuring a global pool with the attributes of a tenant it becomes possible for tenant administrators to use the pool 37
229. ch or port group corresponding to the network resource exists information on whether those resources will be automatically configured is displayed If the checkbox is not selected Configuration is performed automatically This option is not selected by default If the checkbox is selected Resources that have already been created are configured for the network resource Automatically configure VLANs for the uplink ports Whether automatic VLAN configuration for uplink ports is performed is displayed When automatic configuration is performed yes is displayed When automatic configuration is not performed no is displayed Start Address The start address of the IP addresses to be automatically configured is displayed End Address The end address of the IP addresses to be automatically configured is displayed Subnet address The subnet address of the network resource is displayed Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the network resource is displayed Gateway The default gateway is displayed VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the network resource is displayed Ruleset The ruleset for the network resource is displayed A hyphen is displayed if the ruleset has not been set 328 physical LAN segment The physical LAN segment set for the network resource is displayed When no physical LAN segment is set a hyphen is displayed The physical LAN segment item will not be displayed if no server NIC has been defined Excluded IP
230. ch blades Use the following procedure to delete VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed 3 Click Delete The VLAN ID is deleted Deleting VLAN IDs from LAN switch ports Use the following procedure to delete VLAN IDs 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select None from the VLAN type of the port number to delete VLANs or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID is deleted 7 4 3 Re discovering LAN Switches Newly added LAN switches can be discovered by re executing LAN switch discovery For details on LAN switch discovery refer to Discovery in 5 5 2 Registering LAN Switches 79 amp Note When using auto configuration for network device function on a LAN switch register it as a network device using the method described in 5 7 Registering Network Devices instead of re executing LAN switch dis
231. changing the subnet addresses or subnet masks the IP address for L Server is also automatically changed As the OS configuration installed on an L Server is not changed manually change it to match the detailed information of the L Server Making the following change to the network resource for which automatic configuration of VLAN on the external connection port is specified may cause a network loop Adding another external connection port on a LAN switch blade which has been already specified as an external connection port In this case take action to prevent a network loop first such as disconnecting the cable for the external connection port to be added before making changes to the network resource 7 6 Changing Network Device Settings This section explains how to change settings of network devices Use the following procedure to change the settings of a registered network device 1 Create network configuration information for the target network device 2 Change the network device settings based on the network configuration information created in 1 7 6 1 Creating the Network Configuration Information XML Definition Create the network configuration information necessary for changing the registered network device settings In the following cases it is possible to create network configuration information that can be used as input information for changes based on its original network configuration information When the net
232. characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols np nip igi Qo An amp ken ps ape wp mp ets yr ua t a Du mi U en DE s uu wr an on 3 Click OK The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any partition mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as chassis name partition number Unregistered The only operation available for those unregistered partitions is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties 5 9 2 Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers This section explains the method for registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series servers Use the following procedure to register SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series servers 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series from the popup menu The Register SPARC Enterprise dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Physical Server Name Register agent checkbox Remote management controller ILOM XSCF Controller type IP address User ID Password SNMP Community Admin LAN IP address With Agent Registration OS Type User ID Password Physical Server Name Enter a name to assign to this physical server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical cha
233. ching disks may not be able to be displayed in the result For search conditions specify a size allowing for errors Resource Name Specify the name of the disk to be found Prefix match Specify when searching for disks whose names begin with the specified string Partial match Specify when searching for disks whose names include the specified string Select the disk resource which you want to register using the Select checkbox of the displayed disk resources or select all registered disk resources by checking Select all When using Thin Provisioning or Automatic Storage Layering the displayed resources that can be registered differ depending on whether Thin Provisioning attributes of storage pools are configured or not For details on resources which can be registered refer to 10 1 2 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide CE 3 Click OK The storage resource is registered 145 G amp Note When using a LUN that has been created in advance and a LUN for iSCSI boot as a disk resource if the L Server is deleted or disks are deleted from L Servers the content of disks will remain is not deleted When using disk resources that are registered in global pools perform operation carefully as the disk resources can be allocated to any users When using a LUN that has been created in advance as a disk resource it is recommended to operate the LUN in a local pool and delete data on the disk during deletion of L
234. cific information system node name IP address etc made during cloning When deploying a cloning image to the system disk of another server Resource Orchestrator automatically changes server specific information to that of the target server Cloud Edition The edition which can be used to provide private cloud environments data center A facility that manages client resources servers storage networks etc and provides internet connections and maintenance operational services directory service A service for updating and viewing the names and associated attributes of physical logical resource names scattered across networks based on organizational structures and geographical groups using a systematic tree shaped structure management methodology disk resource The unit for resources to connect to an L Server An example being a virtual disk provided by LUN or VM management software DN Distinguished Name A name defined as a line of an RDN which contains an entry representing its corresponding object and higher entry Domain A system that is divided into individual systems using partitioning Also used to indicate a partition DR Option The option that provides the function for remote switchover of servers or storage in order to perform disaster recovery Dual Role Administrators The administrators with both infrastructure administrator s and tenant administrator s role dynamic LUN mirroring This is
235. ck the Deployment Service resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The Deployment Service Properties window is displayed b In the Registry Replication tab select the above registry key c Click lt Remove gt The selected key is removed from the Root registry key list d After removing the registry key click lt Apply gt e Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 2 Change the location of the image file storage folder Change the location of the image file storage folder according to the instructions given in 5 9 rexadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Because image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete Run the rcxadm imagemgr command from either node of the cluster resource The new location should be a folder on the shared disk 3 Restore registry replication settings Restore the registry key deleted in step 1 to the registry replication settings of the Deployment Service resource Use the following procedure to restore the registry key 67 a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right click the Deployment Service resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The Deployment Service Properties window is displayed b Click lt Add gt on the Registry Replication tab The Registry Key window will be displayed c
236. cloning image select New and enter a new cloning image name For a cloning image name enter a character string beginning with an alphabetic character and containing up to 32 alphanumeric characters and underscores _ Update When updating an existing cloning image select Update and select a cloning image from the list Cloning images with the same name can be saved up until the maximum number of image versions If the selected cloning image has already reached this limit it is necessary to delete one of its existing versions in order to create a new cloning image This can be done directly in this dialog by selecting the version to be deleted from the displayed list The selected version will be automatically deleted when collection of the new cloning image completes The maximum number of image versions is three by default This setting can be changed by following the instructions given in 6 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Physical Servers Comment Optional Enter a comment that identifies the cloning image Up to 128 characters other than percent signs 96 back slashes double quotes and line feed characters can be specified If Update was selected for the Cloning Image Name option the comment of the most recent image version is displayed If no comment is specified a hyphen will be displayed in the ROR console It is recommended to enter comments with information such as
237. configuration template in the Excel format the operation column information will be skipped 2 When loading from the system configuration template in the Excel format the whole section will be skipped 3 Do not enter the information of the same physical server both in the ServerAgent and Server VMHost section System backup information is automatically added to the end of the system configuration file when exporting in the CSV format The sections after the line below contain the backup information The backup information is skipped when loading from the system configuration template in the Excel format Do not edit the following information which is used to recover the manager Do not modify the backup information as it is automatically created Note that these sections do not have to be defined if the system configuration file is created for new system configuration Ifasystem configuration file CSV format is imported and then exported the line order after export may differ from the line order before import The following information will also be deleted Comments lines Strings enclosed in parenthesis indicating omitted values Extra commas at the end of lines 344 As with chassis for server blades and chassis for LAN switch blades items that need to be registered in advance to enable registration of other should be defined in the system configuration file or registered in advance Character Code
238. connecting network resources Do not connect 167 Specify when not connecting network resources only creating a configuration definition G amp Note The network NIC number corresponds to a NIC number NICIndex 1 that is defined in L Server templates Oracle VM One or more networks must be specified Label Optional A custom label can be defined for the L Server User defined labels make it easier to identify the server Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Optional A custom comment can be defined for the L Server For example registering detailed work content troubleshooting and recovery procedures can speed up the recovery of affected applications when a problem occurs Enter a maximum of 256 characters 3 Click lt OK gt The L Server is created The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console When creating a physical L Server specifying image deployment clicking lt Cancel gt in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process G amp Note Please note that canceling the creation of a physical L Server specifying image deployment does not restore the destination server to the state before image deployment took place When operations are cancelled on the last part the physical L Server may remain Delete the physical L Server from the Resource tab on the ROR console For details on how to delete an L Server refer t
239. containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Note Server names should be unique between all servers Names are not case sensitive 0 060060000909092292909909009090000000900999900900000000900900909909000900000090099990990909200000009009990909909000000009099999 ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods amp Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources 06060606000002009099099090000000009090909090900000000090909009059099090000000009000009090990900000000000900920090900000000009999 HBA address rename Information of a Server Section Name Enter ServerWWNN as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section port count This is the number of ports that use HBA address rename Enter a number between 1 and 2 wwnn Enter the 16 digit hexadecimal WWNN string of the physical server which uses the HBA address rename function Enter a hexadecimal string using alphanumeric characters with 20 0 as the first three characters Note All WWNNs should be unique between all resources WWNNs are not case sensitive Names are not case sensitive Server Switchover Management Information Section Name Enter SpareServ
240. covery Cr 7 5 Modifying Network Resource Specifications This section explains how to modify specifications of network resources The availability of modification for each item depending on the network resource type is shown below Table 7 1 Modification Availability Range List Admin LAN Network Network Network Resources of Cateoor hem Resources Directly Additionall Resources of gory Connecting with y iSCSI or Public aor Md Manager LAN emme e E vow f CNN E CNN RN NN Information physical LAN segment Yes 2 Yes 2 Yes 2 Auto configuration of VLAN on external ers Subnet address subnet mask address subnet mask Yes YeCA 4 4 Yes Ysea Net set eE type Auto configuration VLAN ID ti t of network devices PT PONS No No Yes etc L2 switches 5 Yes Modification is possible No Modification is not possible Even after changing external connection ports virtual switches port groups and virtual bridges that have been deployed can be used as is New information on the external connection ports will be reflected on the configuration of virtual switches port groups and virtual bridges deployed after modification of the network resource When modifying the deployed network according to the external connection port server virtualization software must be operated directly to do so 2 Even after changing physical LAN segments virtual switches port groups and virtual bridges that have been de
241. cribed in 18 3 4 When Using Server Virtualization Software L Server for Server Storage Management Refers to L Servers that operate servers and disks For Physical Servers This applies when using the hardware listed in 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware and 18 3 3 Manageable Storage For Virtual Machines This applies when using a physical server and when using server virtualization software The hardware listed in 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware and 18 3 3 Manageable Storage The server virtualization software described in 18 3 4 When Using Server Virtualization Software G Note When linking a configured physical server to a physical L Server only L Server for server management is supported L Server for server storage management cannot be created When disk and NIC information is successfully obtained from the configured physical server or virtual machine that information is displayed The output information for NICs differs depending on the L Server type For Physical L Servers MAC address IP address only for admin LAN For Virtual L Servers MAC address Media Access Control address 228 When admin server has been configured on a virtual machine do not link that virtual machine to an L Server 18 2 Available Range The functional range available when a configured physical server or virtual machine is linked to an L Server is as follows amp Note The range of available functions differs according to the
242. ct Register LAN Switch from the popup menu The Register LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined LAN switch name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade on on Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores By default the name of a discovered LAN switch will be set to its system name or to its IP address if the system name could hyphens or periods not be detected SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 3 Click lt OK gt The registered LAN switch will be displayed in the network device tree G amp Note 00606206200020990000090909909909909000090990900900000909902900000909990990909090009090990909090000009090990909909909000909990909200009999099000909999 It is possible to set an automatically detected IP address to another unregistered LAN switch However this will result in the Resource Orchestrator configuration being inconsistent with the actual network configuration If a LAN switch was registered with the IP address of another network device delete the registered LAN switch following the instructions given in 9 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices then perform Discover and Register aga
243. cted access The resources displayed are restricted according to the access rights of the logged in user Server Resources The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Chassis Server Physical OS VM Host VM Guest LAN Switch LAN Switch Blades Network Devices The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Network Devices Firewalls Network Devices Server Load Balancers Network Devices L2 Switches Network Resources The resources below are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon LAN switch excluding LAN switch blades Power Monitoring Devices The following power monitoring devices are shown in a tree view PDU Power Distribution Unit UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Management Software The following management software which can be used in coordination with Resource Orchestrator are shown in a tree view A status icon is displayed over each resource s icon Management Software vCenter Server Management Software SCVMM Management Software VIOM VLAN Selecting a VLAN ID shows a list of resources on which this ID has been applied to Chassis 261 Server VM Host VM Guest LAN Switch NICs LAN Switch Port Storage In the Storage Tree resources managed by Resource Orchestrator are displayed in a tree view The following resource
244. cted from the firewall A warning was detected from the firewall The status of the firewall could not be obtained gt A pts A An error was detected from the firewall TA fatal A fatal error was detected from the firewall which is now unusable 9 hy Lal The firewall was detected to have been powered off Table 11 9 SLB Icons No new errors or warnings were detected from the SLB A warning was detected from the SLB A The status of the SLB could not be obtained An error was detected from the SLB zd A fatal error was detected from the SLB which is now unusable The SLB was detected to have been powered off MI1 Table 11 10 Integrated Network Device Icons No new errors or warnings were detected from the integrated network device A warning was detected from the integrated network device unknown The status of the integrated network device could not be obtained An error was detected from the integrated network device A fatal error was detected from the integrated network device which is now unusable The integrated network device was detected to have been powered off Table 11 11 Port Icons E No errors were detected from the port Bo An error was detected from the port e g its opposite port or NIC was disabled or the error cable between this link and its opposite port or NIC was disconnected Note This icon is displayed for the following ports The currently selected
245. d Network Pool Information on all network resources that have been created is displayed 282 Address Pool Information on all registered address sets is displayed Image Pool Information on all registered cloning images is displayed Cloning Image Information on the selected cloning image is displayed Double clicking a resource in the Resource List tab displays its Resource Details tab in the Main Panel This tab shows detailed information on the selected resource In the Resource List tab resources experiencing problems are shown with a status icon displayed on top of their resource icon Switch to the Resource Details tab to check the faulty component or open external management software to investigate the problem For details refer to Chapter 11 Monitoring Resources in the Operation Guide CE The initial display is not sorted Clicking a column heading in the Resource List tab will sort the displayed resources in ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page Physical servers physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests are displayed under the Server List Resources displayed in the Server List can be filtered by selecting or deselecting their corresponding checkboxes A 6 Resource Details Tab The Resource Details tab displays detailed information on registered resources This
246. d and the XSCF Follow the instructions in the ServerView Agents manual to change the SNMP community used by a managed server The new SNMP community should have Read Write permission In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed Change SNMP Community Click lt OK gt The SNMP community is changed For Rack Mount and Tower Servers Use the following procedure to change the SNMP community used by PRIMERGY servers For servers other than PRIMERGY servers changing SNMP communities does not require any configuration change in Resource Orchestrator 1 Change the SNMP community set on the managed server Follow the instructions in the ServerView Agents manual to change the SNMP community used by a managed server Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed Change SNMP Community Click lt OK gt The SNMP community is changed For SPARC Enterprise Servers Use the following procedure to change SNMP community used by the Remote Management Controller 1 Change the SNMP community set on the remote management controller XSCF For details on changing SNMP communities refer to the XSCF manuals 2 In the ROR console server
247. d refer to 5 17 rcxadm storagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 5 4 When using Blade Servers This section explains how to register resources when using blade servers When using blade servers use the following procedure to register resources Register Chassis Register blade servers Register LAN switch blades Configure VLANs on LAN switch blades 5 4 1 Registering Chassis This section explains how to register a chassis 26 Registering chassis makes it possible to use the optional power monitoring settings When collecting power data perform the power data collection settings according to 7 8 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings For details on devices supporting power monitoring refer to 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide CE By registering a chassis every server blade mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on registering servers to manage refer to 5 4 2 Registering Blade Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register Chassis from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address that was set on the chassis manage
248. d without specifying memory capacity or initial memory capacity for the L Server the values for the following items of the virtual machine will be same as the memory size Initial Memory Capacity StartupRAM Maximum Memory When using dynamic memory or memory weight it is necessary to apply Service Pack 1 SP1 or later to the VM host and upgrade SCVMM when using System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 SP1 or later When dynamic memory is enabled and memory weight is specified modification of the L Server fails unless there are a VM host and SCVMM with SP1 applied Note The modified value is reflected on the configuration of the L Server by periodic queries made to the VM management software For details on reflection of L Server configuration by periodic queries refer to 17 2 Modifying 197 G amp Note Immediately after a snapshot is restored there may be differences between the configuration of VM guests managed by L Server and those managed by VM management software The differences in VM guest configuration are reflected on the configuration of the L Server by periodic queries made to the VM management software For details on reflection of L Server configuration by periodic queries refer to 17 2 Modifying When changing the values for server redundancy for an L Server to which a virtual machine is already allocated the virtual machine is not changed only L Server attributes are changed So
249. d from maintenance mode G amp Note When deploying a cloning image that was collected from a Windows server the following information is reset on each destination server This is a result of the execution of Microsoft s System Preparation Sysprep tool If necessary restore the following settings to their original values after the cloning image has been deployed Desktop icons and shortcuts Drive mappings The Startup and Recovery settings accessed from the Advanced tab of the System Properties window Virtual memory settings TCP IP related settings The What country region are you in now settings in the locations defined in the Location Information window Disk quota settings Storage Provider settings Microsoft Internet Explorer settings RSS feeds subscription information information stored by the Autocomplete function saved passwords Microsoft Outlook Express settings mail directory server passwords Network card driver settings drivers without a digital signature should be replaced by the latest updated drivers with a digital signature Access rights to the Documents and Settings Default User folder While a cloning image is being deployed collection deployment and deletion cannot be performed simultaneously on the cloning images with the same name Ifacloning image is deployed to a system with a larger disk capacity than the disk space required for the cloning image any exces
250. ddress rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE 5 6 Registering Network Resources To register a network resource specify a network pool when creating the network resource Configuration is necessary for each network with which connections will be established For physical L Servers network resources for the admin LAN and public LAN are necessary For virtual L Servers network resources for the public LAN are necessary For details refer to 14 3 Network Resources 43 Prerequisites for Resource Orchestrator Operation The prerequisites for the network environment VM host and physical server used to run Resource Orchestrator differ depending on the L Server used For Physical L Servers Refer to D 4 Network Preparations in the Design Guide CE For Virtual L Servers Refer to Appendix E Preparations for Creating a Virtual L Server in the Design Guide CE Automatic Network Configuration By creating network resources in advance and connecting NIC and network resources when creating an L Server the following settings matching the network resource definition will be registered automatically Configuration of a physical NIC hereinafter a physical LAN segment used by each blade server model and VM host must be defined in the server NIC definitions Specifying the physical LAN segment defined in the server NIC definitions from the network resource allows the users to select a physical NIC for each network resource
251. ddress second mac address snmp community name ipm i ip address ipmi user name ipmi passwd pmi passwd enc admin lanl nic number admin lan2 nic number admin lan nic redundancy chassis01 1 b1ade001 192 168 3 151 1 4 ON chassis01 7 b1ade002 192 168 3 157 1 4 ON chassis01 9 b1ade003 192 168 3 159 1 4 ON rackmount001 192 168 3 200 00 E5 35 0C 34 AB public 192 168 3 199 admin admin plain OFF rackmount002 192 168 3 202 00 E5 35 0C 34 AC public 192 168 3 201 admin admin plain OFF SPARC operation server_name ip_address mgmt_snmp_community_name mgmt_ip_address mgmt_protocol mgmt_user_name m gmt_passwd mgmt_passwd_enc spe001 192 168 3 203 public 192 168 3 204 XSCF fujitsu fujitsu plain spe002 192 168 3 205 public 192 168 3 206 ILOM fujitsu fujitsu plain PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer operation chassis_name partition_no server_name ip_address boot_option pqchassis0 0 pqserver01 192 168 3 209 legacy pqchassisO 1 pqserver02 192 168 3 210 legacy pqchassisO 2 pqserver03 192 168 3 211 legacy ServerNet operation server_name nic_no vlan_id blade001 1 1 U 10 T 20 T blade001 3 1 U blade001 5 1 U blade002 1 1 U 10 T 20 T blade002 3 1 U blade002 5 1 U blade003 1 1 U blade003 3 1 U blade003 5 1 U blade001 2 1 U blade001 4 1 U blade001 6 1 U blade002 2 1 U blade002 4 1 U blade002 6 1 U blade003 2 1 U blade003 4 1 U blade003 6 1 U
252. deViewer apply to the default window For details on the Resource tab of the ROR console refer to Appendix A User Interface For details on Blade Viewer refer to Chapter 4 Blade Viewer This explains the Blade Viewer screen and the functions that it provides When logging in for the first time the ROR console is displayed Otherwise the last view used before logging out either the ROR console or Blade Viewer is displayed In this manual the Resource tab of the ROR console is sometimes referred to as the ROR console Chapter 2 License Setup and Confirmation This chapter explains how to configure and confirm licenses License Setup When using Resource Orchestrator it is necessary to configure the license first Use the following procedure to configure the license 1 After logging in to Resource Orchestrator select Tools Licenses from the menu and click lt Add gt in the displayed dialog The Register License dialog is displayed 2 In the Register License dialog enter the license key to register 3 Click lt OK gt The license will be registered When using a command execute the rexadm license command For details on the rexadm license command refer to 5 12 rcxadm license in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note After applying the Cloud Edition license restart the manager 6066060602900009090000909090029090000090902090900900090909200990900009090090909090000009009090909000009200900000
253. dentifier PXEClient option dhcp server identifier 192 168 4 100 subnet 192 168 4 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 Note Change the IP address in this line to the new takeover logical IP address 6 Unmount the shared disk Un mount the shared disk from the primary node 7 Log in to the admin server s secondary node Log in to the operating system of the admin server s secondary node with administration privileges 8 Change takeover the logical IP address Use the PRIMECLUSTER GLS command line interface to remove virtual interface settings from the PRIMECLUSTER resource register the resource and change the PRIMECLUSTER GLS configuration For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER Global Link Services manual 9 Change the cluster configuration Use the cluster RMS Wizard to change the GLS resource set in the cluster service of either one of the cluster nodes After completing the configuration save it and execute the following operations Configuration Generate Configuration Activate 10 Start the Manager s cluster service Use the cluster administration view Cluster Admin to start the Manager s cluster service 6 2 Changing Port Numbers This section explains how to change the ports used by the Manager services and related services of Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator requires the following services to be running When starting these services ensure that the ports they are using do not conflict with the ports used
254. during cloning image collection a disk is selected from the storage pool where disks which are used by the target L Server from which cloning images will be collected are registered Oracle VM The storage location for images which was specified in the Collect a Cloning Image dialog is disabled It is assumed that the virtual storage resource containing the L Server for collecting cloning images has been specified A given cloning image identified by its name attribute can be managed by image version If a cloning image is created using VM management software it can be used as is Register the server management software BMC BladeLogic Server Automation package 1 Inthe ROR console management software tree right click the target management software BladeLogic and select Update from the popup menu The BMC BladeLogic Server Automation information is updated and the detected package is registered as a cloning image 17 5 2 Viewing This section explains how to view cloning images By selecting the target image pool from the orchestration tree and displaying the Resource List tab the registered cloning images can be confirmed 212 Oracle VM When an Oracle VM image is selected in the Orchestration tree to display the Resource Details tab the OS under Image Information is not displayed From the command line execute rcxadm image list For details on the rcxadm image list command refer to 4 1 rexadm im
255. e When the takeover logical IP address is 192 168 4 100 DHCP Server Configuration file see usr share doc dhcp dhcpd conf sample ddns update style none option vendor class identifier PXEClient option dhcp server identifier 192 168 4 100 This line is added subnet 192 168 4 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 7 Unmount the shared disk Primary node Unmount the shared disk for managers from the primary node 8 Mount the shared disk Secondary node Mount the shared disk for managers on the secondary node 9 Back up files and configure symbolic links for the shared disk Secondary node a Perform step b of step 4 and back up the files on the local disk 56 b Perform step 5 and configure symbolic links for the shared disk 10 Unmount the shared disk Secondary node Unmount the shared disk for managers from the secondary node 11 Start cluster applications Use the cluster system s operation management view Cluster Admin and start the manager cluster service cluster application 12 Register the admin LAN subnet 5 12 Registering BMC BladeLogic Server Automation This section explains how to register BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Registration of BMC BladeLogic Server Automation enables use of virtual L Servers of Solaris containers For details on the required BMC BladeLogic Server Automation settings refer to H 1 Coordination with BMC BladeLogic Server Automation in the Setup Guide CE Us
256. e Server section ping timeout Enter the time out value in seconds for ping control Enter a number from 5 to 3 600 recovery action Enter a recovery process Enter one of the following Reboot reboot Reboot Forced force reboot Switchover switchover Reboot and Switchover reboot and switchover Reboot Forced and Switchover force reboot and switchover 360 reboot_count Enter the number of times to reboot Enter a number from to 3 Power Monitoring Device Data Section Name Enter PowerDevice as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line device name Enter the name that will be used to identify the power monitoring device Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Note Device names should be unique between all power monitoring devices The names are case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the power monitoring device Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods G Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read only permission as that set on the power monitoring device Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens voltage En
257. e execute rcexadm template delete For details on the rexadm template delete command refer to 8 1 rcxadm template in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Point 0606060600029200000009099900000009090090000090900990990900000090990990900000909090909000000900909090000009990900000009909000002299299 When deleting an L Server template do not delete until after confirming that it is not being used as a type of L Platform Template Server If an L Server template being used for L Platform templates and image information is mistakenly deleted rectify it by performing the following procedure 1 After unpublishing the L Platform template that uses the L Server template which was deleted from the Template tab delete it After unpublishing the image information that uses the L Server template which was deleted from the Template tab delete it In cases where deleting does not work in either 1 or 2 as there is an L Platform that has completed deployment recreate an L Server template with the same name 60606060600029200900000099909000009090909009000009090090990900000090990990900000090900900000000909090900000099909000000090909200000909299 163 Chapter 16 Creating L Servers This chapter explains how to create L Servers For an overview of the functions refer to 2 2 3 L Server in the Design Guide CE L Servers can be created using the following two methods Creation Using an L Server Template Resources are automatically selected
258. e L Server This setting is valid only if an image is specified in the General tab The setting process is performed the first time the L Server is started If an image name is not specified it is not necessary to enter all these items VMware For details on the OS tab refer to C 2 9 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V For details on the OS tab refer to C 3 10 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE KVM For details on the OS tab refer to C 6 8 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE Solaris Containers For details on the OS tab refer to C 7 7 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE A Information VMware Hyper V KVM Solaris Containers 187 OS Property Definition File By setting the default values in an OS property definition file in advance the default values of the information on the OS tab etc are generated when creating an L Server Use the UTF 8 character code for OS property definition files Use the OS property definition file for VM products It is necessary to indicate the required parameters between VM management software in the definition files Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Installation_folde SVROR Manager etc customize_data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name The definition file name can be used by dividing into definitions that are available for each user group and def
259. e Name The name of the parameter file set for the ruleset is displayed network device Preserved resource The name of the network device that configures the resource allocated to the L Platform Clicking the link displays the Resource Details tab of the network device Status The status of the resource to be used is displayed A 6 16 Tenant Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Global Pool List Name Label The name label of the global pool is displayed Type The resource pool type of the global pool is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool for automatically selecting a resource when creating an L Server is displayed Stored Resource Number The number of resources stored in the global pool is displayed Tenant L Platform Folder List Name Label The name used to identify the folder is displayed Type The type of the folder is displayed Stored Resource Number The number of stored resources is displayed 313 Pool List Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Type The type of the resource pool is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Stored Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed L Server List Name Label The name of the L Server directly under the root folder tenant is displayed Status L Server statu
260. e OS For UEFI Select UEFI For Legacy Boot Select Legacy boot By default UEFI is selected These settings can be changed after server registration For details on how to modify these settings refer to 7 1 10 Changing Boot Options Use Admin LAN redundancy checkbox Check this when performing redundancy for the NIC on the admin LAN Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox When not changing the Admin LAN NIC settings NICI Index1 and NIC2 Index2 are used without changing the NICs used for the admin LAN the HBA address rename setup service or for redundancy of the admin LAN When changing the Admin LAN NIC settings NICI Index1 and NIC2 Index2 are used as the NICs for the admin LAN the HBA address rename setup service and redundancy of the admin LAN Select the NICs to use from Admin LAN MAC address1 and Admin LAN MAC address2 Admin LAN MAC address 1 Displayed when the Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox is selected Select the NIC to use for the admin LAN The IP address allocated to the selected NIC is displayed in Admin LAN IP address When an IP address is not allocated specify the admin LAN IP address of the server to register Admin LAN MAC address 2 Displayed when the Apply Admin LAN NIC settings checkbox is selected Select the NICs used for the HBA address rename setup service or for admin LAN redundancy For the following cases select the Disable MAC address 2 Wh
261. e VLAN for both the service console and the port group configure the port group name to be excluded from network auto configuration in the VM ware Excluded Port Group Definition Files beforehand An L Server can be created even if there are multiple port groups which have the same VLAN When a user wants to perform network auto configuration using an arbitrary physical NIC specify a physical LAN segment of a server NIC definition from network resources defining a physical NIC to use for the server NIC definitions To reflect the physical NIC configuration specified in the server NIC definition file on Resource Orchestrator use the rcxadm nicdefctl commit command The command operations enable the network auto configuration to perform in the configurations using arbitrary physical NICs Ce For details on how to specify a port group to be excluded from network auto configuration refer to 14 12 VMware Exclusion Port Group Definition File in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm nicdefctl command refer to 5 15 rcxadm nicdefctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the server NIC definitions refer to 14 11 Server NIC Definitions in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target network pool and select Create Network Resource New from the popup menu The Create a network resource dialog is displayed 2 Enter the fol
262. e an L Server dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The target L Server is deleted Note When deleting an L Server log off from the ETERNUSmgr of ETERNUS storage registered on ESC When operating NetApp storage in cluster environments and operating a partial system due to system trouble perform the operation after recovering the NetApp storage and returning the system to cluster operation When the disk resource is a LUN created in advance a LUN for iSCSI boot or a disk resource for virtual L Servers it is recommended to delete the data on the disk as the data is not deleted when deleting the L Server to which the disk resource is allocated For details on how to delete data on the disks refer to the cautionary notes of 14 5 Storage Resources If they are disk resources that were created with dynamic LUN mirroring the disk resources on the local site and on the remote site are deleted simultaneously when the L Server is deleted When deleting a virtual L Server the target L Server will enter unknown status and a warning message may be displayed When the L Server has been deleted the warning message will disappear so no corrective action is necessary From the command line execute rcxadm Iserver delete For details on the rexadm Iserver delete command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 5 Cloning Image Operations This section explains how to collect and delete cloni
263. e directory service is to be performed Specify a string using up to 64 alphanumeric characters or symbols For Basic Mode Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols E mail address Specify the email address of the user Specify a string using up to 64 alphanumeric characters or symbols User Groups Select the user group to configure for the user account from the already created user group Scopes Roles Optional Access Scope Select the scope of access to set for the user account Role Select the role to set for the user account Label Optional Enter a label for the user account Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Optional Enter any comments for the user group Enter a maximum of 256 characters 5 Click lt OK gt The user account is created When using Resource Orchestrator user operations to register users in the directory service check the settings of the operation definition file for directory service operations Idap_attr rcxprop For details on the definition file for directory service operations refer to 8 6 1 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Management in the Operation Guide CE For details on the rexadm user create command refer to 7 1 rcxadm user in the Reference Guide Command XML CE amp Note 06006002090292090990900006090090290009000909909090909000900929099909900009000909909082009090090090990909000009099909909090200009099900000029900900929299 When n
264. e lower right side of each VM guest This power button represents the power status of each VM guest as shown below remm 4 14 VM ca Power e Power button button Coor O Staus Green blinking Power ON in progress Power ON or reboot in progress 14 Dis P OFF i 5 Orange blinking Power OFF in progress progress A Information The power status of a VM guest can be easily controlled by clicking on its power button Refer to 4 4 2 VM Guest for details 606060000009209000000909990990900009090909900900000909099099090900000909990000000909092090000000090909090000009099090900000909090999090000099299 4 3 4 Resource Details To view a resource s details click on its icon chassis LAN switch or physical server icon from the blade panel Chassis Clicking a chassis icon from the blade panel opens up its management blade s Web interface in a new window This Web interface provides more details on the chassis status and contents For details on the chassis icon refer to 4 3 3 Blade Panel LAN switch Clicking on a LAN switch icon opens up its LAN switch details screen This screen provides more details on the LAN switch s status and configuration For details on the LAN switch icon refer to 4 3 3 Blade Panel Physical server Clicking on a physical server icon opens it up in the ServerView Operation Manager s Web interface This interface provides more details on the physica
265. e memory can be specified Oracle VM The size of resources of hardware where VM hosts operate can be specified Solaris Containers The size of resources of hardware where VM hosts operate can be specified Operating System Type Specify the type of operating system to allocate to the L Server It is not necessary to specify this when deploying an image because the VM type of the image is used The OS type can be changed after the OS installation Hyper V If an unsupported OS type is specified installation may fail or the OS of the VM guest may not operate correctly Additionally if an incorrect OS type is specified there is a chance that image collection or L Server creation for a specified image may fail and a guest OS may start but hang while awaiting entry This occurs because Microsoft s Sysprep cannot be processed correctly during personalization processing The OS types displayed in the list are the guest OSs which can be specified on the SCVMM management console Resource Orchestrator displays all guest OSs in the list in order not to limit user selection however this does not mean that all guest OSs are supported by SCVMM Hyper V does not support some server type settings such as number of CPUs depending on the OS type When an incorrect OS type and server type are selected operation is not guaranteed Additionally even when a service pack is not listed in the OS type list it may be necessary to install the service pac
266. e of the selected VM management software is displayed in name 2 Enter the following items Location Select the location of the VM management software registration to change If VM management software is installed on the admin server Select Admin Server In other cases Select Other Server IP address If Other Server was selected enter the IP address of the server on which VM management software is installed User ID Enter the user ID to use to control VM management software Password Enter the password for VM management software 3 Click lt OK gt VM management software settings are changed 7 8 Changing Power Monitoring Environment Settings This section explains how to change power monitoring environment settings Power environment settings include environmental data settings collection cancel settings and power monitoring device settings 7 8 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings Use the following procedure to change environmental data settings 1 Select Tools Options from the ROR console menu The Options dialog is displayed 2 Click the Environmental Data category title and input the following items in the displayed area Data to collect Select the Power checkbox to start collecting power consumption data Polling interval in minutes Enter the time interval of the data collection 1 6 or 10 The number of devices that can be monitored simultaneously depends on the value of this polling interval
267. e of virtual L Servers that include resource pool management provided by server virtualization software Registration of multiple VM management software VMware vCenter Server is possible For details on the required VM management software settings refer to Appendix C Configuration when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE Resource Orchestrator manages a server with storage and networks with defined logical specifications number of CPUs memory capacity disk capacity number of NICs etc as an L Server In order to manage a virtual machine as an L Server VM management software must be registered in Resource Orchestrator Use the following procedure to register VM management software From the ROR console menu select Settings Register and then select the type of the VM management software to use The Register Management Software name dialog is displayed In name the type of the VM management software is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Management software name Enter the name of the target VM management software Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Location Select the location where the VM management software to register is operating If VM management software is installed on the admin server Select Admin Server In other cases Select Other Server S
268. e privileges 3 Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE 4 Change the location of the image file storage folder Change the location of the image file storage folder according to the instructions given in 5 9 rexadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Because image files are actually copied over to the new location this step may take some time to complete In a clustered manager configuration for details on how to change the image file storage folder location refer to Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations 5 Restart the manager Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE 6 Select the Image List tab in the ROR console and confirm the image list is same as before Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations Settings differ depending on the operating system used for the manager Windows Manager 1 Cancel registry replication settings Bring the manager s shared disk online and take all other resources offline Next remove the following registry key from the registry replication settings set for the Deployment Service cluster resource x64 SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu S ystemcastWizard ResourceDepot x86 SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard ResourceDepot Use the following procedure to remove the registry key a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right cli
269. e the following procedure to register BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Register Management Software BladeLogic The Register Management Software BladeLogic dialog is displayed 2 Set the following items Management software name Enter the name of the target BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Label Enter the Label of the Management software Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter the Comment of the Management software Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click OK BMC BladeLogic Server Automation is registered using the entered information 57 Chapter 6 Changing Admin Server Settings This chapter explains how to change the settings for the admin server 6 1 Changing Admin IP Addresses Use the following procedure to change the IP address used on the admin LAN by the admin server 1 2 Log on to the admin server with OS administrative privileges Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE Change the SNMP trap destination set for the management blade and LAN switch blades Set the SNMP trap destination to the new IP address of the admin server Note Depending on the LAN switch blade used setting an SNMP trap desti
270. ect a Server Resource dialog Select one of Automatic Pool or Server in Resource type The default is Automatic When Automatic is Selected Select a physical server automatically from the resource pool with high priority When selecting Automatic operate a resource pool with priorities When there are multiple resource pools with the same priority physical servers will be selected satisfying the conditions for a resource pool which has been searched in advance Therefore the physical server which has the least difference from the L Server definitions may not be allocated For details refer to B 9 Methods for Selecting Physical Servers Automatically in the Setup Guide CE When Pool is Selected A list of server pools which can be selected is displayed In the server pool list the server pool name and the number of servers unused total are displayed Select the server pool from the server pool list When Server is Selected The list of the physical servers that can be selected is displayed In the physical server list server names model names CPU performance memory size and NIC numbers are displayed Select the physical server to use from the physical server list 172 When creating an L Server for which only a configuration definition has been created a physical server not allocated to the L Server can be selected from the list When the Currently unusable checkbox is checked failed physical s
271. ect the appropriate resources and allocate storage pools and virtual storage resources or disk resources to the L Server Set Automatic for the default value Note 0909000909000900000000000000000900909099099099090909909099092009090909090900909000000000000000000000900999909999999 When there are storage pools with and without Thin Provisioning attributes configured that have the same priority the storage pool that will be given priority is decided based on definition files For details on definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE If dynamic LUN mirroring has been set in the virtual storage a volume is also created on the ETERNUS storage in the remote site specified in the definition file If the ETERNUS storage in the remote site has been detected by Resource Orchestrator it will be detected as a disk resource that was prepared beforehand but do not register it to the storage pool 006060000000000090090909090909299090990990990990909909900909090009090900900000000000900909090090990909990999990999990999999090999 Storage pool Select the appropriate resources and allocate storage pools to the L Server Virtual storage Displays virtual storage resources such as RAID groups or aggregates as a list Select from the displayed virtual storage resources Create the specified size of disk resources from the specified virtual storage resource and allocate them
272. ed the following fields must all be specified Rate Start day Start time End day End time Select the data sampling rate to export from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Finest sampling Hourly Daily Monthly Annual 3 Click lt OK gt In the download dialog that is displayed specify the name of the export file The data will be exported to the specified file G amp Note Exporting large amounts of data will take time The operation will fail when it takes over five minutes If the operation fails as processing on the server may not have finished wait for a while before performing the operation again In that case change the settings of Target Resources and Output time span to reduce the amount of data output The recommended export settings for environmental data are as listed below Table 13 1 Recommended export settings Output time span Output device count Hourly 132 Output time span Output device count Monthly Select Custom and specify 5 years foo 13 2 Displaying Power Consumption Data Graphs This section explains how to display power consumption data as graphs The power consumption data for each power monitoring target that is registered in the power monitoring environment can be displayed as graphs The collected power consumption data and average values of the specified time span and rate can be displayed in line graphs Use the following pr
273. ed before collecting the image Cancel the settings in the following cases NIC redundancy has been configured for admin LANs and public LANs Tagged VLANs have been configured on NICs Note However there is no need to cancel public LAN redundancy settings made via the network parameter auto configuration function The following settings are disabled during cloning image collection which may result in services failing to start on server startup To avoid this automatic startup should be disabled for any service that depends on the following settings Hostname P address and subnet mask for the admin LAN Default gateway for the admin LAN G Note When using SUSE Linux Enterprise Server it is necessary to configure the managed server so that only the NIC used for the admin LAN is active when the server is started For details on how to modify the configuration refer to the operating system manual If this procedure is not performed startup of network interfaces will take time and errors may occur during the process 3 Collect a cloning image a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the physical OS of the source server and select Cloning Collect from the popup menu The Collect a Cloning Image dialog is displayed b To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Cloning Image Name Enter a name to identify the collected cloning image 123 New When creating a new
274. ed for each L Server used 00606060600099090000090999900000909099000000090099099090000909090909909000009090990900909000009099090909090000009909090000009009090000090299 16 2 5 OS Tab Enter the parameters to set for the OS when creating the L Server This setting is valid only if an image is specified in the General tab When using an L Server with the server type Physical refer to B 7 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE 16 3 Creation of Virtual L Servers Using Parameters This section explains how to configure a virtual L Server with server storage and network specifications configured without using an L Server template Specify the values on the following tabs General Tab Server Tab Disk Tab Network Tab OS Tab Use the following procedure to create L Servers 1 Right click the target resource folder in the orchestration tree and select Create L Server from the popup menu The Create an L Server dialog is displayed 178 2 Set the items required in each tab and click lt OK gt to create the L Server Note 06060600000909090000009090909000000909099090990000090909099009090000090909090000009090090900000009009009090000009909090000000909090000009099 Each item to set has an upper limit Even when valid values are specified the creation of an L Server may fail depending on the availability of resources in resource pools the hardware configuration and the VM
275. ed for the external port of the LAN switch blade VLAN ID Uplink port settings Perform the settings for VLAN IDs and uplink ports VLAN ID Specify the VLAN ID to allocate to the LAN switch blade and virtual switch Select a VLAN ID allocated to the uplink port of the LAN switch blade or enter a number Specify a pre designed VLAN ID Enter an integer between 1 and 4094 For external networks including blade servers Select the VLAN ID of an uplink port For internal networks or external networks with rack mount servers only Enter a VLAN ID Specifying VLAN IDs and clicking lt Setting gt displays the Define VLAN ID Uplink port settings dialog Uplink port settings Chassis LAN Switch Position Port LAG Name Optional If you connect an external network to an L Server perform the settings for the internal ports and virtual switches of the LAN switch blade to enable communication for the specified ports Information for an uplink port consists of the following information Chassis name Displays the chassis name for the external connection port LAN Switch Displays the switch name for the external connection port Location to mount Displays the slot number in the chassis for the external connection port Port Displays the port number for the external connection port If the external port is a link aggregation group the port numbers of the member ports are displayed separated by commas 139 LAG If
276. ed in the last confirmation window The confirmation window of detailed configurations is displayed in order to enable confirmation of the setting values When using the confirmation window for operation there may be difference in the displayed contents Do not operate it on the confirmation screen 9000000000092990999099092000000090909090909099090000090009090999090090990992000000909099090990990900009000009909290990990000000090299299 15 1 3 Modifying Use the following procedure to modify an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed Select an L Server template to edit on the ROR L Server Template Editor window and click lt Modify gt The Modify L Server Template dialog is displayed In the Modify L Server Template dialog edit the items you want to modify and click lt Modify gt The dialog to confirm the entered information is displayed When Are you sure to copy L Server Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Modify gt The L Server template will be modified 15 1 4 Copying Use the following procedure to copy an L Server template 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed Select an L Server template to copy on
277. editing of labels or comments 4 5 2 Editing Contacts Clicking the Tools icon and selecting Set Contact Information from the drop down list displays the Set Contact Information dialog This function is only available to privileged users If logged in as a general user the Set Contact Information menu item cannot be selected Enter the following item Contact The currently defined contact information is displayed Enter a maximum of 256 characters amp Note New lines are counted as two characters Clicking Save saves the modified contact information into the manager s database The saved content will be displayed the next time the Contact dialog is opened 4 5 3 Changing Passwords Clicking the Tools icon and selecting Change Password from the drop down list displays the Change Password dialog The required information varies according to the authority level of the logged in user as described below The password is changed after entering the required information and clicking Change 20 Privileged user New password Confirm password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols General user Current password Enter the password that is currently set Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols New password Confirm password Enter a string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters or symbols 21 Chapter 5 Registering Resources This chapter explai
278. eeee eei etit bete tbe te eti Hob ea trei ebbe na reins 68 Chapter 7 Changing Resources eeeseeeeeese 7 1 Changing Chassis and Managed Server Settings Pele EMCO MUG M Em T 1 2Changmpe Server INOIBES aaepe ERO ORE EE FEDERE E E EIER sevosousdiaseacasevesugesiaaseasioa IDEE ridet E Tl Chansime Admin IP Agee seg iecore m tei been eem Oe Sr kane in tio itin ei ERE Loc ee ERE ERE Eee ERA RES FSI Chater SNMP COMMUNES a cesses 71 7 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings ici cc0 cc cicsscseecsetceassvscoasatsseasepseansescocasenssnatasasoasessvavsbeasaazsaveaseees 72 T1 Changing Port Nun enno idl aici irte eere te mei eer ek ri ERR ERR RE beer edi e PO DOR en e 73 717 Changing VM Host Losin Account Information eren retento edt tti ee top suse vests eer PUR xt e EHE 73 34 8 Changing the VLAN settings of LAN Switch Blades oce rtr errat hei etd bene dn 74 FAD Chansime HBA address renang Gellia ences tet ete net ke sang EA Ro b a sortes ERES EA na cies PO bere ekle 74 A110 Camis Boot OPONE 74 TJ 1E E hansie Admin e o A iret ree e epe EE A E e E EE EE eed 74 7 2 Changing Settings for the HBA address rename Setup ServiG inue tree esien tlt rea caa tede da te Re ecd re eoe EEEa 75 72 1 Changing the UP Address of the Puch NOPVEE iiie eerte rette Lente neon VETE re Fe FEE rta CH S ERRE EEAS 75 7 2 2 Changing the IP Add
279. egistered Admin LAN Subnets Use the following procedure to create a network resource using an admin LAN subnet and register it in a network pool 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target network pool and select Create Network Resource Using existing admin subnet from the popup menu The Create a network resource dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items Network resource name Clicking lt Select gt displays the Select a subnet for the admin LAN dialog Select an already configured admin LAN subnet When the selected admin LAN subnet has no name enter the name of a network resource for Network resource name Enter up to 32 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters on on upper or lower case underscores periods or hyphens Click lt OK gt Type Admin LAN is displayed VLAN ID Uplink port settings Refer to VLAN ID Uplink port settings of 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Subnet settings Optional Refer to Subnet settings Optional of 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Ruleset Optional Refer to Ruleset Optional in 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Physical LAN segment Optional Refer to Physical LAN segment Optional in 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Label Optional Refer to Label Optional of 14 3 1 Creating New Network Resources Comment Option
280. elect the following values according to the system configuration Procedures for Single path Configurations Specify 1 for HBA ports Procedures for Multi path Configurations Select the number of multi paths for HBA ports However it is necessary to select 1 during installation of the operating system Select the number of paths and reconfigure HBA address rename settings after setting up the multi path driver Portn WWPN Enter or select the WWPN of an HBA collected from physical servers When using a multi path configuration enter the values of the HBAs and the corresponding CAs of servers in the same order based on the values in 8 1 6 Settings when Switching Over SPARC Enterprise Servers in the Design Guide CE Target CA Select WWPNs of storage CA and AffinityGroup on Select hyphens to keep spare servers inactive Also select a hyphen when deleting Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity in the configured WWN information When using a server on which an agent is registered as a spare server the server must meet one of the following conditions When the WWPN of the target CA is the same value as that of the primary server When the AffinityGroup value is different from the value of the primary server When agents are not registered on ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser G amp Note on When using the storage affinity switchover method if a hyphen is selected the storage path s
281. electing this option activates the IP address field Enter the IP address of the server on which VM management software is installed By default Admin Server is selected IP address Enter the IP address of VM management software When specifying Admin Server for the location entry is not possible as the IP address of admin server remains displayed on Enter the IP address using periods amp Note When receiving SNMP traps from VM management software VMware vCenter Server the configured IP address and the SNMP trap source IP address of the VM management software VMware vCenter Server should be the same The SNMP trap 293 source IP address is the IP address of the protocol with the highest priority of protocol binding When changing the SNMP trap source IP address change the order of protocol binding User ID Enter the user ID to use to control VM management software Enter up to 84 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e Password Enter the password for VM management software Enter up to 128 characters including alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e 3 Click lt OK gt VM management software is registered with the entered information A Information Registration and management of multiple VM management software VMware vCenter Server are possible The following VM management software can be registered in Resource Orc
282. elete the data on the disk as the data is not deleted when the disk is detached For details on how to delete data on the disks refer to the cautionary notes of 14 5 Storage Resources When using physical L Servers disks or networks cannot be detached from the L Server that iSCSI boot is being adopted If No is selected for Detach Selections disks this setting is only valid for disk resources when reducing Specifying this does not allow indefinite saving of disk resources If they are disk resources that were created with dynamic LUN mirroring the disk resources on the local site and on the remote site are deleted simultaneously when the L Server is deleted The disk resources detached from a virtual L Server on Hyper V can only be saved when using Microsoft R System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager When the snapshots are collected from a virtual L Server on Hyper V detached disk resources cannot be saved From the command line execute rcxadm lserver detach To detach a disk from an L Server while the power of the L Server is on specify the online option command For details on the rexadm Iserver detach command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Hyper V When changing the configuration a maximum of up to four disks can be specified at one time To perform addition of five or more disks please perform an additional configuration change A Information When not deleti
283. en in B 2 File Format The following operations usually performed from the ROR console can be equally performed using the pre configuration function Registration 5 1 Registering VIOM Coordination 5 4 When using Blade Servers 5 52 Registering LAN Switches 52 Registering VM Management Software 5 10 Registering Power Monitoring Devices 1 5 11 Registering Admin LAN Subnets 5 4 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switches 5 5 3 HBA address rename Settings 2 Chapter 8 Configuring Monitoring Information in the Setup Guide VE Chapter 18 Server Switchover Settings in the User s Guide VE Modification 6 1 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 7 1 11 Changing Admin LAN Subnets 7 1 2 Changing Server Names 7 1 3 Changing Admin IP Addresses 3 7 1 4 Changing SNMP Communities 7 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings 7 1 7 Changing VM Host Login Account Information 7 1 8 Changing the VLAN Settings of LAN Switch Blades 7 1 9 Changing HBA address rename Settings 2 7 1 10 Changing Boot Options 7 3 Changing VIOM Registration Settings 7 4 Changing LAN Switch Settings 7 7 Changing VM Management Software Settings 7 8 Changing Power Monitoring Environment Settings 7 9 Changing Monitoring Information Settings 18 3 Changing Server Switchover Settings in the User s Guide VE To start collecting environment data the collection settings
284. en in When VLANs for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades Have not been Configured to delete a target network resource 2 If the VLAN configured for the external connection port of the LAN switch blade is not necessary follow the procedure from step 3 to delete a target network resource 3 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 4 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Under VLAN select Change Selecta VLAN ID Select None as the VLAN type to delete For details refer to 7 4 2 Changing VLANs Set for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades 5 Click OK 6 Confirm that the VLAN has been deleted In the ROR console server tree click the LAN switch blade that includes the port specified as the external connection port of the network resource In the switch details displayed confirm that no VLAN is configured for the specified port amp Note Deleting a network resource with a VLAN configured for an external connection port of a LAN switch blade does not delete that VLAN Cr eocecee e000606200202000006000099006002999 eccccs520569 eccc 0ccc920c062629 9 6 Deleting VM Management Software This section explains how to delete VM management software Use the following procedure to delete VM management software 94 1 In the
285. en not using the HBA address rename setup service When not performing admin LAN redundancy G amp Note Ce ey For details about the network interface s used on the admin LAN refer to 9 1 1 Admin LAN Network Design in the Design Guide CE If an incorrect network interface is used Resource Orchestrator will not be able to detect the correct admin LAN IP address from the operating system running on the target server An admin LAN IP address is required even when registering a spare server Enter an IP address that does not conflict with the IP address of any other managed server on the admin LAN When registering a newly mounted PRIMERGY BX900 server as recognition of this server s admin LAN MAC address will take time error message number 61142 may be displayed In this case after registration has been canceled right click the chassis on the server resource tree and select Update from the popup menu to request an update of hardware properties This will update the MAC address to the correct value This may also 30 take a few minutes to obtain hardware information and update internal properties Confirm that the correct MAC address is displayed correctly before registering the server again For details on the appropriate corrective action refer to Message number 61142 in Messages Aserver running a VM host can still be registered as a physical OS if its Server OS category is set to Windows Linux For Windows S
286. enable admin LAN redundancy on the registered server Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited XX XX XX XX XX XX This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using the HBA address rename setup service When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy Admin LAN Redundancy Use Admin LAN redundancy checkbox Check this when performing redundancy for the NIC on the admin LAN MAC address NIC2 Enter the MAC address of the second admin LAN network interface This network interface will be used to enable admin LAN redundancy on the registered server Enter a MAC address in either one of the following two formats hyphen delimited xx xx xx xx xx xx or colon delimited 237 XX XX XX XX XX XX This field can be omitted in the following cases When not using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the managed server For a spare server whose primary servers are not using admin LAN redundancy OS Type This option is displayed if the target server runs a physical OS or VM host Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting VM Host activates the user ID and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during installation of this VM host Select the server OS category depending on whethe
287. ent console installed on the Console 4 7 10 client machine Migrate VM Guest EUM TN re Migrates a VM guest to a different VM host 11 Cannot be selected for a VM guest 2 Available only for VM hosts when using PRIMEQUEST 3 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST 4 This option may or may not be available according to the server virtualization software used For details refer to D 1 Common Functions of Server Virtualization Software in the Design Guide VE 5 Available only for PRIMERGY BX servers 6 Cannot be set for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 7 This menu is not available for a physical OS 8 Cannot be selected for a VM host 9 Available only for PRIMERGY series PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise M series servers 10 To use this feature a VM management console must be installed and the admin client must be configured properly After installing the VM management console select this menu item and follow the instructions shown in the displayed dialog 11 Can only be selected for VM guests Table A 5 Popup Menus Available for Physical OSs Solaris Popup Menu Function Spare Server Settings Modifies a server s recovery settings Modify Modifies a SPARC Enterprise server s monitoring Monitoring Settings f settings Powers on a SPARC Enterprise server OFF Powers off a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down its operating system 269 Popup Me
288. enu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The L Server is stopped Use the following procedure to stop forcibly 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Power OFF Forced from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The L Server is stopped forcibly For L Servers for which Resource release setting is configured server resources are released For details on Resource release refer to 16 2 2 Server Tab or 16 3 2 Server Tab From the command line execute rcxadm lserver stop For details on the rcxadm lserver stop command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE amp Note If no OS is installed on the L Server the L Server may not be stopped In that case perform a forced stop Oracle VM Depending on the presence or absence of the VirtualizationMethod attribute and the PV Paravirtualized driver of VM guests stopping operations may cause a forced stop and a forced stopping operation may cause a stop 17 1 3 Restarting an L Server This section explains how to restart an L Server Use the following procedure to restart an L Server 191 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Power Reboot from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The L Server is restarted Use the following procedure to restart forcibly 1 Right clic
289. er as the section name 357 Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section spare server Enter the physical server name of a server to be assigned as a spare server n To specify multiple spare servers separate each server name using semicolons To remove current spare server settings enter DELETE vlan switch optional Specify whether VLAN settings or port group settings should be automatically transferred to the spare server when a server switchover occurs Enter ON OFF or a hyphen auto switch optional This value defines whether or not to trigger an automatic switchover upon detection of a server failure Enter ON OFF or a hyphen boot_type Enter the boot type of the server Enter one of the following SAN boot SAN For local boot local When using the VIOM server profile to conduct boot settings Hyphens spare server force off Enter whether the spare server is turned off forcibly when switching over to the spare server Enter ON OFF or a hyphen 7 spare server with vm guest Enter whether the server is switched to a VM host on which a VM guest exists Enter ON OFF or a hyphen VM Management Software Information Section Name Enter VMManager as the section name Sect
290. er 11 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enter
291. er a character string beginning with an alphabetic character upper or lower case and containing up to 32 alphanumeric characters upper or lower case and underscores Update Select when specifying the same name as that of a cloning image which has already been collected Select the cloning image from the list Cloning images with the same name can be saved up until the maximum number of image versions The maximum number of image versions is three by default Image Configurations for Virtual L Servers with Hyper V VM Type To collect cloning images involving data disks check the Collect all disks checkbox When not checked only system disks will be collected Image location For Virtual L Servers Select the storage location for cloning images Clicking Select displays the Select a Location for this Image dialog Select the storage location and click OK Destination Pool Select the image pool to register cloning images in 210 Comment Optional Enter a comment that identifies the cloning image Up to 128 characters other than percent signs 96 back slashes V double quotes and line feed characters can be specified 3 Click lt OK gt Cloning images are stored in image pools When lt Cancel gt is clicked in the Recent Operations area the confirmation dialog to quit the process is displayed From the command line execute rcxadm image create For details on the rexadm image create command
292. er and the OS operating on it using hierarchies role A collection of operations that can be performed ROR console The GUI that enables operation of all functions of Resource Orchestrator ruleset A collection of script lists for performing configuration of network devices configured as combinations of rules based on the network device the purpose and the application SAN Storage Area Network A specialized network for connecting servers and storage SAN boot A configuration function that enables the starting and operation of servers via a SAN The OS and applications used to operate servers are stored on SAN storage not the internal disks of servers SAN storage Storage that uses a Fibre Channel connection script list Lists of scripts for the automation of operations such as status and log display and definition configuration of network devices Used to execute multiple scripts in one operation The scripts listed in a script list are executed in the order that they are listed As with individual scripts they can are created by the infrastructure administrator and can be customized to meet the needs of tenant administrators They are used to configure virtual networks for VLANs on physical networks in cases where it is necessary to perform auto configuration of multiple switches at the same time or to configure the same rules for network devices in redundant configurations The script lists contain the scripts
293. er from the list will switch the view to the blade panel and display the selected server within its enclosing chassis 19 Editing Labels and Comments This function is only available to privileged users General users are only able to consult labels and comments Privileged user In the Label List dialog select a server and click lt Modify gt The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed The label and comment of the selected server can be edited directly from the Modify Server Settings dialog Enter the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to 0x7e G amp Note 06060000009209009009000000060090909090909090900000009009209050909000000000000090909090990900000000009090909200000000000009099 New lines are counted as two characters Additional information such as OS name server name for a physical OS the physical server name for a VM guest the VM guest name and IP address are displayed to help identify the selected server Clicking Save saves the modified label and comment into the manager s database The saved content is then updated and displayed in BladeViewer General user If logged in as a general user Show is displayed in place of Modify in the Label List dialog Clicking Show displays the Server Properties dialog but does not allow
294. er of resources displayed in the resource list 4 Select the resource to be moved from the Resource List 5 Click lt OK gt The target resource is moved to the selected resource pool When using tenants to segregate resources movement of resources may be limited For details refer to Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations When using Thin Provisioning or Automatic Storage Layering the destination resource pools that can be selected differ depending on whether Thin Provisioning and Thick Provisioning of storage pools are configured or not For details on destination resource pools and the resources which can be registered refer to 10 1 2 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide CE amp Note When the disk resource to be moved is a LUN created in advance or a disk resource for virtual L Servers it is recommended to delete the data on the disk beforehand For details on how to delete data on the disks refer to the cautionary notes of 14 5 Storage Resources Moving Resources between Folders Use the following procedure to move a resource to another resource folder 1 Right click the target resource in the tree and select Move to Folder from the popup menu The Move a Resource or Move a Pool dialog is displayed 2 Select the destination resource folder 3 Click OK The target resource is moved to the destination resource folder When using tenants to segregate resources movement of resources may be limited F
295. er on which the agent was installed it is necessary to either reboot the server or restart its related services explained in the 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE after server registration This step has to be done before running any image operation system image backup or cloning image collection For details on how to restart the agent refer to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE When registering resources directories and files that are necessary for performance monitoring are created on the server where the resources are registered Refer to C 6 9 Advisory Notes for RHEL KVM Usage in the Setup Guide CE for details 000600200909090990900009090909209090000900909909900000090900909049090000090090990900000090909090000009090909090900000999090990900009092920909000009999 5 4 3 Registering LAN Switch Blades To register a LAN switch blade its enclosing chassis must be registered first Use the following procedure to register a LAN switch blade 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click an unregistered LAN switch blade from the target chassis and select Register LAN Switch from the popup menu The Register LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined LAN switch name Enter the name to assign to this LAN switch blade Enter up to 15 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case
296. er or lower case underscores periods and hyphens Xen Oracle VM Periods cannot be used KVM Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores or hyphens Oracle VM Enter the location using 32 characters or less G amp Note Do not enter more than 32 characters Cr ey Solaris Containers Enter up to 52 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters on on periods and hyphens upper or lower case underscores Enter up to 63 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores periods and on hyphens However names which start with SUNW cannot be used The name global cannot be used when the configuration uses the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM For the 179 configuration to use the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM machine refer to Table 17 4 List of Items Specified in the Definition File of 17 8 1 Installation Destination folder Select a resource folder or a tenant to store L Servers Template Specify None in the selection list Server type Enter the type of server for the L Server to be created Select VM
297. er registration to the directory service is not to be performed Check if user information is registered in the directory service If the user information has not been registered in the directory service register it before proceeding further This operation is not necessary when using internal authentication in Basic mode 2 In the ROR console select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 3 Click Add The Add User Account dialog is displayed 4 Set the following User ID When user registration to the directory service is to be performed The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including underscores 7 hyphens and periods When user registration to the directory service is not to be performed Specify a user ID registered in the directory service For Basic Mode When using authentication by directory services or when using Single Sign On Specify a user ID registered in the directory service When using internal authentication The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long including underscores RAS hyphens o on and periods Please note that user names are case sensitive Password Confirm password This is only displayed when registering the user in the directory service or for Basic mode when internal authentication is used When user registration to th
298. eral information or specifications of a virtual L Server and when creating a link between a configured virtual machine and an L Server The names of L Servers created with false set for this item will automatically change when VM names are changed However the VM name must conform to the naming conventions for L Servers 17 8 2 Operations This section explains how to allocate resources to and release resources from L Servers and how to modify configuration definition information 17 8 2 1 Allocating Resources When an L Server is started resources are allocated to it For details on how to start an L Server refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server When an L Server is first started server and disk resources are allocated to it When cloning images are specified deployment of images is also performed When server resources of L Servers have been released server resources will be allocated 17 8 2 2 Releasing Resources When stopping an L Server server resources will be released For details on how to stop an L Server refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server Methods for releasing server resources differ depending on whether the server is a physical L Server or virtual L Server Physical L Server The physical server that was used for the L Server will be released Virtual L Server VM guests that are created on VM hosts are excluded from the target for calculation of the total amount of VM host usage 17 8 2 3 Modifying Confi
299. erations Manager was previously known as ServerView Console ServerView RAID One of the RAID management tools for PRIMERGY ServerView Update Manager This is software that performs jobs such as remote updates of BIOS firmware drivers and hardware monitoring software on servers being managed by ServerView Operations Manager ServerView Update Manager Express Insert the ServerView Suite DVD1 or ServerView Suite Update DVD into the server requiring updating and start it This is software that performs batch updates of BIOS firmware drivers and hardware monitoring software Single Sign On A system among external software which can be used without login operations after authentication is executed once slave slot A slot that is not recognized as a server when a server that occupies multiple slots is mounted 379 SMB Server Message Block A protocol that enables the sharing of files and printers over a network SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A communications protocol to manage monitor and control the equipment that is attached to a network software initiator An initiator processed by software using OS functions Solaris container resource pool The Solaris Containers resource pool used in the global zone and the non global zone Solaris Containers Solaris server virtualization software On Solaris servers it is possible to configure multiple virtual Solaris servers that are referred to as a So
300. ers refer to 5 8 2 Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register PRIMEQUEST from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the virtual IP address that was set on the chassis management board on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on the chassis management board Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens Remote server management User ID Enter the ID of a remote server management user account with administrative authority over this managed server This user ID must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long A user ID with at least administrator privileges within the remote server management must be specified Password Enter the password of the above remote server management user account This password must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long 46 Note The User ID and Password of Remote server manageme
301. ers and for Hyper V Virtual L Servers If a disk resource that has been created from the virtual storage is selected in the Resource List then setting can be made with the following option buttons when reducing disks Yes The disk resources are deleted when they are reduced No Disk resources are not deleted when reducing and they are registered in the same storage pool as the virtual storage they were created from Detach disks for Virtual L Servers When detaching disks check the Detach disks checkbox Detach disks when the L Server is running When detaching disks while the L Server is powered on check the Detach disks when the L Server is running checkbox 3 Click OK 201 Note When using RHEL KVM virtual L Servers the L Server must be powered off in order to detach a disk When using a virtual L Server on something other than RHEL KVM and when detaching a disk resource virtual L Server on Hyper V the content of the detached disk is deleted After checking the advisory notes in the displayed dialog check the Detach disks checkbox If disks are detached while the server is powered on it is necessary to change the status of the disk into unused in advance After checking the advisory notes in the displayed dialog check the Detach disks when the L Server is running checkbox When the disk resource is a LUN created in advance or a disk resource for virtual L Servers it is recommended to d
302. erver and assign a static MAC address to that virtual machine using VM management software or start the virtual machine wait for 3 minutes and then create the link with the L Server For a virtual L Server linked with a configured virtual machine a hyphen on the Resource Details tab on the ROR console is displayed for Usage in the Disk Information displayed Solaris Containers When the cap values of CPU memory of a virtual machine linked with an L Server have not been specified a different method is used for calculating the number of possible L Servers For details on the calculation method refer to Max Number of Possible L Servers View in 20 6 Viewing When importing a Solaris Container related to an L Server into L Platform management functions it is necessary to add NIC information to the L Server Create a network resource if necessary and then add NIC information 18 5 Changing Configuration This section explains how to change configurations of L Servers linked to configured physical servers or virtual machines For details on configuration changes refer to Chapter 7 Changing Resources From the command line execute rcxadm lserver modify For details on the rexadm lserver modify command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G amp Note Disks cannot be attached or detached to and from L Servers which do not manage storage 0060000092909000000909099290990900000
303. erver 2008 etc A VM host server that was mistakenly registered as a physical OS should be deleted and re registered as a VM host The same NIC cannot be selected for Admin LAN MAC address 1 and Admin LAN MAC address 2 For the following cases after selecting Disable MAC address 2 for Admin LAN MAC address 2 the lowest numbered NIC which is not used for Admin LAN MAC address 1 is used for Admin LAN2 When using the HBA address rename setup service When performing admin LAN redundancy 3 Click lt OK gt The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree G Note When an agent is registered on a VM host all VM guests running on that VM host are also registered automatically Whenever a VM guest is created modified deleted or moved on a registered VM host the changes are automatically updated in the server resource tree The VM guest name displayed in the ROR console is either the VM name defined in its server virtualization software or the host name defined in the guest OS The timing at which the host name of a guest OS is detected and displayed varies according its server virtualization software For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE It is recommended not to use duplicate names for physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests If duplicated names are used those resources cannot be managed from the command line When registering a serv
304. erver creation is displayed 304 amp Note Solaris Containers The number of CPUs is displayed based on a cap value when a resource pool used in non global zone is changed from unmanaged to managed When a cap value is set the CPU performance is calculated using the following formulas Number of CPUs cap values of CPUs 100 rounding up the number of decimal places When the cap values calculated using the CPU performance and the number of CPUs for L Servers are the same as those configured for the non global zone the CPU performance and the number of CPUs for L Servers are not updated and the values are not changed from the configured values When a cap value is not set a hyphen is displayed A hyphen is displayed for the number of CPUs when a resource pool used in the non global zone is changed from managed to unmanaged Memory Allocated Value Define Value The memory capacity defined for the L Server is displayed Defined Value The memory capacity of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Allocated Value The memory capacity defined during L Server creation is displayed G amp Note Solaris Containers When the cap value of memory is set that value is displayed When the cap value of memory is not set a hyphen is displayed Model Allocated Value Define Value The model name defined for the L Server is displayed Defined Value The model name of the physica
305. erver uses resources in another tenant the L Server will not be the target of powering on From the command line execute rcxadm folder start For details on the rexadm folder start command refer to 3 5 rexadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Stopping an L Server in a Resource Folder Use the following procedure to stop an L Server in a resource folder Right click the target resource folder or tenant in the orchestration tree and select Power OFF from the popup menu The Power OFF L Servers dialog is displayed Point A list of L Servers that are targets of the power operation is displayed They are displayed in order with low priority Even if the list of L Server is not displayed the power supply can be operated 06060606062060002929929200900000000909090990909090000000900909090909009000000000090909099209900000000000909920909900000000909999 2 Click OK L Servers in a resource folder are stopped in the order of priority From the command line execute rcxadm folder stop For details on the rexadm folder stop command refer to 3 5 rcxadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Restarting an L Server in a Resource Folder Use the following procedure to restart an L Server in a resource folder 1 Right click the target resource folder or tenant in the orchestration tree and select Power Reboot from the popup menu The Reboot L Servers dialog is displayed Point A list of L Se
306. ervers and physical servers that have inconsistencies in their admin LAN network configurations are displayed in the list When the Busy checkbox is checked the following physical servers are displayed in the list Physical servers already allocated to other L Servers Physical servers already assigned as spare servers Physical servers with an OS installed Note 900000000099090990990990909909900000090909990990909090900000000909909909099099090090000090909090990999090990990900000009099090990990990900000000909999 The Select a Server Resource dialog works as follows depending on the configuration status of admin LAN network resources on the NICs in the General tab or the Network tab When admin LAN network resources are unset on the NIC Depending on the selected physical server or the server pool admin LAN network resources are automatically set on the NIC configurations in the General tab or the Network tab For details on the resources automatically set refer to the General tab or the Network tab When admin LAN network resources have been set on the NIC Physical servers or server pools matching the admin LAN network NIC configurations that are set on the General tab or the Network tab are displayed When not filtering resources using admin LAN network settings open the Select a Server Resource dialog after deleting the settings Resource release Specify whether to release the physical server alloc
307. esource list in ascending alphabetical order of resource names registered Displays the resource list in the order in which the resources were registered or created Note To enable the above mentioned setting restart the manager after editing the definition file The orders of some lists such as for blade servers in the server tree cannot be changed A 5 Resource List Tab The Resource List tab in the Main Panel displays a list of resources related to the resource that was selected in the resource tree For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE The table below shows the information displayed in the Resource List for each selectable resource Server Resources Information on all registered chassis servers and LAN switches Chassis Information on registered servers and LAN switch blades mounted in the selected chassis is displayed For PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers information on the partitions configured on the chassis is displayed Server Information on the physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests running on the selected server Physical OS Information on the selected physical OS VM Host Information on the VM guests running on the selected VM host VM Guest Information on the selected VM guest 281 Network Devices Information on the selected network device is displayed Unregistered Server
308. esponding LAN switch is not registered The corresponding LAN switch is not operating in IBP mode 291 The corresponding LAN switch port has not been assigned to a port group Monitoring Information Timeout sec The time out value in seconds for ping monitoring is displayed Recovery method The recovery performed when an error is detected is displayed Number of reboots The number of times reboot is performed during recovery is displayed WWN Settings Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests or servers other than SPARC Enterprise servers WWPN of port n n 1 8 The WWPN value of the port z is displayed Values set by users are reflected on WWPN Target CA WWPN The WWPN for the CA connected to the port n is displayed Target CA AffinityGroup The AffinityGroup for the CA connected to the port z is displayed Automatic Network Configuration The following information is displayed when the VM host is a target of network auto configuration and only when automatic network configuration has been performed Network resource name The network resource name for which automatic network configuration is performed is displayed VLAN ID The VLAN ID configured for the network resource is displayed Subnet Address The subnet address configured for the network resource is displayed When it is not configured is displayed Subnet Mask The subnet mask configured for the network resource is displayed
309. esponsive servers when their operating system does not respond for a given period It is therefore highly recommended to disable the Watchdog function before a cloning operation For details refer to the manual of the managed server When using MAK license activation with Windows Server 2008 Sysprep can be executed a maximum of three times Since Sysprep is executed when deploying a cloning image cloning image collection and deployment cannot be executed four or more times Therefore it is recommended not to collect cloning images from managed servers that have had cloning images deployed but to collect them from a dedicated master server As there is a chance that data will be damaged do not perform collection or deployment of a cloning image while performing an iSCSI connection using a software initiator When using data disks use the hardware initiator 12 2 Collecting When installing servers using the cloning function first collect a cloning image from a source server Collected cloning images can later be used for the deployment of other servers A cloning image can be collected only from a managed server on which an agent has been registered For details on registering agents refer to Chapter 11 Installing Software and Registering Agents on VM Hosts in the Setup Guide CE A cloning image can be collected from a managed server that satisfies the following conditions The status is either normal or warning Has been
310. ess takeover function G amp Note When BladeLogic is being used for server management software remove the managed servers that have been added to BladeLogic and add them again When adding managed servers specify their admin IP address Restart the managed server In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed Change Admin LAN IP address Click OK The admin IP address of the managed server is changed 70 G amp Note It is not possible to change IP address settings of a managed server primary server with a spare server configured to a different subnet from the spare server Ce 7 1 4 Changing SNMP Communities This section explains how to change SNMP community settings For blade servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Use the following procedure to change SNMP community used by chassis and managed servers 1 Change the SNMP community set on the management blade management board or XSCF The new SNMP community should have Read Write permission For details on changing SNMP communities refer to the manual of the management blade management board or XSCF Change the SNMP community set on the managed server Use the same name for the SNMP community of the managed server on the management blade the management boar
311. et When not performing batch power operations check the Exclude from batch power operations checkbox FC settings FC connection pattern If the number of FCs fitted or their location differs from physical server to physical server specify an FC connection pattern file This setting can be made when the storage units are the following For details refer to B 1 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE EMC CLARiiON Storage EMC Symmetrix DMX Storage EMC Symmetrix VMAX Storage Note When FC connection patterns are not displayed in the selection list there are errors in the configuration file Review the configuration files for FC connection patterns referring to B 1 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE 90600000000900990992909990990990990000000909999099090990900000009090909900099009000009090090909999090990990000009099990990990909000000099099999 x 174 Indicates the settings for when the server starts FC path When installing an OS manually check the Single path mode checkbox When an image is not specified it is automatically checked After installing a multi path driver on an OS perform 17 2 1 Modifying Specifications and clear the Single path mode checkbox For details refer to B 5 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE Boot Mode Specify the L Server boot method Normal Specify this mode when performing the boot from the disk connected to the L Server NIC for PXE boot
312. ettings will be deleted 0606000000000000000000000000090090092090990909 09090090900900900009009000000000000090909000900909929999909990990990920999090999 3 Click OK Perform configuration or deletion of Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity based on the configured WWN information When the target operation server is registered on ESC the status should be as below Configuration The server should be turned on Deletion The server should be turned off When configuration and deletion of Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity have been already executed no operations will be performed on the devices G amp Note For WWPN value specification check that the value does not overlap with the WWPN used for HBA address rename or VIOM If the same WWPN is used there is a chance data on storage units will be damaged When configuration or deletion of Fibre Channel switches or storage units performed a warning dialog is displayed Make sure that there are no problems in the settings then click lt OK gt 89 If the target CA is not displayed confirm the status of the following settings ESC is correctly registered on Resource Orchestrator Fibre Channel switches and storage units are correctly registered Only one access path is configured on ESC for each CA of an HBA 8 2 Deploying Cloning Images For the second and subsequent servers operating systems are created using
313. ever the HA function will place a VM guest on an enabled VM host in the following cases The HA function is not located on a disabled VM host There is no available CPU or memory The status power status and maintenance mode of other VM hosts are not suitable Solaris Containers If the HA checkbox is selected It is located on a VM host with a spare server configured When there are no VM hosts with a spare server configured the L Server for which a configuration definition has already been created cannot be started If the HA checkbox is not selected It will be preferentially located on a VM host without a spare server configured However in the following cases the VM guest will be located on a VM host with a spare server configured There are no VM hosts without a spare server configured There is no available CPU or memory The status power status and maintenance mode of other VM hosts are not suitable A Information If the HA function is located on an enabled VM host the HA function of the server virtualization software will be enabled When a problem occurs on the physical server that the VM host is operating on the virtual machine can be recovered by restarting it on a VM host that is operating normally Hyper V In Hyper V environments this setting is ignored and VM guests are always located on clustered VM hosts KVM In RHEL KVM environments this setting is ignored and set as none since there are
314. f LAN switches have been registered delete all LAN switches before deleting the chassis 9 2 Deleting Managed Servers This section explains how to delete managed servers Use the following procedure to delete managed servers 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or the physical OS or the VM host on the server and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed If a VM host is running on the server to be deleted any VM guests running on that host are also deleted from the server resource tree at the same time The VM guests to be deleted appear in the Delete Resource dialog so check that it is safe to delete them 2 Click OK Ifa physical OS or VM host exists on the target server and HBA address rename is set The server will be powered off and the target server will be unregistered when the resource is deleted Resource Orchestrator does not delete the host affinity settings of storage units or the zoning settings of Fibre Channel switches If WWN information is set for the target server The host affinity settings of storage units and the zoning settings of Fibre Channel switches will be deleted when the SPARC server is deleted Ifthe deleted server is a PRIMERGY BX series server a PRIMEQUEST server or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server The target server will be unregistered and remain in the server resource tree 91 A Informa
315. f an L Server of 2 2 3 L Server in the Design Guide CE 0606060600029200000009090990000000909090090000009009099090000009099099000000090900000000009099000000099909000000099090000099299 250 Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations This appendix explains resource folders which are used when managing a large number of resources or when you want to divide resources according to certain conditions Resource Folders Resource folders are used when managing a large number of resources or when you want to divide resources according to certain conditions Resources stored in resource folders can be freely placed Using hierarchical folders other resource folders can be stored in the resource folders Resource folders enable you to do the following Since the number of resources selected at the same time is reduced selection is simplified Resources can be categorized in detail You may want to share some resources between departments in case of future changes or faults while maintaining the segregation of resources for each department Tenants In Resource Orchestrator the unit for division of management and operation of resources based on organizations or operations is called a tenant L Servers and dedicated resource pools for each tenant are stored in tenants The exclusive resource pool for each tenant is called a local pool There is a resource pool which can be used by multiple tenants other than a local pool This res
316. figuration file However this header is automatically changed to second mac address when exporting a new system configuration file snmp community name Enter the name of the SNMP community read permission assigned to this server Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens G Note This field is not necessary when using servers other than the PRIMERGY series ipmi_ip_address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods G Note e00606060000209990909920920000000099992909909290900000000900929099900999099000000909099929099099090009000090999290929000000009029299 IP addresses should be unique between all resources ipmi user name Enter the name of a remote management controller user account with administrative privileges Enter a string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 to Ox7e amp Note 0 060060000009299090909090000000909292929009000000009090990909090990900090900000900999909909090900000009009909099099000000009099999 If the name of the current administrator account on the remote management controller is longer than 16 characters either create a new account or rename the current account within 16 characters 352 ipmi passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller user account Enter a string of up to 16 alphanumeric char
317. following information is displayed only for VM Hosts VM type The type of the VM is displayed VM software name The name of the VM software used is displayed VM software VL The version and level of the VM software used is displayed Number of VM guests The number of VM guests is displayed VM management software The link to the web interface of a server virtualization software is displayed VM guests A list of hosted VM guests is displayed VM Home Positions VM Guests A list of the VM guests with the selected VM host set as their VM Home Position is displayed 289 VM Guest Information Area The following information is displayed only for VM guests VM type The type of the VM is displayed VM host name The name of the VM host on which the VM guest is stored is displayed VM name The name of the VM is displayed VM management software The link to the web interface of a server virtualization software is displayed Hardware Details Area The following information is not displayed for VM guests Server management software The link to the web interface of a server management software is displayed Displayed only when PRIMERGY servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Remote Management Controller IP address IP address of the remote management controller is displayed Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers Latest System Image Area The following information is not displayed for V
318. for L Servers Snapshot is the function that saves the state and configuration of an L Server disk at the time the snapshot is taken When using virtual L Servers the snapshot function of server virtualization software is used Restoring a collected snapshot restores the following L Server parameters to their state when the snapshot was taken Number of CPUs CPU Performance CPU Shares Memory Size Memory Shares Operating System Type Configuration and Size of the Disk Network OS Settings A Information The following parameters cannot be restored using the snapshot function of the server virtualization software Therefore change L Server specifications to restore those parameters using their values at the time the snapshot was taken VMware CPU Reserved CPU Shares Memory Reserved Memory Shares Hyper V Operating System Type These parameters may return to their values at the time that the snapshot was taken even when the restoration process is aborted Check the L Server parameters and modify the specifications as necessary 214 G amp Note If the OS of the L Server is Linux the user name and password used when collecting the snapshot will be saved It is recommended to change the password after collecting a snapshot to maintain security VMware CPU reservation performance and memory reservation capacity are not restored Changing this value may prevent an L Server from starting depe
319. from a resource pool Creation Without Using an L Server Template Specify a resource or a resource pool For details on how to specify and select the VM host to which the created L Server is to be deployed refer to 2 2 3 L Server in the Design Guide CE Creation Using an L Server Template Use the following procedure to create an L Server using an L Server template When cloning images are not stored in image pools or when not using cloning images which have been already registered 1 Select an L Server template Specify None for images For details refer to 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template 2 Install an OS manually As an L Server with no OS installed is created install an OS manually For details refer to Chapter 15 Collecting and Registering Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE When cloning images are stored in image pools 1 Select an L Server template Specify a cloning image to deploy An L Server on which a cloning image has been deployed is created For details refer to 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template Creation Without Using an L Server Template For details on how to create specifying individual specifications without using an L Server template refer to 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters or 16 3 Creation of Virtual L Servers Using Parameters G amp Note 6060606000090909090000009090990900000909090990900000090090990909090000090909090000009090090900000009009009090000
320. function change the IP address of the admin server that is set for the HBA address rename setup service according to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE Back up managed servers If system image backups have already been collected from managed servers it is recommended to update those images in order to reflect the changes made above For details on system image backups refer to 10 1 2 Offline Backup of the Admin Server in the Operation Guide CE System images backed up before changing the admin IP address of the admin server cannot be restored anymore after the change It is recommended to delete all system images collected before change unless those images are specifically needed Collect a cloning image Physical Servers If cloning images have already been collected from managed servers it is recommended to update those images to reflect the change made above For details on cloning image collection refer to 12 2 Collecting Cloning images collected before changing the admin IP address of the admin server cannot be deployed anymore after the change It is recommended to delete all cloning images collected before change unless those images are specifically needed G amp Note IP addresses belonging to registered admin LAN subnets cannot be changed When a managed server belongs to the same subnet as the admin server either delete the managed server or manually change the
321. g Already Registered Admin LAN Subnets esee 142 I M Did ib E 14 5 Storage Resources po Addiess Ser REES o 5a edm eto tnter mente ra he D EINE REN OM EE vases ere etl cr Ee RE FEE e Ete r oe 146 TAY Wea Se ROS cj 146 Dp Visual mage T o secet rete Ret Er Presencia e desees aeu 147 at oo Pascal mage Reso e s eoa ee e eadem asain FO EO ER RET 147 Xi Chapter 15 L Server Template ODSIBIIGIM iuret eeo dtr dscns cccaaadgesuesvodssaanedasachavaceseseadaagessatuaadssudanguacrncesaevadenssesagveneadceuhse 148 15 1 Oporti ns Ubing Ms Wizard EIL e MI 148 DBM MIN HN 148 qaece E M 150 15 1 2 1 Creating a Physical L Server Template 150 123 rapug a Vinual LeServer Template tage tete itt rece t eed tete pci tbe iaar eeni 154 Ea dmm P o 159 IX Tail M E E A E 159 XAR M 160 15 1 6 Export 15 1 7 Import 15 1 8 Creating a Template using an Another Existing Template een netter entrent n ia 161 I2 Eus Lenis Vant qu BOO sin cas caus asc e nee DE Der RE HOD ODD a de n a o eate 161 Iv
322. g a cloning image make sure that the image is not used in image information of L Platform templates Unregistering a cloning image that is used in image information causes the following effects On the image management window of the Template Tab the corresponding image information becomes uneditable Deployment using the L Platform template that uses the corresponding image information becomes impossible For reconfiguration of an L Platform addition of a server by using the corresponding image information becomes impossible 17 5 4 Deleting This section explains how to delete cloning images Use the following procedure to delete cloning images Select the target image pool on the orchestration tree The Resource List tab is displayed 2 Right click the target cloning image in the image pool and select Delete from the popup menu 3 Click OK The cloning image is deleted 213 From the command line execute rcxadm image delete For details on the rcxadm image delete command refer to 4 1 rexadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE amp Note Hyper V For details on how to delete cloning images on Hyper V refer to C 3 8 Collecting and Deleting Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE 17 6 Snapshots and Backup and Restoration of L Servers This section explains how to perform snapshots and backup and restore of an L Server 17 6 1 Snapshot This section provides an overview of snapshots
323. g an Editor Use the UTF 8 character code for L Server templates 15 1 Operations Using the Wizard GUI This section explains how to operate an L Server template using the wizard style GUI From the wizard GUI it is possible to perform the following operations Viewing a Template Refer to 15 1 1 Viewing Creation Refer to 15 1 2 Creating Modification Refer to 15 1 3 Modifying Copying a Template For details refer to 15 1 4 Copying Deleting a Template Refer to 15 1 5 Deleting Export Refer to 15 1 6 Export Import Refer to 15 1 7 Import Creating a Template using an Another Existing Template Refer to 15 1 8 Creating a Template using an Another Existing Template 15 1 1 Viewing Use the following procedure to view a list of L Server templates 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The ROR L Server Template Editor window is displayed 148 2 The registered information of L Server templates is displayed The L Server template information and the buttons that will be displayed are shown below Buttons lt Create gt button Click when creating an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 2 Creating Import button Click when importing an L Server template For details refer to 15 1 7 Import L Server template List In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to specify the
324. gistered with Resource Orchestrator When restoring a snapshot which was taken using Resource Orchestrator V2 2 2 or earlier Resource Orchestrator V 2 3 0 without the following patches applied T005433WP 03 Windows T005567LP 01 Linux 00606060200299090000009090909900009090929090200000090909909909009000009009090909000009090009090000009900909909090000099900900000900209090900009099 Deletion This section explains how to delete unnecessary versions of snapshots 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Snapshot Delete from the popup menu The Delete a Snapshot dialog is displayed 2 Select the version of the snapshot to delete The snapshot is deleted 216 3 Click lt OK gt From the command line execute rcxadm image delete For details on the rcxadm image delete command refer to 4 1 rexadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 6 2 Backup and Restore This section explains how to back up and restore L Servers These functions are only provided for physical L Servers Backup and restore of L Servers is the function for performing backup and restoration of L Server system images If multiple backups of the same L Server are collected the backups are managed by automatically adding version numbers to the backup file name starting from 1 If the number of snapshot versions exceeds the limit standard limit is 3 the oldest snapshot will be deleted 0606060
325. gistering managed servers refer to 5 9 2 Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers Use the following procedure to register a chassis 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register SPARC Enterprise Partition Model from the popup menu The Register Chassis dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address of the XSCF of the target chassis on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community of the XSCF used to manage the target chassis Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 47 Remote management controller XSCF User ID Enter the ID of an XSCF user account with administrative authority over the target chassis This name must start with an alphabet Enter a string of up to 31 alphanumeric characters hyphens and underscores character This user should have platadm privileges for XSCF Password Enter the password of an XSCF user account with administrative authority over the target chassis Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric
326. gistering with VMware vCenter Server will be displayed network device External LAN switches those other than LAN switch blades managed in Resource Orchestrator are shown in a tree view Resources are sorted and displayed by name in alphabetical order Resources displayed in the resource tree are represented by an icon and their resource name For details on the icons used to indicate different resources refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE For a non registered resource one of the following registration states is displayed at the end of the resource s name Table A 37 Resource Registration States Unregistered The resource was automatically detected but has not been registered yet Registering The resource is being registered If a problem occurs on a resource a status icon indicating the problem is shown on top of the resource s own icon For details on status icons refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE Clicking a resource icon will show information related to that resource in the Main Panel Use this information to investigate the problem Power Monitoring Devices The power monitoring devices PDU or UPS used by Resource Orchestrator to monitor power consumption are displayed in a tree view For details on icons used to represent power monitoring devices refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE Clicking a power monitoring device displayed in the resource
327. guration Definition Information To modify an L Server for which a configuration definition has been created defined use the following procedure When changing the L Server deployed when creating an L Platform use the rcxadm lserver modify command to modify the configuration for alive monitoring 222 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Definition from the popup menu The Modify L Server s definition dialog is displayed 2 Change the items to modify For details on setting values in the Modify L Server s definition dialog refer to Chapter 16 Creating L Servers 3 Click OK The L Server configuration definition information is modified From the command line execute rcxadm lserver modify For details on the rexadm Iserver modify command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G amp Note 0006020200090090000090909990909900009090909909909000009900990990909090000909909990900009090909009000000090909909909909000099099090900009099099099000009999 When modifying the configuration definition for an already defined L Server that has been updated from an earlier version alive monitoring is disabled When enabling alive monitoring modify the configuration of the L Server again 17 9 Changing Physical Server Usage This section explains how to change physical server usage Changing server usage is the function for preparing more L Servers t
328. guration files used by Resource Orchestrator s pre configuration function B 1 Obtaining the System Configuration File CSV Format The system configuration files can be obtained as follows From the selection window of the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM Windows Setting the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM in the CD ROM drive automatically displays the screen below Select Tool and click System Configuration Template CSV format The CSV file will be opened from the associated application such as Excel Check the file content and save it Figure B 1 Selection Window F ServerView Resource Orchestrator V3 0 0 ME x S ServerView ServerView Resource Orchestrator Aw En System Configuration Template CSV format Installation amp Environment setup conditions check tool Setup Documentation Tool This menu presents the functionality provided by Resource Orchestrator s preconfiguration feature When using the System Configuration Template Excel format for Preconfiguration feature Microsoft R Excel 2002 or later is required Copyright 2007 2011 FUJITSU LIMITED m Information If the above window does not open execute RcSetup exe from the DVD ROM drive From the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM Set the Resource Orchestrator DVD ROM in the DVD ROM drive and copy the following file Windows DVD ROM_drive template ja template csv Linux DVD ROM mount pointhemplate ja template csv 340 Fro
329. h infrastructure administrator A user who manages the resources comprising a data center infra_admin is the role that corresponds to the users who manage resources Infrastructure administrators manage all of the resources comprising a resource pool the global pool and local pools provide tenant administrators with resources and review applications by tenant users to use resources integrated network device A network device with integrated firewall or server load balancing functions The IPCOM EX IN series fits into this category IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI is a set of common interfaces for the hardware that is used to monitor the physical conditions of servers such as temperature power voltage cooling fans power supply and chassis These functions provide information that enables system management recovery and asset management which in turn leads to reduction of overall TCO IQN iSCSI Qualified Name Unique names used for identifying iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets iRMC integrated Remote Management Controller The name of the Remote Management Controller for Fujitsu s PRIMERGY servers iSCSI A standard for using the SCSI protocol over TCP IP networks iSCSI boot A configuration function that enables the starting and operation of servers via a network The OS and applications used to operate servers are stored on iSCSI storage not the internal disks of servers iSCSI storage
330. han physical servers and is used by switching the startup L Server This function enables effective use of server resources as the physical server can be changed depending on the time period and situation The boot disk and IP address of the L Server are stored even while other L Servers use the physical server This function can be used when an L Server is actually a physical server When using virtual machines multiple L Servers can be located on a single VM host without any specific configuration giving the same effects as changing the physical server The following two methods are available Use multiple L Servers switching between them on a single physical server The physical server which starts the L Server is always the same Use multiple L Servers switching between them on unused physical servers in a server pool The physical server allocated to the L Server will change depending on the available spare servers in a server pool 17 9 1 Configuring L Servers for Usage Change This section explains how to change L Server settings for usage change The operations differ depending on whether the configuration definition has already been created defined or if resources have already been allocated allocated When the status of an L Server for which a configuration definition has already been created defined Refer to 17 9 1 1 When only the Configuration Definition defined is Created When the status of an L Server is
331. hardware configuration server model disk size and number of network interfaces software configuration names of installed software and applied patches and the status of network parameter auto configuration function Release Maintenance Mode after collection checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the source server from maintenance mode after image collection and maintenance work If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image c Click lt OK gt The process of collecting the cloning image starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking lt Cancel gt in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process 4 Restart applications on the source server Restore the settings of any service whose startup settings were changed in step 2 and start these services Restore the settings for the following cases NIC redundancy for admin LANs and public LANs has been released The settings of tagged VLANs for NICs have been released Check that applications are running properly on the source server 5 Release the source server from maintenance mode This step is not required if the Release Maintenance Mode after collection checkbox was enabled in the Collect a Cloning Image dialog a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the source server or its physical OS and select
332. hassis Table 4 4 Chassis Icon Chassis wA See 606060606200002000000000909000009090909090900000009990990900000909099000000909099090900000009090909090000009099000000990909090000099299 For details on the different chassis statuses refer to Table 4 3 Status Icons of 4 3 1 Status Panel If a chassis icon shows a warning or error status it means that a problem occurred in a resource contained in the chassis For details on how to identify faulty resources refer to 4 3 3 Blade Panel A Information Selecting a chassis icon from the chassis panel displays the contents of that chassis in the blade panel For details refer to 4 3 3 Blade Panel 4 3 3 Blade Panel The blade panel displays the statuses of all the resources inserted into the selected chassis Those resources are shown in a format representative of their physical configuration shape and position To display the contents of a specific chassis in the blade panel click on its icon in the chassis panel In the blade panel the selected chassis and its LAN switches are represented by the following icons Those icons are displayed in the upper part of the blade panel Table 4 5 Chassis Icon m fo Table 4 6 LAN Switch Icon See For details on the status icons that are displayed for the chassis and its LAN switches refer to Table 4 3 Status Icons of 4 3 1 Status Panel 4 3 3 1 Resource List Tab The blade panel graphically displays each
333. he VM pool that have enough free space to install an L Server If the HA function or automatic re installation function examples VMware HA or VMware DRS of the VM product is enabled G amp Note When an operation that puts a resource that has been configured for exclusive operation outside the access scope of users the name of the resource will only be displayed on the screen for changing specifications or definitions Startup priority With L Servers when performing batch power operations in a resource folder or a tenant configure the priority for the L Server Set a number between 1 and 256 Smaller values indicate higher priority If omitted 128 is set When not performing batch power operations check the Exclude from batch power operations checkbox 16 3 3 Disk Tab Disk Click Add and specify the following items for each disk Size Number of Disks Size Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Values of 0 1 or larger can be specified VMware Hyper V Specify a number between 0 1 and 2048 Oracle VM Specify the size within the range of 1 to the resource size of the hardware on which the VM hosts operate A Information When creating an L Server even if the size of the system disk is specified if the specified size differs from that of the deployed cloning image the size will be changed to that of the deployed cloning image 0606060600000000000000000900900900099099090992
334. he NIC used in the L Server Clicking lt Add gt displays the Add a Network dialog Select a network resource to connect with the NIC The number of NICs that can be configured is 1 to 32 NICs Select the NIC to use in the L Server from the selection list When adding a new NIC or NIC group select the number displayed as Undefined from the list When selecting an already defined NIC a network resource is added Setup redundant NIC When performing NIC redundancy check the Setup redundant NIC checkbox and select another NIC pair from the list to make redundant Network Select a network resource to connect Clicking lt Delete gt deletes the selected network Clicking lt Change gt displays the Select a Network Resource dialog If lt OK gt is clicked while a network resource is selected the network resource to connect is modified IP address Optional Specify the IP address to allocate to the L Server This should be entered for direct specification of the IP address to be allocated to the L Server The specified IP address will be converted to the IP address of the physical server during creation of the L Server Note If a LUN created beforehand is used to create a physical L Server specify the IP address of the OS stored in the LUN If an agent has already been installed in the LUN created beforehand and the IP address of the manager has been changed the following procedures need to be performed after creating
335. he folder on the shared disk 53 Local Disk Source Shared Disk Target SystemRoot S ystem32 dhcp Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp Example When the OS has been installed on the C drive it is SystemRoot C Windows 060606060000000990090000000009099990900000000090900909090020909000000009009099909000000000000909909090900000000009099029299 9 Configure access rights for the folder for the DHCP Server that was copied to the shared disk Execute the following command using the command prompt of the primary node cacls Drive name WeujitsuRORVSSVRORMhcep T P NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM F BUILTIN Administrators F NT SERVICE DHCPServer F RETURN 10 Add the DHCP Server to Services and Applications for the manager a Right click Services and Applications RC manager and select Add a resource Other Resources 1 Add a DHCP Service from the displayed menu A New DHCP Service will be created in the DHCP Service in Summary of RC manager b Right click the New DHCP Service and select Properties from the popup menu The New DHCP Service Properties window will be displayed c Change the Resource Name on the General tab and set the paths given in the following table Database path Drive_name Pujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp Monitoring file path Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp Backup path Drive_name Fujitsu ROR S VROR dhcp backup After making the settings click lt Apply gt
336. he status of the storage on the physical L Server are detected On virtual L Servers the following information is updated L Server Name 1 CPU Performance 2 Number of CPUs 2 Memory Capacity 3 VM Management Software Specific Information Operating System Type Server Redundancy 4 The Number of Disks Disk Index Disk Capacity Device Path Usage Type 1 Confirm the following for the virtual L Server name and the VM name When use of the same name is configured for both a virtual L Server and a VM performing the following operations makes the L Server name match the VM name Creating an L Server Changing L Server name basic information When use of the same name is configured for both a virtual L Server and a VM performing the following operations makes the L Server name match the VM name when VM information changes are detected Changing labels and comments of L Server basic information Changing L Server Specifications For the configuration to use the same name for both a virtual L Server and a VM machine refer to Table 17 4 List of Items Specified in the Definition File of 17 8 1 Installation 2 Solaris Containers CPU performance and the number of CPUs should be changed when the cap values of CPUs are changed and when resource pools used in non global zone are changed as follows When changing managed resource pools to unmanaged resource pools When changing unma
337. he subnet name for registration The name must start with an alphabetic character and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters long including underscores hyphens and periods Network address Configure the network address of the subnet used as the admin LAN Enter valid values for the network address Subnet mask Enter valid values for the subnet mask Gateway Enter the settings for the gateway used for communication with the admin server on the admin LAN 4 Click lt OK gt A Information When registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time change the simplified DHCP service for Resource Orchestrator to the OS standard DHCP Service Resource Orchestrator takes exclusive possession of the OS standard DHCP Service Note It is necessary to perform network settings for each admin LAN subnet so that managed servers belonging to subnets other than the admin LAN can communicate with the admin server For details on how to configure the network settings refer to Chapter 9 Defining and Configuring the Network Environment in the Design Guide CE Inaclustered manager configuration when registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time perform Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations 0060620620092092909900000909099909909090090090920009009000909090000090999099099090000909090090900009090909909909090990000909990909000099990990900006299299 Settings for Clustered Manager Configurations The followi
338. hestrator VMware vCenter Server System Center Virtual Machine Manager Oracle VM Manager G Note In Disaster Recovery environments multiple occurrences of the same virtual machine name may cause failures of the import of configuration information Avoid setting the same virtual machine name for machines Hyper V An administrator account registered in Resource Orchestrator is not a local account on a server on which SCVMM is installed but a domain administrator account that the server belongs to Specify the account to register in the following format Domain_name Administrator_account_name A Information VM Host Relation Definition File Depending on the network configuration and network settings of VM management software and VM hosts the VM host IP address retained by Resource Orchestrator may not match the VM host IP address retained by VM management software If those IP addresses differ the functions for coordinating with VM management software will be unavailable because Resource Orchestrator cannot associate the VM management software with the VM host A definition file must be created to associate VM management software with a VM host Use the UTF 8 character code for definition files 24 Figure 5 1 Configuration When the IP Address Information of VM Hosts Differ Between the Manager and VM Management Software The IP address differs even in the information of the same VM host VM Management Manager
339. hot o o Refer to Backup of 17 6 2 Backup and Restore Z o System image backup Refer to Restore of 17 6 2 Backup and System image restoration y z Restore o Refer to Deletion of 17 6 2 Backup and Restore Z o System image deletion Viewing cloning images Yes Ye Seminaren 189 Physical L Operation Virtual L Server Reference Server Moving L Servers between VM hosts N Y Refer to 17 7 Migration of VM Hosts between o es migration Servers For details refer to 17 8 2 2 Releasing Resources Releasing resources from L Servers Allocating resources to L Servers s Refer to 17 8 2 1 Allocating Resources Changing physical server usage Refer to 17 9 Changing Physical Server Usage Only possible when using SAN boot 2 P addresses and network resources of virtual L Servers can only be changed when the server s status is defined 3 When using Solaris containers L Servers cannot be operated 4 When using RHEL Xen operation is possible 5 When using VMware operation is possible 6 When using Hyper V operation is possible amp Note 0406060600090909299000000990800009909909099090000090099000000909090909909002909000990909090000900990902909909909000099909000000090909000009999 Operations for an L Server included in an L Platform using the ROR console and commands have limits Use of the console and moving of an L Server migration between VM hosts are
340. how to collect cloning images on RHELS Xen refer to step 3 in C 4 6 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE KVM For details on how to collect cloning images on RHEL KVM refer to step 3 in C 6 6 Creating an L Server in the Setup Guide CE Oracle VM For details on how to collect cloning images on Oracle VM refer to C 5 7 Collecting Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE 0606060090009200990900009009040900000909000200000090929099009000090090090090090090990909090000009090909090900009290990920000009092000000009092996 Point VMware When Default is specified in the Collect a Cloning Image dialog it is assumed that the virtual storage resource containing the L Server for collecting cloning images has been specified Hyper V Images are stored in the SCVMM library Specify a library which has sufficient available disk space to store the collected images When Default is specified in the Collect a Cloning Image dialog selection is made from libraries registered with SCVMM but collection of images may fail as the available disk space of libraries is not managed by SCVMM Xen When Default is specified for the storage destination of images during cloning image collection a virtual storage is automatically selected from the same storage pool as the virtual storage containing the target L Server from which cloning images will be collected KVM When Default is specified for the storage destination of images
341. ib dhcpd When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 2 When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 b After copying the files change source file name by executing the following command Make sure a name like source file name old is specified for the rarget file name 55 mv i source_file_name target_file_name lt RETURN gt 5 Configure symbolic links for the shared disk Primary node Configure symbolic links from the files and directory on the local disk of the primary node for the files on the shared disk Execute the following command In s shared disk local disk lt RETURN gt Table 5 1 Files to Link Shared Disk Local Disk Mount destination of shared disk Fujitsu ROR SVROR etc dhcepd conf 1 etc dhcpd conf Mount_destination_of_shared_disk Fujitsu ROR S VROR etc dhcp dhcpd conf 2 etc dhcp dhcpd conf Mount destination of shared disk Fujitsu ROR SVROR var lib dhcpd var lib dhcpd When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 2 When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 6 Change the settings of the DHCP service Primary node Change the following files when registering the admin LAN subnet and set the takeover logical IP address after the change to the DHCP server File name Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 etc dhcpd conf Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 etc dhcp dhcpd conf Add the following lines and set the takeover logical IP address option dhcp server identifier takeover logical IP address p Exampl
342. ically selecting the optimal VM host when the L Server is started Xen Only Fixed can be specified Repurpose Specify whether to release the server allocated to the L Server when the power is turned off Select true when releasing automatically Select false when not releasing automatically Nothing is set by default In this case the value set to the definition file is used when an L Server is created Xen Only false can be specified It can be omitted ServerlmageLink Specify all when deploying all disks with the same configuration for images including data disks Specification is possible for VMware and Hyper V This specification is not required when deploying only system disks 158 When all is specified in the definition file for L Server creation priority is given to all even if this setting is not specified g Click lt Next gt The dialog to confirm the entered information is displayed When Are you sure to create a new L Server Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Create gt WA See Ce ee For the input ranges for the Create L Server Template dialog refer to 14 2 2 Virtual L Server Templates in the Reference Guide Command XML CE ecccccc0 cc292299 060606000002090209909090000000090909900990090000000009090909090990000000000090090900990000000000090990990990996 When configuring a template using wizard style GUI the detailed configurations can be confirm
343. ich the hostname of a guest OS is detected and displayed varies according its server virtualization software For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE Itis recommended not to use duplicate names for physical OSs VM hosts and VM guests If duplicated names are used those resources cannot be managed from the command line When registering a server on which the agent was installed it is necessary to either reboot the server or restart its related services explained in the 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE after server registration This step has to be done before running any image operation system image backup or cloning image collection For details on how to restart the agent refer to 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE 5 5 2 Registering LAN Switches Use the following procedure to register LAN switches 1 Discover LAN switches For instructions refer to Discovery 2 Register LAN switches displayed in the network device tree For instructions refer to Registration amp Note When using auto configuration of network devices function on a LAN switch register it as a network device using the method described in 5 7 Registering Network Devices instead of re executing LAN switch discovery LAN switches registered using the registration method described here will only be monitored Discovery 1 From the ROR c
344. ick the target physical OS and the VM hosts and select Modify Monitoring Settings from the popup menu The Configuring monitoring settings dialog is displayed 2 Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click lt OK gt The settings for the monitoring information are changed to the entered settings 7 9 2 Canceling Monitoring Information Settings This section explains how to cancel monitoring information settings Use the following procedure to cancel the monitoring information settings 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical OS and the VM hosts and select Modify Monitoring Settings from the popup menu The Configuring monitoring settings dialog is displayed 2 Uncheck the Enable ping monitoring checkbox 3 Click lt OK gt The settings for the monitoring information are cancelled 7 10 Changing Storage This section explains how to change storage settings 7 10 1 Changing Storage Management Software Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic settings of storage management software The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to change the basic settings of storage management software 1 In the ROR console storage tree right click the target storage management software and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 85 2 M
345. ified in the admin lan2 nic number as the backup for admin LAN redundancy OFF 353 SPARC Data Section Name Enter SPARC as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server_name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens ip address Enter the same IP address as that set within the server s operating system Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods mgmt snmp community name Enter the name of a SNMP community with read permission configured on this server s remote management controller ILOM XSCF Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens mgmt ip address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller ILOM XSCF Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note 00062000000229090099009000090909099909090000000009090990909000000000000009092990090909090000009090909090900000000009099299 IP addresses should be unique between all resources mgmt protocol Enter the type of the remote management controller ILOM XSCF to manage servers For M3000 XSCF For T Series ILOM mgmt user name Enter the user name For ILOM Admin privileges and for XSCF
346. ified otherwise the blade servers mentioned in this manual refer to PRIMERGY BX servers Oracle Solaris may also be indicated as Solaris Solaris Operating System or Solaris OS References and character strings or values requiring emphasis are indicated using double quotes Window names dialog names menu names and tab names are shown enclosed by brackets Button names are shown enclosed by angle brackets lt gt or square brackets The order of selecting menus is indicated using Text to be entered by the user is indicated using bold text Variables are indicated using italic text and underscores The ellipses in menu names indicating settings and operation window startup are not shown The gt used in Windows is included in usage examples When using Linux read gt as meaning The URLs in this manual were correct when the manual was written Menus in the ROR console Operations on the ROR console can be performed using either the menu bar or pop up menus By convention procedures described in this manual only refer to pop up menus Regarding Installation Folder Paths The installation folder path may be given as C Fujitsu ROR in this manual Replace it as shown below When using Windows 64 bit x64 C Program Files x86 Resource Orchestrator When using Windows 32 bit x86 C Program Files Resource Orchestrator Abbreviations The following abbrevi
347. igrate VM Guest ie Migrates a VM guest to a different VM host VM Home Position Clears VM Home Position BacktoHome to Home Migrates a VM guest to VM Home Position Automatic Network Automatically configures the network before creating o an DES Console Screen Screen F Opens the L Server console the L Server console Install VM Tool Connects the ISO images for installing VMware Tools to an L Server Discover LAN switches Discovers LAN switches within the admin LAN Topology Detect physical links Acquires physical link data from registered LAN switches Tools Options I Modifies client and environmental data settings client and environmental data Modifies client and environmental data settings Environmental Data Displ tal dat isplays environmental data graphs Graph play grap 1 Can only be selected for Basic mode 2 Cannot be selected for a VM guest 3 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST and SPARC Enterprise Partition Models 4 Available only for PRIMERGY BX servers 5 Cannot be set for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 6 Cannot be selected for PRIMEQUEST 7 Can only be selected for SPARC Enterprise servers 8 Not available for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 9 Cannot be selected for a VM host A 2 2 Popup Menus Right clicking an object displayed in the resource tree or in the Image List tab displays a popup menu with a l
348. imit The upper limit value is 64 for RHEL6 1 Solaris Containers The size of resources of hardware where VM hosts operate can be specified CPU Performance Enter the server CPU speed to allocate to the L Server Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigahertz A number between 0 1 and 8 can be specified The value entered here is used to determine the CPU ratio to allocate to the L Server out of the clock speed of the physical CPU of the VM host If VM hosts with different types of physical CPUs are registered in the VM pool the actual processing performance may differ according to the allocated VM host VMware For VM guests on VMware set the CPU performance for the limit value and 0 for the reserved value A Information For details on limit values and reserved values of CPUs refer to the vSphere Resource Management Guide of VMware Refer to the relevant version of document referring to the following URL URL http www vmware com support pubs vs_pubs htm Hyper V CPU performance is realized through the resource settings of VM guests and VM hosts When the SCVMM management console or a Hyper V manager is used to change the resource reservation of a VM guest or VM host there is a chance that the creation or starting of VM guests may fail or the expected performance may not be obtained Please do not change VM guest and VM host resource reservations when L Servers have been created KVM CPU Capp
349. in 5 5 3 HBA address rename Settings Use the following procedure to configure HBA address rename settings Point When creating a physical L Server using a rack mount server the following procedure is not necessary Only the HBA address rename setup service is necessary Refer to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE The HBA address rename function allows the admin server to control the WWNs set on a managed server s HBAs Since the admin server carried over these settings when performing maintenance on or switching managed servers it is not necessary to set the storage side configuration again Use of the HBA address rename function requires registering specific settings for each managed server in advance 40 Note The HBA address rename function is not available if ServerView Deployment Manager is used on the admin LAN For details refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE For servers which already have server switchover configured when configuring or changing HBA address rename the following conditions must be met Primary servers with HBA address rename configured Spare servers with the server switchover method HBA address rename configured For any servers that do not meet these conditions cancel any existing recovery settings before enabling the HBA address rename function on a server HBA address rena
350. in only commas Unrecognized resource definition Resource Definitions Create the resource definition using the following format Describe the same type of resource in the same section Resource Definition Format Section name Section Header Operation column Parameter parameter Section Name This describes the resource type Section Header This describes the parameter type unique to the resource amp Note Do not enter any comments between the section name and section header 0 000600900929090000009094909900000009090029090000090909090409000009009909909090900009990909090000909009909090000009092999099090000909990099 6 Operation Column This describes the operation type for the resource The following characters can be used in the operation column 342 new Register change Modification on Hyphens Do nothing Parameter This describes the parameter value to be set Note The order of operation and parameter columns should follow the order defined in section header under B 3 Resource Definitions 00606060020900900000090909909000000909909020000090009909909000000099900000090990900909000000529099090000000900990900000099990909996 Allowed Characters For details on the characters allowed for each resource definition refer to B 3 Resource Definitions Optional parameters can be omitted by using hyphens However hyphens are seen as valid characters
351. ination servers as their computer names for Windows systems or system node names for Linux systems Those names can be changed using the following procedure 1 Double click the Server name after deployment cell of a server The Server name after deployment cell becomes editable 2 Enter a new server name Windows A string composed of up to 63 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens The string cannot be composed solely of numbers Linux A string composed of up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the following symbols OL fram ae on iom p n n on n non n on 0 25 pe 8 E 73 x L3 A Information Since the entered server name is also used as the hostname of its corresponding destination server it is recommended to use only characters defined in RFC Request For Comments 952 Alphanumeric characters Hyphens Periods Linux d Click lt OK gt The cloning image deployment process starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking lt Cancel gt in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process Note 00960000000000000000900000090090090909090990909090909090990909090990000000000000000000000000000000909099999999999 When this process is cancelled cloning image deployment to all destination servers is cancelled Please note that canceling the deployment of a cloning image d
352. ing Resource release for allocating and releasing resources to and from L Servers and adjusting CPU and memory settings a physical server will be selected according to the modified conditions Changing Virtual L Server Specifications The following items can be changed when the power status of the virtual L Server is ON For details refer to the manuals of VM products CPU Performance Number of CPUs Memory Size OS Type When no images are not deployed Oracle VM The OS type cannot be changed regardless of whether images are deployed or not KVM When changing the specifications for the OS types when images have not been deployed of virtual L Servers for KVM it is necessary to perform settings based on the OS type that the user intends to install When the OS type differs from the OS installed on the virtual L Server operation is not guaranteed The following shows the VM products where changes may be made while the power is on 196 VMware Hyper V KVM The items that can be changed depend on the type of VM product and the settings Refer to Table 17 2 Items that can be changed Containers VM No No Yes Yes Yes Yes while the power is on for details Table 17 2 Items that can be changed while the power is on a Modification Hyper V K Name CPUs Detaching a Disk No Add Yes 2 Yes 2 Performance Detaching a Disk Memory Size Detaching a Disk No 1 Can be changed
353. ing a function of the storage perform disk formatting For ETERNUS Create a LUN again KVM The deletion of the content of disks can be automated by specifying true for CLEAN_VM_GUEST_DISK_RESOURCE in the definition file storage rcxprop when the deletion of the content of the disks of all KVM virtual L Servers in the system is possible When you specify the deletion of the content of the disks for each virtual L Server specify false for CLEAN VM GUEST DISK RESOURCE in the definition file storage rcxprop For information about the definition file refer to C 6 1 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE 00690099909900000090909909000000990909090000009090909909909900000909909090909000090909090900000009909909909000009090990990900009099990090009999 When registering a disk resource for virtual L Servers in a storage pool it is recommended to use the appropriate physical storage unit resource allocation method thin provisioning or thick provisioning for that disk resource This does not affect the allocation method of storage resources in the storage pool Virtual Storage Resources and Disk Resources for Physical L Servers Use the following procedure to register a storage resource 144 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target storage pool and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Select the storage resource to register
354. ing functions will be ignored since the function is not supported by RHELO 1 181 Oracle VM Specify the size within the range of 0 3 to the_resource_size_of_the_hardware_on_which_the_VM_hosts_operate Solaris Containers Specify the size within the range of 0 1 to the resource size of the hardware on which the VM hosts operate Memory Size Enter the memory capacity to allocate to the L Server Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes A number between 0 1 and 255 can be specified VMware For VM guests on VMware set the memory size for the limit and reserved values A Information Ce For details on limit values and reserved values of memory refer to the vSphere Resource Management Guide of VMware Refer to the relevant version of document referring to the following URL URL http www vmware com support pubs vs pubs html Hyper V For VM guests with dynamic memory disabled set the memory size for the virtual machine memory For VM guests with dynamic memory enabled set the memory size to the maximum memory The enabled disabled state of dynamic memory is determined according to the value specified in the VM specific information definition file For details on VM specific information definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers and Chapter 8 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE KVM The maximum size of availabl
355. initions that are common to the system If the key of the definition file common to the system is the same as a definition file for a user group priority is given to the values indicated in the definition file for the user group For User Groups os setting user group name rcxprop Common on System OS setting rcxprop Definition File Format In the definition file an item to define is entered on each line Each line is entered in the following format Key Value Items in the Definition File VMware Refer to C 2 9 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V Refer to C 3 10 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE KVM Refer to C 6 8 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE Solaris Containers Refer to C 7 7 OS Tab Configuration in the Setup Guide CE 0060020090209000000909990990000090990909090000009090909099090000009099900000090909090900000009099009099000000909990900000009900000009999 188 Chapter 17 L Server Operations This chapter explains how to operate L Servers L Servers can perform the following operations Table 17 1 Available Operations Physical L ration Starting an L Server Stopping an L Server Restarting an L Server Starting all L Servers in a resource folder Yes Refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server For details refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server Yes Refer to 17 1 3 Restarting an L Server Refer to Starting an L Serve
356. ion December 2011 1 1 J2X1 7612 01ENZO 01 December 2011 1 2 J2X1 7612 01ENZ0 02 tober 2012 Third PROPERE EATUR J2X1 7612 03ENZ0 00 Edition Copyright FUJITSU LIMITED 2010 2012 viii Contents Chapter 1 Resource Management OVErview cc cccesceeesceeeseeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeessaeesaeeseaeeseaeessaeesacesesaeeseaeseneeeteaeneates 1 Chapter 2 License Setup and COFTWITIBIDIT necare rr retreat t Ehe I Rm herini rt En rar BOR epa nt uk be SERRE ego Re ax A ren enne esr 2 Chapter 3 Configuring Users for Infrastructure Administrators eeseesesessseeeeeenennee nennen nnne enema 3 3 1 Registering User Accounts 32 Wb a User ACCOUNE M T 3 3 Modifying a User Account xr Deluns a User ACCO eoin eE AE TER E EEE EEEE EEE ANERE ER EE 5 Chapter 4 Blade VIG web sa coi fi cic 2s ana ea a a esc aD ann ented E aaa a a a Oa E O a 7 A EGTA o E inn dy arte S 7 AD SOPSBI LAV 8 4 Resource Status DADE OP RE 8 LEE ril 9 S3 Chasus Panel eese dime eee ien i diete eain ee Ev TO cenis 9 AaS Blode Panel N 10 Bm TEES USE TA
357. ion Dependent Resource PXE Services DHCP Server 13 Restart the manager Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Bring this service or application online from the displayed menu Linux Manager A Information 00606060600909909090000090909909909900009090909909090000909090990990990990000909090992909909009009090909900900099909990000000999909000000099090000009299 When configuring a cluster system in an environment that already has an admin LAN registered in addition to the installation procedure for the cluster system perform steps 1 to 2 and 4 to 11 In that case set the manager that is operating now as the primary node of the cluster system 1 Stop cluster applications Use the cluster system s operation management view Cluster Admin and stop the manager cluster service cluster application 2 Mount the shared disk Primary node Mount the shared disk for managers on the primary node 3 Stop automatic startup of the dhcpd service Primary node and Secondary node Disable automatic startup of the dhcpd service by executing the following command chkconfig dhcpd off lt RETURN gt 4 Copy dynamic disk files Primary node a Copy the files and directory on the local disk of the primary node to the shared disk for managers Execute the following command Files and Directory to Copy etc dhcpd conf 1 letc dhcp dhcpd conf 2 var l
358. ion Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line name Enter the name used to identify this VM management software Enter one of the following When using VMware vCenter Server as VM management software vCenterServer When using System Center Virtual Machine Manager as VM management software SCVMM 358 ip_address Enter the IP address used to connect to this VM management software or a hyphen Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods If a hyphen is entered this VM management software will be seen as being installed on the admin server product Enter the name of this VM management software Enter one of the following When using VMware vCenter Server as VM management software vmware vc When using System Center Virtual Machine Manager as VM management software ms scvmm login_name Enter the name of the user account set for this VM management software Use a string of up to 84 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes from 0x21 to 0x7e When specifying a domain use the following syntax domain namAuser_name login_passwd Enter the password for this VM management software Use a string of up to 128 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes from 0x21 to Ox7e passwd_enc Enter one of the following If login_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encry
359. ion method for the network device is displayed Login Check An account information check result is displayed One of the following is displayed successful failed unchecked Monitoring Settings Area SNMP community name Displays the community name used for SNMP communications with the network device Monitoring method The type of monitoring used on the network device is displayed One of the following is displayed None ping SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol ping SNMP 296 Monitoring interval sec Displays the monitoring interval in seconds for the network device Retry count Displays the number of retries when monitoring of the network device fails no response before timeout Timeout sec Displays the time in seconds a response is waited for before it is determined monitoring of the network device has failed A 6 5 Power Monitoring Devices PDU or UPS Attributes General Area Device name The name used to identify a PDU or UPS is displayed Admin LAN IP address The IP address on the admin LAN is displayed Device type The device type PDU or UPS is displayed Model The model name of the PDU or UPS is displayed Comments Comments entered when registering a PDU or UPS are displayed Hardware Details Area Serial number The serial number of the PDU or UPS is displayed Voltage The voltage supplied to the PDU or UPS is displayed Hardware version The hardware version of the PD
360. ions Deleting an L Server 1 For the following cases it will be the L Server for server management When disk configurations cannot be supported by an L Server When only Raw Device Mapping RDM a pass through disk Pass through Disk and a difference disk are included When a configuration including device paths which are not described Raw Device Mapping RDM a path through disk Pass through Disk or difference disks are included For the non global zone of Solaris containers power control start stop and restart is possible Solaris Containers 230 In the following cases the L Server for Server Storage Management is used When using storage listed in 18 3 3 Manageable Storage and the device paths for all disks that have been allocated to the virtual machine are found in the following list VMware SCSE0 1 SCSI 0 6 SCSEO 8 SCSI 0 14 SCSI 1 0 SCSI 1 6 SCSEL 8 SCSE1 14 AM SCSI 2 0 SCSI 2 6 SCSLE2 8 SCSE2 14 AM SCSI 3 0 SCSI 3 6 SCSI 3 8 SCSE3 14 AM Hyper V SCSI 0 1 SCSI 0 14 SCSI 1 0 SCSE1 14 AM SCSI 2 0 SCSI 2 14 AM SCSI 3 0 SCSE3 14 AM For virtual machines on VM host of VMware which is not managed by VM management software power operations starting stopping or restarting and modification of basic information label comment configurations can be performed 2 Solaris Containers are not supported Solaris Containers 3 Datasto
361. irtualization software manual or to 3 11 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for details Depending on the server virtualization software used some restrictions may apply to the use of VM maintenance mode settings For details about such restrictions refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE 4 4 2 VM Guest The power status of a VM guest can be controlled by clicking the OS icon of its VM host and then clicking its power button in the list of VM guests that is displayed Clicking on the power button provides power controls similar to those provided for server blades Table 4 16 Actions of VM Guest Power Buttons Gray not lit Powers on a VM guest 17 Green lit Shuts down or reboots a VM guest Note VM guests need to be properly configured in order to use the shut down or reboot buttons Attempting to shut down or reboot a VM guest that is not properly configured will result in an error For details refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE Depending on the server virtualization environment a VM guest may automatically migrate to another VM host when a power control operation is performed This may cause power control operations to fail and return an error when used on VM guests For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE A VM guest can be configured to automatically start
362. is displayed Stored Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed L Server List Name Label The name of the L Server directly under the root folder tenant is displayed Status L Server status is displayed Server type The server type of the L Server is displayed For Physical L Servers Physical is displayed For Virtual L Servers The VM type of the L Server is displayed OS The OS type of the L Server is displayed Current Resource The following information is displayed according to the L Server allocation status 302 When resources are already allocated allocated The name of the physical server or VM host that has been allocated is displayed When servers have been released preserved The name of the physical server or VM host that was used the last time the L Server was started is displayed The name is followed by preserved When only the configuration definitions have already been created defined defined is displayed Preserved resource The information set for Physical server or VM host during L Server creation is displayed When neither server nor host is specified Automatic Automatic is displayed When a resource pool is specified The server pool icon or VM pool icon and resource pool name are displayed For physical servers The server pool icon and resource pool name are displayed Fora VM host The VM host icon and VM host name are dis
363. isioning TPV Thin Provisioning Volume One of resources defined using ETERNUS Thin Provisioning Volumes are physical disks created using the Thin Provisioning function UNC Universal Naming Convention Notational system for Windows networks Microsoft networks that enables specification of shared resources folders files shared printers shared directories etc b Example hostname dir_name 00060606000000000920909090000000090909999090000000009090909009090909909000000009090909999099000000000090999909009090000000090999299 UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply A device containing rechargeable batteries that temporarily provides power to computers and peripheral devices in the event of power failures Resource Orchestrator uses UPSs with current value display functions as power monitoring devices 381 URL Uniform Resource Locator The notational method used for indicating the location of information on the Internet VIOM ServerView Virtual IO Manager The name of both the I O virtualization technology used to change the MAC addresses of NICs and the software that performs the virtualization Changes to values of WWNs and MAC addresses can be performed by creating a logical definition of a server called a server profile and assigning it to a server Virtual Edition The edition that can use the server switchover function Virtual I O Technology that virtualizes the relationship of servers and I O devices main
364. isplayed graph Return to resource selection window Clicking Resource Selection displays the Environmental Data Graph dialog Note 06006060000900099099099090909000000090090909909099000000000909090990909090900000000900090909909090000000009090909090990900000000090099999 If you change the size of the web browser when displaying graphs click the update button after doing so 135 Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools This section explains how to register a resource managed by Resource Orchestrator to a resource pool A resource pool is a type of resource folder displayed on the orchestration tree of ROR console which stores the resources for selection when creating or adding L Servers A resource pool type is specified when creating a resource pool and only resources of a specific type are stored in each type of resource pool When installing Resource Orchestrator one resource pool is created for each resource pool type For details on operating multiple resource pools refer to Chapter 20 Resource Pool Operations This section explains how to register resource pool types and resources to a resource pool Table 14 1 Registering Resources to Resource Pools Based on Resource Type Necessity of Registration Resource Pool Type of Resources Stored in the Method of Registration to the Based on Server Type Types Resource Pool Resource Pool Physical L Virtual L Server Server For details refer to 14 1 VM Host
365. isplaying overall maps and local maps and when updating networks automatically at one minute intervals When updating the network map automatically drawing operations cannot be accepted When stopping the automatic update after once displaying the network map network link operations are possible without being affected by drawing operations The automatic update configurations are recorded in the browser and taken over when login is performed again Note As a guide it takes about 1 to 10 minutes to draw in environments with 100 to 1 500 physical virtual servers This changes depending on the workload of the admin server or admin client wA See 60060620062000909060909000090990900900000909909909000009009099209909000090909090090900009009099090000009090920900000090990990900000000999099090000099299 For details on resource icons refer to 11 4 Resource Icons For details on link statuses refer to 11 5 Network Links Operations of the ROR console may not be able to be executed when updating the network map automatically Stop automatic update by clearing the Automatic Updates checkbox and then operations of the ROR console will be able to be executed during updating of the network map In order to update the network map to show the latest status click the update button 0060606060009000602060060600090060990000900060909090000090909000909000090909909909000000090990900000092909909900060600099290900060009000060c60c00c09692
366. ist of options available for that object The tables below detail the popup menus provided for each object Available menus vary according to user account privileges 266 Table A 1 Popup Menus Available for the Server Resources Tree Node Popup Menu Function Register Table A 2 Popup Menus Available for Chassis Popup Menu Function Modify Registration Settings Modifies a chassis registration settings External M t M au E Opens a Management Blade s Web interface E Expot 9 Environmental Data Exports environmental data collected from chassis Move to Folder eo S Moves a chassis to another folder Note This option is only available for chassis equipped with power monitoring capabilities Table A 3 Popup Menus Available for Servers Popup Menu Function Register Ema mene Pme ehem Registration Settings Modifies a server s registration settings HBA address rename settings 2 Modifies the HBA address rename settings of a server Modify Network Settings 3 4 Modifies the network settings of a server Spare Server Settings 2 Modifies a server s recovery settings Places a server into maintenance mode Release Sets a server to active mode OFF Powers off a server after shutting down its operating system Powers off a server without shutting down its operatin OFF Forced e Hee system Reboots a server after shutting down its operatin Reboot 8 P e system Maintenan
367. ister the agent after registration of the server is complete 00006000002099099990200000009990999090820000000909092909909009099090000000929909999090200000000999990992909000000009029299 3 Click OK The registered server will be displayed in the server resource tree amp Note 00600600090990990900009099909909000000909909909000009909099099090909009009099090909009000090909990909000009909099090990990000999909090000099909000009999 After registering the server please verify that the information registered for the remote management controller is correct This can be verified by trying out power operations from Resource Orchestrator against that server Refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE for details on power operations When using HBA address rename setup service please confirm that the registered server can boot properly using the HBA address rename setup service If the server cannot be booted properly ensure that the specified MAC address NIC2 is correct 38 When an agent is registered on a VM host all VM guests running on that VM host are also registered automatically Whenever a VM guest is created modified deleted or moved on a registered VM host the changes are automatically updated in the server resource tree The VM guest name displayed in the ROR console is either the VM name defined in its server virtualization software or the host name defined in the guest OS The timing at wh
368. itsu Systemcast Wizard DatabaseBroker Default HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP PXE Services HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard PXE ClientBoot Perform the following procedure for each of the above resources a Right click the target resource on Other Resources on the Summary of RC manager displayed in the middle of the Failover Cluster Management window and select Properties from the displayed menu The target resource Properties window will be displayed b From the Root Registry Key displayed on the Registry Replication tab select the above registry keys and click Remove The selected key is removed from Root Registry Key When deleting the second registry key repeat step b c Click Apply The settings are applied d Click OK to close the dialog Take the following services of the Services and Applications for the manager offline Deployment Service TFTP Service PXE Services Register the admin LAN subnet On the primary node bring the shared disk of the manger online and take all other cluster resources offline Open Services from Administrative Tools on the Windows Control Panel and then configure the startup type of DHCP Server service as Manual on the Services window From the Services window stop the DHCP Server service Using Explorer copy the following folder from the local disk of the primary node to t
369. ive mode When in maintenance mode it is not possible to switch over to a spare server if a server fails managed server A collective term referring to a server that is managed as a component of a system management blade A server management unit that has a dedicated CPU and LAN interface and manages blade servers Used for gathering server blade data failure notification power control etc Management Board The PRIMEQUEST system management unit Used for gathering information such as failure notification power control etc from chassis manager The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on admin servers It manages and controls resources registered with Resource Orchestrator master configuration file This is the original network device configuration file that is backed up from each network device immediately after Resource Orchestrator is set up It is used for the following purposes When initializing the settings of network devices When checking the differences between the current and original configurations For providing the initial settings when creating a new system with the same configuration In regards to the network device file management function these files are excluded from the scope of version management They are not automatically deleted master slot A slot that is recognized as a server when a server that occupies multiple slots is mounted member server A collective term
370. k When a guest OS that Hyper V supports is specified for the OS type a converged network adapter will be added to VM When a different OS has been selected an emulated network adapter will be added For details on the guest OSs supported by SCVMM refer to the Help of SCVMM For details on the guest OSs supported by Hyper V refer to the following Microsoft web site Microsoft download web site 182 KVM Linux Windows and Linux SELinux can be selected A personalized guest OS can only be selected for Linux When creating a new guest VM the information will be displayed When information of a newly created VM guest is lost during backup and restoration unknown may be displayed Oracle VM The OS type cannot be changed Solaris Containers The OS type cannot be changed VM host Optional Individually specify the resources to allocate to the L Server Clicking lt Select gt displays the Select a VM host dialog Specify a VM host or VM pool If you do not specify a VM host or VM pool a VM host that can create an L Server is automatically searched for from the VM pool If there are multiple VM pools the VM host is searched for beginning with the VM pool with the highest priority Solaris Containers When the specifying VM host to use please choose a VM host suitable for specification of Server Recovery If the HA checkbox is selected Choose a VM host with spare server settings Resource release
371. k the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Power Reboot Forced from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The L Server is restarted forcibly From the command line execute rcxadm lserver restart For details on the rcxadm Iserver restart command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE amp Note If no OS is installed on the L Server the L Server may not be restarted In that case perform a forced restart Oracle VM Depending on the presence or absence of the VirtualizationMethod attribute and the PV Paravirtualized driver of VM guests restarting operations may cause a forced restart and a forced restarting operation may cause a restart 60606060000900090900000909008400000090909090000009009092090909000000909000009000900909000000090909090900000900909950000000920900000000299 17 1 4 Batch Power Operation of L Servers in Resource Folders This section explains the batch power operations of L Servers in resource folders When performing batch power operation of L Server in resource folders configure the startup priority settings for L Servers in advance For priority order settings configure from Startup priority of the Modify an L Server dialog or Server tab of the Create an L Server dialog For details refer to 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters or 16 3 Creation of Virtual L Servers Using Parameters
372. ked in the Resource List tab 262 Recovery Settings Tab Displays information on the spare servers assigned to the resource selected in the resource tree Image List Tab Displays system and cloning image information Network Map Tab Displays a network diagram of registered resources Available Pool A list of resource pools available for use is displayed The resource pools displayed are restricted according to the role and scope of access of the user Template List A list of registered L Server templates is displayed An L Server can be created using an L Server template Events Resource Orchestrator events and related information are displayed The event log displays a history of events that have occurred on managed resources The resources displayed are restricted according to the role and scope of access of the user Recent Operations Displays the progress statuses and results of operations performed in Resource Orchestrator according to the user s access scope lt BladeViewer gt gt gt Button Opens the BladeViewer interface BladeViewer is a management interface specially designed for blade servers It can only be used in conjunction with PRIMERGY BX servers registered as managed servers When users are as follow lt BladeViewer gt gt gt is not displayed Users with a role that only allows use of L Servers Users with restricted access A 2 Menus This section describes the menus available in the RO
373. l specified for ServerImageLink all disks system disk and data disks are deployed as they are in the cloning image To check the disk configuration of the L Server to be created check the cloning image in advance Image Specify a cloning image to deploy Clicking Select displays the Select a Cloning Image dialog To manually install an operating system select None When None is selected it is necessary to select the OS type on the Server tab When selecting None check the Single path mode checkbox of FC path For details refer to 16 2 2 Server Tab and 16 3 2 Server Tab If you select Deploy from Image deployment the parameters for the operating system must also be specified For details on the items that must be set refer to 16 2 5 OS Tab and 16 3 5 OS Tab Note When creating an L Server specifying a cloning image if the OS of a cloning image is Linux the L Server is created using the user name and password used when the cloning image was created It is recommended to change the password after creating an L Server to maintain security When deploying cloning images the OS image included in a cloning image is used but the values of CPU memory and network are overwritten with the values used when creating an L Server VMware Hyper V When using templates with all specified for ServerImageLink all disks are created in the same location When selecting a storage location
374. l server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Allocated Value The model name defined during L Server creation is displayed Type The server type of the L Server is displayed Disk type The type of disks on the physical L Server is displayed One of the following is displayed iSCSI SAN Storage Area Network PXE boot One of the following is displayed When PXE boot is configured for the physical L Sever Enable is displayed 305 When PXE boot is not configured Disable is displayed Server Properties VM Management Software Specific Information CPU Reserve The minimum size of CPU resources minimum reserved value to be allocated for the VM guest is displayed CPU Share The relative proportion of CPU resources to be allocated when CPU resources run out is displayed Memory Reserved The minimum size of memory resources minimum reserved value to be allocated for the VM guest is displayed Memory Buffer The proportion of memory to be allocated to the VM guest as a buffer is displayed Memory Share The relative proportion of memory resources to be allocated when memory resources run out is displayed Dynamic Memory One of the following is displayed Only displayed for virtual L Servers When Dynamic Memory is true on is displayed When Dynamic Memory is false off is displayed Server Information Advanced Setting Server recovery L Server redundancy settings are displayed Spare server spec
375. l server s status and its internal components For details on the physical server icon refer to Table 4 8 Physical Server Icons in 4 3 3 1 Resource List Tab 4 4 Power Control This section explains how to control the power status of server blades and VM guests from BladeViewer 4 4 1 Server Blade The power status of a server blade can be easily controlled by clicking its power button Table 4 15 Actions of Server Blade Power Buttons om Gray not lit Power OFF Powers on a server blade Green lit Shuts down or reboots a server blade Power On Clicking on a power button that shows Power OFF status will power on the target server blade A confirmation dialog is displayed first Clicking lt OK gt in the confirmation dialog powers on the server and starts its OS At this time the power button changes to an intermediate Power ON in progress state green blinking The power button finally displays a Power ON state after confirming that the OS has started up correctly on the target server 15 Power Off and Reboot Clicking on a power button that shows Power ON status will either shut down or reboot the target server blade A Power Operation dialog is displayed in which the appropriate action can be selected Figure 4 5 Power Operation Dialog Power Operation abc Please select one of the following power operations for the server lt Ca Cancel Options gt gt Shutdown
376. l server the L Server will be located on Clicking Delete deletes the network in the last line of the list When Physical is selected for the server type the admin LAN network resource is automatically configured if the admin LAN network settings for all physical servers registered in a server pool are the same When the admin LAN network settings for physical servers differ specify the correct NICs for the admin LAN or public LAN and the network resources of the destination for connection When not using the public LAN select not connected Note 90906060000000029099209909909200000009099992909082000000000909209920999099090200000099999999092000090900099929092909000000009029299 When the admin LAN network settings for a physical server registered in a server pool are different an admin LAN network resource is automatically registered if a physical server is selected for use in the Server tab Also if an admin LAN network resource is specified for the NIC in Network NIC when Physical server is selected on the Server tab only a physical server or server pool with a NIC configuration matching that of the admin LAN network will be displayed For details refer to 16 2 2 Server Tab When performing NIC redundancy configure the settings by switching over to the Network tab For details refer to 16 2 4 Network Tab Label Optional Enter a label for the L Server Enter a maximum of 32 characters Co
377. laris Containers If the CPU s CAP value has not been set both Number of CPUs and CPU performance must be changed when changing the CPU settings CC 17 2 2 Modifying the Basic Information This section explains how to modify the basic information of L Servers Use the following procedure to modify the basic information of L Servers G amp Note Immediately after a snapshot is restored there may be differences between the configuration of VM guests managed by L Server and those managed by VM management software The differences in VM guest configuration are reflected on the configuration of the L Server by periodic queries made to the VM management software For details on reflection of L Server configuration by periodic queries refer to 17 2 Modifying Changing an L Server name changes the VM guest name on server virtualization software as well For associating an L Server name with a VM guest name refer to Association of an L Server Name with a VM Guest Name in 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template To change an L Server name the L Server must be stopped When the L Server power status is on the L Server name cannot be changed Change the names of physical L Servers when the power status of the L Server is OFF When the physical L Server power status is on the L Server name cannot be changed For virtual L Servers only when the VM product is VMware can the L Server name can be changed while the L Server power
378. laris Zone Solaris Zone A software partition that virtually divides a Solaris OS space SPARC Enterprise Partition Model ASPARC Enterprise model which has a partitioning function to enable multiple system configurations separating a server into multiple areas with operating OS s and applications in each area spare server A server which is used to replace a failed server when server switchover is performed storage blade A blade style storage device that can be mounted in the chassis of a blade server storage management software Software for managing storage units storage resource Collective term that refers to virtual storage resources and disk resources storage unit Used to indicate the entire secondary storage as one product surrogate pair A method for expressing one character as 32 bits In the UTF 16 character code 0xD800 OxDBFF are referred to as high surrogates and OXDCOO0 OxDFFF are referred to as low surrogates Surrogate pairs use high surrogate low surrogate switchover state The state in which switchover has been performed on a managed server but neither failback nor continuation have been performed system administrator The administrator who manages the entire system They perform pre configuration and installation of Resource Orchestrator Administrator privileges for the operating system are required Normally the roles of the infrastructure administrator and system administrat
379. le A collective term that refers to the files necessary for operating devices such as CA certificates user authentication databases customized user information etc but excluding the network device configuration file As these files are not usually changed after they have been configured Resource Orchestrator does not back them up each time automatic configuration is performed network device file Regarding the network device file management function this is a collective term that refers to the files held by network devices that are the target of backup and restore operations The two types of network device files are network device configuration files and network device environment files network map A GUI function for graphically displaying the connection relationships of the servers and LAN switches that compose a network network view A window that displays the connection relationships and status of the wiring of a network map NFS Network File System A system that enables the sharing of files over a network in Linux environments NIC Network Interface Card An interface used to connect a server to a network non global zone A virtual machine environment that has been prepared in a global zone Its OS kernel is shared with the global zone Non global zones are completely separate from each other OS The OS used by an operating server a physical OS or VM guest overcommit A function to virtually allocate
380. le connection stored in tenants makes requests to the VM host connection set in the definition file One VM host can be shared by multiple tenants in an environment where there is a separate public LAN for each tenant Preparations for using a console connection from a public LAN Preparations are necessary in order to use a console connection from a public LAN For details refer to E 1 VMware in the Design Guide CE Setting the VM Host Connection for each Tenant Set the VM host connection for when the console window for the L Server stored in the tenant is started For details refer to C 2 VMware in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V Admin clients must be in the same domain as SCVMM or VM hosts It is necessary to install the VMM management console for SCVMM that is of the same version as the SCVMM registered as VM management software Console This chapter explains the L Server console connection Use the following procedure to connect the console 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Console Screen from the popup menu The confirmation dialog is displayed 2 When using a virtual L Server click OK The L Server console window is displayed in another window amp Note When using virtual L Servers it is necessary to permit the starting of the console screen using the policy settings of Java Plug in Use the following procedure to permit the starting of the console screen When starti
381. lick OK Unregister multiple resources Use the following procedure to release a number of registered resources that have been registered in the resource pool 1 Right click on the resource pool in the orchestration tree then select Unregister from the contextual menu The Unregister a Resource dialog is displayed 2 Ifthe resources being deregistered are disk resources click the Search in the search conditions After entering the resource name click Search to reduce the number of resources displayed in the resource list 3 Select the resource to be deregistered from the Resource List 4 Click OK 19 5 Deleting Use the following procedure to delete a resource registered in a resource pool 1 Right click the target resource in the orchestration tree and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK G amp G Note 006062062000920990000090909929099099000009099090090090009099090900009099909909909000909090909099090900000909099099099090900099990990900009999900090029209299 When there are managed servers on the subnet to be deleted the subnet information cannot be deleted After deleting the managed server delete the subnet information 241 When registering resources directories and files that are necessary for performance monitoring are created on the server where the resources are registered This directory is not automatically deleted when re
382. line 347 chassis_name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 amp Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive e09006060000292990920992000090009999929099090000000909092909990909909909000009099990992909209090090900009929929000000009029299 ip address Enter the same IP address as that configured on the XSCF Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources 0060060000900909299090909909900000900909029909090909900000090909090900929099000090000090090999099090990990900000000929909909029000000009099999 snmp community name Enter the name of a SNMP community with read permission configured on this server s remote management controller XSCF Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens mgmt user name Enter the name of a remote management controller XSCF user account with administrative privileges platadm privileges Enter a string of up to 31 alphanumeric characters hyphens and underscores This name must start with an alphabet character mgmt passwd Enter the password of the remote management controller XSCF user account on Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric ch
383. line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis_name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 amp Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the management board Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read write permission as that set on the management board Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens mgmt user name Enter the name of a remote server management user account with administrative privileges This user name must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long mgmt passwd Enter the password of the remote server management account This password must be between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters long mgmt passwd enc Enter one of the following If mgmt passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Chassis Data Section Name Enter SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this
384. location Hyper V When using an L Server template with dynamic memory settings enabled VM hosts that do not support dynamic memory are excluded from being the targets of L Server deployment In this case 0 is displayed for the L Server conversion number even when there is available space on resources 2 For the resource pool VM pool configured as a resource pool for overcommit the capacity is calculated according to the specified calculation method for free space When configured to calculate using a maximum value free CPU capacity memory size are calculated based on the CPU performance memory size of the virtual machine Point When creating a virtual L Server if the CPU reservation performance and memory reservation capacity are not specified the values are configured as follows CPU reservation performance 0 Memory reservation capacity memory capacity or initial memory size 9060600600000090900000090909090900000909090609090000009090909909000000909099099090900000909090900000900029090000000099099009090000090990600099 VMware When configured to calculate using a reservation value free CPU capacity memory size are calculated based on the CPU performance memory size reserved for the virtual machine The number of L Servers that can be created is calculated based on the CPU reservation performance and the memory reservation capacity specified in the L Server template When the free capacity for VM pools is configu
385. lowing items Network resource name Enter a name for the network resource When selecting Admin LAN for type Enter up to 16 characters beginning with an alphabet character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters on on upper or lower case underscores _ periods or hyphens Ifa type other than Admin LAN is selected Enter up to 32 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric non on characters upper or lower case underscores periods or hyphens 138 Type Set the network resources type to create using the following option buttons When creating the public LAN a network resource name and a VLAN ID must be entered When creating a network resource for the admin LAN a network resource name a VLAN ID a subnet address and a subnet mask must be entered When creating a network resource for iSCSI boot a network resource name a VLAN ID a subnet address and a subnet mask must be entered Public LAN Admin LAN iSCSI boot Detail configuration Make settings to suit usage Use configured virtual switches Select this checkbox to use a virtual switch that was set up beforehand Clear this checkbox if VLAN auto configuration is to be used for the external port of the LAN switch blade Automatically configure VLANs for the uplink ports Select this checkbox if VLAN auto configuration is to be us
386. lowing settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select None from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN ID set for the selected LAN switch blade port is released 4 Repeat step 1 and set the new VLAN ID in the VLAN Settings dialog VLAN Select Create new or Change in the VLAN information and select the VLAN ID to be changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Select Tagged from the VLAN type of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 5 Click OK The VLAN ID is changed Changing VLAN Types This section explains how to change the types of VLAN port or tagged VLAN set on the external ports of a LAN switch Use the following procedure to change VLAN types 78 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch blade and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The VLAN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined VLAN Select Change and select the VLAN ID that has been changed Physical Port Link Aggregation Change the VLAN type Untagged or Tagged of the port number to configure or link aggregation group name 3 Click OK The VLAN type is changed Deleting VLAN IDs This section explains how to delete VLAN IDs Deleting VLAN IDs from LAN swit
387. ly storage and network thereby simplifying the allocation of and modifications to I O resources to servers and server maintenance For Resource Orchestrator it is used to indicate HBA address rename and ServerView Virtual IO Manager VIOM virtual server A virtual server that is operated on a VM host using a virtual machine virtual storage resource This refers to a resource that can dynamically create a disk resource An example being RAID groups or logical storage that is managed by server virtualization software such as VMware datastores In Resource Orchestrator disk resources can be dynamically created from ETERNUS RAID groups NetApp aggregates and logical storage managed by server virtualization software virtual switch A function provided by server virtualization software to manage networks of VM guests as virtual LAN switches The relationships between the virtual NICs of VM guests and the NICs of the physical servers used to operate VM hosts can be managed using operations similar to those of the wiring of normal LAN switches A function provided by server virtualization software in order to manage L Server VM networks as virtual LAN switches Management of relationships between virtual L Server NICs and physical server NICs operating on VM hosts can be performed using an operation similar to the connection of a normal LAN switch VLAN Virtual LAN A splitting function which enables the creation of virtual LANs seen
388. m L Server allocation regardless of its available space When operating a VM host in a cluster system create an L Server with the storage resources shared between VM hosts specified L Server cannot be created using storage resources that are not shared between VM hosts Depending on the None Definition only checkbox the power status of an L Server after its creation is as follows Table 16 2 L Server Power Status after Creation y When Checked When not Checked Virtual L Server Power OFF Power OFF For details on how to start an L Server refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server When creating a virtual L Server the values in the VM specific information definition file are used even if those values have not been set in the L Server template If there are discrepancies between the L Server template and VM specific information definition file e g CPU performance is lower than CPU Reserve L Server creation will fail For details on VM specific information definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers and Chapter 8 Creating Definition Files in the Setup Guide CE Hyper V When using dynamic memory and memory weight Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 SP1 or later must be applied to the VM host and SCVMM must be upgraded to System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 SP1 or later When creating an L Server for which dynamic memory is enabled o
389. m the ROR console The System Configuration Template can be obtained from a Resource Orchestrator manager installation 1 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 2 Login and Logout in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 2 Select File System Configuration File Download Template from the ROR console menu Displays the File Download window 3 Click lt Save gt 4 Specify the destination directory and the file name 5 Click lt Save gt B 2 File Format The system configuration files CSV format used for pre configuration are comma delimited The format of each line is given below File Format Definition The first line of the file must begin with the following Point Resource Orchestrator can import the following system configuration file formats RCXCSV V1 0 RCXCSV V2 0 RCXCSV V3 0 RCXCSV V3 1 RCXCSV V3 2 RCXCSV V3 3 RCXCSV V3 4 RCXCSV V3 5 However system definition files are always exported in the most recent format importing a file in an older format and re exporting it will produce a file in the latest format Note 90600920909000000909990909000009090029090000090909002090990000909099090990000090990909090000009090099099099000000990909090000009099090090900909299 Although each RCXCSV version has a different format those formats are retro compatible newer formats include all the information defined in older formats As detailed below s
390. m this power monitoring device and its specified voltage Comments Enter a comment that describes this power monitoring device Enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e G amp Note A line break is counted as one character 3 Click lt OK gt The registered power monitoring device will be displayed under the power monitoring devices tree If collection of power data is disabled in the option settings data will not be collected even if power monitoring devices are registered Change power data collection settings according to 7 8 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings G Note Resource Orchestrator is not aware of the relationship between power monitoring devices and actual server resources Make sure to register the power monitoring devices that are connected to the server resources for which you want to monitor power consumption 5 11 Registering Admin LAN Subnets This section explains how to perform admin LAN subnet registration Registering admin LAN subnets enables management of managed servers belonging to subnets other than that of the admin LAN Use the following procedure to register an admin LAN subnet 1 From the ROR console menu select Settings Admin LAN Subnet The Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 2 Click lt Add gt The Add Admin LAN Subnet dialog is displayed 51 3 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Subnet name Set t
391. me and VIOM cannot be used together within the same chassis When using PRIMEQUEST FC cards set with HBA address rename cannot use the PHP function Restarting of a server is required after replacing the FC card 1 Storage Settings Refer to 10 2Configuring the Storage Environment in the Design Guide CE to configure the storage When altering the configuration of a storage device already used by active servers ensure those servers are powered off before performing any configuration changes 2 Settings for the HBA address rename Function On the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server or the physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify HBA Address Rename Settings from the popup menu The HBA Address Rename Settings dialog is displayed 2 Define the following settings WWNN Specify the WWNN value provided by the I O virtualization Option The admin server generates WWPNs automatically from the values that are input into the WWNN and the number of HBA ports HBA ports Specify the following values according to the system configuration To create a single path configuration specify 1 For details refer to Figure 5 4 Procedures for Single path Configurations Tocreate a multi path configuration specify 2 However it is necessary to specify 1 during installation of the operating system Specify 2 and reconfigure HBA address rename settings after setting up the multi path
392. me is displayed Displayed only if managed by VIOM and a server profile has been set 287 Network Properties Area Physical Connections The list of physical connections between the server s network interfaces and LAN switch ports is displayed When a column heading in the list is clicked the color of the selected column will change and the resources can be sorted in either ascending or descending order Hardware Maintenance Area NIC Summary The MAC addresses and IP addresses of each server are displayed For servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers and PRIMEQUEST servers only admin LAN information is displayed For SPARC Enterprise servers only the IP address is displayed A Information 060606002000290900000909099099099000090909909090000090909909099090000090909290900000099090990900000090999000000000999099090000909909909000009999 The IP address displayed is the one set within the server s operating system For network interfaces that were made redundant using BACS software the information set in BACS within the operating system is displayed Partition Configuration The following information is displayed only when a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Partition name The name used to identify a partition is displayed SB The ID of the system board used to configure a partition is displayed IOB The ID of the IO board used to configure a partition is displayed GSPB Giga LAN SAS
393. ment Software VIOM Registers VM management software VIOM Table A 13 Popup Menus Available for Management Software vCenter Server SCVMM VIOM Popup Menu Function 271 Popup Menu Function Update ls Updates management software information Modify Registration Settings Modifies registration settings for management software Table A 14 Popup Menus Available for Network Devices Popup Menu Function Menu Submenu Deregisters the selected network devices from a resource Unregister pool Obtains and updates the information on the selected Update f network devices Moves the selected network devices to another resource Move Resources L poo Maintenance Mode Release 00000000 Releases maintenance mode External Management Starts the management screen Web console provided Software by the network device Table A 15 Popup Menus Available for the Orchestration Tree Popup Menu Function Create Powers on all L Servers in a resource folder Powers off all L Servers in a resource folder Reboots all L Servers in a resource folder Table A 16 Popup Menus Available for Resource Pools VM Hosts Servers Storage and Images Popup Menu Function Menu Submenu Register Resources Bu Registers a resource to the selected resource pool Unregister Resources He Unregisters resources from the selected resource pool Move Resources Moves registered resources in the selected resource pool to another resource pool
394. ment blade on Enter the IP address using periods Chassis name Enter a name to assign to this chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on the chassis management blade Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 3 Click lt OK gt The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any server blade mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as chassis name Slot numberUnregistered The only operation available for those unregistered server blades is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties If the manager is installed on one of those server blades this blade will be shown as chassis name Slot number Admin Server In that case server registration will not be available for the admin server but its hardware status and properties will be displayed in the ROR console 5 4 2 Registering Blade Servers To register a blade server PRIMERGY BX series a PRIMEQUEST server or a SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server its enclosing chassis must be registered first When using VIOM for I O virtualization VIOM server profiles should be registered in advance according to
395. ment software attaching disks to or detaching disks from the L Server may fail 17 2 4 Sharing Disks Between L Servers This section explains how to share disks between multiple L Servers 203 Prerequisites Sharing of disks is possible when the managed servers and storage are shared using Fibre Channel connections First disk System Volume cannot be shared between L Servers Control of simultaneous access to shared disks is performed by other applications such as cluster systems Disk sharing between L Servers is only possible for physical L Servers that are use SAN boot Installation Use the following procedure to create new L Servers and to share disks between L Servers Create an L Server First server Create an L Server referring to Chapter 16 Creating L Servers When creating an L Server using the command execute the rcxadm Iserver create command For details on the rcxadm lserver create command refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver and 14 3 1 Definition Information for Physical L Servers XML in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Creating an L Server For a second or later server Create an L Server In this case select the following Select the disk to allocate to the L Server Select Allocated for Allocation Status Select the first L Server created in Creating an L Server For a first server as Allocated L Server When specifying these items as search conditions connected shared disk
396. mment Optional Enter any comments for the L Server Enter a maximum of 256 characters 171 16 2 2 Server Tab Server Specification Methods Select a method to specify a server Click lt Model gt to select a model name to allocate to the L Server Clicking lt CPU and Memory gt enables you to enter the number of CPUs CPU performance and memory size of the server allocated to the L Server Note When CPU and Memory is selected you must enter the number of CPUs the CPU performance and the memory size 0000000009909099909909090990990000009909099909090909000000909090909909909090990900000000090909099909090909900000090090909909099099000000009099999 Number of CPUs Enter the number of server CPUs to allocate to the L Server Enter an integer between 1 and 240 CPU Performance Enter the server CPU speed to allocate to the L Server Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigahertz Values between 0 1 and 10 can be specified Memory Size Enter the memory capacity to allocate to the L Server Enter a number with up to one decimal place in units of gigabytes Values between 0 1 and 8192 can be specified Specifications The specifications of the physical server are displayed When Automatic or Pool is selected for Physical server a hyphen will be displayed in each parameter Physical server Select the physical server to allocate to the L Server Clicking Select displays the Sel
397. mments Storage Blade A power lamp is displayed in the top part of each storage blade The table below shows the status and meaning associated with each power lamp Table 4 12 Storage Blade Power Lamps B UT A Gray not lit Power OFF Power OFF status 4 3 3 2 VM GuestList When a VM host is displayed in the blade panel clicking the VM host OS icon displays a list of hosted VM guests with their statuses 13 Figure 4 4 Blade Panel VM Guest List o d y io Update 2009 06 29 16 10 28 E Total 10 fa Advanced gt gt T Chassis gt Seach 4 gt 116 116 1 E vmware El rem E Vmware E VMware m caa r bx620 2 4 eB ps0 w bx620 4 6 M bx20 5 web w2x3 12 win200312 05 fujtsu a LY Windows O LY Windows Ko A VM guest icon is shown on the left side of each VM guest displayed in the VM guest list Table 4 13 VM Guest Icon VM guest RA See For details on the different VM guest statuses refer to Table 4 3 Status Icons in 4 3 1 Status Panel A user defined label is displayed on the upper right side of the VM guest icon If no label is set The OS name is displayed If the OS name cannot be acquired because the OS has not been installed or for other reasons The VM guest name is displayed An OS icon is displayed below the label For details on the different OS icons refer to Table 4 10 OS Icons in 4 3 3 1 Resource List Tab A power button is displayed on th
398. more resources than the actual amount of resources CPUs and memory of a server This function is used to enable allocation of more disk resources than are mounted in the target server 375 PDU Power Distribution Unit A device for distributing power such as a power strip Resource Orchestrator uses PDUs with current value display functions as Power monitoring devices physical LAN segment A physical LAN that servers are connected to Servers are connected to multiple physical LAN segments that are divided based on their purpose public LANs backup LANs etc Physical LAN segments can be divided into multiple network segments using VLAN technology physical network adapter An adapter such as a LAN to connect physical servers or VM hosts to a network physical OS An OS that operates directly on a physical server without the use of server virtualization software physical server The same as a server Used when it is necessary to distinguish actual servers from virtual servers pin group This is a group set with the end host mode that has at least one uplink port and at least one downlink port Pool Master On Citrix XenServer it indicates one VM host belonging to a Resource Pool It handles setting changes and information collection for the Resource Pool and also performs operation of the Resource Pool For details refer to the Citrix XenServer manual port backup A function for LAN switches which is al
399. mum number of cloning image versions 1 Change the maximum number of cloning image versions 2 Check the maximum number of cloning image versions 65 For details of the methods for changing and checking the generations of cloning images refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE G amp Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing cloning image versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case collecting a new cloning image version will require selecting a previous image version for deletion Delete unused image versions manually if they are no longer necessary For details refer to 17 5 4 Deleting If the ROR console has been already opened refresh the Web browser after changing the maximum number of system image versions 6 5 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Virtual Servers Use the following procedure to change the maximum number of cloning image versions 1 Change the maximum number of cloning image versions 2 Check the maximum number of cloning image versions For details of the methods for changing and checking the generations of cloning images refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note If the specified limit is smaller than the number of existing cloning image versions older versions will not be deleted automatically In this case collecting a new cloning image version will a
400. n Perform the procedure described in 18 4 2 For Physical Servers or 18 4 3 For Virtual Machines and confirm the configured physical server or virtual machine linked to an L Server using the following procedure Confirmation from the GUI Select the L Server in the orchestration tree display the Resource Details tab and check the information is displayed in Controlled resources on the Status table In Controlled resources the following text strings are displayed When Server is displayed A physical L Server or a server is managed by a virtual L Server When Server Storage is displayed A server or a storage device is managed by a virtual L Server Confirmation from the Command Line Execute the rcxadm Iserver show command and check that the scope of the controlled resources ControlledResources is displayed For details refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For the scope of controlled resources the following text strings are displayed When Server is displayed A physical L Server or a server is managed by a virtual L Server When Server Storage is displayed A server or a storage device is managed by a virtual L Server 18 4 2 For Physical Servers Use the following procedure to use a physical server as a physical L Server 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click a physical server in the registered server pool and select Convert to L Server from the pop
401. n CSV format from the ROR console 1 Open and log in to the ROR console according to Chapter 2 Login and Logout in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE In the ROR console select File System Configuration File Export from the menu The export process starts automatically When the process complete successfully the File Download dialog is displayed Click one of the following When clicking lt Save gt As the Save As dialog is displayed specify the destination folder and file name and then save the file Note that the system configuration file can be exported only in the CSV format When clicking lt Open gt Open the file using an application such as Excel associated to CSV files When clicking lt Cancel gt Export operations will be cancelled G amp Note If any server is in switchover state the server name is enclosed in parentheses such as name The admin server subnet information is not output in the Subnet section 90060600600000920990909990992000090009090909090090990900000009090990090909909909900000090090909090990909200009000009909099009900900000090299299 Point 00606060600606002990909090690900000609099090909999990900000090009090990990990909090009000600990990099090999000000000090990990000600000092929299 Error handling If an error occurs during the export an error message is displayed Follow the message diagnostic to resolve the problem 102 Chapter
402. n admin LAN subnet is deleted the simplified DHCP service for Resource Orchestrator will be disabled In this case either use the OS standard DHCP service that was enabled when the admin LAN subnet was registered or perform re installation after uninstalling the manager amp Note It is not possible to delete the information of subnets which have managed servers registered Before deleting subnet information delete all managed servers that have been registered on the relevant subnet 0006062020002099000002099099099090000099909020000090900990299090000090990990909900000990990900000099099099099090000999909000000909999090000909999 95 9 9 Deleting BMC BladeLogic Server Automation This section explains how to delete the registered BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Use the following procedure to delete the registered BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software BladeLogic and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete management software BladeLogic dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The target BMC BladeLogic Server Automation is deleted 96 Chapter 10 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification This chapter provides an overview of the pre configuration function and explains how to use system configuration files 10 1 Overview Using the Pre configuration function it is possible to create system definiti
403. n them on unused physical servers in a server pool Repeat the following procedure the same number of times as the number of physical servers which are used for usage change a Create and Register Each Resource Perform resource creation and registration referring to Chapter 5 Registering Resources and Chapter 14 Registering Resources in Resource Pools b Confirm the Server Pool Confirm whether an unused physical server exists in the server pool When an L Server is allocated to all physical servers in the specified server pool release a physical server from an L Server c Release the resources of the source L Server for usage change Resources are released while the resource details of the source L Server for usage change are preserved For details refer to 17 8 2 2 Releasing Resources d Create an L Server Create an L Server for which resources are already allocated allocated referring to Chapter 16 Creating L Servers Perform the following configuration Set Deploy for image deployment from the select a cloning image section of the General tab Do not check the None Definition only checkbox from the General tab Check the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release on the Server tab 225 Operation The methods for operating physical servers after usage changes are as follow Perform the procedure before performing any operations When using multiple L Servers switching between them
404. n using the virtual storage resource on which the Thin Provisioning attributes are configured the disk resource can be created specifying a size exceeding the actual disk space Hyper V When creating an L Server or changing the configuration a maximum of four disks can be specified at one time To perform addition of five or more disks please perform an additional configuration change Saved disk resources that are created from virtual storage can only be connected to the L Server when using Microsoft R System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager Disk resources can be specified if the disk number No is 1 or larger After selecting Disk from the resource type to use resources that are displayed in the Resource List can be filtered by entering the search conditions and clicking Search Note When the creation of an L Server with saved disks specified fails if a virtual machine remains on VM management software remove the saved disks from the virtual machine before deleting the virtual machine from VM management software When a virtual machine is deleted without taking removing saved disks the saved disks are also deleted Disks on virtual machines can be identified using the disk number No specified when creating an L Server For details refer to 3 1 Operations for Creating or Starting L Servers in Troubleshooting 066060600600000006000000000000000000099009009909909099090929090990990909909900000000000000000
405. naged resource pools to managed resource pools 194 3 When using VMware the value to be reflected varies depending on the memory limit settings When Unlimited is set for the memory limit the specified memory size is reflected When a particular value is specified for memory limit that value is reflected When using Hyper V the value to be reflected varies depending on the dynamic memory settings When dynamic memory is enabled the setting for the maximum memory is reflected When dynamic memory is disabled the setting for the virtual machine memory is reflected 4 Updated only when VMware FT is configured or released When attaching and detaching disks from a virtual machine are performed consecutively on VM management software an event log regarding Storage Migration is output Network information and physical L Servers are not updated When attachment or detachment of disks is performed using storage management software the changes to the configuration of storage on the physical L Server is not detected For the created physical L Server reflect attachment or detachment of disks using the following procedure When a Disk has been Attached 1 Detach the disk from the physical server using the storage management software When the physical server is powered on it is necessary to change the status of the disk to detach into unused in advance 2 Attach the disk to the physical L Server For details refer to 17 2 3 Att
406. nagement networks create two or more network resources for admin LANs It is not necessary to register admin LAN subnets of the server resource tree For details on how to register admin LAN subnets refer to 5 11 Registering Admin LAN Subnets Ruleset Optional Select a ruleset to use from the rulesets available for network resources Physical LAN segment Optional When using network auto configuration with a physical NIC specify the physical LAN segment If no server NIC is defined Setting will not be displayed for the physical LAN segment For details on the server NIC definitions refer to 14 11 Server NIC Definitions in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Label Optional A custom label can be defined for the network resource User defined labels make it easier to identify the resource 141 Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Optional A custom comment can be defined for the network resource For example registering detailed work content troubleshooting and recovery procedures can speed up recovery Enter a maximum of 256 characters 3 Click lt OK gt The network resource is created and registered in a network pool When checking the Automatically configure VLANs for the uplink ports checkbox in the VLAN ID Uplink port settings a tagged VLAN is automatically configured in the uplink port of LAN switch blade when creating a network resource 14 3 2 Creating Network Resources Using Already R
407. nagement software for the virtual storage is displayed Physical Storage Unit The storage unit for the virtual storage is displayed A 6 9 VM Management Software Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Resource Type The resource type of the virtual storage is displayed Label The label is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Configuration Information Management Software Type The management software type of the storage management software is displayed Version The version of the storage management software is displayed IP Address The IP address used to access the storage management software is displayed Port Number The port number used to access the storage management software is displayed User ID The user name of the storage management software is displayed Management software A link to the web interface of the management software is displayed Virtual Storage List Status The status of the registered virtual storage is displayed Capacity Unused Capacity Total Capacity The capacity of the registered virtual storage is displayed Storage Type The type of the registered virtual storage is displayed Attributes The type of the virtual storage is displayed 300 Storage Management Software The storage management software for the virtual storage is displayed Physical Storage Unit The storage unit for the virtual storage is displayed A 6
408. nager services Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE When changing the nfagent port the following ports on managed servers should be set to the same value Set the nfagent port set on each managed server to the same value according to the instructions given in 7 1 6 Changing Port Numbers The system image and cloning images collected before the change can no longer be used and should be deleted If necessary re collect system images and cloning images Related Services Use the following procedure to change the port numbers used for the related services However the port numbers of the DHCP server and the dhcpd service cannot be changed Windows Manager 1 Change the port numbers a Open the Windows Registry Editor and search for the following subkey When using a 32 bit version of Windows Key name HKEY LOCAL MACHINENSSOFTWAREWujitsuSystemcastWizard CLONE When using a 64 bit version of Windows Key name HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu S ystemcastWizard CLONE b Select PortBase from the registry entries under this subkey c From the menu select Edit Modify The Edit DWORD Value dialog is displayed d Select Decimal and click OK This port value will define the first port of the range used by deployment services However because the related services can use up to 16 port numbers ensure that all ports included between Po
409. nation may restrict SNMP access to that switch blade In a clustered manager configuration set the physical IP addresses of both the primary and secondary nodes as SNMP trap destinations If the LAN switch blade is set to only grant access from known IP addresses be sure to give permissions to the physical IP addresses of both the primary and secondary cluster nodes as is done with trap destination settings For details refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade to be used 0 00606000090909909929099909909990000000999990990909009090009909999090909099000000000099999099099909000000909099909990990990000000900999999 Change the IP address set within the operating system Change the IP address following the instructions given in the operating system s manual If the admin LAN has been made redundant change the admin IP address set in the following tools or products PRIMECLUSTER GLS BACS Intel PROSet Refer to the manual of each product for usage details Ina clustered manager configuration change the cluster IP address according to the instructions given in Changing the IP Address of a Clustered Manager Change the IP address registered as the manager s admin IP address Use the rcxadm mgrctl modify command to set a new IP address Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETU
410. nd SAN connections All servers must also be able to access the same network and storage devices Note that LAN or fibre channel switches connected in a cascade configuration are viewed as a single device Some applications may require manual adjustments to function properly after cloning If necessary manually perform such adjustments before or after the cloning process When backing up or restoring system images or collecting and deploying cloning images up to four processes can be executed simultaneously If four processes are already being executed any additional image operations will enter a standby state Moreover server switchover which is executed using the backup and restore method or any restore process performed during failback will also enter a standby state When using auto recovery and manual switchover operations with the backup restore method execute a maximum of three system image backup restore or cloning image collection deployment operations at the same time After collecting or deploying a cloning image software required for connecting to external servers etc when the OS is started may not start correctly In this case restart the operating system after collecting or deploying the cloning image For managed servers on which the Watchdog function is enabled cloning operations on that server may be aborted by an automatic restart or shutdown The Watchdog is a function which automatically restarts or shuts down non r
411. nding on the amount of resources used by other VM guests on the same VM host 000000092090900009009092909900000009099090909000090900990990900000090429099090990000990909909000000990909099099099090009990920000000029209909000009999 If multiple snapshots are collected of the same L Server the snapshots are managed by automatically adding version numbers to the snapshot file name starting from 1 If the number of snapshot versions exceeds the limit standard limit is 3 the oldest snapshot will be deleted Use the rcxadm imagemgr command to change the maximum number of snapshot versions For details on the rcxadm imagemgr command refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE To collect a snapshot it is recommended that the power of the L Server is OFF to avoid any inconsistencies occurring in the data and file system on the disk When collecting a snapshot from an L Server that is running the L Server must be configured in advance for live collection of snapshots For details on the settings required to collect a snapshot when the server is running refer to the manual of the server virtualization software For details on operations using the rcxadm image command refer to 4 1 rcxadm image in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note 00606060000999090000090909090900000090990000000909099000000000909090900900090900900009000090900090900000909909090000000900900060600909299 Immediately after a snapshot is
412. ndows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm dbctl modify passwd RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rexadm dbctl modify passwd RETURN Inaclustered manager configuration bring offline all manager resources except for the shared disk move all cluster resources from the primary node to the secondary node then execute the rcxadm dbctl modify command on all the nodes that are hosting cluster resources 4 Restart the manager Start the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE 68 Chapter 7 Changing Resources This chapter explains how to change settings for the admin server or resources registered on the admin server 7 1 Changing Chassis and Managed Server Settings This section explains how to change the settings for the chassis and managed servers If collecting the system images and cloning images of managed servers collect them after completing changes to managed server settings For details on backing up system images refer to Backup For details on how to collect cloning images refer to 17 5 1 Collecting and Registering amp Note To change VM guest settings use the management console of the server virtualization software used A managed server that has already been registered cannot be moved to a different slot To move a managed server to a different slot first delete the managed server then move it to the new slot and
413. nfig import command after specifying false in the AutoConfiguration element of the network configuration information it is excluded from the targets of auto configuration during network device modification Whenan infrastructure administrator is excluding the network device from the target of auto configuration during network device modification By executing the rcxadm netdevice modify command after specifying false in the AutoConfiguration tag of the network configuration information it is excluded from the targets of auto configuration during network device modification p Example When an infrastructure administrator is configuring the network device using auto configuration 257 opt FJS Vrcevmr bin rcxadm netdevice set name nd01 attr auto_conf true lt RETURN gt When an infrastructure administrator is excluding the network device from auto configuration You can confirm either of the following operations if the network device is the target of auto configuration From the GUI 1 Select the target network device in the network device tree 2 Select the Resource Details tab 3 Refer to auto configuration of basic information to confirm state of auto configuration true Indicates that the network device is the target of auto configuration false Indicates that the network device is not the target of auto configuration Confirmation from the Command Line Confirm if the network device is the target of
414. ng configuration is necessary only when registering an admin LAN subnet for the first time Windows Manager m Information 0606002000209900000909920900000909099090000009090929099090909000090909909000009099000000000909009090000009999090900009099909909000009999 When configuring a cluster system in an environment that already has an admin LAN registered perform steps 5 to 10 and 13 1 Allocate the shared disk to the primary node Right click Services and Applications RC manager on the Failover Cluster Management tree and select Move this service or application to another node 1 Move to node zode name from the displayed menu The name of the primary node is displayed for node name 2 Delete the registry replication settings from the following Services and Applications of the manager Based on the following table delete registry replication for the resources 52 x64 Resources for l HKEY LOCAL MACHINEJSOFTWAREWow6432NodeWujitsu SystemcastWizard ResourceDepot Deployment Service HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu SystemcastWizard DatabaseBroker Default HKEY LOCAL MACHINEJSOFTWAREWow6432NodeWujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP PXE Services HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu SystemcastWizard PXE ClientBoot x86 Resources for HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu Systemcast Wizard ResourceDepot Deployment Service HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fuj
415. ng detached disks from virtual storage when detaching them the L Server can be connected with the same operations as the LUNs that were detached in advance When not deleting detached disks from virtual storage when detaching them use the following procedure to delete the disk resources 1 Connect the disk resource to the L Server 2 Select Yes in Detach Selections disks when detaching disks Otherwise delete the L Server amp Note Immediately after a snapshot is restored there may be differences between the configuration of VM guests managed by L Server and those managed by VM management software The differences in VM guest configuration are reflected on the configuration of the L Server by periodic queries made to the VM management software For details on reflection of L Server configuration by periodic queries refer to 17 2 Modifying If the disk configuration of a virtual machine is modified using VM management software attaching and detaching disks to and from virtual L Servers will be disabled VMware 202 When changed to use a device path other than the following SCSI 0 0 SCSI 0 6 SCSI 0 8 SCSI 0 14 SCSI 1 0 SCSI 1 6 SCSE1 8 SCSIE1 14 AM SCSI 2 0 SCSI 2 6 SCSE2 8 SCSI2 14 AM SCSI 3 0 SCSI 3 6 SCSE3 8 SCSE3 14 AM When changed to use Raw Device Mapping Hyper V When changed to use a device path other than the following IDE 0 0 SCSI 0 1 SCSI 0 14
416. ng image deployment process starts The process status can be checked in the Recent Operations area of the ROR console Clicking Cancel in the Recent Operations area displays a confirmation dialog and stops the process Note 6606060000000000000000000000090090090090909090905000900609009009009000000000000000000000000000092090909999 Please note that canceling the deployment of a cloning image does not restore the destination server to the state before the deployment took place Deploying a cloning image to multiple destination servers a In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning images is displayed under the cloning image list b Right click the cloning image to deploy and select Deploy from the popup menu The Deploy a Cloning Image dialog is displayed A server that can be deployed is displayed C Check the checkbox of the server to deploy a cloning image to and set the following items Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the destination server from maintenance mode after cloning image deployment If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image 127 The Server Name column displays the names of each destination servers By default server names computer name or hostname or physical server names are displayed The names specified in this column will be assigned to dest
417. ng images Solaris Containers Cloning Images cannot be operated from the ROR console 209 17 5 1 Collecting and Registering This section explains how to collect cloning images Use the following methods to collect cloning images Collect cloning images from L Servers with an OS installed Collect Cloning Images from Templates of Server Virtualization Software Register the server management software BMC BladeLogic Server Automation package Note Cr For physical L Servers agents must be registered before collecting cloning images For details refer to B 6 Collecting and Registering Cloning Images in the Setup Guide CE Use the following method to collect cloning images Collect cloning images from L Servers with an OS installed 1 After installing an OS right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Cloning Collect from the popup menu The Collect a Cloning Image dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined amp Note For physical L Servers the target L Server must be operating when cloning images are being collected Cloning images cannot be collected from a physical L Server on which a VM host has been installed For virtual L Servers the target L Server must be stopped when cloning images are being collected Cloning Image Name New Enter a name to identify the collected cloning image For a cloning image name ent
418. ng of the console screen is not allowed the Download dialog of the Java policy setup script is displayed 2 Click OK The Java policy setup script is downloaded Save the file 3 Execute the Java policy setup script to configure the settings for permitting the console screen startup 208 4 After performing the configuration close the web browser Log in to Resource Orchestrator again using a web browser and the console screen can then be started from the ROR console In cases where the following VM products are used for a virtual L Server starting the ROR console turns the L Server ON when the selected L Server was OFF VMware vSphere 4 0 VMware vSphere 4 1 For physical L Servers when opening the L Server console screen at the second time or later a window for iRMC management may be opened instead of the console screen If an iRMC management screen is displayed close that screen and then start the console screen again For details refer to 3 4 When Opening the Physical L Server Console Screen the iRMC Management Window may be Opened in Troubleshooting 17 4 Deleting an L Server This section explains how to delete an L Server To delete an L Server the L Server must be stopped If an L Server is deleted the resources allocated to the L Server are automatically made available for reuse 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Delete from the popup menu The Delet
419. ngs using the rcxadm netdevice modify command 45 Deletion of a network device using the rexadm netdevice delete command is not possible because the target network device cannot be identified Refer to 9 4 2 Deleting LAN Switches and Network Devices to delete the target network device The intended network device may not be automatically configured Disaster Recovery may fail Under redundancy configuration it is only enabled for the same vendor and model For this reason registration should be made specifying the same group ID as the network device that has been already registered for redundancy configuration During the registration confirmation process if the network device has a different vendor name and device name from the registered one registration as a network device will fail 006062062009229209909000090909990990990900909909909000000090990990900009099909909090900090909090909000000909099099099099090009099909902000099990990009009999 5 8 When using PRIMEQUEST Servers This section explains how to register resources when using PRIMEQUEST servers Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers 5 8 1 Registering Chassis For PRIMEQUEST Servers By registering a chassis every partition mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on registering serv
420. nk ports can be filtered based on the following items Filter ports by VLAN ID Chassis name Switch name Location to mount Port number LAG name If the VLAN auto configuration of the external port is to be used clear the Filter ports by VLAN ID checkbox and check the checkbox of the external port that was set up beforehand Do not specify for internal networks or external networks with rack mount servers only Subnet settings Optional This setting can be omitted if Public LAN is specified for the type Enter if you want to automatically set a network and IP address for the NIC connected to the network resource when deploying an image on an L Server IP addresses included in subnet addresses are allocated to L Servers but it is possible to specify a range of addresses to exclude Clicking lt Add gt will display the Define start and end IP addresses dialog specify the range of IP addresses to exclude and click lt Add gt To reactivate excluded IP addresses check the appropriate checkboxes on the list and click lt Delete gt Clicking lt OK gt displays the original dialog with the entered settings Network addresses and broadcast addresses are automatically excluded 140 A Information If a subnet address has been set for the network resource the IP address can be automatically set when deploying an image to an L Server If no subnet address is set the DHCP settings are adopted Cr Subnet addre
421. no server recovery functions on Hypervisor Gj Note 9090000000090909909099909909090990990000000909909909090909009000090909909099099099090900900000909090990999099099909000000090990909909909909000090000909999 When KVM or RHEL Xen is selected for the VM type because server recovery cannot be enabled do not select the HA checkbox Alive monitoring Configure alive monitoring as enabled or disabled The following operations are performed if you select the HA checkbox Xen KVM Oracle VM Solaris Containers The alive monitoring configuration is not displayed Exclusion Enter when not operating the virtual machine on the same VM host as another virtual machine For example when performing load balanced work using multiple virtual machines you can set exclusive operation to ensure that the work continues in a degenerate state because only one virtual machine stops when a physical server fails Specify an L Server name or resource folder name that you have operating privileges for The virtual machine of the specified L Server is allocated to different physical servers 184 If you specify a resource folder name one s own L Server can be included in the resource folder In the following cases the L Server may be allocated to the same physical server regardless of whether exclusive operation is specified If no other VM hosts that meet the conditions for exclusive operation can be found such as when there are no VM hosts in t
422. ns how to register resources used by Resource Orchestrator The Resource Orchestrator manager must be completely installed beforehand In addition to the usual method of registering each resource individually it is also possible to register or change registration settings of multiple resources in batches using the pre configuration function Registering or modifying resources individually This method is used when the number of servers to be installed is small from one to four or when adding a similar number of servers to an existing environment Registering or modifying multiple resources collectively This method is used when there are many five or more servers to be installed For information on how to register and modify multiple resources together refer to Chapter 10 Pre configuration for Resource Registration and Modification A Information User Accounts When creating new user accounts changing passwords or modifying permission levels during setup refer to Chapter 3 Configuring Users for Infrastructure Administrators Backing up the Admin Server The admin server should be backed up after the entire system has been completely set up or after registering changing or deleting resources For information about backing up the admin server refer to 10 1 Backup and Restoration of Admin Servers in the Operation Guide CE 00606000200099209000000099290000009090909009000009090099099090000009099900000090990920900
423. nt are different from the user name and password used to log in on the Web UI for management board CC 3 Click lt OK gt The mounted chassis will be displayed under the server resource tree Any partition mounted within this chassis will be detected automatically and shown as cassis name partition numberUnregistered The only operation available for those unregistered partitions is server registration while the ROR console can only display their hardware statuses and properties If the manager is installed on one of those partitions this partition will be shown as chassis name partition number Admin Server In that case server registration will not be available for the admin server but its hardware status and properties will be displayed in the ROR console 5 8 2 Registering PRIMEQUEST Servers For details on PRIMEQUEST server registration refer to 5 4 2 Registering Blade Servers 5 9 When using SPARC Enterprise Servers This section explains how to register resources when using SPARC Enterprise servers Registering SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers Registering SPARC Enterprise M3000 T Series Servers 5 9 1 Registering SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers By registering a chassis every partition mounted in the chassis will be automatically detected and displayed as an unregistered server in the server resource tree Register these managed servers individually For details on re
424. nu Function OFF Forced Powers off a SPARC Enterprise server without shutting orce down its operating system Reboot Reboots a SPARC Enterprise server after shutting down eboo its operating system Reboot Forced Reb ots a SPARC Enterprise server without shutting down its operating system Switches over a server with one of its spare servers Failback Switches back a server to its pre switchover state Spare Server Accepts a switched over configuration as final without Takeover M Un switching back to the original configuration Maintenance Mode Release Sets a server to active mode External Management Opens external server management software for SPARC Software Enterprise servers Table A 6 Popup Menus Available for LAN Switches Popup Menu Function LAN Switch Registers a LAN switch C a T s Pe eet Network Settings oa hpa the VLAN settings of a LAN switch s external 2 s Restore Restore Restores a LAN switch Restores a LAN switch configuration External M t cana a a Opens a LAN switch s Web interface Software Note Not available for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode Table A 7 Popup Menus Available for System Images Popup Menu Function Table A 8 Popup Menus Available for Cloning Images Popup Menu Function Deploy Me Deploys a cloning image to a server 270 amp Note If ServerView Deployment Manager is used on the admin LAN the
425. number protocol name nfagent 23458 tcp Linux VMware Xen KVM Use a command such as vi to change the following line in the etc services file service name port number protocol name nfagent 23458 tcp Solaris Use a command such as vi to change the following line in the etc services file service name port number protocol name rcvat 23458 tcp 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed 7 1 7 Changing VM Host Login Account Information This section explains how to change VM host login account information If the login account information user ID and password of the VM host entered when the VM host was registered is changed change the login account information of the VM host that was registered in Resource Orchestrator The method for changing the VM host login account is shown below 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target VM host and select Modify VM Host Login Account from the popup menu The Change Login Information dialog is displayed 293 2 Enter the new login account information that was changed on the VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host 3 Click lt OK gt VM host login information is changed 7 1 8 Changing the VLAN Settings of LAN Switch Blades This section explains how to ch
426. o 17 4 Deleting an L Server Point Association of an L Server Name with a VM Guest Name When installing an operating system manually on the L Server or using the management console of server virtualization software select the L Server in the orchestration tree and operate the VM for the Guest_name displayed in Resource Details The following name is automatically allocated for Guest_name L Server_name Number Numberis automatically set by Resource Orchestrator to avoid overlapping of names on server virtualization software if an L Server with the same name is created during Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations For operation without numbering refer to Numbering VM names in Table 17 4 List of Items Specified in the Definition File of 17 8 1 Installation However L Servers with the same name cannot be created Avoid using the same L Server name more than once 060606000020909000000909090990000009099090900000909090990909000009090909028000009090900000000909090909099000000909909909000000909090900000909299 When creating an L Server log off ETERNUSmgr of ETERNUS storage registered on ESC When operating NetApp storage in cluster environments and operating a partial system due to system trouble perform the operation after recovering the NetApp storage and returning the system to cluster operation 168 When the status of the VM host and virtual storage is one other than normal the resource will be excluded fro
427. o 8 6 1 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Management in the Operation Guide CE Use the following procedure to delete a user account 1 In the ROR console select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 2 Select the user account to delete 3 Click lt Delete gt The Delete User Account dialog is displayed 4 Confirm the user account to delete 5 Click lt OK gt The selected user account is deleted From the command line execute rcxadm user delete For details on the rexadm user delete command refer to 7 1 rcxadm user in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Chapter 4 BladeViewer This chapter provides an overview of BladeViewer and explains its features Please note that BladeViewer is only available for PRIMERGY BX servers For details on the ROR console refer to Appendix A User Interface 4 1 Overview This section provides a functional overview of BladeViewer BladeViewer provides an intuitive representation of blade servers and their statuses This makes it easier to monitor resource states or perform basic operations on blade servers Figure 4 1 BladeViewer i A y jo Update 2009 08 29 16 13 59 0 2 8 0 Total 10 d 8 LJ 19 JEO e Oeon EM MB HaedSiend MJ HardSimd 9l vm 1 Bem 2 m12 BladeViewer allows the following operations Monitoring of resource statuses The statuses of chassis servers LAN switches and physical OSs
428. o connect to a NIC or Yes Yes Yes a NIC group Redundancy modification Example Changing the Yes Yes 3 Yes 3 combination of NICI and 2 to NIC3 and 4 Redundancy addition Example Changing NICI to Yes Yes 3 the combination of NICI and 2 Redundancy deletion Example Changing the Yes Yes 3 combination of NICI and 2 to NICI only Changing IP addresses across subnets is not possible 2 P addresses and network resources of virtual L Servers can only be changed when the server s status is defined 3 Select Admin LAN MAC address 1 of the physical server that the L Server will be located on as the admin LAN of the physical L Server When performing admin LAN redundancy for the physical L Server all NICs of the admin LAN for the physical server that the L Server will be located on must be included 4 For L Servers with RHEL KVM or RHEL Xen selected for the VM type the NIC cannot be added or deleted 5 For L Servers with VMware Hyper V Solaris Containers or RHEL KVM selected for the VM type NICs can be added or deleted Gj Note Cr Modifications to L Server specifications have no effect on the settings of the OS installed on the L Server Modify the network settings of the OS referring to the IP address and network information of the modified L Server For physical L Servers the position of the NIC used for the admin LAN cannot be changed After deployment of L Servers do not change the
429. o import and Click lt OK gt The L Server template is imported When a registered L Server template name is included in the specified file a warning dialog is displayed to confirm whether or not to overwrite the L Server template When overwriting it click lt OK gt When not overwriting it click lt Cancel gt and return to the dialog to specify the file name 160 15 1 8 Creating a Template using an Another Existing Template It is possible to create an L Server using another L Server template that has already been made Use the following procedure to create an L Server template from an L Server 1 Select the ROR console orchestration tree and select File L Server Template Edit from the ROR console menu The L Server Template Editor window is displayed 2 Select the L Server to save as an L Server Template and click lt Save as a Template gt The Save as a Template dialog is displayed 3 Specify the template name for saving the L Server and click lt OK gt The L Server can be saved as an L Server template Click lt Cancel gt and return to the L Server Template Editor window Note When an L Server template is created from an existing L Server the log is not displayed in the event and the progress report of the ROR console When using an L Server template which is created from an L Server linked with configured physical server or virtual machine to create an L Server the configuration of the L
430. o the L Platform is displayed Use Resource The name and status of the network device configuring the resources allocated to the L Platform are displayed in the following format When multiple network devices are configured network device names and statuses will be displayed separated by commas Name Status Name Status A 6 14 Firewall Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Firewall is displayed Network Device Basic Information Name Label The name of the directory containing the ruleset used by the resources allocated to the L Platform is displayed Description A description of the ruleset is displayed Parameter File Name The name of the parameter file set for the ruleset is displayed network device Preserved resource The name of the network device that configures the resource allocated to the L Platform Clicking the link displays the Resource Details tab of the network device Status The status of the resource to be used is displayed A 6 15 SLB Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed SLB is displayed 312 Network Device Basic Information Name Label The name of the directory containing the ruleset used by the resources allocated to the L Platform is displayed Description A description of the ruleset is displayed Parameter Fil
431. ocedure to display power consumption data as graphs 1 Select Tools Environmental Data Graph from the ROR console menu The Environmental Data Graph dialog is displayed 2 Set the following items Figure 13 2 Environmental Data Graph dialog Environmental Data Graph Choose the desired resources ard output time Up to 18 resources can be selected Target Resources ill Chassis B Server o Power Monitoring Device Select Resource Name j Resowce Type O bx900 Chassis ej L bx800 2 Server O bxeo0 3 Server O bx800 4 Server L bx800 6 Server L bx800 7 Server O bx800 8 Server O bx800 9 Server L bxeo0040 Server vi Graph Settings Power Instantaneous power consumption Data Type O Average power Average power consumption during the selected time span paren Wis Span Rate Finest sampling v Graph Output 133 Target Resources Specify the power monitoring target name to display the power consumption data graph of Select the checkboxes of each desired target Up to 18 targets can be selected Graph Settings Data Type Specify the type of data to display the graph Specify either one of the following for the data type Power Instantaneous power consumption Average power Average power consumption during the selected time span Output Time Span Select the time span for the data from the drop down menu Select one of the following options Last hour Last day Last
432. odify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click lt OK gt Basic information for the storage management software is modified 7 10 2 Changing Storage Unit Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic information of storage units The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to change the basic information of storage units 1 In the ROR console storage tree right click the target storage unit and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 3 Click lt OK gt Basic information for the storage unit is modified 7 10 3 Changing Virtual Storage Resource Basic Information This section explains how to change the basic settings of virtual storage resources The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to modify the basic information for virtual storage resources 1 Inthe ROR console storage tree right click the target virtual storage resource and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 2 Modify the values f
433. oes not restore the destination server to the state before the deployment took place 3 Restart applications on the destination server s Perform the following settings if necessary The settings of NIC redundancy for admin LANs and public LANs The settings of tagged VLANs for NICs After deployment destination servers are set to use the admin server as their default gateway Re configure such network settings if necessary Check that applications are running properly on destination servers At this point if an application is still using the source server s hostname or IP address e g within application specific settings or configuration file manually update such settings with the destination server values G amp Note 0060600009099922909909009099000000090299909090900000090990909090909000000000900909990990900929090000009009909900909000000009090999 When a managed server is a PRIMEQUEST set the PSA MMB IP address after deployment For details refer to the PRIMERGY Partition Model manual 128 4 Release maintenance mode This step is not required if the Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox was enabled in the Deploy a Cloning Image dialog a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the source server or its physical OS and select Maintenance Mode Release from the popup menu The Release Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click lt OK gt The target server is release
434. ofiles to open the Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager and change the settings Changes made inside Virtual IO Manager are automatically reflected in Resource Orchestrator 7 4 Changing LAN Switch Settings This section explains how to change LAN switch settings 7 4 1 Changing LAN Switch Basic Settings This section explains how to change LAN switch basic settings The following settings can be changed LAN switch name node name for management purposes Admin LAN IP address User ID Password Administrative password Connection method SNMP community name Complete the changes to the settings on the target LAN switch before performing this procedure Use the following procedure to change LAN switch settings 2962 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree or network resource device tree right click the target LAN switch name and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify LAN Switch dialog is displayed 2 Make changes to the values as needed 3 Click lt OK gt The settings for the LAN switch are changed with the entered information Note 06060606000902000000009000400000090909909090000090090909090000009090900600600000090090600000009092009000000060900909000000000920090060060906996 It is possible to set the IP address of the target switch to another unregistered LAN switch However this will result in the Resource Orchestrator configuration being inconsistent with
435. ome sections described in B 3 Resource Definitions are only available with the latest format s RCXCSV V2 0 and Later LanSwitchNet ServerAgent ServerVMHost PowerDevice Memo RCXCSV V3 0 and Later VMManager 341 RCXCSV V3 1 and Later SPARCEnterprise RCXCSV V3 2 and Later PRIMERGYPartitionModelChassis PRIMERGY PartitionModelServer RCXCSV V3 3 and Later Subnet SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer MonitorSetting RCXCSV V3 4 and Later VIOManager RCXCSV V3 5 and Later SPARC SPARC Enterprise M3000 T series performs import export of a system configuration file CSV format by a section name SPARC The section name SPARCEnterprise only imports a system configuration file CSV format 60600020009000000909990990900009090909000000090909090099090000609099090000000909090000000900909090000000909099090000000920000000090299 Comments The following lines are assumed to be comments and are skipped Lines that begin with the symbol 7 p Example 606060602000090900000009000900000909909090000090090000000000990909000009090909090000009009090000000090909000000909060009996 Development environment definition 060606062000090900000009900000009090909090000090909090909000000090000000909909090000090900909000000009099090000099990000999 on Lines that consist of only blank spaces tab characters or linefeed code Lines that conta
436. on Point Clicking the close button will close the detailed content server blades LAN switch blades that was shown for the selected chassis 00606060600002000000909090000000009009099090000000009090909009009090900000000090909990909000000000909990900900000060009099299 4 Resource Icons This section describes the icons used to represent resource statuses on the Network Map 11 4 1 Resource Statuses The following table details the resource statuses associated with each icon Table 11 1 Chassis Icons m sms Wes No new errors or warnings were detected from the chassis A warning was detected from the chassis The status of the chassis could not be obtained error An error was detected from the chassis A fatal error was detected from the chassis which is now unusable The chassis was detected to have been powered off 107 Table 11 2 Server Icons A warning was detected from the server The status of the server could not be obtained error An error was detected from the server A fatal error was detected from the server which is now unusable The server was detected to have been powered off No new errors or warnings were detected from the LAN switch normal blad ade A warning was detected from the LAN switch blade The status of the LAN switch blade could not be obtained An error was detected from the LAN switch blade fatal A fatal error was detected from the LAN switch
437. on files that can be later used to setup a Resource Orchestrator environment Importing system configuration files makes it easy to perform various registration settings in one operation This prevents the operating mistakes induced by sequences of individual manual configuration steps The pre configuration function can be used in the following situations New Installation From a traditional work office or another off site location define the various parameters required for Resource Orchestrator and record them in a system configuration file Next send this definition file to your actual system location machine room and import the file into Resource Orchestrator using the import functionality of the ROR console This single operation automates the registration of all the servers defined in the system configuration file Backing up a System Configuration Using the export function of the ROR console the current Resource Orchestrator configuration can be exported to a system configuration file Batch Re configuration The registration settings of already registered resources can be modified easily by exporting the current configuration to a system configuration file and editing the desired configuration items before re importing that configuration file The actual re configuration is then performed as a single import operation Re use of Existing Configurations Once a system has been fully setup its configuration can be exported
438. oning image Solaris Containers L Servers cannot be created with Do not deploy specified in Image deployment Resource allocation When creating an L Server for which only a configuration definition exists check the None Definition only checkbox When allocating resources for an L Server for which only a configuration definition was created refer to 17 8 2 1 Allocating Resources Network NIC If None is specified in Template the Add and Delete buttons are displayed Clicking Add adds a network Perform settings based on the physical server the L Server will be located on Clicking Delete deletes the network in the last line of the list Label Optional Enter a label for the L Server Enter a maximum of 32 characters 180 Comment Optional Enter any comments for the L Server Enter a maximum of 256 characters 16 3 2 Server Tab VM type Select the VM type for the L Server to be created It is not necessary to specify this when deploying an image because the VM type of the image is used Number of CPUs Enter the number of server CPUs to allocate to the L Server Enter an integer between 1 and 8 Oracle VM The range that can be entered differs depending on the OS type of VM guests Windows An integer between 1 and 8 Linux An integer between 1 and 32 Hyper V Enter an integer between 1 and 4 KVM The number of CPUs supported by the KVM in use is the upper l
439. only for PRIMERGY BX servers Admin LAN MAC address The admin LAN address MAC address of the physical server is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected CPU core count The CPU core count is displayed CPU Type The CPU type of the physical server is displayed CPU clock speed The CPU clock speed frequency of the physical server is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers 320 Memory Size The memory capacity of the physical server is displayed This attribute is displayed as for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers or SPARC Enterprise M servers For SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers this is displayed only when the server is powered on Admin LAN Redundancy Displayed when NIC redundancy has been configured for admin LANs HBAAR LAN MAC address The MAC address used for the HBA address rename setup service is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers Hardware Maintenance Mode The hardware maintenance mode of the server is displayed Displayed only for PRIMEQUEST servers Boot option The boot option setting specified when registering servers is displayed Displayed only for PRIMEQUEST servers Hardware Details Area I O Virtualization Management Software The link to the web interface of external I O
440. onsole select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed 2 Select the user account to modify 3 Click lt Modify gt The Change User Account dialog is displayed 4 Change the items you want to modify 5 Click lt OK gt The user account information is modified Password Use the following procedure to change the password of the logged in user 1 On the ROR console select Settings Change Password The Change Password dialog is displayed 2 Enter the necessary items to change passwords Current password Enter the current password New password Enter the new password Confirm password Enter the new password again to confirm it 3 Click lt OK gt The password is changed Execute the rexadm user modify command For details on the rexadm user modify command refer to 7 1 rcxadm user in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 3 4 Deleting a User Account This section explains how to delete user accounts The user information in the directory service is not deleted when the settings are made not to register users in the directory services The user information in the directory service is deleted when the settings are made to register users in the directory services A definition file for directory service operations Idap attr rcxprop is used to define whether user information is registered in the directory service For details on the definition file for directory service operations refer t
441. onsole menu select Tools Topology Discover LAN switches The Discover LAN Switches dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Start address Enter the start IP address of the network where to discover LAN switches on Enter the IP address using periods Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the network where to discover LAN switches on Enter the IP address using periods Addresses in range Enter the number of addresses to scan for LAN switches Enter a number greater than 1 The maximum number of addresses is determined by the number of hosts allowed by the subnet mask b Example 0606060606060606060060000002000000009090900990909909909090909099090900600000000000000000000000000099099999999090909009006009299 If subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the number of addresses in the specified range could be any value between 1 and 256 39 SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 3 Click lt OK gt Resource Orchestrator starts scanning for LAN switches within the specified network range Discovered LAN switches will be displayed under the network device tree with the status Unregistered Registration 1 Inthe ROR console network device tree right click a discovered LAN switch and sele
442. or UPS enables monitoring of power consumption Use the following procedure to register power monitoring devices 1 Inthe ROR console power monitoring device tree right click Power Monitoring Devices and select Register Power Monitoring Device from the popup menu The Register Power Monitoring Device dialog is displayed 50 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Device name Enter a name to assign to this power monitoring device When exporting power consumption data use this name to select power monitoring devices for which to export data Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address that was set on this power monitoring device This IP address will be used to collect power consumption data from this power monitoring device SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this power monitoring device Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens This SNMP community will be used to collect power consumption data from this power monitoring device via SNMP protocol Voltage Enter the voltage V supplied to this power monitoring device Enter a number between 10 and 999 Power consumption data is calculated using the electrical current value obtained fro
443. or are performed concurrently 380 System Board A board which can mount up to 2 Xeon CPUs and 32 DIMMs system disk The disk on which the programs such as the OS and files necessary for the basic functions of servers including booting are installed system image A copy of the contents of a system disk made as a backup Different from a cloning image as changes are not made to the server specific information contained on system disks tenant A unit for the division and segregation of management and operation of resources based on organizations or operations tenant administrator A user who manages the resources allocated to a tenant tenant_admin is the role for performing management of resources allocated to a tenant Tenant administrators manage the available space on resources in the local pools of tenants and approve or reject applications by tenant users to use resources tenant user A user who uses the resources of a tenant or creates and manages L Platforms or a role with the same purpose Thick Provisioning Allocation of the actual requested capacity when allocating storage resources Thin Provisioning Allocating of only the capacity actually used when allocating storage resources tower server A standalone server with a vertical chassis TPP Thin Provisioning Pool One of resources defined using ETERNUS Thin Provisioning Pools are the resource pools of physical disks created using Thin Prov
444. or details refer to Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations When the resource is an L Server execute rcxadm lserver move command For details on the rexadm Iserver move command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 240 Note Storage resources with Thin Provisioning attributes cannot be moved to storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are not configured Storage resources with Thick Provisioning attributes cannot be moved to storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured When using datastores of VMware they can be moved to both storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured and storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are not configured For details refer to Effective Utilization of Storage Using Thin Provisioning in 2 2 8 Simplifying Storage in the Design Guide CE When using disk resources with iSCSI connections or disk resources for virtual L Server they can be moved to both storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured and storage pools for which Thin Provisioning attributes are not configured 19 4 Unregistration Unregister individual resources Use the following procedure to unregister a resource registered in a resource pool Right click the target resource in the orchestration tree and select Unregister from the popup menu The Unregister a Resource dialog is displayed 2 C
445. or stop whenever its VM host starts up or shuts down This can be achieved by configuring the VM guest s startup and shutdown options in the server virtualization software used For details refer to the server virtualization software manual Windows Take caution regarding the following points when shutting down or rebooting a managed server running a Windows operating system If Windows is not configured to shut down when the computer s power button is pressed the power operations in Resource Orchestrator may not function properly To check this option access the Control Panel open the Power Options and check the settings of the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties window Ifa file is being edited by a logged in user a dialog prompting the user to save the file is displayed and the system may not shut down immediately In such cases shutdown does not take place until the user takes the appropriate action or a specified time approximately five minutes has elapsed 4 5 Status Panel Operations This section describes the operations that can be performed from the status panel Figure 4 7 BladeViewer Tool Icons Contact icon 2 zi y io Update 2009 06 29 16 13 59 TENE Total 10 rem VMware EC 9l um 1 Sumit 9l wn 2 Byent 2 18 Contact icon Displays the Contact dialog This dialog shows the contact information that was set for the entire system Tools icon Enables selection of the foll
446. or the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 86 3 Click lt OK gt The basic information of the virtual storage resource is modified 7 10 4 Changing Disk Resource Basic Information This section explains how to modify the basic information for disk resources The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to modify the basic information for disk resources 1 Select the target virtual storage in the ROR console storage tree The disk resource list is displayed in the Resource List tab 2 From the disk resource list right click the target disk resource and select Modify Registration Settings from the displayed menu The Resource Change Setting dialog is displayed 3 Modify the values for the following items Label Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols Comments Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols 4 Click lt OK gt The basic information for disk resources is modified 7 11 Changing BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Settings This section explains how to change BMC BladeLogic Server Automation settings The following settings can be changed Label Comments Use the following procedure to perform setting changes for BMC BladeLogic Server Automation 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software BladeLogi
447. or the system disk The following device paths are used for data disks SCSI 0 1 SCSI 0 14 SCSET 0 SCSI 1 14 AM SCSE2 0 SCSI2 14 AM SCSE3 0 SCSE3 14 AM amp Note When using pass through devices or difference disks or when using a device path other than those listed above only servers can be managed For disks using any other device path assign 60 or higher as the disk number When collecting a cloning image for deploying an L Server use IDE 0 0 for the system disk 18 3 4 When Using Server Virtualization Software Virtual machines of server virtualization software supported by Resource Orchestrator can be managed as virtual L Servers in the following cases When the virtual machine is managed by VM management software When a Solaris container is used For the server virtualization software supported by Resource Orchestrator refer to 2 4 2 1 Required Basic Software and 2 4 2 2 Required Software in the Design Guide CE Server virtualization software supported by this function is as follows VMware Hyper V Solaris Containers 233 amp Note If 2 4 2 2 Required Software in the Design Guide CE is not installed a new L Server cannot be deployed on that VM host When using VMware the virtual machine on a VM host which is not managed with VM management software can be linked to an L Server Power operations starting up stopping and restarting and modification of basic information la
448. ort Numbers in the Setup Guide CE For information on how to change the ports used by ServerView Operations Manager refer to the ServerView Operations Manager manual The ports used for SNMP communication and server power control are defined by standard protocols and fixed at the hardware level and thus cannot be changed For the port numbers used by Resource Orchestrator refer to Appendix A Port List in the Design Guide CE When using a firewall on the network firewall settings should be updated to match the new port definitions and allow communications for any modified port Manager Services Use the following procedure to change the admin server ports used by manager services 63 1 Stop the manager Stop the manager referring to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager in the Operation Guide CE 2 Change the port numbers Use the rcxadm mgrctl modify command to set a new port number for a given service name Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify port name number RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm mgrctl modify port name number RETURN In a clustered manager configuration bring offline all cluster resources except for the manager s shared disk and IP address move all cluster resources from the primary node to the secondary node then execute the rexadm mgrctl modify command on all the nodes that are hosting cluster resources 3 Restart ma
449. ot registering the user in the directory service and using the application process add all infrastructure administrators and dual role administrators to the IflowUsers group For information on how to add those administrators refer to 19 2 1 2 Adding an infrastructure administrator dual role administrator to IflowUsers Group in the Setup Guide CE When users of Resource Orchestrator log in to ServerView Operations Manager user definitions are necessary for ServerView Operations Manager For details on how to add user definitions for ServerView Operations Manager perform settings for Single Sign On referring to the following manual 12 2 Set up ServerView Operations Manager and the Directory Service Environment in the Design Guide CE 3 2 Viewing a User Account This section explains how to view user accounts Use the following procedure to view a registered user account 1 In the ROR console select Settings User Accounts The User Accounts dialog is displayed A list of user accounts user IDs and user groups is displayed From the command line execute rcxadm user list or rcxadm user show For details on the rcexadm user list command and the rcxadm user show command refer to 7 1 rcxadm user in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 3 3 Modifying a User Account This section explains how to modify user accounts and passwords User Accounts Use the following procedure to modify a user account 1 In the ROR c
450. ote If physical servers or chassis are registered in a resource folder the resource folder cannot be deleted Delete the folder after moving or deleting all physical servers and chassis from the target resource folder 21 6 Moving This section explains how to move a resource folder Use the following procedure to move a resource to another resource folder 1 Right click the target resource folder in the orchestration tree and select Move to Folder from the popup menu The Move a Folder dialog is displayed 2 Select the destination resource folder 3 Click lt OK gt The target resource folder is moved to the destination resource folder In this case resources in the resource folder are also moved to the destination resource folder When using tenants to segregate resources movement of resources may be limited For details refer to Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations From the command line execute rcxadm folder move For details on the rexadm folder move command refer to 3 5 rcxadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 255 Chapter 22 Network Device Operations This chapter explains how to operate network devices 22 1 Switchover of Maintenance Mode This section explains operations temporarily excluding the network devices from the target of monitoring or auto configuration in order to perform operations such as regular maintenance of network devices configuring network devices or configuring a ne
451. ource pool is called a global pool Resource Orchestrator enables operation of tenants through division of resources on a tenant level as well as by user groups and combinations of scopes configured to divide resources Perform the following settings to share and segregate resources without combining them by tenants Create a tenant for each department When creating a tenant batch creation or setting of user groups users or resource pools can be performed Local pool creation or global pool selection can be performed for each resource pool Additionally when using a tenant only within a department create a local pool When sharing a tenant between multiple departments select an existing global pool When using tenants to segregate resources the following operations are limited A powered on L Server cannot be moved to another tenant Stop the L Server before moving it Resources used by powered on L Servers and resource pools or resource folders that contain those resources cannot be moved to another tenant Stop the L Servers before moving them L Servers that are using resources in another tenant cannot be started Required resources must be placed in the same tenant or the same global pool as the L Server 251 Figure 21 1 Sharing and Dividing Resources Using Tenants Administrator Administrator admin A admin B TenantA Tenant B User A1 21 1 Overview Resource folders are used when managing a
452. ource to another resource pool ove Resources Or moves a resource from the selected resource pool Fold Creates a resource folder in the server resource tree or older orchestration tree es eae Network Resource Using Registers VM management software VIOM fits Creates a network resource from an admin LAN subnet existing admin subnet Moves a resource pool resource folder or a resource Move to Folder to another resource folder C 7T RN Modify 2 Registration Settings Modifies a resource s registration settings 264 Menu Items Function Er Global LEN Global pool Modifies the global pool information for the tenant Spare Server Settings 6 Server Settings 6 Spare Server Settings 6 Modifies a server s recovery settings ee Settings Monitoring Settings Modifies the ECT a mu information for a server WWN WWNSetings 7 7 Modifies the WWN Modifies the WWN settings for a server for a server Detach Disk Detaches disks from an L Server Network Configuration Changes the network configuration of an L Server Modifies L Server definition information Modifies the registered login account used to VM Host Login Account f 2 B communicate with the VM host ow Se a link between an L Server and a configured emen i physical server or virtual machine L Server Conversion Best Cancels the link between an L Server and a physical ever i i server or virtual machine
453. overcommit function When the VM type of basic information is one of following types the functions can be configured VMware Hyper V RHEL KVM Solaris Containers Overcommit Decide whether to use the Overcommit function Select true when using the overcommit function Select false when not using the overcommit function false is selected by default Enter information on the CPU and memory When the VM type of basic information is one of following types the functions can be configured VMware Hyper V RHEL KVM Solaris Containers CPU Arch Select a CPU architecture IA is displayed Solaris Containers SPARC is displayed CPU Perf Enter the CPU frequency Enter a number between 0 1 and 8 0 Oracle VM Enter a number between 0 3 and 8 0 Solaris Containers Enter a number between 1 and 8 CPU Reserve Optional Enter the minimum size of CPU resources to be reserved for the L Server Enter when using the overcommit function Enter the value in the range from 0 to the upper limit of the CPU performance If left blank 0 is set when creating an L Server 155 CPU Share Optional Enter the relative proportion for allocation of CPU resources It is possible to specify it for VMware Enter when using the overcommit function Enter an integer between 1 and 1000000 By default the value is set to number of CPUs 1000 when an L Server is created CPU Allocation Priority Optional Enter CP
454. owing menu options Display Label List Displays the Label List dialog Displays a list of labels This list also allows modification of labels and comments For details on editing labels and comments refer to 4 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments Set Contact Information Displays the Set Contact Information dialog For details on modifying contact information refer to 4 5 2 Editing Contacts Change Password Displays the Change Password dialog For details on changing passwords refer to 4 5 3 Changing Passwords Help icon The Help is displayed 4 5 1 Listing and Editing of Labels and Comments Clicking on the Tools icon and selecting Display Label List from the drop down list displays the Label List dialog shown below When applications are defined with labels this list can provide a quick overview of the applications running on each server Figure 4 8 Label List Server Name OS Name Label Comments ap w2k3 11 ap w2k3 11 BX620 sv1 bx620 1 esx35 fi abc J web w2k3 12 web w2k3 12 hello dddd 7 win2003r2 05 win2003r2 05 fuj BX620 sv2 bx620 2 esx35 fi vm winnt4sv vm winnt4sv web w2k3 11 web w2k3 11 win2003r2 02 win2003r2 02 fuj win2003r2 07 win200312 07 fuj pvenhn m Bul 2 amp li s s5 hijo wClose Contents of the label list The Label List dialog displays server names OS names labels and comments for each server Clicking lt Switch To gt after selecting a serv
455. ox 3 Click lt OK gt The VM host resource is registered 14 2 Physical Server Resources This section explains how to register a physical server in a server pool Use the following procedure to register a physical server in a server pool 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the server pool and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Select the physical server to register The list of the physical servers that can be registered is displayed in the resource list Select the physical server that you want to register using the Select checkbox or select all registered physical servers displayed in the resource list by checking lt Select all gt G amp Note When the Display servers with OS installed checkbox is checked physical servers with OSs installed are displayed in the resource list However physical servers with OSs installed cannot be used for creating L Servers Do not check the Display servers with OS installed checkbox Do not select servers for which I O virtualization is not available such as other vendor s servers and Solaris as those servers cannot be used to create physical L Servers In this case link L Servers with configured physical servers For details refer to Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines 3 Click lt OK gt The physical server is registered 14 3 Network
456. p x00 t gaxe00 2 gexooo 3 E8 900 4 Unvogistered t E 8X900 5QUnregistered recent Operators ggxo00 5 gxoo0 7 Bewos 2i t Er 20120402 18 54 49 20120602 19 55 19 Compieted E8x900 2 A 2012 02 02 1853 57 201209502 18 53 57 Completed dy 8000 10 t Daxcoo 11 2012 05 22 18 49 18 20124502 18 40 18 Completed Tree Panel Recent Operations Menus Operations can be performed either from the menu bar or popup menus Status Panel The Status Panel displays the status of managed servers The statuses of both physical servers and L Servers can be displayed The properties displayed for physical servers and L Servers can be switched from the drop down menu Only the status of L Servers is displayed for the following users Users with a role that only allows use of L Servers 260 Users with restricted access If a warning or error event occurs on a managed server the status monitoring area starts to blink If you click the blinking area the server s information is displayed on the main panel For details on different statuses refer to A 3 Status Panel Tree Panel By switching between tree types it is possible to select from the following 7 types of trees If resource folders have been created in the server tree these resource folders are also displayed Only the orchestration tree is displayed for the following users Users with a role that only allows use of L Servers Users with restri
457. panding a new one will close the chassis that was expanded first When selecting a chassis The following items are displayed Server blades VM hosts VM guests Virtual switches LAN switch blades LAN switches connected to LAN switch blades Chassis connected to LAN switches Network links When selecting a server The following items are displayed NICs In addition the following items will be displayed when the selected server is a VM host VM guests Virtual switches Ports Network links When selecting a LAN switch blade The following items are displayed Ports Selecting a LAN switch blade will show all its ports For PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode a list of port groups is displayed Selecting a port group from the list will highlight in blue the ports belonging to the selected port group 106 Moreover selecting a port from a switch in IBP mode will show a list of port groups to which the selected port belongs If the selected port belongs to more than one port group all port groups are shown in the displayed list Expand button Selecting an item listed below will show this button on the upper right side of this icon Clicking this button expands the resource contents Server blade LAN switch blade VM server VM guest Virtual switches LAN switch Close button 11 Clicking this button closes expanded chassis contents replacing them with a chassis ic
458. placed into maintenance mode Cloning images cannot be collected from VM hosts or VM guests 119 Preparations Install the desired operating system and necessary applications on the managed server from which a cloning image will be collected Additionally apply any required patches and other necessary settings Make sure that the source server operates properly after those steps When the configurations of managed servers are as below execute the following commands before collecting cloning images Ina SAN data environment using a built in disk boot and a physical WWN or VIOM Windows Manager gt Installation_tolde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN Linux Manager tilopt FJSV rcvmr bin rexadm server set name physical server attr bootagt dos RETURN When using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 ext4 file system and one of the following conditions is met Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename When using a rack mount or tower server and the server is registered with Disable of Association with server management software ServerView is selected Windows Manager gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrevmr bin rcxadm server set name physical server attr bootagt winpe lt RETURN gt Ina SAN boot environment using HBA address rename
459. played CPU performance Defined The CPU performance value defined during L Server creation is displayed CPU performance Allocated The CPU performance value of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Number of CPUs Defined The number of CPUs defined during L Server creation is displayed Number of CPUS Allocated The number of CPUs of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Memory Defined The memory capacity defined during L Server creation is displayed Memory Capacity Allocated The memory capacity of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Number of NICs The number of NICs on the L Server is displayed The Number of Disks The number of disks on the L Server is displayed Model Defined The model name defined during L Server creation is displayed Model Allocated The model name of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed 303 A 6 12 L Server Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Server Information Server Specification Name The name of the L Server template used for the L Server is displayed CPU performance The CPU performance defined for the L Server is displayed Defined Value The CPU performance of the phy
460. ployed can be used as is New information on the physical LAN segments will be reflected on the configuration of virtual switches port groups and virtual bridges deployed after modification of the network resource When modifying the deployed network according to the physical LAN segment server virtualization software must be operated directly to do so 3 The subnet address and subnet mask of admin LAN can be changed when there are no physical servers using the network resources of the target of modification 4 Modification can be performed by executing the rexadm mgrctl modify command 5 Possible when the network resource has been created specifying auto true for the lt SwitchConfiguration gt element in the XML definition file Use the following procedure to change network resource specifications 80 1 Right click the target network resource in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Modify Specification from the popup menu The Modify a network resource dialog is displayed 2 Change the items you want to modify 3 Click OK The network resource is changed Note 6060606060200000909000090900909290909000090920909000009009209909000009009090909000009009020900000092090909900000090099290900000020090600606906299 The default gateway address of an admin LAN resource which is the same subnet address as that of the manager cannot be changed When changing the number of the IP address to use after
461. pool has thin provisioning attributes is determined when it is created Once a storage pool is created thin provisioning attributes cannot be set nor cancelled for that storage pool Label Enter a label for the resource pool Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Enter any comments for the resource pool Enter a maximum of 256 characters 3 Click OK The created resource pool is displayed in the orchestration tree 20 3 Modifying Settings Use the following procedure to change resource pool configurations 1 Right click the target resource pool in the orchestration tree and select Change Settings Basic Information from the popup menu The Change Setting for a Pool dialog is displayed 2 Change the items you want to modify 3 Click OK The resource pool setting information is modified 244 Note Once a storage pool is created its thin provisioning attributes cannot be changed For a workaround create a new storage pool with the desired Thin Provisioning attributes settings and then move the resources of the current pool to the new one 006000900929090090009009292099090000009099090909000009099099099000000902429099090990900099209029090000009992090990990900099900000000092909909000009999 20 4 Moving Use the following procedure to move a resource pool to another resource folder 1 Right click the target resource pool in the orchestration tree and select Move to Folder from the popup menu
462. ppropriate storage pool Create the specified size of disk resources and allocate them to the L Server Set Automatic for the default value amp Note 006006000090090929909009090000000902990909909000000099009209090909909000000000900999909909090929090000009009909099099000000009099999 When there are storage pools with and without Thin Provisioning attributes configured that have the same priority the storage pool that will be given priority is decided based on definition files For details on definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE If dynamic LUN mirroring has been set in the virtual storage a volume is also created on the ETERNUS storage in the remote site specified in the definition file If the ETERNUS storage in the remote site has been detected by Resource Orchestrator it will be detected as a disk resource that was prepared beforehand but do not register it to the storage pool 006060600000992929909909099090000090909099990990900990900000099909909900209090000000090909099999099099909900000009909990999099909000000090999299 Storage pool Select a virtual storage resource registered in the specified storage pool Create the specified size of disk resources and allocate them to the L Server Virtual storage Displays virtual storage resources such as RAID groups or aggregates as a list Select from the displayed virtual storage resources Create the
463. prise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 n Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat Ent L eo Hat Enterpise Linux g Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Virtual Machine Function a PRIMECLUSTER GLS Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 RHELS Xen Vi Abbreviation Products SCVMM System Center Virtual Macmne Manager 2008 R2 System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager VMware vSphere R 4 VMware VMware vSphere R 4 1 VMware vSphere R 5 VMware R ESX R Mware R ESX R 4 Mware R ESXi TM Mware R ESXi TM 5 0 Mware R Tools Mware vSphere R 4 0 Mware vSphere R 4 1 Mware vSphere R 5 Mware vSphere R Client Mware R vCenter TM Server Mware R vClient TM Mware R Fault Tolerance Mware R Distributed Resource Scheduler Mware R Distributed Power Management Mware R vNetwork Distributed Switch Mware R Storage VMotion ServerView Virtual IO Manager BMC BladeLogic Server Automation Se
464. pted encrypted Server Agent Management Information Section Name Enter ServerAgent as the section name This is required when registering multiple agents together for Windows or Linux managed servers Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line The change operation cannot be used for this section server_name Enter the server name the value of server_name in the Server section VM Host Management Information Section Name Enter ServerVMHost as the section name This is required when registering multiple agents together for VM host managed servers 359 Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in the Server section vm login name Enter the name of the user account used to remotely log into the VM Host vm login passwd Enter the password of the above user account for remote login vm passwd enc Enter one of the following If the password is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted Monitoring Settings Section Name Enter MonitorSetting as the section name Section Header operation on Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line server name Enter the server name the value of server name in th
465. purposes Note that all partitions Windows drives or Linux partitions included in the boot disk will be cloned Ud 12 1 Cloning Target E First Second Because managed servers are restarted during the cloning process it is necessary to stop all applications running on those servers beforehand The first partition must be a primary partition When multiple partitions exist within the disk of the cloning target the drive letters for the drives other than the system drive may be changed after cloning images are deployed Change the drive letter back to the original letter after deploying cloning images Dynamic disks cannot be used Cloning images can be collected with the following file systems Note that LVM Logical Volume Manager partitions are not supported NTFS 118 EXT3 EXT4 LinuxSwap The following conditions must be met for the managed server to collect the cloning image from and the managed server to deploy the cloning image to All server models must be identical The hardware configuration of each server must be identical including optional cards expansion boards and the slots they are mounted in The same BIOS settings must have been made for all servers according to the procedure in 8 2 7 Configuring BIOS Settings for Managed Servers in the Design Guide CE All servers must use the same redundancy configuration if any and the same number of redundant paths for LAN a
466. r consumption As well as server blades LAN switch blades management blades and other components used by multiple server blades can be mounted inside the chassis blade type A server blade type Used to distinguish the number of server slots used and servers located in different positions BladeViewer A GUI that displays the status of blade servers in a style similar to a physical view and enables intuitive operation BladeViewer can also be used for state monitoring and operation of resources BMC Baseboard Management Controller A Remote Management Controller used for remote operation of servers boot agent An OS for disk access that is distributed from the manager to managed servers in order to boot them when the network is started during image operations CA Channel Adapter An adapter card that is used as the interface for server HBAs and fibre channel switches and is mounted on storage devices CCM ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Copy Control Module This is a module that does not require installation of the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager agent on the server that is the source of the backup but rather uses the advanced copy feature of the ETERNUS disk array to make backups chassis A chassis used to house server blades and partitions Sometimes referred to as an enclosure 368 cloning Creation of a copy of a system disk cloning image A backup of a system disk which does not contain server spe
467. r in a Resource Yes Folder in 17 1 4 Batch Power Operation of L Servers in Resource Folders Hi g Yes Yes Yes Refer to Stopping an L Server in a Resource Folder in 17 1 4 Batch Power Operation of L Servers in Resource Folders Stopping all L Servers in a resource folder Refer to Restarting an L Server in a Resource Folder in 17 1 4 Batch Power Operation of L Servers in Resource Folders Yes Refer to 17 2 1 Modifying Specifications Refer to 17 2 2 Modifying the Basic Information Restarting all L Servers in a resource folder Modifying specifications Modifying the basic information Yes Refer to 17 2 3 Attaching and Detaching Attachi d Detaching Disk aching and Detaching Disks Disks Yes 1 Yes 3 Refer to 17 2 4 Sharing Disks Between L Sharing disks between L Servers y Servers Yes 1 Yes 4 Refer to 17 2 5 Modifying Network Resource Modifyi twork tti Y Yes 2 odifying network resource settings es es 2 Settings Using the L Server console Yes 5 6 Refer to 17 3 Using the L Server Console Yes 5 6 Refer to Collection of 17 6 1 Snapshot Deleting an L Server Collecting cloning images Viewing cloning images Unregistering cloning images Deleting Cloning Images Collection of snapshots o Snapshot restoration Yes 5 6 Refer to Restore of 17 6 1 Snapshot Snapshot deletion Yes 5 6 Refer to Deletion of 17 6 1 Snaps
468. r memory weight is specified creation of the L Server will fail unless there are a VM host and SCVMM satisfying the conditions above 606060606020000600060000060090094090000090909060909000009009099009090000009090060906000009009000000009090900000000090909090000000920000006090299 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters This section explains how to configure a physical L Server with server storage and network specifications configured without using an L Server template Specify the values on the following tabs General Tab Server Tab Disk Tab Network Tab OS Tab Use the following procedure to create L Servers 1 Right click the target resource folder in the orchestration tree and select Create L Server from the popup menu The Create an L Server dialog is displayed 2 On each tab set the following items 3 Click OK The L Server is created 169 Note Each item to set has an upper limit Even when valid values are specified the creation of an L Server may fail depending on the availability of resources in resource pools and the hardware configuration L Servers cannot be created for physical servers that are in maintenance mode ecccccc022029 Cr p Information For the storage units that support the setting of LUN alias names when disk resources are created with Resource Orchestrator set the alias if possible based on the disk resource name in the LUN If identic
469. r the relevant server is used on a physical OS or a VM host For a Physical OS Select Windows Linux For a VM Host Select VM Host and enter the VM host login account information This login account information will be used by Resource Orchestrator to control and communicate with the registered VM host User ID Enter the user ID to log in to the VM host Specify a user ID that has VM host administrator authority Password Enter the password of the user to log in to the VM host amp Note For details about the network interface s used on the admin LAN refer to 9 1 1 Admin LAN Network Design in the Design Guide CE If an incorrect network interface is used Resource Orchestrator will use a wrong MAC address for the admin LAN An admin LAN IP address is required even when registering a spare server Enter an IP address that does not conflict with the IP address of any other managed server on the admin LAN Aserver running a VM host can still be registered as a physical OS if its Category of Server OS is set to Windows Linux For Windows Server 2008 etc A VM host server that was mistakenly registered as a physical OS should be deleted and re registered as a VM host When registering rack mount servers on which VMware ESXi is operating select Disable for Association with server management software ServerView even when using PRIMERGY servers After registering the server clear the Register agent checkbox and reg
470. r type of the L Server is displayed For Physical L Servers Physical is displayed For Virtual L Servers The VM type of the L Server is displayed OS The OS type of the L Server is displayed Current Resource The following information is displayed according to the L Server allocation status When resources are already allocated allocated The name of the physical server or VM host that has been allocated is displayed When servers have been released preserved The name of the physical server or VM host that was used the last time the L Server was started is displayed The name is followed by preserved When only the configuration definitions have already been created defined defined is displayed Preserved resource The information set for Physical server or VM host during L Server creation is displayed When neither server nor host is specified Automatic Automatic is displayed When a resource pool is specified The server pool icon or VM pool icon and resource pool name are displayed 310 For physical servers The server pool icon and resource pool name are displayed Fora VM host The VM host icon and VM host name are displayed CPU performance Defined The CPU performance value defined during L Server creation is displayed Number of CPUs Allocated The CPU performance value of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Memory Defined The memory capacity defined d
471. r up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores or hyphens Destination folder Select a resource folder or a tenant to store L Servers Template Specify None in the selection list 170 Server type Enter the type of server for the L Server to be created Select Physical Image Specify a cloning image to deploy a Click lt Select gt The Select a Cloning Image dialog is displayed b Select the cloning image to deploy to the L Server specifying Deploy in Image deployment The available cloning images are displayed in the selection list Specifying Do not deploy in Image deployment will create an empty server without an operating system installed Note When using a Windows image for multiple languages English Japanese Language Pack manually select the language version when deploying the cloning image Resource allocation When creating an L Server for which only a configuration definition exists check the None Definition only checkbox When allocating resources for an L Server for which only a configuration definition was created refer to 17 8 2 1 Allocating Resources Network NIC If None is specified in Template and the server type is specified the Add and Delete buttons are displayed Clicking Add adds a network Perform settings based on the physica
472. r usage change 1 Change L Server Configuration for Fixed Operation Clear the Automatic when powered off checkbox of Resource release in the Modify an L Server dialog and click OK For details refer to 17 2 1 Modifying Specifications 2 Delete Unnecessary L Servers When unnecessary L Servers exist use the procedure in 17 4 Deleting an L Server to delete them 221 Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines This chapter explains how to link a configured physical server to a physical L Server and how to link a configured virtual machine to a virtual L Server A Information Ce It is possible to import L Servers into the L Platform management function For details refer to 7 2 3 Import to L Platforms in the Operation Guide CE 18 1 Management Scope The management scope varies depending on the resources used by the configured physical server or virtual machine Depending on which resources can be managed L Servers are referred to differently as follows L Server for Server Management Refers to L Servers that operate only servers For Physical Servers This applies when using the hardware listed in 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware For Virtual Machines This applies when using a physical server and when using server virtualization software The hardware listed in 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware and 18 3 3 Manageable Storage The server virtualization software des
473. racter and containing up to 15 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 48 Register agent checkbox Without Agent Registration Automatic registration of agents is not performed after server registration After registering servers register agents as required If registering agents register agents after checking the product name is displayed in the General Area of Resource Details tab Executing Update acquires the latest information With Agent Registration Agents are automatically registered after server registration is completed Remote management controller ILOM XSCF For SPARC Enterprise M3000 servers Controller type Select XSCF IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller XSCF User ID Enter the ID of a XSCF user account with administrative authority over this server Enter up to 31 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores _ or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character This user should have platadm privileges for XSCF Password Enter the password of the above XSCF user account Enter up to 32 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols pr p igi J nan amp LA nts ae xn pe S Du uum wp az lm vem a en TE E qu m an SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this server s remote management controller XSCF Either select p
474. racter is used for the first character When using an image created beforehand template configure the system disk for template using the following settings VMware SCSI 0 0 Hyper V IDE 0 0 Oracle VM For PVM Para Virtualized Machine xvda For HVM Hardware Virtualized Machine hda When using something other than the above for the system disk the L Server creation process that accompanies cloning image deployment may fail 14 7 2 Physical Image Resources This section explains how to register a cloning image that was collected using ROR VE to a resource pool 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click the target image pool and select Register Resources from the popup menu The Register Resources dialog is displayed 2 Selecta cloning image to register 3 Click OK The cloning image is registered 147 Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations This section explains how to operate an L Server template An L Server template comprises pre defined specifications number of CPUs memory capacity disk capacity number of NICs etc for an L Server Use the following XML format There are two ways to create an L Server template Using the Wizard GUI L Server templates can be created using the wizard GUI For details refer to 15 1 Operations Using the Wizard GUI Creation Using an Editor L Server templates can be created using an editor For details refer to 15 2 Editing a Template Usin
475. rated based on the XML specifications 15 2 2 Editing This section explains how to edit an L Server template Edit the L Server template exported in 15 2 1 Export using the editor The L Server template XML definitions differ depending on whether the server is a physical L Server or virtual L Server For Physical L Servers For XML definitions of L Server templates refer to 14 2 1 Physical L Server Templates in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For Virtual L Servers For XML definitions of virtual L Server templates refer to 14 2 2 Virtual L Server Templates in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Gj Note When creating a virtual L Server the values in the VM specific information definition file are used even if those values have not been set in the L Server template If there are discrepancies between the L Server template and VM specific information definition file e g CPU performance is lower than CPU Reserve L Server creation will fail For details on VM specific information definition files refer to C 1 Definition Files Commonly Shared when Creating Virtual L Servers in the Setup Guide CE 06060606200020909000000909090290900000900900200000000909000000090909090000000990000000000909090909090000999092900000002420000000009299 15 2 3 Import This section explains how to import an L Server template Use the following procedure to import L Server templates edited in 15 2 2 Editing 1 Select the ROR
476. ration are displayed in the destination list 3 Click OK From the command line execute rcxadm lserver migrate For details on the rcxadm lIserver migrate command refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Note 0000600090909090900000909099909090000009099909090000909909909090000090990990990900009090990909900000909090999099099090000909999090900000999909000009999 Select a destination VM host with available CPU capacity and memory If there is insufficient CPU capacity or memory migration between servers or starting of L Servers may fail When specifying Automatic selection in the Migrate an L Server dialog the migration movement differs depending on the value of the Resource type for VM Host specified when creating the L Server This also applies to L Servers for which overcommit settings have been configured When Automatic is specified for Resource type The migration is performed with a destination VM host selected from accessible VM pools In environments using overcommit depending on whether or not overcommit settings have been configured for the L Server the migration is performed differently as follows For L Servers with Overcommit Configured The migration is performed with a destination VM host selected from accessible resource pools with overcommit configured For L Servers without Overcommit Configured The migration is performed with a destination VM host selected from
477. rcxadm lserver attach For details on the rexadm Iserver attach command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE A Information VMware Hyper V Data disks are connected to the L Server as SCSI disks They are not connected as IDE disks Oracle VM Specify the following items when connecting data disks to an L Server When the L Server is an HVM Hardware Virtualized Machine System volume hda Data disks First to seventh sda to sdg When the L Server is a PVM Para Virtualized Machine System volume xvda Data disks First to fifty ninth xvdb to xvdbh 06060600000929090000000909909909900009090990909000009090990990990000009090929000000909090909000000909909090000000990909909000090099099000009999 amp Note When an L Server is powered on the disk to be attached to must be recognized by the L Server Follow the procedure provided by the OS When using physical L Servers disks or networks cannot be attached to the L Server that is using iSCSI boot 200 Saved disk resources which are created from virtual storage can only be attached to virtual L Servers on Hyper V when using Microsoft R System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager The only disk resources that can be attached to a virtual L Server on Hyper V are disk resources that are not used for other virtual L Servers Saved disk resources cannot be attached to virtual L Servers on Hyper V from which snapshots
478. rder In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to move forwards and backwards by single pages and to the first or last page A 9 Network Map Resource Orchestrator displays the following information Network configuration of physical and virtual servers including virtual switches and VM guests Statuses of network links between all resources VLAN configuration affecting each physical and virtual server wA See For details on the Network Map refer to Chapter 11 Network Map A 10 Available Pool This section describes the available pools displayed in the ROR console For each resource pool type the list of resource pools that can be used according to the role and scope of access of the logged in user is displayed VM Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed CPU Capacity Unused Total The CPU capacity of the VM host registered in the resource pool is displayed Memory Capacity Unused Total The memory capacity of the VM host registered in the resource pool is displayed 334 Attributes When using a VM pool with overcommit Over Commit is displayed The calculation method for free space is displayed
479. re In the following cases it is necessary to register storage management software with Resource Orchestrator for coordination When the server type is Physical When using RHELS Xen as server virtualization software Note For storage management software only PRIMECLUSTER GDS can be coordinated when using RHELS Xen 606000009090000009090090000009090 040900000909959090900000000909009000009090905090000009009090909000000909099000000092000000090099 Use the following procedure to register storage management software 1 Decide the storage environment 2 Configure the storage environment using storage management software which can be registered The following storage management software can be registered with Resource Orchestrator ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Data ONTAP PRIMECLUSTER GDS EMC Navisphere Manager EMC Solutions Enabler For details on configuration of storage environments refer to D 1 System Configuration in the Design Guide CE 3 When registering EMC Navisphere Manager or EMC Solutions Enabler as storage management software it is necessary to specify the installation folder of Navisphere CLI or SYMCLI in the definition file for EMC storage emcpath conf 4 Register storage management software for coordination with Resource Orchestrator Execute the rcxadm storagemgr register command to register storage management software with Resource Orchestrator For details on the rcxadm storagemgr register comman
480. re displayed in the Modify an L Server dialog Items that have been changed are indicated with an asterisk in front of the item 3 Click lt OK gt When making changes while the power of the virtual L Server is on only the configuration of the virtual L Server can be changed 4 When changes were made while a virtual L Server was powered on follow the procedures for the OS s running on the virtual L Server to have the changes recognized by the OS s The Procedure From the Command Line 1 Execute rcxadm Iserver modify or rcxadm Iserver set For details on the rcxadm Iserver modify command and the rcxadm lserver set command refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When making changes while the power of the virtual L Server is on only the configuration of the virtual L Server can be changed 2 When changes were made while a virtual L Server was powered on follow the procedures for the OS s running on the virtual L Server to have the changes recognized by the OS s Changeable Items The items for which specifications can be changed differ depending on whether the L Server is physical or virtual Changing Physical L Server Specifications The following items can be changed when the power status of the physical L Server is OFF FC path Boot Mode CPU Performance Number of CPUs Memory Size Note Can be specified when using blade servers When you start the L Server after sett
481. reating an L Server Create an L Server definition If only creating an L Server definition configure None Definition only when creating an L Server For details refer to 16 2 1 General Tab and 16 3 1 General Tab Only IP addresses MAC addresses WWNs are allocated to the created L Server and defined is displayed 219 Automatically release server resources for L Servers If releasing server resources when the L Server is turned off set Resource release during L Server creation For details refer to 16 2 2 Server Tab and 16 3 2 Server Tab When the power of an L Server for which this setting is configured is turned off preserved is displayed Note When sharing resources on the same physical server between L Servers using the usage change function set Resource release on the L Server where the server resource is allocated When the server resources are allocated to the L Server for which Resource release is not configured the server resources cannot be shared G amp Note For an L Server from which VM guests have been deleted using server virtualization software unknown is displayed for the resource allocation status For details refer to Message number 67154 or Message number 67178 in Messages Figure 17 1 State Transition of L Servers L Server L Server Resource Status Configuration Modification Boot Position Configuration 4
482. red to be calculated using a maximum value for the virtual machine for which limit values of CPU memory has been set to Unlimited using VM management software the calculation is performed assuming the following values as the maximum values When no limit has been set for CPU performance The physical CPU performance on the VM host is used When no limit has been set for memory size The memory size set for the virtual machine Hyper V When configured to calculate using a reservation value the values referred to for calculation vary depending on the dynamic memory settings for the virtual machine and the L Server template as follow When Dynamic Memory is Enabled Free CPU capacity and memory size are calculated based on the CPU performance and initial memory size reserved for the virtual machine 248 Free CPU capacity and memory size are calculated based on the CPU performance and initial memory size reserved for the L Server template When Dynamic Memory is Disabled Free CPU capacity memory size are calculated based on the CPU performance memory size reserved for the virtual machine The number of L Servers that can be created is calculated based on the CPU reservation performance and memory capacity specified in the L Server template KVM When configured to calculate using a reservation value free memory size is calculated based on the memory reservation capacity memory size for the virtual machine The free CPU
483. refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For Virtual L Servers Use the rcxadm Iserver attach and detach commands for adding and deleting NICs For details on the rexadm Iserver attach command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 3 Using the L Server Console This section explains how to use peripheral devices from an L Server When installing an OS after creating an L Server and performing L Server maintenance the L Server console can be obtained When performing usual operations or the console cannot be obtained log in to an L Server through the network p Example Network Connection Example Windows Remote desktop connection Linux SSH connection Prerequisites for Console Connections When using a console connection the prerequisites differ depending on the server type of the L Server used For Physical L Servers When the hardware is PRIMERGY and the iRMC video console redirection function can be used connection to the console is possible Note For console connection use functions of ServerView Operations Manager For details on ServerView Operations Manager refer to 2 4 2 2 Required Software in the Design Guide CE 06060202090200000009909900000090909429090000009090909409909000090990990000009090909090000000209099099000000999090900000990990000009999 For Virtual L Servers On VMware and Hyper V when an admin client is installed
484. res must be installed on a shared disk 4 When CPU performance and memory size have been specified the settings cannot be changed into Unlimited 5 For system disks use SCSI 0 0 VMware or IDE 0 0 Hyper V If SCSI 0 0 VMware or IDE 0 0 Hyper V is not used for the system disk the L Server creation process that accompanies cloning image deployment may fail For Hyper V datastore must be installed on a shared disk VMware When the virtual machine linked to the target L Server includes Raw Device Mapping RDM disks the target disks are treated as virtual disks and the image will be collected Hyper V When the virtual machine lined to the target L Server includes Pass through Disks images cannot be collected When the virtual machine linked to the target L Server includes difference disks the image will be collected with the difference disks included 18 3 Prerequisites When linking a configured physical server to a physical L Server or when linking a configured virtual machine to a virtual L Server the available management scope varies depending on the configured hardware and software environments 18 3 1 Manageable Hardware When using the hardware listed in Table 2 64 Required Hardware in 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide CE only servers can be managed 18 3 2 Manageable Servers For Physical Servers Connected with a SAN 231 Has 2 HBA ports on the server An agent has been regis
485. resource tree right click the target chassis and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Chassis Settings dialog is displayed 71 3 Change SNMP Community 4 Click lt OK gt The SNMP community is changed 7 1 5 Changing Server Management Unit Configuration Settings This section explains how to modify server management unit settings For rack mount or tower servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration Settings from the popup menu The Modify Server Settings dialog is displayed 3 Change the Remote Management Controller IP address To modify user account information select the Modify remote management controller login account checkbox and change the User ID and Password of the Remote management controller For SPARC Enterprise M3000 servers Use the following procedure to change remote management controller XSCF settings 1 Change settings on the remote management controller XSCF If the user account is changed it should still have administrator authority platadm privileges 2 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Modify Registration
486. ress as the manager s admin LAN IP address Windows Manager 1 Cancel registry replication settings On the primary node bring online the shared disk and IP address and take all other resources offline Next remove the following registry key from the registry replication settings set for the PXE Services cluster resource x64 SOFTWARE Wow6432Node Fujitsu S ystemcastWizard DHCP x86 SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard DHCP Use the following procedure to remove the registry key a Inthe Failover Cluster Management window right click the PXE Services resource in Summary of RC manager Other Resources and select Properties from the popup menu The PXE Services Properties window will be displayed b In the Registry Replication tab select the above registry key c Click lt Remove gt The selected key is removed from the Root registry key list d After removing the registry key click lt Apply gt e Click lt OK gt to close the dialog 2 Change the manager IP address on the primary node On the primary node use the rexadm mgrctl modify command to set the new IP address gt Installation_folde SVROR Manager bin rcxadm mgrctl modify ip P address lt RETURN gt 3 Restore registry replication settings Restore the registry key deleted in step 1 to the registry replication settings of the PXE Services resource Use the following procedure to restore the registry key 60 a Inthe Failover Cluster
487. ress of the HBA address fen nie Server ace ee tret rte tr Free Pmtt btt e ER E MR ERE Ee pe Hebe a pado 75 T3 Changing VIOM Bexistr tbon Semis eric ee deren or Ho ch da ene E etica 76 a Changing LAN Switch SELIG isco sessisaicessesusstsebders toads terrre intei tetto er ke be ate rE NA SSE eee tiet udin 76 3051 Chansons LAN Switi Basie SEEN Leere teta ttr trt ertt FD tnn P ERO Eae D er e FUR PEOR ER dae 76 7 4 2 Changing VLANs Set for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades eese TI proxs curd d M iiie M 79 To Modifying Network Resource SpeelCRHOIR lt cicso i csissescasssesesscatisnesnsshsdedsuseasenentobeseesaaseys a aTe R PEE SUR pe ttt eei ar oc aei edel 80 T6 Changing Network Device Sete aient pe etat he oe Le rer E rei EE e LER E RR eed 81 7 6 1 Creating the Network Configuration Information XML Defimition c cessssccssssessssecsassecsasccestsecstsecsanesneasecsabenisasessanest 81 3h24 Chaneuns NeDOOIE Device SOUS ae dre rte en nca ene adeo ttt obra dienen dtc pai docebo dioit 81 Lg Changing YM Management Software Settms 5 eene ee ettet eie ho Te e E ee i ti dire er iaasa 82 pe Changing Power Monitoring Eavironment Settings E 83 8 1 Changing Environmental Data Settings siise retire rete rettet te heiter se Li etin eset Le Pe aUe etia 83 7 8 2 Canceling Collection Settings for Power Monitoring Environments esee nete 84 7 8
488. restored there may be differences between the configuration of VM guests managed by L Server and those managed by VM management software The differences in VM guest configuration are reflected on the configuration of the L Server by periodic queries made to the VM management software For details on reflection of L Server configuration by periodic queries refer to 17 2 Modifying Physical Servers When using physical L Servers snapshots cannot be used Hyper V When using Hyper V refer to C 3 11 Advisory Notes for Hyper V Usage in the Setup Guide CE Xen When using RHELS Xen snapshots cannot be used Collect L Server snapshots using PRIMECLUSTER GDS For details refer to C 4 7 Advisory Notes for RHEL5 Xen Usage in the Setup Guide CE KVM Oracle VM Solaris Containers Snapshots cannot be used A Information Ce The snapshot function provided by server virtualization software records the disk from the last update Consequently when a disk failure occurs the snapshot function becomes unavailable at the same time Snapshot can be used as a corrective measure for problems such as the following p Example 0606060606006006000909090906909000000009090909090990909000000900900929090906000000000009990900990909000000009099209099090060606006006000629299 Forrecovery when a problems occurs with the applied patch Forrecovery when a problem occurs when changing operating system parameters 215 Collection
489. roduct key Note 5 digit values separated by hyphens p Example ProductID 11111 22222 33333 44444 55555 e00606060600006000600600690900909006000009099090000000099090900006090090990900000090990990900000029209000006000909900600009999006999 Note Ce If there is a mistake in the product ID value or format an error occurs when the collected cloning image is deployed Make sure to enter a valid product ID when editing the definition file For Windows Server 2008 Installation_folder Agent scw SeparateSetting ipadj activation dat In the ActivationInfo section set the following parameters using a parameter value syntax Refer to the following table for details on each parameter Table 12 2 Structure of the Definition File Format Parameter Value KMS host search type Select one of the following cmd remotescript KMS 1 params kmscheck AUTO Mandatory Automatically searches KMS hosts MANUAL 121 Specify the KMS host When MANUAL is selected make sure to set cmd remotescript 1 params kmsname cmd remotescript The host name FQDN computer name or IP address of the KMS 1 params kmsname host cmd t ipt KMS host port number The default is 1688 1 params kmsport cmd remotescript MAK MAK key a L params makkey Mandatory cmd remotescript Host name FQDN and the port number of the proxy server The host l params ieproxy name and port number are separated by a colon
490. role of the user and user group who operate it For details on roles and available operations refer to 5 1 2 Roles and Available Operations in the Design Guide CE When a configured physical server or virtual machine is linked to an L Server using infrastructure administrator privileges it is created as a normal L Server Create a new L Server when you want to create an L Server for infrastructure administrators 06006062090909990000090999082900090990909909009090000909092909909000090909909000009990990000009099090990009000990909000000290900000099299 Table 18 1 Functional Range Available When Using a Configured Physical Server as an L Server Type of L Server L Server Function Physical Server Using HBA Physical Server Using VIOM y ddes e Other Physical Servers Modifying specifications Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Starting es es es es es es o o o es lt g i g lt g Modifying the basic information Collecting cloning images c an Backup and Restore Attaching and detaching disks No Sharing disks between L Servers Z Changing physical server usage Server redundancy Yes 2 Ye Spare server configuration checks Alive monitoring ping Z lt K K IK n AD Yes 3 monitoring Deploying the network information o o lt g lt Admin LAN multiple subnet names o Z o o o lt g Network redundancy tagVLAN Modifying network
491. rovisioning attributes are set Thin Provisioning is displayed When Thin Provisioning attributes are not set Thick Provisioning is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Capacity Disk Capacity Total Capacity The total disk capacity of the storage pool is displayed Unused Capacity The free disk capacity of the storage pool is displayed Virtual Storage List Name Label The name of the registered virtual storage is displayed Status The status of the registered virtual storage is displayed Capacity Unused Capacity Total Capacity The capacity of the registered virtual storage is displayed Storage Type The type of the registered virtual storage is displayed 322 Attributes The type of the virtual storage is displayed Disk Resource List Name Label The disk name is displayed A link to the detailed information of the allocated disk is displayed Status The disk status is displayed Size The disk size is displayed Virtual Storage The disk allocation destination is displayed Share The shared settings of the disk are displayed Attributes The attributes that have been set are displayed When thin provisioning is configured Thin Provisioning is displayed When thick provisioning is configured Thick Provisioning is displayed Allocated L Server The name of the L Server to which a disk has been allocated is displayed
492. rs enabling flexible management of operations VMware DPM VMware Distributed Power Management A function of VMware This function is used to reduce power consumption by automating power management of servers in VMware DRS clusters VMware DRS VMware Distributed Resource Scheduler A function of VMware This function is used to monitor the load conditions on an entire virtual environment and optimize the load dynamically VMware Teaming A function of VMware By using VMware Teaming it is possible to perform redundancy by connecting a single virtual switch to multiple physical network adapters Web browser A software application that is used to view Web pages WWN World Wide Name A 64 bit address allocated to an HBA Refers to a WWNN or a WWPN WWNN World Wide Node Name A name that is set as a common value for the Fibre Channel ports of a node However the definitions of nodes vary between manufacturers and may also indicate devices or adapters Also referred to as anode WWN WWPN World Wide Port Name A name that is a unique value and is set for each Fibre Channel port HBA CA fibre channel switch ports etc and is the IEEE global MAC address As the Fibre Channel ports of the same WWPN are unique they are used as identifiers during Fibre Channel port login Also referred to as a port WWN WWPN zoning The division of ports into zones based on their WWPN and setting of access restrictions between different zones
493. rtBase defined here and PortBase 15 do not conflict with any other applications or services Moreover be sure to set a value lower than 65519 for PortBase so that the highest port number PortBase 15 does not exceed the largest valid port 64 number 65534 In a clustered manager configuration change port numbers on both the primary and secondary node 2 Restart the server on which the port number has been changed Linux Manager 1 Change the port numbers Edit the following file etc opt FJS Vscw common scwconf reg In PortBase under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Fujitsu SystemcastWizard CLONE set the first value of the port number to be used by deployment services This value should be entered in hexadecimal format To avoid conflicts with ephemeral ports use a value not included in the ephemeral port range defined by net ipv4 local port range However as a maximum of 16 port numbers are used for image file creation and deployment ensure that the port numbers for PortBase to PortBase 15 do not conflict with ephemeral or well known ports This ensures that deployment services will use ports outside of the range defined by netipv4 ip local port range for image operations Moreover be sure to set a value lower than 65519 for PortBase so that the highest port number PortBase 15 does not exceed the largest valid port number 65534 In a clustered manager configuration change port numbers on both the primary and
494. rtual appliances virtual is displayed following Type Location Displays the location of the network device 293 Auto configuration Displays whether the network device is set to be automatically set or not true false Redundant Configuration The following attributes are not displayed for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode Group ID The group ID is displayed Network Devices Another device in the redundancy configuration is displayed When there are multiple devices the names of those devices are displayed separated by commas Hardware Details Area Launch Network Device Web UI A link to the Web interface of the network device is displayed Clicking the link displays the Web interface of the network device Links will be displayed even for devices that the Web UI does not support but if these links are clicked the Web interface will not be displayed Refer to the manual of the network device to confirm whether a Web interface is provided Port Properties Area Port Number The number of the port of the selected network device is displayed Port Name The name assigned to the port of the selected network device is displayed Member Port When the name of a port with link aggregation is displayed for the port name the port names of the physical port with link aggregation are displayed separated by commas on When the physical port name is displayed as the port name a hyphen
495. rver The HBA port for the physical server must be the same as the HBA port that is configured in storage and is accessible to LUNs using that physical server For Virtual Machines Settings differ according to the server virtualization software being used In the following cases both servers and storage can be managed VMware Virtual machines are managed using VMware and vCenter Server Datastores are used SAN storage or NAS storage supported by VMware excluding built in disks on the server and iSCSI storage is used SCSI0 0 is used for the system disk The following device paths are used for data disks SCSI 0 1 SCSI 0 6 SCSI 0 8 SCSI 0 14 SCSI 1 0 SCSI 1 6 SCSE1 8 SCSIE1 14 AM SCSI 2 0 SCSI 2 6 SCSE2 8 SCSI2 14 AM 232 SCSI 3 0 SCSI 3 6 SCSE3 8 SCSE3 14 AM Note When using Raw Device Mapping or when using a device path other than those listed above only servers can be managed For disks using any other device path assign 56 or higher as the disk number When collecting a cloning image for deploying an L Server use SCSI 0 0 for the system disk Hyper V Virtual machines are managed using SCVMM MSFC has been added to VM hosts A cluster disk has been configured as a shared cluster volume A SAN volume has been configured as a cluster disk SAN storage supported by Hyper V excluding built in disks on the server and iSCSI storage is used IDE 0 0 is used f
496. rver from the popup menu The Convert to L Server dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items Batch Folder Settings optional Select a resource folder or a tenant to store L Servers If omitted the L Server is stored in the root folder of the user that executed linking between the virtual machine and the L Server VM guests Displays virtual machines that were created on the specified VM host that have not been linked to L Servers In addition to the virtual machine name the OS type L Server name and destination folder are displayed When the virtual machine name starts with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and consists of 64 or less characters non on or periods the virtual machine including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores hyphens name is displayed as the default L Server name Select a virtual machine to use as a virtual L Server To use all virtual machines registered on the specified VM host click Select all gt Details optional Set the L Server name label comment and destination folder Clicking Details displays the VM Guest Setting dialog For the information that can be specified for each item refer to 18 4 2 For Physical Servers For the L Server name enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphabetical character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores periods
497. rver is displayed CPU clock speed The CPU clock speed frequency of the physical server is displayed 319 Number of CPUs The memory capacity of the physical server is displayed Memory Capacity The memory capacity of the registered server is displayed Allocated L Server The L Server name allocated to the physical server is displayed Server Attributes General Area Physical server name The name of the server on which the physical OS VM host or VM guest is operating is displayed When the server has been registered as a managed server and powered on the server model name obtained from ServerView Operations Manager is displayed For other servers no model name is displayed Product name The product name of the physical server is displayed For PRIMERGY BX servers the product name obtained from the management blade is displayed For other servers the model name is displayed Status The status of the physical server is displayed Slot The slot number of the physical server is displayed Displayed only for PRIMERGY BX servers Partition ID The partition number is displayed Displayed only when a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected Maintenance mode The maintenance mode of the physical server is displayed Not displayed when SPARC Enterprise servers are selected LED status The illumination status of the maintenance LED for the physical server is displayed Displayed
498. rverView SNMP Agents for MS Windows 32bit 64bit ServerView Agent ServerView Agents Linux ServerView Agents VMware for VMware ESX Server lt lt RCVE ServerView Resource Coordinator VE IRR ServerView Resource Orchestrator ROR VE ServerView Resource Orchestrator Virtual Edition ROR CE ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition R Coordinat ystemwalker Resource Coordinator esource Coordinator RA Systemwalker Resource Coordinator Virtual server Edition Export Administration Regulation Declaration Documents produced by FUJITSU may contain technology controlled under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan Documents which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization from the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry of Japan in accordance with the above law Trademark Information BMC BMC Software the BMC logos and other BMC marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of BMC Software Inc in the U S and or certain other countries vii EMC EMC CLARiiON Symmetrix and Navisphere are trademarks or registered trademarks of EMC Corporation HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows MS MS DOS Windows XP Windows Server Windows Vista Windows
499. rvers When not configuring the method select Select name order when selecting a server from the servers with the same model name in alphabetical order When selecting a server with the same or higher level of performance values or a server with the least difference in the performance levels select keep spec on is selected by default 153 FC connection pattern Specify the name of the pattern file for FC connections The list of file names of pattern files for FC connections located under the directory in the manager environment is displayed as a pull down menu Windows Manager Installation_folde SVROR Manager etc customize_data fc_connection_pattern Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data fc connection pattern is selected when there is no FCConnectionPattern file As for default is selected When the fc connection pattern file is created after the L Server template created it is possible to input directly Enter a string that is no more than 64 characters long where the first character is a number or letter and the remaining characters are alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens f The dialog to confirm the entered information is displayed When Are you sure to create a new L Server Template is displayed confirm the content and then click lt Create gt wA See 60060606000000909909090000000909090999909090900000090909090909909900909000000009009990990990900
500. rvers are selected Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers Admin LAN Redundancy Displayed when NIC redundancy has been configured for admin LANs Hardware Maintenance Mode The hardware maintenance mode of the server is displayed Displayed only for PRIMEQUEST servers Boot option The boot option setting specified when registering servers is displayed L Server The link to the allocated L Server information is displayed VA See Refer to the Management Blade s manual for details on management blades product names Refer to the ServerView Operation Manager manual for details on the server models displayed and obtained from ServerView Operation Manager Refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE for details on resource statuses Hardware Details Area Server management software The link to the web interface of a server management software is displayed Displayed only when PRIMERGY servers PRIMEQUEST servers or SPARC Enterprise servers are selected Remote Management Controller IP address IP address of the remote management controller is displayed Displayed only for servers other than PRIMERGY BX servers I O Virtualization Management Software The link to the web interface of external I O virtualization management software is displayed Displayed only if coordinated up with external I O virtualization management software VIOM server profile The assigned VIOM server profile na
501. rvers that are targets of the power operation is displayed The display order is in descending order of priority Even if the list of L Server is not displayed the power supply can be operated 06060606060600029209929090909000000009090909909090909900000009009090909090900000000009009099099090900000000009099090990900000000009999 2 Click OK L Servers in a resource folder are restarted in the order of priority From the command line execute rcxadm folder restart For details on the rexadm folder restart command refer to 3 5 rcxadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 17 2 Modifying This section explains how to perform L Server configuration changes When modifying configurations for an L Server for which only a configuration definition was created refer to 17 8 2 3 Modifying Configuration Definition Information 193 Point Resource Orchestrator makes periodic queries to VM management software When the configuration of a virtual machine is modified using VM management software periodic queries will reflect the changes on the virtual machines used by a virtual L Server When addition modification or deletion of storage is performed using VM management software changes to the configuration status of storage of the virtual L Server are detected Resource Orchestrator makes periodic queries to storage devices When changes are made to storage using storage management software the changes to t
502. s 22 2 Switchover of the Target of Auto Configuration This section explains the switchover operation necessary for changing the rulesets of network devices that are the target of auto configuration Use the following operations to configure whether network devices are the targets or are not targets of auto configuration Configuring a network device as the target of auto configuration When configuring a network device as the target of auto configuration an infrastructure administrator should use the commands to perform the operation The specified network device is configured as the target of auto configuration using the rexadm netdevice set command with the attr auto conf true option specified Excluding a network device from auto configuration In following cases the network device is excluded from the targets of auto configuration When an infrastructure administrator is temporarily excluding the network device from auto configuration The specified network device is excluded from the target of auto configuration by using the rexadm netdevice set command with the attr mode active option specified When auto configuration fails due to problems such as login failure or device failure related to network devices When an infrastructure administrator is excluding the network device from the targets of auto configuration during network device registration By executing the rcxadm netdevice create command or the rcxadm netco
503. s When the disk type is one other than ETERNUS If an alias name has not been set in LUN A Information Ce If the alias name of LUN has been changed with the ETERNUS WebGUI it will be updated a certain time later 325 L Server Properties Allocated L Server The name of the L Server to which a disk has been allocated is displayed Disk No The disk number is displayed Disk Usage The usage of the disk is displayed A 6 20 Network Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name used to identify the network pool is displayed Type The type of the network pool is displayed Priority The priority for automatic selection of resources when multiple network pools are available is displayed Label The label for the network pool is displayed Comments Comments for the network pool are displayed Capacity IP address Total Number The total number of IP addresses registered in the network pool is displayed Unused Number The number of unused IP addresses registered in the network pool is displayed Network Resource List Name Label The network resource name is displayed Admin LAN Whether it is being used as an admin LAN is displayed When used as an admin LAN yes is displayed When not used as an admin LAN no is displayed iSCSI boot The LAN for iSCSI boot is displayed VLANID The VLAN ID for the network resource is displayed 326 Subnet Address The subnet address of the network resource is displayed
504. s The method to select a spare server of the L Server is displayed Spare server pool The spare server pool for the L Server is displayed Alive monitoring The alive monitoring configuration status is displayed When Alive Monitoring is Configured on is displayed When Alive Monitoring is not Configured off is displayed Note 90060006090600600090600909000000000000009090920099099090909090909909909909909909099090090000000000000090999909990909999909999099029299999 For virtual L Servers upgraded from earlier versions or virtual L Servers linking with already configured virtual machines a hyphen is displayed for the alive monitoring configuration status 306 Boot Location The L Server s physical location change status is displayed Releasing Resources Resource release settings are displayed When Repurpose is Configured on is displayed When Repurpose is not Configured off is displayed Current resource The information set for Physical server or VM host during L Server creation is displayed When neither server nor host is specified Automatic Automatic is displayed When a resource pool is specified The server pool icon or VM pool icon and resource pool name are displayed For physical servers The server pool icon and resource pool name are displayed Fora VM host The VM host icon and VM host name are displayed Last allocated resource The name of the physical server or VM host that wa
505. s storage network devices and images that are configured for an L Platform LSB Logical System Board A system board that is allocated a logical number LSB number so that it can be recognized from the domain during domain configuration L Server A resource defined using the logical specifications number of CPUs amount of memory disk capacity number of NICs etc of the servers and storage and network devices connected to those servers An abbreviation of Logical Server L Server template A template that defines the number of CPUs memory capacity disk capacity and other specifications for resources to deploy to an L Server LUN Logical Unit Number A logical unit defined in the channel adapter of a storage unit MAC address Media Access Control address A unique identifier that is assigned to Ethernet cards hardware Also referred to as a physical address 373 Transmission of data is performed based on this identifier Described using a combination of the unique identifying numbers managed by assigned to each maker by the IEEE and the numbers that each maker assigns to their hardware maintenance mode The state where operations on managed servers are stopped in order to perform maintenance work In this state the backup and restoration of system images and the collection and deployment of cloning images can be performed However when using Auto Recovery it is necessary to change from this mode to act
506. s can be filtered For details refer to 16 2 3 Disk Tab Attaching Shared Disks Use the following procedure to attach disk resources to L Servers created in advance and to share the disks Attaching shared disks to the first L Server To attach disks use the procedure of Attach new disks in 17 2 3 Attaching and Detaching Disks Attaching disks to share for a second or later L Server To attach disks use the procedure of Attach new disks in 17 2 3 Attaching and Detaching Disks In this case select the following Select the disk to allocate to the L Server Select Allocated for Allocation Status Select the first L Server to which the shared disks have been attached as the Allocated L Server When specifying these items as search conditions connected shared disks can be filtered For details refer to 16 2 3 Disk Tab 17 2 5 Modifying Network Resource Settings This section explains how to modify network resource settings The following items can be modified 204 Table 17 3 Network Resource Items for Modification L Server Status Physical L Physical L Server Server Virtual L Server iSCSI Boot Pe preserve Dene presong Pe preserve Allocated ejes Preserved located IP address change Admin LAN public LAN 1 e Changing network resources to connect to a NIC or a NIC group e Changing untagged VLAN Yes Yes Yes settings use not use Operation Adding or deleting network resources t
507. s during server deletion it is recommended to move VM guests to another server beforehand For more details on the high availability features available for each server virtualization software refer to D 2 Configuration Requirements in the Design Guide VE 00606000099909000900909909990000909009099099000090909909909909900090909099990900009090909090900000090999909000900999099000000990909000000999 G amp Note When registering resources directories and files that are necessary for performance monitoring are created on the server where the resources are registered This directory is not automatically deleted when resources are deleted Delete it manually Refer to C 6 9 Advisory Notes for RHEL KVM Usage in the Setup Guide CE for details CC ey 9 3 Canceling VIOM Integration This section explains how to cancel VIOM integration Use the following procedure to cancel VIOM integration 1 In the ROR console management software tree right click the target management software VIOM and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click lt OK gt The target management software VIOM is deleted To delete registered VIOM server profiles follow the procedure described in 5 1 1 Registering VIOM Server Profiles to open the Web interface of ServerView Virtual IO Manager and delete the desired profiles from there G amp Note Integration with VIOM cannot be cancelled in the following cases
508. s for integration with ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Specifying HBA WWNs storage WWNs and AffinityGroup for ETERNUS SE Storage Cruiser enables configuration of the zoning settings of Fibre Channel switches and storage unit host affinity When performing switchover on managed servers using the WWN settings enables the admin server to automatically change settings of storage devices Use of this function requires registration of specific settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser in advance Fibre Channel Switches and storage units connected to managed servers must be registered on ESC amp Note WWN settings for servers and HBAs are not performed by this function Configuration cannot be performed for managed servers which are configured as spare servers or are used as spare servers 000606000099900000909990909009000909909900000909009090909090000909909909909000090999090000009099099099099099000099990909000090999090900909999 Use the following procedure to configure the WWN settings When changing the current WWN information configure the new WWN information after deleting Fibre Channel Switch zoning and storage unit host affinity in the currently configured WWN information 88 1 Inthe ROR console server resource tree right click the target physical server and select Modify WWN Settings from the popup menu The WWN Settings dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined HBA ports S
509. s is displayed Server type The server type of the L Server is displayed For Physical L Servers Physical is displayed For Virtual L Servers The VM type of the L Server is displayed OS The OS type of the L Server is displayed Current Resource The following information is displayed according to the L Server allocation status When resources are already allocated allocated The name of the physical server or VM host that has been allocated is displayed When servers have been released preserved The name of the physical server or VM host that was used the last time the L Server was started is displayed The name is followed by preserved When only the configuration definitions have already been created defined defined is displayed Preserved resource The information set for Physical server or VM host during L Server creation is displayed When neither server nor host is specified Automatic Automatic is displayed When a resource pool is specified The server pool icon or VM pool icon and resource pool name are displayed For physical servers The server pool icon and resource pool name are displayed 314 Fora VM host The VM host icon and VM host name are displayed CPU performance Defined The CPU performance value defined during L Server creation is displayed CPU performance Allocated The CPU performance value of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Num
510. s started by the L Server last time is displayed Exclusion The exclusive operation settings of the L Server are displayed Startup priority The startup priority of the L Server is displayed When the startup priority is 0 Exclude from batch power operations is displayed FC Single path mode For physical L Servers whether only one path has been configured for VIOM or HBAar is displayed When single path mode is set on is displayed When single path mode is not set off is displayed Status OS Type The OS type of the L Server is displayed Status The resource status of the L Server is displayed Allocation status The resource allocation status of the L Server is displayed Controlled resources The management status of the resources allocated to the L Server is displayed 307 Displays the resource types being managed When there are multiple resource types being managed they are displayed separated by commas When server resources are being managed Server is displayed When storage resources are being managed Storage is displayed When no resources are being managed A hyphen is displayed For the L Servers that were created in Resource Orchestrator a hyphen is displayed Allocated Resource Information Resource Resource name A link to the resource details for the related physical server is displayed Guest name A link to the resource details for the related VM guest is displayed VM t
511. se M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Servers eese tete 47 5 9 2 Registering SPARC Enterprise M30DQ T Series SOCVEIS ueessete terrre rte three abere eei beber 48 ix ST Recisgiening Power Imari DGsIned cin cete or etat da ec iss pea UI ane UG ERA o E aan oneal ass 50 5 11 Resistant Admin LAM SUD 3 3 nne HE epi erro POE EE EFI EHE OO HOHER DEM N S SCESE a ES ESES 51 32 12 Registering BMC BladeLo amp l Server AEOUSIIOU rere rne enter t tate d nee e herbes ph das te he dese IERS dna ego 57 Chapter 6 Changing Admin Server Setlinis 1 ccuiciue ie reetme rimedio cett nennt etenim une dance une nee eEu up meti ru gne anne Rae R 58 GI Chame me Adami ncc TES 58 6 2 Changing Fort UA oo 2er nire re te HIDE DR GEI REORHREE icuseusesaeea cepacia E EE EUER ENTER E OEE EIRENE Ei 62 6 5 Changiug the Maximum Number of System Image Versions eee cn ete rte retten so rinse de hne aicist 6 4 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Physical Servers 6 5 Changing the Maximum Number of Cloning Image Versions Virtual Servers esee 6 6 Changing the Maximum Number of Snapshot Image VerglOns iiec mener etre ek prin etae noe cete ea bb nte dea pne e Sant paca sh 06 7 Changing the Image Folder Locate et sis uscite meri tenir teet teer rte trie er eges Perte tor te Fidei ae peter rie EE Feed en eiad 6 8 Changing the Password for the Resource Orchestrator Database see
512. sedendo deus dai ces reed ein P ER ER EROGO ED 304 SO PS LAPTubuer EFIE uc errem cert e err HERO E err EHI nii te pedi ressort 310 zug IM Tres STIS cerato deem aa dele i re a i e TE a eU ER et ded c oet aaa AO IS SLB Pa PANG esae os enne bricenmed terme ie a e els A aa ERE A 6 16 Tenant Attributes A 6 17 VM Pool Attributes AO IS Server Pool AQGURDWIeS eoo eie rediere erre ita ct ee ER ERE A hee E SU eRe 319 ETONEPOG DC jqeBlniI0 MEM EEES 322 duo c EDO POI AMENES iuc col ee etie E RE Pte ri m e TO p en ver re E HC ORE CRETAE 326 A021 Address Pool ANDES s ose teireae ni eren mede HERO EET EE PORTE 330 ETWAA TL dg S VL LR RH 331 2 3 Recovery Settings Tab ecne danie ittm me eet iere bestie ded n ed e pareil ep rte He eet ined RE a 333 S RRO Les Puls nate endi roro er ea EOD ts 333 Pr loc ld ojo 334 AE l T a enin entertain Gut etes h iato ta Aste induti 334 WDR I IgE TEES 336 A 12 Recent Operations 5334 tM Nc DUE 338 Ww ilii RT H 339 Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Fliles 2 ceni retire tette t ipe Hace t Radon tiere r e B 1 Obtaining the System Configuration File CSV Format H2 PIE FOM ueteres teen ei eee bed i Dein tete ten tp o EO nd eee etie fees B3 Resource DObtfiolio coenae tele te RES Oh EHE
513. server is a virtual L Server the name of the VM host where the L Server operates is displayed When the Current resource checkbox and the Preserved resource checkbox are selected resources that have been allocated and resources in use are displayed 245 For the already allocated resources the following information is displayed depending on the status of resource allocation allocated Resource name preserved Resource name preserved defined defined For resources in use the resources configured as Physical server or VM host are displayed as icon resource name If you select the Resource List tab with a resource pool selected in the orchestration tree a list of information for the resources that belong to the resource pool are displayed If you select the Resource Details tab detailed information such as the total size of data and free space in the resource pool is displayed Also if you select the Available Pool tab a list of the resource pools that the user has usage rights for and the resources that belong to those pools is displayed For virtual storage resources with Thin Provisioning attributes configured the virtually allocated size will be displayed inside the used amount Also depending on the value of the virtually allocated size the display of free capacity may differ as follows When the virtually allocated size is less than the total size of virtual storage resources The area not virt
514. sical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Allocated Value The CPU performance defined during L Server creation is displayed amp Note 090006000000000000000000000000009000009099209099099000090990009000000000000000000000009099090999099099099020909909909090900099 Solaris Containers CPU performance is displayed based on a cap value when a resource pool used in non global zone is changed from unmanaged to managed When a cap value is set the CPU performance is calculated using the following formulas Number of CPUs cap values of CPUs 100 rounding up the number of decimal places CPU performance cap values of CPUs Number of CPUs 100 physical CPU performance GHz When the cap values calculated using the CPU performance and the number of CPUs for L Servers are the same as those configured for the non global zone the CPU performance and the number of CPUs for L Servers are not updated and the values are not changed from the configured values When a cap value is not set a hyphen is displayed A hyphen is displayed for the CPU performance when a resource pool used in the non global zone is changed from managed to unmanaged Number of CPUs Allocated Value Define Value The number of CPUs defined for the L Server is displayed Defined Value The CPU performance of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Allocated Value The number of CPUs defined during L S
515. sive disk space becomes unused disk space This unused disk space can be used for other purposes Destination servers are rebooted several times during cloning image deployment Make sure that deployment has completed before restarting operations and making further settings The number of reboots during deployment increases when using the HBA address rename function If Windows Server 2008 activation failed during deployment message number 47233 is displayed This message indicates that deployment of Windows Server 2008 completed but that activation failed For details on the appropriate corrective action refer to Message number 47233 in Messages When a cloning image is deployed to multiple servers it may be necessary to enable IGMP snooping on admin LAN switches If IGMP snooping is not enabled transfer performance may deteriorate when ports with different speeds co exist in the same network or multiple image operations are run simultaneously 129 12 4 Viewing This section explains how to display collected cloning images In the ROR console select the Image List tab A list of cloning images is displayed under the cloning image list Use this list to manage the cloning images used by Resource Orchestrator Figure 12 1 Cloning Image List Cloning Image List v lt lt lt 11 1 gt gt gt Cloning Image Name Version Collection Date os Comments bx600_1_clone 1 2010 05 07 11 34 00 RedHat Linux For
516. so referred to as backup port port VLAN A VLAN in which the ports of a LAN switch are grouped and each LAN group is treated as a separate LAN port zoning The division of ports of fibre channel switches into zones and setting of access restrictions between different zones power monitoring devices Devices used by Resource Orchestrator to monitor the amount of power consumed PDUs and UPSs with current value display functions fit into this category power monitoring targets Devices from which Resource Orchestrator can collect power consumption data pre configuration Performing environment configuration for Resource Orchestrator on another separate system primary server The physical server that is switched from when performing server switchover primary site The environment that is usually used by Resource Orchestrator 376 private cloud A private form of cloud computing that provides ICT services exclusively within a corporation or organization public LAN A LAN used for operations by managed servers Public LANs are established separately from admin LANs rack A case designed to accommodate equipment such as servers rack mount server A server designed to be mounted in a rack RAID Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks Technology that realizes high speed and highly reliable storage systems using multiple hard disks RAID management tool Software that monitors disk arrays mounted on PRIMER
517. sources are deleted Delete it manually Refer to C 6 9 Advisory Notes for RHEL KVM Usage in the Setup Guide CE for details 242 Chapter 20 Resource Pool Operations This chapter explains how to add new resource pools and delete or modify existing resource pools For an overview of the functions refer to 2 2 2 Resource Pool in the Design Guide CE 20 1 Overview This function manages all the resources allocated when creating an L Server A resource pool is a type of resource folder that exists in the orchestration tree and has the following features that differ from regular folders Pools are selected as resources when creating or adding L Servers By specifying a resource type when creating a resource pool only resources of the same type will be stored in that resource pool The total size of the resources in the resource pool and the free space are calculated and displayed The converted number of L Servers for the specified L Server template is also displayed By default a resource pool is automatically created for each resource pool type n default resource pools which are created automatically VM hosts of different server virtualization software can be stored in VM pools In a VM pool where there are various server virtualization software if the following is specified Resource Orchestrator will select the appropriate VM host from the VM pool and create an L Server When creating an L Server using an
518. splayed Point 06060620000092090000600009909909090000900909909090000009090992000000909090909909090900009002000000009090900000009909909090000009099090060006029299 When an operation is executed in a tab other than the Resource tab e g the L Platform tab multiple entries might be displayed in the Recent Operations for that single operation When multiple entries are displayed match the resource name displayed in the tab on which the operation has been executed to the resource name in the Operation column to locate the operation in concern When the link in the Operation column is clicked the Progress Details dialog is displayed The Progress Details dialog displays the following information Progress List The list of the executed processes and the status are displayed for the selected operation If an operation is performed simultaneously for multiple resources the processes are displayed in a tree view for each target resource Message List The list of any error messages that occurred during the operation is displayed Detailed information is displayed under the list when each message is selected For the operation that can be cancelled The Cancel link is displayed to the right of the Status column Clicking this link displays a confirmation dialog for cancelling the operation 337 A 13 Event This section describes the event area of the ROR console Figure A 7 Event ice ee ice Me SET eC Pa Mt RM E
519. splayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Attribute Information Start Address The start address of the address set is displayed End Address The end address of the address set is displayed Address Type The address type of the address set is displayed Excluded Address List Address The list of IP addresses to be excluded from the address set is displayed A 6 22 Image Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Priority The priority of the image pool is displayed 331 Cloning Image List Name Label The name of the image is displayed Version The version of the image is displayed Collection Date The date and time the image was collected is displayed Image Type The image type of the image is displayed VM type The VM type of the image is displayed Comments Comments for the image are displayed Cloning Image Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Image Information Image Type The image type of the cloning image is displayed OS The name of the operating system stored in the cloning image is displayed Version
520. ss mask Enter the subnet address and subnet mask to set using the xxx xxx xxx xxx format The maximum value for a subnet mask is 255 255 255 255 32 bit mask and the minimum value is 255 255 0 0 16 bit mask However 255 255 255 254 cannot be specified amp Note When creating a physical L Server specify a different subnet from admin LAN for the public LAN subnet Default gateway Optional This setting can be omitted if something other than Admin LAN is selected Enter the IP address for the default gateway to use when communicating externally of the subnet Exclusion IP range Optional IP addresses that are being used for other devices but you do not want to automatically allocate to an L Server because of plans for future use can be specified G Note 060906000000092909909090000009099900000090909090000000000009009099099090000090090990000000000900200999000000000999099 Of the IP addresses specified for the Subnet address mask the following addresses are automatically excluded from the target of allocation They cannot be specified for Exclusion IP range Admin server Network address and broadcast address m Information 0000000000922990900000009099909090000090999099099000000009090999099090900000909999090900000009009090209909000000099999299 A network resource for the admin LAN is automatically created as the management network that is specified when installing Resource Orchestrator When using two or more ma
521. ssociated with the event Event ID Identifier related to the event No event ID is displayed for network resources Event Log Content of the event When the link in the Event Log column is clicked an error dialog is displayed The error dialog provides detailed information of events Events can be filtered using the checkboxes displayed in the window Selecting a checkbox will show the events whose status corresponds to that of the selected checkbox Clearing a checkbox will hide such events When lt Filter gt is clicked in the window the Filter Settings dialog is displayed The following conditions can be set for the events displayed in the list Tenant Event Log 338 Date The conditions set for events are displayed above the list To clear the conditions click lt x gt displayed on the right of the list Clicking a column heading will change the color of the selected column and sort events in either ascending or descending order In each page of the list 10 items can be displayed It is possible to specify the page to display move forwards and backwards by single pages and move to the first or last page G amp Note 000606090090992990000090909990990900009090999090900000090909090990900000909909909090990900909909099090000090990990909000009999099090000009909090090099999 When a resource s status becomes fatal its related event shows an Error status in the Status column For this reason the actual status
522. status is displayed Label The label set for the disk is displayed 324 Comments Comments set for the disk are displayed Configuration Information Status The disk status is displayed Size The disk size is displayed Allocation The disk allocation status is displayed L Server that was last used If a disk is unallocated the name of the L Server that the disk was last allocated to is displayed If it is an L Server located in a tenant or resource folder the name of the tenant or resource folder is also displayed The information from when the disk is deleted is displayed even if the L Server is changed or deleted after reducing disks in the L Server A hyphen is displayed in the following cases If the disk has already been allocated to an L Server If the disk has never been allocated to an L Server Virtual storage The disk allocation destination is displayed Share Whether the disk is allocated to multiple L Servers is displayed When the disk has been allocated to 2 or more L Servers yes is displayed When the disk is preserved or has been allocated to only one L Server no is displayed Thin Provisioning Thin provisioning configuration information is displayed When thin provisioning is configured yes is displayed When thick provisioning is configured no is displayed Alias If the disk type is ETERNUS the alias name set in LUN is displayed A hyphen is displayed in the following case
523. status of VMware HA is displayed One of the following is displayed on off Displayed when the VM host is VMware When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen is displayed VMware DRS The ON OFF status of VMware DRS is displayed One of the following is displayed on off Displayed when the VM host is VMware When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen is displayed VMware DPM The ON manual or automatic OFF status of VMware DPM is displayed One of the following is displayed on off 317 Displayed when the VM host is VMware on When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen is displayed Admission Control The enabled disabled status of the admission control function provided by VMware is displayed One of the following is displayed on off Displayed when the VM host is VMware When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen Standby Mode is displayed The values based on the status of VMware standby mode and VM ware DPM are displayed One of the following is displayed on off Displayed when the VM host is VMware on When not in a cluster configuration a hyphen is displayed Even in a cluster configuration if both standby mode and VMware DPM are disabled off is displayed Maintenance Mode The maintenance mode setting of VM ware Hyper V is displayed One of the following is displayed on off Displayed when the VM host is VMware or Hyper V on
524. statuses are shown by adding colored outlines to displayed links as described in 11 5 1 Link Display The following table shows display examples of abnormal link statuses Table 11 16 Statuses of Physical or Virtual Links Represents a link with an error status e g its opposite port or NIC is disabled or the cable between this link and its opposite port or NIC is disconnected Represents a link with a warning status For example an aggregated link as described in 11 5 3 Aggregate Display of Network Links will show a warning status if only a subset of its links have an error status 11 5 3 Aggregate Display of Network Links When two resources are linked by two or more links those links are represented as one aggregated link please note that this appellation is not related with the Link Aggregation Protocol but only refers to the display representation of multiple links as one entity Aggregated links are shown as thick lines in the Network Map The following diagram shows an example of aggregate display 115 p Example TI FU JITSU SLOT 1 RC SLOT i Mgr FUJITSU 1 FUJITSU 7 a L SLOTH ANEALORORNARZONALAORAN SLOTH FUJITSU lan1 SSSR erie FUJITSU lan2 CIEAERERCACAEACAESCHECHICHECHER CHIC OH CHEHEHEHEHE A 19 18 Catalyst2950 Close details FUJITSU SLOT 1 RC SLOT L Mgr FUJITSLI 1 FUJITSU SLOT y SLOT H2 y FUJITSUHani F JITSU lan2 Catalyst2950
525. stops the import process The lt Cancel gt button interrupts the import process after completing the current process Note that the processing performed up to the error point is effective in the system Point 060606060000002209909000000000009090900909000000009090909090900000000000909090990990900009000000000909099099090000000600909999 The SpareServer ServerAgent and ServerVMHost sections must meet the conditions below when performing pre configuration a Spare server section SpareServer In cases where the specified spare server has no operating system installed The physical server which is defined as a spare server must not be defined in ServerWWNN ServerAgent or Server VMHost sections When configuring a server using I O virtualization as a spare server The server must meet one of the following conditions HBA address rename information must already be configured on the physical server in which a spare server is defined A VIOM server profile must already be configured on the physical server in which a spare server is defined In cases where the specified spare server is a VM host The physical server which is defined as a spare server must already be registered for the Resource Orchestrator agent When configuring a server with WWN information set using storage affinity switchover as a spare server WWN information must already be configured on the primary server and the spare server If the above conditions
526. strator administrator plain pqchassis1 192 168 3 208 public administrator administrator plain SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis operation chassis name ip address snmp community name mgmt user name mgmt passwd mgmt passwd enc spechassis 192 168 3 212 public fujitsu fujitsu plain LanSwitch operation chassis name slot no switch name address esnmp community name user name passwd passwd enc privile ged passwd privileged passwd enc product name connection type chassisO1 1 switch 01 192 168 3 161 public admin admin plain admin plain BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 telnet chassisO1 2 switch 02 192 168 3 162 public admin admin plain admin plain BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 telnet LanSwitchNet operation chassis name slot no port no vlan id chassisO1 1 31 1 U 10 T 20 T chassis01 1 32 1 U chassis01 1 33 1 U chassisO1 1 34 1 U chassis01 1 35 1 U chassis01 1 36 1 U chassisO1 1 37 1 U chassis01 1 38 1 U chassis01 1 39 1 U chassisO1 1 40 1 U chassis01 1 41 1 U chassisO1 1 42 1 U chassisO1 1 43 1 U chassisO1 1 44 1 U chassisO1 2 31 1 U 10 T 20 T chassisO1 2 32 1 U chassisO1 2 33 1 U chassis01 2 34 1 U chassis01 2 35 1 U chassis01 2 36 1 U chassis01 2 37 1 U chassis01 2 38 1 U chassis01 2 39 1 U 363 chassisO1 2 40 1 U chassisO1 2 41 1 U chassisO1 2 42 1 U chassis01 2 43 1 U chassis01 2 44 1 U Server operation chassis name slot no server name p address mac a
527. switch blades are included PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 8 2 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Network links For LAN switch blades connection information of network devices is not displayed Resource Name left side The name of the selected network device is displayed I F left side The port name of the network device is displayed I F right side The interface name of the resource connected to the network device is displayed Resource Name right side The name of the resource connected to the network device is displayed 295 ruleset Name Label The name of the ruleset is displayed This is only displayed when the type of a network device is Firewall or SLB Description A description of the ruleset is displayed Login Information Area Tenant Displays the name of the tenant that can be used as login information for the network device on If the network device type is L2 Switch a hyphen is displayed IP address The IP address which the network device logs into is displayed Port Number The port number which the network device logs into is displayed Protocol The name of the protocol used to login to the network device is displayed User ID The user name used to login to the network device is displayed Authority The privileges of the user used to login to the network device are displayed Authentication The user authenticat
528. t 152 Click lt Add NIC Group gt to add a NIC Group Click lt Delete NIC Group gt to delete a NIC Group NICs Select a NIC index to configure as the NIC redundancy group Two NICs must be specified for the group Enter the NIC information and click lt Next gt d Enter the disk information Disk Enter the disk capacity Enter a number in the following range 0 1 to 2048 Clicking lt Add gt adds a disk Clicking lt Delete gt deletes a disk Up to 60 disk indexes can be added in the range between 0 to 59 Connection Configuration Select a disk type FC iSCSI When FC is selected for the connection type clicking lt Add gt adds a disk The disk can be deleted by clicking lt Delete gt button Enter the disk information and click lt Next gt e Enter the information on server redundancy alive monitoring and boot location Redundancy Select a server redundancy to be allocated to the L Server Select HA when enabling redundancy Select None when not enabling redundancy Alive monitoring Configure alive monitoring as enabled or disabled Repurpose Specify whether to release the server allocated to the L Server when the power is turned off When not configuring repurpose select When automatically releasing a server select true When not automatically releasing a server select false is selected by default Selection method for spare servers Specify the selection method of spare se
529. t Update Updates a physical OS VM host or VM guest HBA address rename settings 3 4 Modifies the HBA address rename settings of a server Network Settings 4 5 6 Modifies the network settings of a server Spare Server Settings 3 4 Modifies a server s recovery settings Modify 1 2 Monitoring Settings Modifies the monitoring information for a server Modifies the registered login account used to VM Host L A t 7 ost Login Aecourt GM communicate with the VM host O Z Powers on a server Powers off a server after shutting down its operating O system FF Powers off a server without shutting down its operatin OFF Forced 8 oe system Reboots a server after shutting down its operatin Reboot 8 p 8 system Reboots a server without shutting down its operatin Reboot Forced 8 P e system 268 Popup Menu d Function Menu Submenu Switches over a server with one of its spare servers Spare Server 1 3 Failback Switches back a server to its pre switchover state 2 Tak Accepts a switched over configuration as final without akeover switching back to the original configuration DINE cane Collects a cloning image from a server Cloning 1 8 Deploy Deploys a cloning image to a server VM Hi Positi C 7 Migrates a VM guest to VM Home Position External Management Software 1 9 EU Opens external server management software VM Management Opens the VM managem
530. talled Specify 127 0 0 1 345 login_name Enter the name of a VIOM user account When specifying a domain use the following syntax domain_name user_name login passwd Enter the password of the above VIOM user account passwd enc Enter one of the following If login_passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted Chassis Data Section Name Enter Chassis as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the name that will be used to identify the chassis Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and containing up to 10 alphanumeric characters and hyphens 7 Note Chassis names should be unique between all chassis Names are not case sensitive ip address Enter the same IP address as that set on the management blade Enter a string of numeric values between 0 and 255 and periods amp Note IP addresses should be unique between all resources snmp community name Enter the same SNMP community read write permission as that set on the management blade Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens PRIMEQUEST Chassis Management Data Section Name Enter PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis as the section name 346 Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current
531. target LAN switch or network device is deleted from the network device tree The Procedure From the Command Line Use the rcxadm netdevice delete command See For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 6066060620000920000000900909090900000909090909000000909099099090000009099090909000090909090909000000009099090000009990000009090920000099299 amp Note The network devices already deployed to an L Platform cannot be deleted 93 When no information is displayed in the line of AllocatedResources XXX after executing the rcxadm netdevice show command it shows that the network device has not been deployed to the L Platform For details on the rexadm netdevice show command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 9 5 Deleting Network Resources This section explains how to delete network resources When VLANs for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades have not been Configured Use the following procedure to delete a network resource 1 Inthe ROR console orchestration tree right click the target network resource in a network pool and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK When VLANs for External Connection Ports of LAN Switch Blades have been Configured Use the following procedure to delete a network resource 1 Refer to the instructions giv
532. tch Port Group When the VM type is VMware the virtual switch and port group names are displayed When it is Hyper V the virtual network name is displayed A hyphen is displayed in the following cases When the same configuration that is to be configured automatically has been created by the user beforehand When a configuration change made by the user with VM management software after automatic configuration is detected by this product A 6 21 Address Pool Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed Priority The priority of the address pool is displayed Capacity Number Of Address Total Number The total number of IP addresses stored in the address pool is displayed Unused Number The number of unused IP addresses stored in the address pool is displayed General Area Name Label The name of the address set is displayed Address Type The address type of the address set is displayed Start Address The start address of the address set is displayed End Address The end address of the address set is displayed 330 Address Number Unused Number Total Number The unused number and total number of IP addresses in the address set are displayed Address Set Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is di
533. ter deployment Enter the name of the server to which the cloning image is to be deployed By default the physical OS name is entered if the physical OS is registered If the physical OS is not registered the physical server name is entered Windows A string composed of up to 63 alphanumeric characters underscores on on and hyphens The string cannot be composed solely of numbers Linux A string composed of up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the following symbols wg qno onm non non ny nn non ng non non Rig hig eus mus rgo doy c p mu Oy ce Note When using SUSE Linux Enterprise Server it is not possible to configure server names that include periods for the post deployment server names of cloning images A Information Since the entered server name is also used as the hostname of its corresponding destination server it is recommended to use only characters defined in RFC Request For Comments 952 Alphanumeric characters Hyphens Periods Linux 606000000000000000000000000900909099090990090090992090290902099009009000000000000000000000000000009090929299999 Release from Maintenance Mode after deployment checkbox Enable this option to automatically release the destination server from maintenance mode after cloning image deployment If this option disabled maintenance mode should be released manually after collecting the cloning image c Click OK The cloni
534. ter the registered VM guest name When resource type is common Do not enter any characters label optional This label is used to identify the applications running on each server Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Note that if the value of resource type is common do not enter anything amp Note Line breaks n are not available comment optional This is a comment that can be set as an option for each application If the resource type is common this can be used for the contact details maintenance information or other information Enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e B 4 Examples of CSV Format This section shows an example of the system configuration file in the CSV format 362 RCXCSV V3 5 ServerView Resource Orchestrator System configuration file Subnet operation subnet_name network_address subnet_mask gateway subnet1 172 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 172 16 0 1 subnet2 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 VIOManager operation name ip address login name login passwd passwd enc VIOM 127 0 0 1 administrator administrator plain Chassis operation chassis_name ip_address snmp_community_name chassis01 192 168 3 150 public PRIMERGY PartitionModelChassis operation chassis name ip address snmp community name mgmt user name mgmt passwd mgmt passwd enc pqchassis0 192 168 3 207 public admini
535. ter the voltage V that is being supplied to the power monitoring device Enter a number between 10 and 999 Note Resource Orchestrator calculates power consumption data using the electrical current value obtained from the power monitoring device and its specified voltage comment optional Enter any comments for the power monitoring device Enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters or symbols ASCII characters 0x20 to Ox7e Note A line break is counted as one character Use Alt Enter to enter line breaks 361 Memo Section Name Enter Memo as the section name This is required when registering the labels comments and contact information displayed in Blade Viewer using the pre configuration function Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line resource_type Enter the type of the resource for which to set this memo Enter one of the following When a physical server including a VM host is specified physical_server When a VM guest is specified vm guest When contact information is specified common resource name Enter the name of the resource name for which to set this memo Enter one of the following When resource type is physical server Enter one of the following Server name server name of ServerAgent section VM host name server name of Server VMHost section When resource type is vm guest En
536. tered G amp Note When not using VIOM or HBA address rename disk information of connected SAN disks is not displayed When importing an L Server into an L Platform in an environment where an admin LAN with multiple subnets has been configured before linking to the L Server create an admin LAN network resource with the subnet addresses including the IP address of the admin LAN for the physical server 18 3 3 Manageable Storage Manageable storage differs depending on whether a physical server or a virtual machine is used For Physical Servers Servers and storage can be managed when using the hardware listed in Table 2 64 Required Hardware in 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide CE and in the following cases In other cases only servers can be managed When using the ETERNUS storage or NetApp storage listed in Table 2 67 Storage Units that can be Connected with L Servers on Physical Servers in 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide CE When using Table 2 68 Fibre Channel Switches which can be used when Connecting ETERNUS Storage NetApp Storage EMC CLARiiON Storage EMC Symmetrix DMX Storage and EMC Symmetrix VMAX Storage with L Servers on Physical Servers in 2 5 Hardware Environment in the Design Guide CE When storage units are managed using the storage management software listed in 2 4 2 2 Required Software in the Design Guide CE When one AffinityGroup is operated for one physical se
537. that refers to a server in a Windows network domain that is not a domain controller migration The migration of a VM guest to a different VM host The following two types of migration are available Cold migration Migration of an inactive powered off VM guest Live migration Migration of an active powered on VM guest multi slot server A server that occupies multiple slots 374 NAS Network Attached Storage A collective term for storage that is directly connected to a LAN network device The unit used for registration of network devices L2 switches firewalls and server load balancers fit into this category network device configuration file These files contain definitions of settings regarding communication such as VLAN information for network devices and interfaces rules for firewalls and server load balancers etc As the content of these files changes each time settings are configured from the CLI they are the target of automatic backup by Resource Orchestrator and a constant number of versions 32 by default are backed up inside Resource Orchestrator Many network devices have two types of network device configuration files running config which holds the current configuration details and startup config which holds the configuration that is valid directly after startup In Resource Orchestrator these two types of files are the target of backup and restore operations network device environment fi
538. the Network Resources Tree Node Popup Menu Function Basic Information Modifies the selected resource s registration settings Change Settings j mae Modifies the specifications of the selected network Modify Specification resource external connection port subnet settings Automatic Network Automatically configures the network before creating an Configuration L Server Move Resources fee sSY Moves a resource to another resource pool Table A 30 Popup Menus Available for Network Devices Popup Menu are Function Menu Submenu Move Resources Moves a resource to another resource pool 276 Table A 31 Popup Menus Available for Address Sets Popup Menu Function Delete ie si Deletes the specified network resource Move Resources le 4 Moves a resource to another resource pool The following menus are displayed when selected from the orchestration tree Table A 32 Popup Menus Available for Cloning Images Popup Menu Function Unregister le O Unregisters the selected resource from a resource pool Move Resources e Moves a resource to another resource pool The following menus are displayed when selected from the cloning image list Table A 33 Popup Menus Available for Cloning Images Popup Menu Ss Function Menu Submenu Change Settings Basic Information Modifies the selected resource s registration settings Table A 34 Popup Menus Available for the Storage Tree Storage Management Software
539. the cloning image collected from the first server For details on cloning refer to Chapter 12 Cloning Physical Servers 90 Chapter 9 Deleting Resources This chapter explains how to delete resources It is possible to register and delete a managed server and LAN switch as a single resource when they are in the same chassis Note that operation of a server cannot be performed while the LAN switch is being registered and removed If the operation is performed simultaneously for multiple resources one of the following messages is displayed In this case wait until the current operation is completed before executing the desired operation again FJSVrcx ERROR 67210 LAN_switch_name LAN switch is busy FJSVrcx ERROR 67210 Managed server name physical server is busy 9 1 Deleting Chassis This section explains how to delete chassis Use the following procedure to delete the chassis 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target chassis and select Delete from the popup menu The Delete Resource dialog is displayed 2 Click OK The target chassis is deleted from the server resource tree amp Note 6060200200909092990900000906099099090000090099009090000000909909000009099099000000909909090990000090909090990990900900090929990909000009990000009999 If server blades and partitions within the chassis were already registered delete these server blades and partitions before deleting the chassis I
540. the command line execute rcxadm lserver start For details on the rexadm lIserver start command refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 190 Note From virtual L Servers to which resources have been allocated allocated or from which servers have been released preserved a startup command is sent out to VM guests even in the following cases CPU or memory resources of the VM host on which VM guests are located are running out and the destination VM host does not exist When Boot Location is Relocate at startup CPU or memory resources of the VM host on which VM guests are placed are running out When Boot Location is Fixed As sufficient CPU or memory resources cannot be secured on the VM host an error will occur during L Server startup In this case confirm the output message and then take corrective action When using tenants to segregate resources the startup of L Servers may be limited For details refer to Chapter 21 Resource Folder Operations VMware When starting the L Server sufficient overhead memory may not be secured and starting of the L Server may fail In this case confirm the output message and then take corrective action 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server This section explains how to stop an L Server Use the following procedure to stop an L Server 1 Right click the target L Server in the orchestration tree and select Power OFF from the popup m
541. the external port is a link aggregation group the link aggregation group name is displayed Untagged VLAN Displays the Untagged VLAN information set in the external connection port Tagged VLAN Displays the Tagged VLAN information set in the external connection port separated by commas Make the settings for the external port as follows a Click lt Setting gt in VLAN ID Uplink port settings in the Create a network resource dialog The Uplink port settings dialog is displayed b Specify the uplink port to use when automatically setting external networks including blade servers Select two ports to make into a pair For details on how to configure link aggregation on LAN switch blades refer to C 3 2 Preparations in the Design Guide CE If there are multiple chassis Select the all ports of the chassis to use When specifying a port in a link aggregation configuration When specifying LAN switch blade PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gbps 18 8 Set a link aggregation configuration on the uplink ports of LAN switch blades in advance reflect the link aggregation information for LAN switch blades and then select a configured link aggregation group name When specifying a port in a link aggregation configuration When specifying something else Confirm the settings of the LAN switch blade in advance and select one or more ports for which link aggregation has been configured The ports displayed for the selected targets of Upli
542. the system configuration file specified for import If it is necessary to specify more than 200 resources for registration or changing do by importing multiple system configuration files When using ServerView Deployment Manager on the admin LAN the following settings cannot be defined using the pre configuration function For details on co existence with ServerView Deployment Manager refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE Spare server settings using the backup and restore or HBA address rename method HBA address rename Settings 10 2 Importing the System Configuration File This section explains how to import a system configuration definition file saved in CSV format from the ROR console Use the following procedure to import a system configuration definition file 1 Prepare a system configuration file in CSV format Point 00606206000606029290909090990900000090900999990990000009000909290990990909090000000900999090909999000 000000090990900000000009299299 System configuration templates in Excel format cannot be directly imported into Resource Orchestrator Use the template s save to CSV function to produce a system configuration file in CSV format before importing Only system configuration files conforming to the format described in B 2 File Format can be imported For details on the file format refer to Appendix B Format of CSV System Configuration Files
543. tify a chassis is displayed Model name The model name of the chassis is displayed Admin LAN IP address The chassis admin IP address is displayed Status The status of the chassis is displayed 284 Server blades The number of server blades mounted in the chassis is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a blade server is selected Partition count The number of mounted partitions is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected LAN Switch blades The number of LAN switches mounted in the chassis is displayed Displayed only when the chassis of a blade server is selected wA See Refer to 11 2 Resource Status in the Operation Guide CE for details on resource statuses 60606062060620009090000000929099090909000090909909090000090090992090000090909090990909090000900909909000000909090900000009099000000900999000000909299 Hardware Details Area Launch Management Blade Web UI The link to the management blade s Web interface is displayed Not displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Launch XSCF Web UI The link to the remote management controller XSCF Web UI is displayed Only displayed for SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 servers Partition Configuration The following information is displayed only when the chassis of a PRIMEQUEST or SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 server is selected
544. tion If HBA address rename has already been set up on the managed server the HBA WWN is reset to the factory default When this occurs the managed server is turned on temporarily after the power is forcibly turned off once When the operating system is running on a managed server it is recommended to shut it down before deleting the server Factory default Deleted from Registered in Resource Orchestrator Resource Orchestrator VWN set by Resource Orchestrator VM guests can be deleted using the management console of the server virtualization software used Doing so will automatically delete those VM guests from Resource Orchestrator as well Ifthe same storage device volume is to be used to operate the target server after the server has been deleted use storage management software such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser to reset the storage host affinity and fibre channel switch zoning with the factory default WWN Any system images backed up from the target server are also deleted automatically After the server has been deleted the maintenance LED is switched OFF automatically Deleting a server on which both the HBA address rename function and a VM high availability feature provided by the server virtualization software used are enabled will produce the following behavior The server will be powered off causing the high availability feature to trigger its VM recovery process To avoid interruption of hosted application
545. tions refer to 7 1 10 Changing Boot Options When using local disks as system disks and iSCSI storage as data disks refer to the advisory notes described in Table 8 1 Supported Storage Device Configurations in 8 1 1 Storage Configuration in the Design Guide VE 0606006000292090900000009090900000090990909000000090290909090000009092092000000092000000029969 e006060600009090900060060020200000009092929 Deploying a Cloning Image Use the following procedure to deploy a cloning image to one or more destination servers 1 Place the destination server s into maintenance mode only for agent registered servers a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the desired server or its physical OS and select Maintenance Mode Set from the popup menu The Set Maintenance Mode dialog is displayed b Click OK The target server is placed into maintenance mode 2 Deploy a cloning image Deploying a cloning image to a single destination server a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the destination server or its physical OS and select Cloning Deploy from the popup menu The Deploy a Cloning Image dialog is displayed The available cloning images are displayed Only cloning images that have been collected from a server of the same model as the destination server are available for deployment 126 b Select the cloning image to deploy and set the following items Server name af
546. tline of the operation method of the ROR console provided by ServerView Resource Orchestrator hereinafter Resource Orchestrator Target Readers This manual is written for system administrators who will use Resource Orchestrator to operate the infrastructure in private cloud or data center environments When setting up systems it is assumed that readers have the basic knowledge required to configure the servers storage network devices and server virtualization software to be installed Additionally a basic understanding of directory services such as Active Directory and LDAP is necessary Organization This manual is composed as follows Chapter 1 Resource Management Overview Provides an overview of the two views available in Resource Orchestrator Chapter 2 License Setup and Confirmation Explains license setup Chapter 3 Configuring Users for Infrastructure Administrators Explains how to configure user settings for infrastructure administrators Chapter 4 BladeViewer Provides an overview of BladeViewer and explains its features Chapter 5 Registering Resources Explains how to register the resources used by Resource Orchestrator Chapter 6 Changing Admin Server Settings Explains how to change the settings of the admin server Chapter 7 Changing Resources Explains how to change settings for the admin server or resources registered on the admin server Chapter 8 Configuring the Operating Environments of Managed Servers Explains
547. to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens user name Enter the name of the user account used to remotely log into the LAN switch blade Enter up to 64 characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores _ or hyphens passwd Enter the password of the above user account for remote login Enter a string of up to 80 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 0x21 or 0x23 to Ox7e and no double quotations Passwords entered in this field are seen as plain text passwords passwd enc Enter one of the following If passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted privileged passwd Enter the admin password of the above user account Enter a string of up to 80 alphanumeric characters and symbols ASCII character codes 0x20 0x21 or 0x23 to Ox7e and no double quotations Passwords entered in this field are seen as plain text passwords privileged passwd enc Enter one of the following If privileged passwd is plain text plain If the password is encrypted encrypted 349 product_name Enter the model of the LAN switch blade Note that if a hyphen is entered it is treated as BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 One of the following models can be entered PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 8 2 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 10Gb 18 8 BX600 Gb
548. tware addition or modification has been performed The information below is not copied when the cloning image is collected from the managed server and will be automatically reconfigured when the cloning image is deployed This enables a single cloning image to be deployed to different servers Hostname P address and subnet mask for the admin LAN Default gateway for the admin LAN Settings other than the above such as those for applications and middleware are not automatically reconfigured please set them manually before and after the cloning operation when necessary Cloning cannot be performed for Linux managed servers on which iSCSI disks have been configured Note 06006202000020909000009099209090000009090990000000900909909900000099909909090000909090900900000090909090990000090990909090000099909090000090299 When using ServerView Deployment Manager on the admin LAN this function is disabled Use the cloning function of ServerView Deployment Manager For details refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE When using server cloning regardless of the boot environment local SAN iSCSI or RAID configurations only content from the boot disk first disk recognized by the BIOS on managed servers is actually cloned Data disk content second disk onwards cannot be cloned It is recommended to use other backup software or copy features available in storage systems for such
549. twork device as the target of monitoring or auto configurations after regular maintenance completion Perform the following operations to configure or release the maintenance mode settings of network devices Configuring Maintenance Mode When configuring maintenance mode for a network device the network device will be excluded temporarily from the target of monitoring or auto configuration Maintenance mode is configured for the specified network device by using the commands to specify the attr mode maintenance option Releasing Maintenance Mode A network device can be configured as the target of monitoring or auto configuration by releasing the maintenance mode configured for the network devices Maintenance mode is released for the specified network device by using the commands to specify the attr mode active option p Example When configuring maintenance mode opt FJSVrcevmr bin rcxadm netdevice set name nd01 attr mode maintenance lt RETURN gt When releasing maintenance mode The maintenance mode configuration status can be confirmed by using one of following methods From the GUI 1 Click the network device to confirm in the network device tree 2 Select the Resource Details tab 3 Confirm the maintenance mode status referring to Maintenance Mode of General maintenance Indicates that maintenance mode is configured active Indicates that maintenance mode is released From the Command line
550. type T or U to be assigned to the LAN switch blade port connected to this server s network interface Enter a VLAN ID followed by tag types To specify multiple VLAN IDs separate each set of VLAN settings using semicolons Both tagged T and untagged U VLAN IDs can be used together but only one untagged U type is allowed Example 10 U 10 U 20 T 30 T 10 T 20 T Note If a hyphen is entered VLAN settings will not be performed Use the following NIC indexes to specify LAN expansion cards if any was mounted PRIMERGY BX600 Servers 7 8 PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 Servers 5to 12 This section will be ignored for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades operating in IBP mode 00600600000922909909090990909000009090999909909900909000009090990909900090900900000090909099909909090909909000000099999900990900000009099999 SPARC Enterprise M4000 M5000 M8000 M9000 Server Data Section Name Enter SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelServer as the section name Section Header operation Enter the desired operation for the current line Enter a hyphen to skip this line chassis name Enter the chassis name the chassis name in the SPARCEnterprisePartitionModelChassis section 356 partition_no The number of a partition Enter a number between 0 and 23 server_name Enter the resource name that will be used to identify the server Enter a character string beginning with an alphabetical character and
551. types are displayed Storage Management Software Storage Units RAID Groups LUNs Virtual Disks of VM Guests Orchestration Tree Manages and operates L Servers and resource pools All resources authorized for access by the logged in user are displayed The resources displayed differ depending on the role and access rights of the user The resources below are shown in a tree view Resource folders and L Servers Resource pools and the resources registered in resource pools The top level resource folder of each tree is called a root folder The standard tree consists of only the root folder The orchestration tree displays the following information Resource List Tab Displays information on resources related to the resource selected in the resource tree Resource Details Tab Displays detailed information for the resource selected in the resource tree Additionally external software can be opened Available Pool A list of resource pools available for use is displayed Template List A list of the L Server templates available for use is displayed An L Server can be created using an L Server template Main Panel The Main Panel displays information on resources selected in the tree Resource List Tab Displays information on resources related to the resource selected in the resource tree Resource Details Tab Displays more detailed information on the resource selected in the tree or a resource that was double clic
552. ually allocated is displayed in the free capacity When the virtually allocated size is more than the total size of virtual storage resources on The area exceeding the capacity is displayed preceded by a minus in the free capacity For VMware datastores when storage pools with Thin Provisioning attributes are registered they are displayed as explained above a Example When the total size of virtual storage resources is 20 GB and the virtually allocated size is 10 GB Total Capacity 20 0 GB Free Capacity 10 0 GB When the total size of virtual storage resources is 20 GB and the virtually allocated size is 30GB Total Capacity 20 0 GB Free Capacity 10 0GB 6060606060092090906000000909099090900009090909090900000909090990909000000909090909000009090909090900000090909909000000909000900000900990000009999 The combined total of the capacity of the virtual storage and disk resources registered in the resource pool is displayed for the total capacity of the storage pool If a disk resource that has been separated from a virtual storage and that virtual storage exist in the same resource pool the capacity of the disk resource will not be included in the calculation of the total storage capacity of the storage pool G amp Note 0006062002029099209909000090909990990900090990990900090000090990909900000090990990909090009099099090000090990990909909900009999099090000920990990900909099999 When the following conditions are met
553. ublic or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens For SPARC Enterprise T servers Controller type Select ILOM IP address Enter the IP address of this server s remote management controller ILOM User ID Enter the ID of an ILOM user account with administrative authority over this server on on Enter between 4 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters underscores _ or hyphens This name should start with an alphabet character This user ID should have Admin privileges for ILOM Password Enter the password of the above ILOM user account on Enter between 8 and 16 characters including alphanumeric characters blank spaces and any of the following symbols np ge ngn Qo AU amp Nanc p abd A pus n ys acm Wm a xn tai U en ys us LA n n an 49 SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community name of this server s remote management controller ILOM Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the IP address used by this server on the admin LAN Server OS Category Select the appropriate server OS category Physical OS or VM host Selecting Solaris Containers activates the user name and password input fields Those refer to the user name and password entered during
554. uire a resource folder to be specified Resources that can be Registered Resource folders are managed according to their resource folder type The resources that can be registered for each resource folder type are indicated below Table 21 1 Resource Folder Types and Resources that can be Registered Resources that can be R Folder T R esource Folder Types er Orchestration Iserver Server server 21 2 Creating This section explains how to create resource folders 1 Right click the target resource folder in the tree and select Create Folder from the popup menu The Create a Folder dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Name Label Enter a name for the resource folder Enter up to 32 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters on upper or lower case underscores Label or hyphens Enter a label for the resource folder Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Enter any comments for the resource folder Enter a maximum of 256 characters 3 Click OK The created resource folder is displayed in the tree From the command line execute rcxadm folder create For details on the rexadm folder create command refer to 3 5 rexadm folder in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 253 21 3 Viewing This section explains how resource folders are displayed Resource
555. underscores and hyphens Admin LAN IP address Enter the admin LAN IP address that was set on this LAN switch blade on Enter the IP address using periods 231 User ID Enter the name of a telnet or SSH user account that can log in to this LAN switch blade Password Enter the password of the above telnet or SSH user account Connection method Select either Telnet or SSH The default setting is Telnet Administrative password Enter the password of this LAN switch blade s telnet or SSH administrator account If the user ID and the password of the administrator account for the LAN switch blade were set in User ID and Password simply re enter the same password in this field In this case Resource Orchestrator does not check whether the password entered here matches the password set on the LAN switch blade SNMP Community Enter the SNMP community that was set on this LAN switch blade Either select public or enter an arbitrary string Enter a string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters underscores _ and hyphens 3 Click lt OK gt The registered LAN switch blade will be displayed in the server resource tree Ce ey e00606060002090909000600600920200000009092929 A telnet or SSH connection is made when registering a LAN switch blade When telnet or SSH SSH version 2 connection is disabled enable it Refer to the manual of the relevant product Some models may have restrictions reg
556. up menu The Convert to L Server dialog is displayed 2 Enter the following items L Server Name Enter a name for the L Server When the physical server name starts with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and consists of 64 or less characters including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores or hyphens the physical server name is displayed as the default L Server name 235 Enter up to 64 characters beginning with an alphanumeric character upper or lower case and including alphanumeric characters upper or lower case underscores or hyphens Destination folder Select a resource folder or a tenant to store L Servers If omitted the L Server is stored in the root folder of the user that executed the operation Label Optional Enter a label for the L Server Enter a maximum of 32 characters Comment Optional Enter any comments for the L Server Enter a maximum of 256 characters 3 Click lt OK gt The physical server becomes manageable as a physical L Server From the command line execute rcxadm lserver convert For details on the rexadm Iserver convert command refer to 3 6 rcxadm lserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 18 4 3 For Virtual Machines Use the following procedure to use a virtual machine as a virtual L Server 1 In the ROR console orchestration tree right click a VM host in the registered VM pool and select Convert to L Se
557. uring L Server creation is displayed Memory Capacity Allocated The memory capacity of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Number of NICs The number of NICs on the L Server is displayed The Number of Disks The number of disks on the L Server is displayed Model Defined The model name defined during L Server creation is displayed Model Allocated The model name of the physical server actually allocated to the L Server is displayed Firewall List Name Label The name of the firewall resource allocated to the L Platform is displayed along with its icon Type The type of the resource allocated to the L Platform is displayed Firewall is displayed Ruleset The name of the directory containing the ruleset used by the resources allocated to the L Platform is displayed Use Resource The name and status of the network device configuring the resources allocated to the L Platform are displayed in the following format When multiple network devices are configured network device names and statuses will be displayed separated by commas Name Status Name Status Server Load Balancer List Name Label The name of the server load balancer resource allocated to the L Platform is displayed along with its icon Type The type of the resource allocated to the L Platform is displayed 311 SLB is displayed Ruleset The name of the directory containing the ruleset used by the resources allocated t
558. us is displayed When the disk is allocated to multiple L Servers yes is displayed In other cases no is displayed Network Properties Area No The network number configured for the L Server is displayed IP address The IP address of the network configured for the L Server is displayed MAC address The MAC address of the network configured for the L Server is displayed When an L Server is created the MAC address allocated with Resource Orchestrator or the VM management software is displayed Network resource name The network name configured for the L Server is displayed VLAN The VLAN ID for the network resource is displayed When Untagged VLAN is configured for the physical L Server is displayed Snapshots System images Version The version of the snapshot image collected from the L Server is displayed Collection Date The date and time the snapshot image was collected from the L Server is displayed Comments Comments set for the snapshot image collected from the L Server are displayed 309 A 6 13 L Platform Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Label The label set for the resource is displayed Comments Comments set for the resource are displayed L Server List Name Label The name of the L Server directly under the root folder tenant is displayed Status L Server status is displayed Server type The serve
559. used to perform automatic configuration There are the following eight types of script lists script lists for setup script lists for setup error recovery script lists for modification script lists for modification error recovery script lists for setup physical server added script lists for setup error recovery physical server added 378 script lists for deletion physical server deleted script lists for deletion server A computer operated with one operating system server blade A server blade has the functions of a server integrated into one board They are mounted in blade servers server management unit A unit used for managing servers A management blade is used for blade servers and a Remote Management Controller is used for other servers server name The name allocated to a server server NIC definition A definition that describes the method of use for each server s NIC For the NICs on a server it defines which physical LAN segment to connect to server virtualization software Basic software which is operated on a server to enable use of virtual machines Used to indicate the basic software that operates on a PC server ServerView Deployment Manager Software used to collect and deploy server resources over a network ServerView Operations Manager Software that monitors a server s PRIMERGY hardware state and notifies of errors by way of the network ServerView Op
560. utomatic Agent registration With a registered agent Deleting Managed Server C Server status L gt Functions that can be used with that server status E The target resource is not displayed in the resource tree Use the following procedure to register rack mount or tower servers 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click Server Resources and select Register Server from the popup menu The Register Server dialog is displayed 2 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Enter items differ depending on whether the Register agent checkbox is selected as described below If this checkbox is checked agents will be registered after server registration If this checkbox is not checked registration of agents will not be performed so register agents after server registration when necessary Without Agent Registration Physical server name Remote management controller IP address User ID Password Association with server management software ServerView Enable Disable SNMP Community 35 Admin LAN IP address MAC address NIC1 For physical L Servers specify the MAC address of the second specified NIC decided in 9 1 1 Admin LAN Network Design in the Design Guide CE SAN Boot Admin LAN Redundancy Use Admin LAN redundancy checkbox MAC address NIC2 For physical L Servers specify the MAC address of the second specified N
561. utomatically switching over the system image of a failed server to a spare server and restarting it in the event of server failure This function can be used when managed servers are in a local boot configuration SAN boot configuration or a configuration such as iSCSI boot where booting is performed from a disk on a network 367 When using a local boot configuration The system is recovered by restoring a backup of the system image of the failed server onto a spare server When booting from a SAN or a disk on a LAN The system is restored by having the spare server inherit the system image on the storage Also when a VLAN is set for the public LAN of a managed server the VLAN settings of adjacent LAN switches are automatically switched to those of the spare server backup site An environment prepared in a different location which is used for data recovery BACS Broadcom Advanced Control Suite An integrated GUI application comprised from applications such as BASP that creates teams from multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing Basic Mode A function that can be used by configuring a Cloud Edition license after installing ROR VE BASP Broadcom Advanced Server Program LAN redundancy software that creates teams of multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing and failover blade server A compact server device with a thin chassis that can contain multiple server blades and has low powe
562. ver or the physical OS or VM host on the server and select Modify Network Settings from the popup menu The Network Settings dialog is displayed 2 Select the index of the network interface for which to assign a VLAN ID and click lt Setting gt The VLAN Configuration dialog is displayed 3 To use this feature the following settings must first be defined Port VLAN VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID to assign to the LAN switch blade port that is connected to the network interface selected in step 2 Tagged VLAN VLAN ID Enter the tagged VLAN ID s to assign to the LAN switch blade port that is connected to the network interface selected in step 2 Multiple VLAN IDs can be entered by separating them with commas 4 Click lt OK gt Note that the VLAN settings are not applied onto the LAN switch blade at this stage To configure VLANs for multiple network interfaces repeat steps 2 to 4 33 5 Confirm the configuration set in the Network Settings dialog 6 Click lt OK gt VLAN settings are applied to the related LAN switch blade Note 0060600009990990900009999099090900909099099090000090900999099090000090990990999090009099929090000090909909990999099000099990990900009999099000009999 The VLAN configuration of a registered LAN switch blade should be set from the ROR console instead of the LAN switch s own Web based and command based interfaces If the Port VLAN ID field is left blank and a value is entered for
563. ver in the orchestration tree and check Preserved resource in the Resource List tab Select the target L Server in the orchestration tree and check Current resource in the Resource Details tab Maintenance mode excludes the target VM host from the automatically selected target for migration of a virtual L Server Migration by users is possible When performing movement between servers migration refer to the chapter of each VM type in Appendix E in the Design Guide CE Solaris Containers When an L Server is located on a VM host with a spare server configured migration cannot be performed When an L Server is located on a VM host without a spare server configured migration can be performed to another VM host without a spare server configured that is sharing the disk A Information 0606060000909090000000990990900000090990990900000909090990990900000090990900000009090909909000000909090990900000009909909000000909090900009099 When using virtual L Servers the VM Home Position of ROR VE can be used for migration For details refer to 15 3 VM Home Position in the User s Guide VE 17 8 Allocating and Releasing Resources to L Servers This section explains how to allocate resources to and release resources from L Servers Even if there are no resources to allocate to L Servers flexible configuration and operation such as creating only L Server definitions in advance is possible Configure the following settings when c
564. witch is registered network links may not be properly displayed for that switch The Network Map cannot display network links between BX600 GbE Switch Blade 30 12 and the following LAN switch blades PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 12 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 36 8 2 PY CB Eth Switch IBP 1Gb 18 6 Network links between two supported LAN switches may not be displayed properly if an unregistered or un supported LAN switch is placed between them 104 b Example In such a case the following inconsistencies may be displayed A LAN switch port maybe seen as being connected to multiple switches multiple links are shown attached to that switch port Cr ey 11 3 Screen Layout This section describes the Network Map s layout The main part of the Network Map is the network view 11 3 1 Network Map Layout This section describes the Network Map s layout Network view Shows the statuses of registered resources and the network links between them Map selection area Provides buttons to select which map to display overall map or local map Scroll button Scrolls the network view into the selected direction up down left or right Reset button Resets the network view to its initial display Magnification slider Maximizes or minimizes the network view Automatic Updates checkbox To configure automatic updating of the network map check the checkbox Clearing the checkbox stops automatic updating of the network map Update button
565. work configuration information used for registering the network device exists When the network configuration information retrieved from Resource Orchestrator using the rexadm netconfig export command exists MA See 00606060600090009006000909909900009000990990900000909290909090900009099909090090909099909000900099099909000060000992900000009000000099299 For how to create network configuration information XML definitions refer to 9 4 8 When Registering Network Devices as Resources in the Design Guide CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 7 6 2 Changing Network Device Settings This section explains how to change settings of a network device The following information can be changed Device name 81 Location Type Information Maintenance mode Group ID SNMP Information Login Information Monitoring Settings Web Interface URL Network device settings can be changed using the following methods When modifying network devices individually Use the rcxadm netdevice modify command When modifying multiple network devices at one time Use the rcxadm netconfig import command See For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command
566. x Number of Possible New L Servers When an L Server template is selected the number of L Servers that can be created using resource pools is displayed 335 Network Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed IP Address Number Unused Total The number of IP addresses of the network resources registered in the resource pool Address Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed Number Of Address The number of addresses of the address set registered in the resource pool is displayed Image Pool Name Label The name used to identify the resource pool is displayed Path The path to the location of the folder or the tenant in which a resource pool is stored is displayed Priority The priority of the resource pool is displayed Resource Number The number of resources registered in the resource pool is displayed A 11 Template List This section describes the template list
567. xport file is saved as the backup of the manager configuration Use this file to return to the previous values if there is an input error in the system configuration file Note that the backup can store the latest five versions The system configuration file backup can be stored in the following folder on the manager Windows Manager Folder Installation foldeNSN RORMManager war Wconfig backup File name rcxconf YY YYMMDDHHMMSS csv the date and time are shown in YY YYMMDDHHMMSS Linux Manager Directory opt FJS Vrcvmr var config backup File name rcxconf YY YYMMDDHHMMSS csv the date and time are shown in YY YYMMDDHHMMSS 06060606000000099090909000000000090909009090000000909090990909090509090000000009009090909900000000000900909090909000000000009999 7 Perform post setting operations If the import is completed successfully perform the following procedures if required If HBA address rename is set then restart the relevant managed server 101 If the agent is registered perform either one of the following to enable further backup or cloning operations Restart the managed server Restart the Related Service described in 2 2 Starting and Stopping the Agent in the Operation Guide CE 10 3 Exporting the System Configuration File This section explains the method for exporting a system configuration file containing the current system settings Use the following procedure to export the system configuration file i
568. y of the VM host is displayed VM Host List Name Label The name of the registered VM host is displayed Status The status of the registered VM host is displayed VM type The VM type of the registered VM host is displayed Cluster Group Displayed when using cluster configurations CPU Capacity Unused Total The CPU capacity of the registered VM host is displayed Memory Capacity Unused Total The memory capacity of the registered VM host is displayed VM Host Attributes General Area Name Label The name of the resource is displayed Type The type of the resource is displayed Capacity CPU Capacity Total Capacity The total CPU capacity of the VM host is displayed Unused Capacity The free CPU capacity of the VM host is displayed 316 Memory Size Total Capacity The total memory capacity of the VM host is displayed Unused Capacity The free memory capacity of the VM host is displayed VM Host Information Area Status The status of the VM host is displayed VM type The VM type of the VM host is displayed Cluster Group Displayed when using cluster configurations Number of VM guests The number of VM guests belonging to the VM host is displayed Management software The link to the web interface of the VM management software for the VM host is displayed Physical Server Name The name of the physical server to which the VM host belongs is displayed VM Management Software Specific Information VMware HA The ON OFF
569. ype The VM type of the L Server is displayed Management software The management software for the L Server is displayed Allocated Resource Information Cloning image information Deployed image name The name of the cloning image specified during L Server creation is displayed Version The version of the cloning image specified during L Server creation is displayed Allocated Resource Information Virtual WWN address information WWNN The information of the WWNN allocated to the L Server is displayed WWPN World Wide Port Name The information of the WWPN allocated to the L Server is displayed When single path mode is set one of the displayed addresses is set for the WWPN address Disk Information No The disk number set for the L Server is displayed Size The disk size set for the L Server is displayed Device Path The type of the disk allocated to the L Server is displayed on When a device path cannot be obtained a hyphen is displayed 308 Usage The usage of the disk set for the L Server is displayed Resource name The disk name set for the L Server is displayed When a Disk is Allocated A link to the detailed information of the allocated disk is displayed When No Disk is Allocated The name of the resource to be used is displayed Type The type of the disk allocated to the L Server is displayed is displayed When type information cannot be obtained a hyphen Share The shared disk stat

Fujitsu V3.1.0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents